CFN Series

CFN III Managers Manual

for Windows

XP Embedded
MDE-4871
Version 3.6
Computer Programs and Documentation
All Gasboy computer programs (including softwareon diskettes and within memory chips) and documentation arecopyrighted by, and shall remain theproperty of, Gasboy. Such
computer programs and documents may also contain tradesecret information. Theduplication, disclosure, modification, or unauthorized useof computer programs or
documentation is strictly prohibited, unless otherwiselicensed by Gasboy.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Warning
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with thelimits for aClass A digital devicepursuant to Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Theselimits aredesigned to provide
reasonableprotection against harmful interferencewhen theequipment is operated in acommercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiateradio frequency
energy, and if not installed and used in accordancewith theinstruction manual, may causeharmful interferenceto radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential areais likely to causeharmful interferencein which casetheuser will berequired to correct theinterferenceat his own expense. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by themanufacturer could void theusers authority to operatethis equipment.
Approvals
Patents
Gasboy products aremanufactured or sold under oneor moreof thefollowing US patents:
Dispensers
Point of Sale/Back Office Equipment
Trademarks
5,257,720
D335,673
Gasboy, Greensboro, is an ISO 9001:2000 registered facility.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
UL File# Products listed with UL
MH4314
All dispensersandself-containedpumping
units
MH10581 Key control unit, Model GKE-B Series
Cardreader terminals, Models1000, 1000P
SiteController, Model 2000S CFN Series
Dataentry terminals, Model TPK-900Series
Fuel Point Reader System
National Conference of Weights and Measures (NCWM) - Certificate of Compliance (CoC):
Gasboy pumps and dispensers areevaluated by NCWM under theNational TypeEvaluation Program(NTEP). NCWM has issued thefollowing CoC:
CoC# Product Model # CoC# Product Model # CoC# Product Model #
95-179 Dispenser
9100 Retail Series, 8700
Series, 9700 Series
91-019 Dispenser
9100 Commercial
Series
05-002 Atlas
8700K, 8800K,
9100K, 9200K, 9800K
95-136 Dispenser 9800 Series 91-057 Controller
1000 Series FMS,
2000S-CFN Series
California Air Resources Board (CARB):
Executive Order # Product
G-70-52-AM BalanceVapor Recovery
G-70-150-AE VaporVac
Registered trademarks
ASTRA

Fuel Point

Gasboy

Keytrol

Slimline

Additional US and foreign trademarks pending.

Other brand or product names shown may be
trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respectiveholders.
Non-registered trademarks
Atlas

Consola

Infinity

This document is subject to changewithout notice.

E-mail: literature@gasboy.com Internet: http://www.gasboy.com
2010 GASBOY. All Rights Reserved.
Additional US and foreign patents pending.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page i
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Introduction 1-1
Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Starting the SC III. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Quitting the CFN3 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Minimizing the Command Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Levels of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Logging onto Windows XP as Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Miscellaneous Windows XP Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Profit Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Online Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Related Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Cabling and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
2 Important Safety Information 2-1
3 Site Controller III 3-1
System Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
CFN3 Command Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Readers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Log Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Command Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Command Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
System-response Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
CFN3 Command Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
How to Sign On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
How to Sign Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Automatic Sign Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
How to Enter Commands and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
How to Use Options with Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
How to Enter Multiple Blocks of Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
How to Verify Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
How to Use Ranges with Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Shortcut for Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
How to Use Disk-based Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Redirecting Command Input and Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
How to Redirect Input for a Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
How to Redirect Output from a Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Log Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
How to Print a File on a Log Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
How to Print a Message on a Log Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Keyboard Control Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
The CONTROL Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
How to Terminate a Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
How to Delete Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
How to Delete a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
How to Pause Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
How to Pause Printout with the L Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Table of Contents
Page ii MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Permission Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Remote Access Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Optional Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
HELP Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
4 Users 4-1
User ID Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
How to Add a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
How to Print a List of User Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Permission Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
How to Use Permission Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
New Security.bin Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
System Key Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Menu Item 1: Enter New System Pass Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Menu Item 2: Save Pass Key to Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Menu Item 3: Enter New System Master Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Menu Item 4: Save Master Key to Diskette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Menu Item 5: Get Pass Key from Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Menu Item 6: Get Master Key from Diskette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Menu Item 7: Update System Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
5 Audit Trail 5-1
PC and CFN Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1
Miscellaneous Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1
6 Receipts, Messages, and Date 6-1
Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
Receipt Heading and Footing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
How to Enter Receipt Heading and Footing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
Special Printer Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
How to Print Receipt Heading and Footing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
How to Change Heading and Footing Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
How to Delete Heading and Footing Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Island Card Reader Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
How to Enter Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
How to Print Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
How to Change Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
How to Load Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
How to Delete Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
7 Fuel Products 7-1
How to Add or Change Fuel Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
How to Initialize Fuel Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
How to Create a New Fuel Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
How to Change Fuel Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
How to Print Fuel Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
How to Remove a Fuel Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
Fuel Product Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
How to Enter Fuel Product Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page iii
Table of Contents
8 Tank and Pump Commands 8-1
Tank Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
How to View Current Tank Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
How to Add to and Subtract from Tank Inventory Counters. . . . . . . . . . 8-1
How to Set Tank Inventory Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Method-of-payment Pricing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Price Code Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
How to View Current Price Code Levels and Prices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
How to Enter Price Code Levels and Prices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
How to Change Price-code Prices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
How to Delete a Price Code or Price Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
How to Set Up Day-Night Pricing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Pump Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
How to Assign Products, Prices, and Tanks to Hoses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
How to View Pump Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
How to Set the Pump Totalizers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
How to Reset the Pump Totalizers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
How to Enter the Pump-Fill-Limit and Slow-to-Cutoff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
9 Merchandise Products 9-1
How to Add or Change Merchandise Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
How to Create a New Merchandise Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
How to Create Special Merchandise Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
How to Print Merchandise Product Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
How to Change Merchandise Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Change Price Lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
How to Print Merchandise Product Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
How to Remove a Merchandise Product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
How to Enter Merchandise Product Price Lookups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Merchandise Product Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
How to Enter Merchandise Product Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
How to Add to Merchandise Product Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
How to Subtract from Merchandise Product Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
How to Enable Merchandise Dollar Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
How to Disable Merchandise Inventory Tracking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
10 Setting Up Tax Tables 10-1
Tax Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Tax Accumulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
How to Enter Tax Accumulator Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
How to Print Tax Accumulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
How to Reset Cumulative Tax Totals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Tax as Percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
When to Use Tax Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
How to Set Up a Tax Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Preparing a Compressed Description of Tax Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Allot Storage Space for Your Tax Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Assign a Tax Number and Name to Each Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Build a Tax Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Back Up Your Tax Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Table of Contents
Page iv MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
11 Reports, Cash Drawer, and Shifts 11-1
Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-1
How to Print Sales Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2
How to Print Quantity Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5
How to Print Quantity and Dollar Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-7
How to Print a Sales Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-9
How to Reset Sales Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-9
Cash Drawer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10
How to Enter Cash Drawer Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10
How to Add To or Subtract From Cash Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11
How to Print Cash Drawer Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11
Shift Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12
NEXT SHIFT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12
Other Shift Change Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12
NEXT DAY Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13
12 Transactions 12-1
Printing Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
How to Print Transactions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-2
How to Sort a Transaction Printout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-2
How to Print Specified Types of Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
How to Print a Range of Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
How to Print Transactions in Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
How to Print Receipts from the Transaction File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5
Transaction File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5
How to Reset the Transaction-begin Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-6
How to Automatically Reset the Transaction Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-7
Detailed Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-7
13 Proprietary Cards 13-1
Proprietary Card Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-1
How to Restrict Purchases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-2
Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-2
Bit-mapped Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-2
Limited Lockout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3
Positive and Negative Lockout Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4
How to Select Negative Lockout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4
How to Select Positive Lockout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5
Disk-based Bit-mapped Lockout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5
How to Check a Cards Lockout Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5
How to Lock Out and Unlock Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6
How to Print a Lockout List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-7
Authorization Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-7
How to Assign Product Codes to Authorization Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . .13-8
How to Print Authorization Code Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-9
How to Remove Product Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-9
Fuel Limitation Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-10
How to Assign Fuel Limits to Fuel Limitation Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-10
How to Print Fuel Limitation Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-10
How to Remove a Fuel Limitation Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
Patron/Loyalty Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
Example of the Patron.ini file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
Price Levels, Authorization Codes, and Limitation Codes . . . . . . . . .13-12
Using the Patron Card as Payment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-12
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page v
Table of Contents
Attendant Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Key Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Communicating with the Site Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Restrictions Using the CFN with Key Option System. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Fueler ID - Fleet Packages Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Assigning a Fueler ID to a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
14 Lookup Program 14-1
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Short and Long Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Default Actions in Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Main Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Update from Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Add New Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Delete Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Edit Existing Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Search and Replace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Merge Updates to/from File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Copying from a Source File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Copying to a Target File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
List Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
List Records to a Text File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Display a Text File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Unsorted List of Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Sorted List of Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
Optimize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
15 Fuel Allocation and Miles-per-Gallon 15-1
Fuel Allocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
How to Set Up an Allocation System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
How to Initialize the Allocation File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
How to Set Up Allocation Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
How to Change Allocated Amounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
How to Print Currently Allocated Amounts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
How to Remove an Allocation Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Miles per Gallon System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
How to Set Up an MPG System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
How MPG Information is Calculated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
How to Set Up Vehicle Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
How to Reset MPG Period for All Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
How to Print MPG Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
How to Remove a Vehicle Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
16 Backup System Data and Disk Files 16-1
Why Take Backups? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Floppy Diskettes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Backup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Table of Contents
Page vi MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Back Up System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Backing Up CFN3 Files with Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
How to Do a Custom System Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
How to Back Up Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
TRANBACK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
BACKTRAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
How to Restore Your Backup Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
How to Write-protect Backup Diskettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
How to Restore System or Transaction Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
17 CFN3 File System 17-1
What is a CFN3 File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
Filename Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
Filename Extensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Wildcards in Filenames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
File System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Disk Drive Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
How to Specify Files on Other Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Site Controller Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
How to Create Site Controller Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
How to Print the Contents of Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
How to Remove User Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
How to Copy Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
How to Rename Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
How to Move Files Between Directories of the RAM Drive. . . . . . . . . 17-7
How to Set Permissions of Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
Directory Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8
How to List Files in a Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8
How to Print a Short File List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8
How to List All Files Below a Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
How to Create Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
How to Change to a Different Directory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
How to Change to a Different Disk Drive from a Remote Site. . . . . . . 17-9
How to Print the Current Directory Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
How to Copy a Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
How to Remove a Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
Disk Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11
How to Format the RAM Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11
How to Check a Disk for Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11
18 Using Text Editors 18-1
Windows XP Text Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
FRED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Editors Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
How to Change Editor Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Command Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Using the Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
How to Enter Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
How to Correct Text as You Type It . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Command Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Work Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
How to Name Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
How to Save New Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
How to Resave Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page vii
Table of Contents
How to Exit the Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
How to Exit the Editor without Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6
How to Move the Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6
How to Insert Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
How to Delete Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
How to Open a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
How to Undo Changes to a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
How to J oin Two Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
How to Split Two Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
How to Copy a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
How to Replace One Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
Advanced Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
How to Move the Cursor to a Specified Character. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
How to Move the Cursor to Specified Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
How to Search for a Specified String. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
How to Search for and Print a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
How to Execute a Global Search and Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10
How to Erase the Entire Work Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10
How to Delete Specified Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10
How to Delete Up to a Specified Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
How to Append a File to the Current File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
How to Set Tab Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
How to Edit a New File without Leaving FRED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12
Editor Command Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12
19 Making Your Own Commands 19-1
Restrictions on Command File Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
Program Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
Search Path for Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
How to Execute User Command Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
Comments in Command Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
How to Use Terminal Input with Command Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
Command File Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4
How to Print a Line with ECHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4
How to Wait with SLEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
From Command File to Command File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
Wait for User Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
Line Length Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6
~0A Control Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6
@P Console Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6
Command Files Executed from a Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6
Command Files at Sign On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7
How to Save Output from a Command File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7
Output of a Single Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7
Output of Several Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7
How to Output to Log Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8
How to Output to a Receipt Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8
How to Add an Event to the Disk J ournal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9
Variables for Use in Command Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9
System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9
Command-line-argument Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-11
User Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-12
EXECUTE Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-12
How to Exit from Command Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-13
Table of Contents
Page viii MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
20 Advanced Command Files 20-1
How to Use the IF Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-1
How to Use Loops in Command Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-4
How to Use Case Statements in Command Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-5
Prompt String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-6
How to Set User Variables in Command Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-7
ECHO with the p1 Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-9
How to Use Branching and Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-10
How to Search for a String in a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-12
Advanced Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-12
NEXT CLERK Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-12
SCREEN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-13
21 Automatic Cron Commands 21-1
What Conditions can be Specified for Cron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-1
Timed Cron Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-2
Restart Cron Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-3
Reboot Cron Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-4
Transaction-memory Cron Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-4
Where To Put Command Files for Cron. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-5
How To Enter Cron Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-5
How To Keep Cron Command Output from the Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-5
How To Print a Listing of Cron Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-6
22 Communications 22-1
Remote Authorizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-1
Dial-out Phone Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-1
How to Initiate a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-2
Kermit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-3
23 Configuration Command Summary 23-1
Disk-based Configuration Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-1
24 Preventive Maintenance 24-1
How to Clean the Diskette Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-1
When Batteries Fail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-1
Island Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-1
How to Clean the Magnetic Strip Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-1
POS Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-2
Magnetic Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-2
Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-2
25 Diagnostic Commands 25-1
System Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-1
How to Print System Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-1
How to Reset System Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-2
How to Reset System Diagnostics after Reconfiguration . . . . . . . . . . .25-2
Diagnostic Error Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-2
Event History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-4
How to Enable and Disable Event History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-4
How to Print the Event History List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-5
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page ix
Table of Contents
System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-5
How to Print System Monitor Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-5
How to Display Current System State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-7
How to Display Buffers in Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-7
How to Examine Contents of Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-9
How to Display Site Controller Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-10
How to Test a Pump Control Units Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-11
How to Test a Receipt Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-11
SHOW Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-11
26 Enabling and Disabling Devices 26-1
Shut Down and Restart a Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1
How to Shut Down a Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1
Disable Pumps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1
How to Do an Emergency Stop from the Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2
How to Do and Emergency Stop from the Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2
How to Restart a Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2
How to Restart from a Console ALL Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2
How to Restart a Site from a Serious Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-3
How to Reboot the Site Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-3
Site Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-4
How to Disable and Enable a Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-4
How to Disable and Enable a Pump Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-5
How to Disable and Enable a Reader Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-5
How to Disable and Enable a Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-6
How to Disable and Enable a Tank Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-6
How to Disable and Enable a Gate Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-6
How to Disable and Enable a Fuel Point Reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-7
How to Disable, Enable, and Download SDIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-7
Operating Pumps Manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-8
How to Activate a Pump from the Command Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-8
How to Deactivate a Pump from the Command Window. . . . . . . . . . . 26-9
How to Put a Pump into Full-service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-9
How to Bypass the Pump Control Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-10
27 Invoice Printing 27-1
Requirements and Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1
Invoice Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1
Printing an Invoice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2
Sample Invoice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3
Duplicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3
28 Site Controller III Optional Packages 28-1
Appendix A: SC III Ports and Switches A-1
Front Panel Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Serial/Parallel Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
DIP Switch Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Memory Board DIP Switch SC-Memory I/O - S1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Memory Board DIP Switch SC-Memory I/O - S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
PC IRQ Switch, SC-COMM CPU - S1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
PC Address Switch, SC-COMM CPU - S2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Table of Contents
Page x MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
J umper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
SC-Comm CPU Board Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
SC-Comm Memory I/O Board Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Appendix B: Modem Settings and Cables B-1
Setup Instructions for C01533 - Answer Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Configuring to Use as an Answer Modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Setup Instructions for C05899 - Credit/Debit Network Modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Configuring to Use as a Credit/Debit Card Network Modem. . . . . . . . . B-3
Modem DIN Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Null Modem Cross Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Appendix C: Printed Receipt Regulations C-1
EFT Regulation E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Section 205.9(a)Documentation of Transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Section 205.9(b)(1)(iv) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Gasboy Receipt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Appendix D: Status and Error Messages D-1
Messages on the Log Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Name Table Reconstructed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
[Pump #] Card #XXXXXXXXXXXX denial_reason
WED 11/29/08 12:34 PM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Bank Verification Came Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Battery FAILED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Battery OK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Card Reader Terminal #X Came Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Card Reader Terminal #X Disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Card Reader Terminal #X Paper Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Card Reader Terminal #X Out of Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Card Reader Terminal #X Paper Refilled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Card Reader Terminal #X Printer Down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Card Reader Terminal #X Printer J ammed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Card Reader Terminal #X Printer Unjammed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Card Reader Terminal #X Printer Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Card Reader Terminal #X Reader J ammed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Card Reader Terminal #X Reader Unjammed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Card Reader Terminal #X Went Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
CFN Verification Came Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
CFN Verification Did Not Respond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Profit PT #X Came Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Profit Pt #X Disabled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Profit Pt #X Went Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Data Corrupted in Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
CARD: XXXXXXXXXX DES Not Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Diagnostics Table Too Small . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Disk Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
EMERGENCY STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
End EMERGENCY STOP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Fuel Point Reader #on Loop #Went Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Fuel Point Reader #Came Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Gate #on Loop #Went Down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Gate #Came Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page xi
Table of Contents
Island EMERGENCY STOP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Island Reader Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Loop Table Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Master Key Loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Memory Available. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Memory Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
XPE PC-SCIII Interface V#.#Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
PC Not Responding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
PC Responding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Product #XX Name Below Reorder Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Pump #X Disabled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Pump #X Disabled, No Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Pump #X Disabled, No Price . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Pump #X Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Pump Control Unit #X Came Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Pump Control Unit #X Disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Pump Control Unit #X Down, Bad Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Pump Control Unit #X Found Unassigned Transaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Pump Control Unit #X Went Down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
Remote Command: command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
Remote Verification Did Not Respond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
SC III Vx (HHMM/MMDDYY) Router:r_name, Handler:h_name
Day MM/DD/YY HH:MM AM/PM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
Tank #X Below Reorder Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
Tank #X Fuel Leak. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
Tank #X Probe Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
Tank #X Excess Water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
Tank #X YYY Gal Delivery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
Warm Boot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
Messages in the Transaction Printout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
error #. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
Aborted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
Mem Lost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
Pwr Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
Payout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
Prod Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
Pump Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
Refund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
Reversal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
Timed Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
Unassigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
Withdrawal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
Messages in Command Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
Already exists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
Bad Data Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
BAD MESS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
Cant activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
Cant open file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
Cannot run program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14
Card is not valid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14
Card is valid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14
Command failed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14
Device out of service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14
Table of Contents
Page xii MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Does not exist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14
Error loading program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14
Invalid option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14
Manager key required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
No more file space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
Permission denied. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
Program checksum error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
Pump deactivated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
Pump is not on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
Pump is ready. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
Site is stopped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
Some valid, some not . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
String too long. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-16
Transactions in progress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-16
Unknown command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-16
Appendix E: Files on the Hard Disk E-1
Customer Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Root Directory: Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
SC III Root (C:\SC3) Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
SC3\BIN Directory: Disk-based Commands and Command Files . . . . E-2
Appendix F: Dialout Communications F-1
Type of Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-1
Credit Card Numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-2
Handling Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-2
Authorization (verification). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-3
Data Capture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-3
Settlement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-4
Card Networks Certifying CFN III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-4
Upper Case Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-5
Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-5
Troubleshooting - Quick Diagnostic Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-7
Glossary Glossary-1
Index Index-1
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 1-1
Operating System Introduction
1 Introduction
This reference manual explains commands that are used to set up, maintain, produce reports
on, and diagnose problems for a CFN III system.
Your service technician will set up your CFN III and introduce you to some of its features.
This manual can help you avoid many unnecessary service calls, and help assure that your
CFN III works the way you want it to.
This manual is for anyone who requires to know how to issue commands to the CFN III, or
interpret the log printout and other reports. The Site Manager or person in charge of operations
at the site must be familiar with this manual and its contents so you can operate and maintain
the CFN III information. Attendants are not required to read this manual in order to operate the
Profit Point consoles, which are covered in other manuals.
This manual is not intended to be read cover to cover, but you must become familiar with its
contents so you can look up information when you require it.
Operating System
The Site Controller III (SC III) comes with a PC operating system called Windows

XP
Embedded (XPE) from Microsoft

. Windows XPE is set up with restricted services. The

Windows XPE system is not set up as a general PC and must be used only for the purpose of
housing the CFN embedded payment controller. Microsoft Windows XPE license states that a
Windows XPE system cannot be used as a general purpose PC. For example, the restrictions
would include general software such as Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel

, or other general
applications. This new system is icon based, that is, you must use your mouse to access the
command window and/or applications. You must move the mouse (which is represented as the
arrow on the screen) over the icon that you want to open and double click the left mouse
button. Your technician will instruct you on the basics of this system and accessing your CFN3
command window. The CFN3 command window must remain running at all times. It can be
minimized (more about that later), but once closed, you will lose contact with the Site
Controller.
When the CFN3 software was installed, your technician or system administrator configured it
with your particular devices and the procedures your company follows. For example, if your
site accepts cash for fuel, the CFN III has been told whether the customer is required to pay
before pumping (a prepay system) or is allowed to pay after pumping (a postpay system).
Starting the SC III
The computer is turned on (booted) by pressing the button on the front of the computer. Ensure
that the monitor is turned on and there are no diskettes in the A: drive. It will take a few
moments to start. Not required to double-click the CFN3 icon to start operations, the operating
system has been programmed to do this for you. The CFN3 command window automatically
opens. Press the return key if your signon prompt does not display immediately.
Introduction Operating System
Page 1-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Quitting the CFN3 Application
The preferred way to quit the CFN3 application is to press Alt and when continuing to press
the Alt key, press the X key. This will terminate your site operations. If you forget this, this
method is mentioned when you log on at the top of the screen as illustrated in Figure 1-1 on
page 1-3.
Minimizing the Command Window
The site controller runs with either the command window open or minimized.

Minimizing the CFN3 command window collapses the window on your desktop into the
taskbar at the bottom of the screen, running it in the background. To place the window in the
background, click the small box in the upper right corner of the command window that has an
underline. Notice the box with the X. Clicking once on the X will quit the application and
terminate site operations; this is not the recommended way of quitting the site operations. You
required to log on again by double-clicking on the CFN3 icon. Ensure that the CFN3
command window must remain either open or minimized to communicate with the SC III. If
your window is not open, or has been minimized, click once, using the left mouse button, on
the CFN3 box in the taskbar to open the window onto the desktop.
Should you accidently quit the CFN3 program by clicking in the X in the upper right corner,
double click on the CFN3 icon using the left mouse button and log in again.
Levels of Operation
The SC III has two user levels of operation:
Gasboy: Used for the daily CFN3 operation (and Integral Profit Point system, if present).
Administrator: Allows you to add software updates, create/delete users, add passwords,
change your PC settings, and so on.
Running the site from the Administrator level is a violation of the PCI Security Standard.
WARNING
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 1-3
Operating System Introduction
Gasboy Level
Figure 1-1: Gasboy - CFN3 Desktop
CFN3 Window
Taskbar
Icons
Gasboy is the default login (user) and is the working level of operation. All CFN3 operations
occur at this login level. When you turn on the computer the user is Gasboy with GASBOY as
the password. The desktop will contain very few icons; CFN3, CFN3 Help, My Computer, and
Integral Profit Point (optional). Your day to day site operations use this login.
Figure 1-1 shows a typical CFN3 desktop with the various icons available and the CFN3
command window open. See in Figure 1-1 that the CFN3 icons (CFN3, the Integral Profit
Point and the CFN3 HELP) are located in the lower left of this desktop. Icons are your link to
starting your software programs. The icons can be placed anywhere on the desktop but must
always be available to open the program.
At the bottom of the screen is a taskbar. Whenever an application is open it will be represented
at the bottom of the screen in this taskbar. If you minimize the CFN3 command window it will
be represented in this taskbar. This is your identification that the CFN3 command window is
still running. The command window must remain open, or run in the background (minimized),
to communicate with the site controller.
Clicking on the box representing the program will open or minimize the programs window on
the desktop.
Introduction Logging onto Windows XP as Administrator
Page 1-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Administrator Level
Administrator is where users are added or deleted, your hardware settings changed, passwords
changed, and so on. You can also add software updates. The Administrator requires a separate
login, has a different password, and has additional features/options. There are more icons
displayed on the desktop.
Note: Administrator level accounts must not be shared between multiple users. Therefore,
each administrator level user must have an individual account. Accounts can be created
by logging to the Windows XPE as an administrator user. Access Control Panel > User
Account, to add a user.
The RUN command, used to install software from the Start button, is only available from the
Administrator level. This command is a Windows XP operating system command and is
different from the CFN3 RUN command.
Logging onto Windows XP as Administrator
When the computer boots, the default login is Gasboy. To make any changes to your CFN3
setup you must log in as Administrator. To log in as the Administrator, proceed as follows:
1 Select Start >Shutdown.
2 From the Shut Down Windows screen, select the list of options under the What do you want
the computer to do? prompt.
Figure 1-2: Shut Down Window
3 Select Log off gasboy.
Note: Before logging off, ensure that you shut down (exit to the OS) the integral Profit Point
system, if present.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 1-5
Logging onto Windows XP as Administrator Introduction
4 Select OK. Any applications currently running will shut down, the Shut Down Windows
screen will close, and the Log On to Windows window appears.
5 In the User name field, enter your administrator level user name (the default user name is
administrator). In the Password field, enter the password (the default password is blank).
Figure 1-3: Log On to Windows Window
The desktop will appear similar to that of the gasboy user, except that there are more icons on
the desktop. Select Start on the taskbar for more options to add software updates.
6 When you have finished making the required additions or changes, select Start >Shutdown.
In the Shut Down Windows screen, select the list of options, under the What do you want the
computer to do? prompt.
7 Select Log off administrator from the list of options. Select OK.
Introduction Miscellaneous Windows XP Information
Page 1-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
8 When the Log On to Windows window appears, relogin as gasboy.
Note: The default password for gasboy user name is GASBOY.
Figure 1-4: Log On to Windows Window
Miscellaneous Windows XP Information
If you do not like the arrangement of the icons on the desktop, you can change the arrangement
by clicking once with the right mouse button anywhere on the open desktop. Select an option
from the list that appears.
To refresh your desktop, press F5. If using the Profit Point keyboard, F5 is All Stop.
Profit Point

If you have an integral Profit Point system, it will start automatically. If not, start the Profit
Point system by double-clicking on the Profit Point icon using the left-most mouse button. For
the Profit Point system to operate, the SC III must be running with the CFN3 window on the
desktop, either open or minimized.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 1-7
Related Documents Introduction
Online Documentation

Online documentation is available on the CFN III. The online system is viewed using your
browser that comes with your PC system. Use the online documentation for a quick reference
when you do not want to pull the manual off the shelf.
To open the online system, double-click the CFN3 HELP icon. The browser will open
displaying the online library available. Click once on the manual that you would like to
review.
Related Documents
CFN III - Version 3.5 and Later
Document
Number Document Title GOLD Library
C35923 Point of Sale and Shift Change Gasboy

Fuel Management Products

MDE-4355 Profit Point Clerks Manual Gasboy Fuel Management Products
MDE-4356 Profit Point Reference Manual Gasboy Fuel Management Products
MDE-4759 CFN III Payment Application Best Practices Implementation
Requirements
CFN Series Networks, Card Handlers
& Pump Interface
MDE-4773 CFN III Configuration Manual for Windows XP CFN Series Controllers and POS
MDE-4870 CFN III Fuel Management System PA-DSS Implementation
Guide Version 3.6
CFN Series Controllers and POS
MDE-4872 CFN Series CFN III Configuration Manual for Windows XP
Version 3.6
CFN Series Controllers and POSs
Credit and Debit Card Network
Document
Number Title GOLD Library
MDE-4390 CFN Series NBS (GL3) Credit and Debit Card Network CFN Series Networks, Card Handlers
and Pump Interface
MDE-4560 VisaNet

Credit and Debit Card Networks Gasboy Fuel Management Products

MDE-4572 PaymenTech

005 Credit and Debit Card Networks Gasboy Fuel Management Products
MDE-4606 Buypass
SM
Credit and Debit Card Networks Gasboy Fuel Management Products
Pump Interface
Document
Number Title GOLD Library
MDE-4337 Gilbarco CRIND

PC Interface for Site Controller III

with Windows NT or Windows XPE
Gasboy Fuel Management Products
MDE-4501 Wayne

CAT PC Interface for Site Controller III with

Windows NT or Windows XPE
Gasboy Fuel Management Products
MDE-4559 Insight Interface Gasboy Fuel Management Products
Introduction Related Documents
Page 1-8 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Card Encoding and Miscellaneous
Document
Number Title GOLD Library
C01687 CFN Series Card Encoding Manual Gasboy Fuel Management Products
Remote Communications
Document
Number Title GOLD Library
MDE-4489 PC/CFN Users Guide N/A
Technical Publications
Document
Number Title GOLD Library
C01759 CFN Diagnostic Manual Gasboy Fuel Management Products
MDE-4624 Gasboy CFN Series Tokheim

Pump PC Interface for

CFN III with Windows NT or XPE
Gasboy Fuel Management Products
MDE-4634 CFN Series Gilbarco Pump PC Interface Gasboy Fuel Management Products
MDE-4651 Wayne Pump PC Interface for Site Controller III with
Windows NT or Windows XPE
Gasboy Fuel Management Products
Document
Number Title GOLD Library
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 1-9
Cabling and Wiring Introduction
Cabling and Wiring
Use the following illustration to correctly connect your SC III to the various pieces of
equipment.
Figure 1-5: SC III Connections
W&M Switch (S4)
SC-COMM DIP Switch (S3)
Loop 1 Island RS-485 Port
Loop 2 Island RS-485 Port
Factory Set to 2-Wire for Tokheim DPTS
Loop 3 POS High Speed RS-485 Port
Port 1 Local RS-232
Port 6 RS-232
Port 5 RS-232
Port 4 RS-232
Port 3 RS-232
Port 1, Local RS-232 - Use cable number C05994, SC III terminal cable assembly.
Port 2, Ribbon Cable to RS-232 - Use ribbon cable C05554 (currently not used).
Port 3 - The Tokheim driver has been replaced with the Tokheim PC Interface, which uses
a serial port instead of this one (currently not used).
Port 4 - RS-232 - Use cable number C05995, SC III modem cable assembly.
Port 5 - RS-232 - This port is extra and can be used as a modem port or logger printer port.
Port 6 - This port is extra and can be used as a modem port or logger printer port.
Note: Ports 1, 4, 5, and 6 are interchangeable.
Loops 1, 2, and 3 - use cable number C05670, cable assembly 4 position 1:1 HS/Line - 8 feet.
modular cable.
Complete information on ports and switches can be found in SC III Ports and Switches on
page A-1.
Introduction Cabling and Wiring
Page 1-10 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 2-1
Important Safety Information
2 Important Safety Information
This section introduces the hazards and safety precautions
associated with installing, inspecting, maintaining or servicing
this product. Before performing any task on this product, read
this safety information and the applicable sections in this
manual, where additional hazards and safety precautions for
your task will be found. Fire, explosion, electrical shock or
pressure release could occur and cause death or serious
injury, if these safe service procedures are not followed.
Preliminary Precautions
You are working in a potentially dangerous environment of
flammable fuels, vapors, and high voltage or pressures. Only
trained or authorized individuals knowledgeable in the related
procedures should install, inspect, maintain or service this
equipment.
Emergency Total Electrical Shut-Off
The first and most important information you must know is
how to stop all fuel flow to the pump/dispenser and island.
Locate the switch or circuit breakers that shut off all power to
all fueling equipment, dispensing devices, and Submerged
Turbine Pumps (STPs).

The EMERGENCY STOP, ALL STOP, and
PUMP STOP buttons at the cashiers station
WILL NOT shut off electrical power to the
pump/dispenser. This means that even if you
activate these stops, fuel may continue to flow
uncontrolled.
You must use the TOTAL ELECTRICAL
SHUT-OFF in the case of an emergency and
not the consoles ALL STOP and PUMP STOP
or similar keys.
!
WARNING
!
Total Electrical Shut-Off Before Access
Any procedure that requires access to electrical components
or the electronics of the dispenser requires total electrical
shut off of that unit. Understand the function and location of
this switch or circuit breaker before inspecting, installing,
maintaining, or servicing Gasboy equipment.
Evacuating, Barricading and Shutting Off
Any procedure that requires access to the pump/dispenser or
STPs requires the following actions:
An evacuation of all unauthorized persons and vehicles
from the work area
Use of safety tape, cones or barricades at the affected
unit(s)
A total electrical shut-off of the affected unit(s)
Read the Manual
Read, understand and follow this manual and any other
labels or related materials supplied with this equipment. If you
do not understand a procedure, call a Gasboy Authorized
Service Contractor or call the Gasboy Service Center at
1-800-444-5529. It is imperative to your safety and the safety
of others to understand the procedures before beginning
work.
Follow the Regulations
Applicable information is available in National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA) 30A; Code for Motor Fuel Dispensing
Facilities and Repair Garages, NFPA 70; National Electrical
Code (NEC), Occupational Safety and Hazard Association
(OSHA) regulations and federal, state, and local codes. All
these regulations must be followed. Failure to install, inspect,
maintain or service this equipment in accordance with these
codes, regulations and standards may lead to legal citations
with penalties or affect the safe use and operation of the
equipment.
Replacement Parts
Use only genuine Gasboy replacement parts and retrofit kits
on your pump/dispenser. Using parts other than genuine
Gasboy replacement parts could create a safety hazard and
violate local regulations.
Safety Symbols and Warning Words
This section provides important information about warning
symbols and boxes.
Alert Symbol
This safety alert symbol is used in this manual and
on warning labels to alert you to a precaution which must be
followed to prevent potential personal safety hazards. Obey
safety directives that follow this symbol to avoid possible
injury or death.
Signal Words
These signal words used in this manual and on warning
labels tell you the seriousness of particular safety hazards.
The precautions below must be followed to prevent death,
injury or damage to the equipment:
DANGER: Alerts you to a hazard or unsafe practice
which will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING: Alerts you to a hazard or unsafe practice
that could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION with Alert symbol: Designates a hazard or
unsafe practice which may result in minor injury.
CAUTION without Alert symbol: Designates a hazard
or unsafe practice which may result in property or
equipment damage
Working With Fuels and Electrical Energy
Prevent Explosions and Fires
Fuels and their vapors will explode or burn, if ignited. Spilled
or leaking fuels cause vapors. Even filling customer tanks will
cause potentially dangerous vapors in the vicinity of the
dispenser or island.
!
!
!
Page 2-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Important Safety Information
No Open Fire
Open flames from matches, lighters, welding torches
or other sources can ignite fuels and their vapors.
No Sparks - No Smoking

Sparks from starting vehicles, starting or using power tools,
burning cigarettes, cigars or pipes can also ignite fuels and
their vapors. Static electricity, including an electrostatic charge
on your body, can cause a spark sufficient to ignite fuel
vapors. Every time you get out of a vehicle, touch the metal of
your vehicle, to discharge any electrostatic charge before you
approach the dispenser island.
Working Alone
It is highly recommended that someone who is capable of
rendering first aid be present during servicing. Familiarize
yourself with Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) methods,
if you work with or around high voltages. This information is
available from the American Red Cross. Always advise the
station personnel about where you will be working, and
caution them not to activate power while you are working on
the equipment. Use the OSHA Lockout/Tagout procedures. If
you are not familiar with this requirement, refer to this
information in the service manual and OSHA documentation.
Working With Electricity Safely
Ensure that you use safe and established practices in working
with electrical devices. Poorly wired devices may cause a fire,
explosion or electrical shock. Ensure that grounding
connections are properly made. Take care that sealing
devices and compounds are in place. Ensure that you do not
pinch wires when replacing covers. Follow OSHA
Lockout/Tagout requirements. Station employees and service
contractors need to understand and comply with this program
completely to ensure safety while the equipment is down.
Hazardous Materials
Some materials present inside electronic enclosures may
present a health hazard if not handled correctly. Ensure that
you clean hands after handling equipment. Do not place any
equipment in the mouth.

The pump/dispenser contains a chemical known to the
State of California to cause cancer.
WARNING
!

The pump/dispenser contains a chemical known to the
State of California to cause birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
WARNING !
In an Emergency
Inform Emergency Personnel
Compile the following information and inform emergency
personnel:
Location of accident (for example, address, front/back of
building, and so on)
Nature of accident (for example, possible heart attack, run
over by car, burns, and so on)
Age of victim (for example, baby, teenager, middle-age,
elderly)
Whether or not victim has received first aid (for example,
stopped bleeding by pressure, and so on)
Whether or not a victim has vomited (for example, if
swallowed or inhaled something, and so on)
Gasoline ingested may cause unconsciousness
and burns to internal organs.
Do not induce vomiting.
Keep airway open.
Oxygen may be needed at scene.
Seek medical advice immediately.
WARNING !
Gasoline inhaled may cause unconsciousness
and burns to lips, mouth and lungs.
Keep airway open.
Seek medical advice immediately.
WARNING !
Gasoline spilled in eyes may cause burns to eye
tissue.
Irrigate eyes with water for approximately
15 minutes.
Seek medical advice immediately.
!
WARNING !
Gasoline spilled on skin may cause burns.
Wash area thoroughly with clear water.
Seek medical advice immediately.
WARNING !
IMPORTANT: Oxygen may be needed at scene if gasoline
has been ingested or inhaled. Seek medical advice
immediately.
Lockout/Tagout
Lockout/Tagout covers servicing and maintenance of
machines and equipment in which the unexpected
energization or start-up of the machine(s) or equipment or
release of stored energy could cause injury to employees or
personnel. Lockout/Tagout applies to all mechanical,
hydraulic, chemical or other energy, but does not cover
electrical hazards. Subpart S of 29 CFR Part 1910 - Electrical
Hazards, 29 CFR Part 1910.333 contains specific
Lockout/Tagout provision for electrical hazards.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 2-3
Important Safety Information
Hazards and Actions

WARNING
Spilled fuels, accidents involving pumps/dispensers, or uncontrolled fuel flow create a
serious hazard.
Fire or explosion may result, causing serious injury or death.
Follow established emergency procedures.
!
Collision of a Vehicle with Unit Fire at Island Fuel Spill
The following actions are recommended regarding these hazards:
Do not go near a fuel spill or allow anyone else in the area.
Use station EMERGENCY CUTOFF immediately. Turn off all system circuit breakers to the island(s).
Do not use console E-STOP, ALL STOP, and PUMP STOP to shut off power. These keys do not
remove AC power and do not always stop product flow.
Take precautions to avoid igniting fuel. Do not allow starting of vehicles in the area. Do not allow
open flames, smoking or power tools in the area.
Do not expose yourself to hazardous conditions such as fire, spilled fuel or exposed wiring.
Call emergency numbers.
Page 2-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Important Safety Information
This page is intentionally left blank.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 3-1
System Overview Site Controller III
3 Site Controller III
System Overview
The Site Controller III (SC III) is the brain of the CFN III System. Its job is to keep you
informed of what is going on at your site and to enable you to control the various pieces of
equipment involved in a fueling operation, such as fuel pumps or dispensers, automatic gates,
and tank gauges.
The SC III collects information about what each device is doing and makes that information
available to you in a convenient format. When you issue commands to the Site Controller-for
example, to tell it to authorize a sale on a fuel pump-it forwards the request to the pump
hardware, then monitors the sale in case something goes wrong. It puts control of all the
connected devices at your fingertips.
When the SC III was installed, your technician or system administrator configured it with the
PC operating system, along with your particular devices and the procedures your company
follows. For example, if your site accepts cash for fuel, the SC III has been told whether the
customer is required to pay before pumping (a prepay system) or is allowed to pay after
pumping (a postpay system).
CFN3 Command Window
The P: drive is your CFN3 prompt and the location of the SC3 root directory.
The command window has a [drive:/directory]* prompt where you will enter your commands
to the SC III. If you do not see this prompt you must press Enter to bring up the signon
prompt. Sign on as instructed and press Enter. The [P:]* prompt will display. The command
window must be active to communicate with the SC III. Active means that the window
appears on the desktop with a colored band at the top displaying the words CFN3. If the band
is gray then the window is not active. To activate the window, move the desktop arrow over
the window (using the mouse) and click once using the left mouse button. For more
information about your command window and the desktop refer to Introduction on page 1-1.
Consoles
The Point Of Sale (POS) device that communicate with the SC III is the Profit Point console.
The console combines pump control and cash-register functions. They allow you to turn on
pumps and accept cash or other payment. They are used at sites that do retail business, accept
cash or Credit Cards in the store. The Profit Point manuals describe console operations.
Site Controller III Readers
Page 3-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Readers
Readers are devices that communicate with the CFN system and allow input from the end user.
They can activate pumps, display messages, and print receipts. Readers can consist of any
combination of a customer display, keypad, card reader, and receipt printer. Some readers are
in dispenser and are specifically assigned to a single pump. Stand-alone readers can
represent multiple pumps and require a pump selection from the user. To obtain a receipt from
these readers, the user must return to the reader after completing a fuel sale and re-swipe the
card or enter the pump number that was used.
Log Printer
Another device, the log printer prints a continuous record of transactions and may also be
used to print reports. Every site requires some type of printer. It is important to know how to
read the information that comes out of the printer, since it includes data about completed sales
and messages about any errors that have occurred.
The log printer generates an on-going record on paper of important events at the site. These
include sales transactions and system messages generated when certain commands are run or
when errors are detected during operation.
The log printer, such as an Okidata

184 plain printer, must be located where site personnel

can read its output. The output of the log printer serves both as a maintenance log and an audit
trail. For example, the log printer records an entry as each sale is concluded and also any time
a problem is detected in an attached pump, island card reader, or other device.

Since the printed log is an important business record, it is important not to let the log
printer jam or run out of paper.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
In order to print, the log printer must be in the state called on-line or ready. This is usually
indicated by a light on the front panel of the printer. The log printer normally goes off-line
automatically when it jams or runs out of paper. You can take the log printer off-line to load
paper. Most printers have a switch labeled on-line or select for taking them on- and off-line.
A properly connected and configured log printer will notify the SC III whenever it goes
off-line, so that no data will be sent to it until it is again ready to print. However, the space
available for storing such output is limited, so the log printer must not be left off-line for long
periods when the site is operating.
It is possible to print a file on a log printer. This is usually done at shift change or by a local
automatic command file. When a file is printed on the log this way, the terminal beeps and
prints the header - Printing: filename date time where filename is the name of the file being
printed.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 3-3
Command Terminals Site Controller III
Command Terminals
Site commands can be entered through local or remote terminals. The local terminal is the
command window on your CFN III PC. A remote terminal is connected to the site through one
of the SC IIIs RS-232 ports. It can be any dumb terminal such as the LINK or another PC
running terminal emulator software capable of supporting VT100 or VT52 (such as Procomm
Plus

). The remote terminal can also be a modem connection.

Commands
In order to use the SC III fully, you must know how to give it commands and to understand its
replies. Commands are instructions you type in the CFN3 Command window. CFN3
commands must be typed in exactly the format shown in this manual. Most commands are
words or abbreviations for the action to be performed. For example, typing PRINT DATE and
then pressing Enter causes the SC III to print the current date and time according to its
internal clock.
Some commands, as explained in this manual, have short forms that you can use instead of
typing the whole command in order to save time. In the above example, PRINT DATE could
have been typed P DA.
Besides command words, other special symbols, such as <and >, provide flexibility in
redirecting the input to or output from commands.
Command Keys
The keyboards on all types of PCs have much in common. The SC III uses several specific
keys for specific functions. These keys may be located in different positions on different
keyboards.
Locate the Delete, Control, Enter, and EscapE keys on your keyboard. Note that:
Delete key may be marked Del
Control key may be marked Ctrl or Ctl
Enter key may be marked Return, RTN or
Escape key may be marked Esc
System-response Problems
When you open the CFN3 command window, it must display a [P:]* at the top left of the
screen. If not, press Enter or Return on your local terminal, the system must respond with a
signon prompt. Should the system not respond, close the window by pressing Alt, hold it
down, and then press X. Release both keys. Open the CFN3 window again by double-clicking
the CFN3 icon. Press Enter to get the signon prompt.
Site Controller III CFN3 Command Sessions
Page 3-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
CFN3 Command Sessions
After signing on, you may enter data and commands until you either sign off or are signed off
automatically. The time during which you are signed on is referred to as a command session.
How to Sign On
To sign on to the Site Controller, enter a user number and password. The information below
provide information to add new users and change the password.
To sign on, proceed as follows:
1 Press Enter. The terminal will print the message signon:
2 Type your user number, a comma, and your password. Press Enter.
For example, if your user number is 3, and your password is AGENT007, type 3,
AGENT007. If your password has any upper case letters, ensure that you enter them in upper
case. The terminal will not echo the password you type for security reasons.
When you are properly signed on, the terminal prints a message such as Connected to site
1010 on Tue 7/27/04 1:12PM to show that the command session has begun and it is ready to
accept commands. The next line displays the command prompt [P:]*.
How to Sign Off
To end a command session, press Escape (usually marked ESC) or type Exit or Quit and
press Enter.
The terminal will accept no further commands until you or someone else signs on again. When
you sign off, the terminal prints Sign off Tue 10/26/04 1:25PM. Do not click X in the upper
right corner of the window.
Automatic Sign Off
If you do not type anything on the terminal for 5 minutes, the terminal ends the command
session automatically. This protects the system if you forget to sign off.
How to Enter Commands and Data
Commands tell the site controller to perform particular actions, such as printing reports or
changing prices.
To enter a command, type the command on the terminal keyboard and press Enter.
After the site controller finishes performing the action requested by a command, it will
respond with the current drive letter followed by an asterisk [P:]* to show that it is ready to
accept another command. This letter-asterisk combination is called the command prompt,
since it prompts you to enter a command. Anytime you see the command prompt, the site
controller is ready to accept a command.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 3-5
CFN3 Command Sessions Site Controller III
For example, if you type the PRINT DATE command and press Enter, the terminal prints the
date and time, followed by the command prompt to indicate that the command has been
executed and the terminal is ready to accept another command.
Note: Any time you enter a command, you can type the full command or use the short form,
such as P DA for Print Date in the section immediately above. You can use either upper
case or lower case letters when typing commands. For the short form of system
commands, type HELP and press Enter at the command prompt. The essential part of
the command will appear in upper case. For the Print DAte command, the P DA
command is shown in upper case and this is all that is required to execute the command.
If a command requires that you enter data, the terminal will ask a questionwhich is called a
data entry promptindicating what type of data you must enter. If the terminal displays a
data entry prompt:
Type the data and press Enter.
If the command has several prompts, type the requested data and press Enter after each
one.
After the last prompt in the series, the terminal will print the command prompt to indicate
the command has been executed and the terminal is ready to accept another command.
[ P: ] * PRINT DATE
Tue 10/ 26/ 04 11: 40AM, Tr ans=57, Seq=624 SCI I I v3. x
[ P: ] *
To print the date, type PRINT DATE and press Enter.
CFN3 will display the date.
Command prompt will be displayed.
To load the date, proceed as follows:
1 Type LOAD DATE.
[ P: ] * LOAD DATE
MONTH? 10
DAY OF MONTH? 26
YEAR? 04
HOUR? 13
MI NUTE? 31
Tue 10/ 26/ 04 1: 31PM, Tr ans=154, Seq=332 SCI I I v3. x
[ P: ] *
2 Enter the month (mm format).
3 Enter the day (dd format).
4 Enter the year (yy format).
5 Enter the hour (military time format).
6 Enter the minute. CFN3 will display the date and time.
[ P: ] * RESET DIAGNOSTICS

[ P: ] *
Site Controller III CFN3 Command Sessions
Page 3-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
If a command does not print data or require data to be entered, the terminal prints just a
command prompt to indicate the command has been executed and the terminal is ready to
accept another command as illustrated.
How to Use Options with Commands
Many commands take options that modify how the command works. These options are
additional letters or symbols typed on the command line after the command.
A semicolon (;) separates the command and the option(s). Do not put a space between the
command and the option(s); if you insert a space, the option will be interpreted as an
argument.
If both options and arguments (data) are used on a command line, the options come first, then
a space, then the arguments:
command;options arguments
When more than one option is used with a command, the options may be listed in any order.
Complex options (P1=, P2=, >, >>, <) are separated by commas.
The common options are:
Option Function Description
A All Usually expands the effect of a command.
I Initialize Usually initializes data affected by the command.
C Chain Allows you to enter multiple sets (a chain) of data to
commands requiring data. See below.
P1=,P2= Parameter Allows you to specify fields for sorting. Field name is given
as data immediately following parameter; for example,
PRINT TRANSACTION;P1=AUTH would print a list of
transactions sorted by authorization codes.
> Redirect output to a
new file
Saves output of a command in a file you specify. If the file
already exists, that file is overwritten. Requires destination
(file name or LOG) as argument.
>> Redirect output to an
existing file
Output is appended to the end of the specified file.
Requires destination (file name) as argument. If a file does
not exist, it will be created.
< Redirect input Allows you to use a file as the source of input to a
command. Requires source (file name) as argument.
L Lines Used with any command to page output for CRT screen.
May also be used to set number of lines per screen (for
example, L=20). Stays in effect for all subsequent
commands until the user signs off or the L option is
redefined by using it on another command.
T Text Used in command files intended to be run from the
console so that single lines of text can be displayed on the
console.
H Home Used with any command, clears from the current cursor
position to the end of the screen and puts the cursor in the
home position on a CRT.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 3-7
CFN3 Command Sessions Site Controller III
Disk-based commands use different options than those given here for system-resident
commands. However, almost all the commands required for everyday operation are system
resident, and so they have the options and form described in this section.
How to Enter Multiple Blocks of Information
For the commands that enter data, the LOAD commands, for example, you can use the C
option to enter multiple blocks of data with one command. Without the C option, only a single
block can be entered with each command.
To use the C option:
Type semicolon C (;C) after the command.
The terminal will print a prompt each time you press Enter. The amount of data you can
enter for each command is determined by the CFN3 configuration.
When you have entered all the data, press Enter once after the next prompt without
entering any data.
To use the C option with the command LOAD HEADING, type LOAD HEADING;C.
Figure 3-1: LOAD HEADING Command with C Option
[ P: ] * LOAD HEADING;C
Li ne number ? 1
Headi ng l i ne? SMI TTY S STATI ON
Li ne number ? 2
Headi ng l i ne? 10 MAI N STREET
Li ne number ? 3
Headi ng l i ne? SMI TH, WA 98000
Li ne number ? 11
Foot i ng l i ne? THANK YOU
Li ne number ? 12
Foot i ng l i ne? PLEASE COME AGAI N
Li ne number ? 0
For mf eed l engt h? 5
Li ne number ?
[ P: ] *
Two Commas
Typed
No Data Entered
The terminal continues to print prompts each time Enter is pressed.
To enter a comma, type two commas on the third heading line (see Figure 3-1). One comma
will be printed on the receipt.
End the sequence by pressing Enter, without entering any data, after the last Line number?
prompt of the series (see Figure 3-1).
Site Controller III CFN3 Command Sessions
Page 3-8 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Verify Commands
Some commands require verification before they are executed. These commands give you a
chance to terminate the action if you entered the command inadvertently.
If a command requires verification, the terminal will print the prompt Verify (y/n)?. Type a Y
to continue execution, or an N to terminate the command. Do not type a Y unless you are sure
the command does what you want to do.
Try not to get in the bad habit of typing Y automatically when prompted with Verify (y/n)?.
Look at the command line you typed and think first.
Note: Verification is not required when one of these commands is included in a command file.
How to Use Ranges with Commands
Most PRINT commands allow you to act on specified ranges of data.
A range has the form N-M, which means numbers N through M (in entering the command,
actual numbers are substituted for N and M).
A -N means numbers from the beginning of the file through N.
An N- means number N through the end of the file.
An N means print only number N.
If the starting number specified is not in the file, no data is printed. The printout stops after the
last number specified or at the end of the file if the ending number is not in the file.
You can specify more than one range for a command:
PRINT TRANSACTION 23-150 prints transactions 23 through 150.
PRINT TRANSACTION 23-150 200-250 prints transactions 23 through 150 and 200
through 250.
PRINT TRANSACTION 23- prints transaction number 23 through the end of the
transaction file.
PRINT TRANSACTION -5 prints transactions from the beginning of the file through
transaction 5.
PRINT TRANSACTION 34 prints only transaction number 34.
PRINT TRANSACTION;P2=ACC=54, 1-10 prints transactions whose account number
starts with 54, in the transaction range 1 through 10.
The only PRINT commands that do not allow ranges are PRINT CARD, PRINT CONSOLE,
PRINT DATE, PRINT PHONE, PRINT RECEIPT, and PRINT TIP. PRINT LOCKOUT does
not allow ranges in systems with limited lockout.
Shortcut for Entering Data
After you are familiar with some of the commands, you may no longer require the prompts to
remind you how to enter data. You can type the command and all the data you want to enter on
one line before you press Enter.
Separate items with a comma. To enter a comma as part of the text, type two commas.
Remember that if you use the C option, you must press Enter twice to enter and terminate the
command.
[ P: ] * LOAD HEADING;C 1,SMITTYS STATION,10 MAIN
STREET
Li ne number ?
[ P: ] *
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 3-9
Redirecting Command Input and Output Site Controller III
The command and the data required for the command, with commas between items are typed,
then Enter is pressed twice.
How to Use Disk-based Commands
Disk-based commands are programs that are stored on a disk. These commands are actually
names of executable disk files. Therefore, if the file is stored on a removable (or floppy) disk,
the disk must be present in the drive for the command to be run.
There are two types of disk-based commands: command files that contain a list of CFN3
commands and have the extension .CMD, and executables that have the extension .BIN. To
execute either of these, a disk containing the corresponding CMD or BIN file must be in the
SC III disk drive, or the file must be present on the hard disk drive.
The SC III will first look for the command in different places in the following order (known as
the search path):
You must type the entire command name, including the path, if the command is not in the
RAM drive, the current directory, or P:BIN. Do not type the extension .BIN or .CMD. If the
SC III cannot find a .BIN or .CMD file corresponding to what you typed, it will reply with the
message unknown command. The site looks for .BIN first, then .CMD.
Redirecting Command Input and Output
Normally commands take their input from the keyboard and send their output to the command
terminal. You can use input and output redirection to cause commands to take their input from
a file and put their output in a file.
You can use input and output redirection together. When you combine the redirection options
with other options on the same command line, if the other options follow the redirection
options, put a comma after the filename.
For example,
PRINT PUMP;>filename,A
may also be written as
PRINT PUMP;A>filename
In any case, a blank space must always separate the command options from the arguments or
data.
Path Description
R: RAM drive
. current directory
P:BIN the .BIN directory on the hard disk
Site Controller III Log Printer
Page 3-10 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Redirect Input for a Command
The option for input redirection is <. You can create a file with data for a command, then
execute the command with that file as input. For example, the file MESSAGES shown below
contains data for the command LOAD MESSAGE. This example results in a moving message
on the island card readers display. The second column is the length of time each line is
displayed.
[ P: ] * LOAD MESSAGES
1 3. 00 Wel come t o
2 3. 00 Wi l l s Fast Fuel
3 3. 00 Wal l a Wal l a, , WA
4 3. 00 <- - - Sl i de Car d <- - -
5 0. 20 <- - -
6 0. 20 <- - -
7 0. 20 <- - -
8 0. 20 <- - -
9 2. 00 Need Oi l ?
10 3. 00 Oi l i s on sal e!
[ P: ] *
The command LOAD MESSAGE;<MESSAGES,IC executes the command LOAD
MESSAGE with input from the file MESSAGES.
How to Redirect Output from a Command
The options for output redirection are >and >>. These options differ in their effect on an
existing file that is to receive output. The >option overwrites the contents of an existing file.
The >>option appends data to the end of an existing file. For example, the command PRINT
TRANSACTIONS;>TRANS puts the output of PRINT TRANSACTIONS in the file TRANS,
deleting whatever was in the TRANS file.
The command PRINT TRANSACTIONS;>>TRANS appends the output of the command
PRINT TRANSACTIONS to the file TRANS.
Log Printer
Do not use the option ;>LOG with a command file or an executable on an SC III.
How to Print a File on a Log Printer
Use the command LOG FILE or LOG FI to print a file on the log printer.
LOG FI LE ( LOG FI )
[ P: ] * LOG FILE
Fi l e name? SAL-RPT
[ P: ] *
1 Type LOG FILE.
2 Enter the filename.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 3-11
Keyboard Control Characters Site Controller III
The A option, when added to LOG FILE, deletes the designated file after it has been printed
on the log printer.
How to Print a Message on a Log Printer
Use LOG MESSAGE or LOG ME to print a message on the log printer. You can use the C
option to log messages requiring more than one line, but each line will have the date and time
appended to it.
LOG MESSAGE ( LOG ME)
[ P: ] * LOG MESSAGE Bob, Call office

[ P: ] *
The message that prints includes the date and time: Bob, Call branch office Tue 10/26/04
5:51 PM.
Keyboard Control Characters
Keyboard control characters are used to edit the command line and to modify the effect of
commands. They allow you to terminate commands, delete characters you have typed, and
temporarily stop printout.
The following key combinations are described in this section:
The L command option and the HELP command are also discussed next.
The CONTROL Key
As shown above, some functions are executed by using a combination of the CONTROL key
(designated by CTRL or CTL on the key) and a specified character. To execute one of these
functions, hold down CONTROL when you type the specified character.
Note: The use of the CONTROL key is indicated by a caret (^) before the character to be typed
when CONTROL is held down. For example, to enter a ^C, hold down CONTROL and
type a C.
Keys Description
CTRL-C
Terminate a command.
CTRL-S
Pause display.
CTRL-Q
Unpause display.
CTRL-X
Delete current line.
DELETE
Delete previous character(s) - printer terminal.
BACKSPACE
Delete previous character - CRT or PC CFN3 terminal.
Site Controller III Keyboard Control Characters
Page 3-12 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Terminate a Command
After you have typed a command and pressed Enter, you can terminate the command in most
cases by typing a ^C. (Ensure, C for cease.) When you type a ^C with a print command the
printout will stop at the point where the ^C was typed.
How to Delete Characters
Press Backspace (or type a ^H) to delete the previous character. Press Backspace as many
times as required to delete the mistake, then type the correct characters. You must make the
corrections before you press Enter.
The user typed PRNT.
The user pressed Backspace twice.
The terminal deleted the NT.
The user typed INT DATE.
[ P: ] * PRNT
[ P: ] * PR
[ P: ] * PRINT DATE
How to Delete a Line
Use a ^X to delete an entire line. You must make the correction before you press Enter.
The user typed PRUNT DATE and noticed the error.
The user entered a ^X.
The terminal printed a backslash after the deleted line and moved down one line.
[ P: ] * PRUNT DATE
[ P: ] * PRUNT DATE\
How to Pause Printout
A pause in printing is useful for viewing a printout on a CRT.
To temporarily pause printing without terminating a command, enter a ^S (S for stop) or press
Pause if you have a printer terminal. This will keep new lines from being printed.
To continue printing, enter ^Q, or press Enter, or press Pause again.
How to Pause Printout with the L Option
Use the L option to automatically pause printing after a specified number of lines have been
printed. Press Enter to print the next group of lines. If you do not specify a number, 24 lines
will be printed.
To use the L option to specify page length, type a semicolon L (;L), followed by an equals sign
and the required number, after the command. For example, ;L=20 sets the screen length to
20 lines.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 3-13
Permission Levels Site Controller III
The L option will affect all subsequent print commands until you sign off. To remove the L
option, type semicolon L=0 (;L=0) or semicolon minus L (;-L) after a command.
Type: PRINT DIAGNOSTICS;L
[ P: ] * PRINT DIAGNOSTICS;L
The terminal will print 24 lines each time the user press Enter, until all the diagnostics
have been printed
Type: PRINT DIAGNOSTICS;L=20
[ P: ] * PRINT DIAGNOSTICS;L=20
The terminal will print 20 lines each time the user press Enter, until all the diagnostics
have been printed
Permission Levels
Permission levels are used for security and safety. By assigning appropriate permission levels
to users and to commands, you can make sure that users have access to only the commands
they require to use.
Level 10 must be used only for Administrator Access to the CFN3. Standard users of
the system must use level 4.
For security reasons, users with permission level 10 are not allowed to login remotely.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
In the default configuration, users with permission level 2 are allowed to activate only basic
CFN3 commands.
Remote Access Command
SYStem. Typing SYStem will take you to the Windows XP operating system from the CFN3
application. Typing SYS does not change drives, it only allows you to see different drives on
the PC. To return to CFN3 from Windows XP, type EXIT. Do not add any additional
extensions or commands such as SYS PJ or SYS TYPE. It is NOT advised to use this
command when using the PC. When you require to execute Windows XP commands on your
PC, use a DOS window with a C: prompt or use Windows XP Explorer.
This command is designed for use from a remote signon when the PC cannot be accessed
directly.
Site Controller III Optional Commands
Page 3-14 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Optional Commands
Several of the commands shown on the help list, such as DISABLE FPR and ENABLE FPR,
work only with the optional programs you may not have installed. If you try to run these
commands without having installed the program, an error message appears.
HELP Command
Type HELP to list all valid commands and options for the permission level you are signed on
at (the short form of the commands are shown in uppercase letters).
The following illustration shows a printout for a user who has access to all commands. The
number before each command is the number that runs that command from a console.
If you specify the first word of a command with the HELP command, only the commands that
start with that word will be printed. For example, HELP LOAD prints all the commands that
start with LOAD.
If you type HELP * and the second part of a command, you will see all the commands whose
second word starts with what you specified. For example, HELP * VEHICLE (note the blank
space before and after the *) prints all the commands whose second word is VEHICLE.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 3-15
HELP Command Site Controller III
The A option with the HELP command shows each command prefaced with its command
number.
[ P: ] * HELP;A
Ter mi nal Commands SCI I I v3. 6
94: ACt i vat e GAt e; c 10: ACt i vat e PUmp; cap1 77: ADd ALl ocat i on; c
11: ADd DRawer ; c 100: ADd I Nvent or y; c 12: ADd TAnk; c
102: CALL 103: CHDi r 13: Check CAr d; c
154: CLOSE 105: COPy; i a 105: CP; I
14: DEact i vat e PUmp; ca 6: DELet e; a 4: DI Rect or y; i a
19: DI sabl e COnsol e; c 106: DI sabl e DUmp 162: DI sabl e FPR; c
88: DI sabl e GAt e; c 107: DI sabl e HI st or y 20: DI sabl e PCu; c
108: DI sabl e PROduct ; c 21: DI sabl e PUmp; ca 109: DI sabl e RAW
22: DI sabl e REader ; c 163: DI sabl e SDI ; c 86: DI sabl e TMS; c
100: DOwnl oad SDI 144: ECho; ap1 23: Enabl e COnsol e; ci
112: Enabl e DUmp; a 87: Enabl e GAt e; ci 113: Enabl e HI st or y; i
24: Enabl e PCu; ci 114: Enabl e PROduct ; c 25: Enabl e PUmp; ci a
8: Enabl e RAW; a 161: Enabl e FPR; ci 26: Enabl e REader ; ci
164: Enabl e SDI ; ci 85: Enabl e TMS; ci 27: EXi t
28: Fi x TRansact i on; i a 116: FORMAT 117: Get TRansact i on; a
29: Hel p; a 78: LOad ALl ocat i on; c 30: LOad Aut hor i zat i on; ci
146: LOad CAr d; c 76: LOad CRon; ci 40: LOad CUt of f ; c
31: LOad DAt e 32: LOad DRawer ; c 33: LOad Fuel ; c
34: LOad Headi ng; ci 118: LOad I Nvent or y; c 35: LOad LI mi t at i on; ci
36: LOad MEssage; ci 46: LOad PHone; ci 119: LOad PLU; c
37: LOad PRi ce; ci 38: LOad PROduct ; ca 39: LOad PUmp; c
41: LOad SHi f t 45: LOad TAnk; ci 142: LOad TAX; ci
47: LOad TRansact i on 82: LOad Vehi cl e; ci a 48: LOCk CAr d; ca
158: LOG EVent 121: LOG FI l e; a 93: LOG MEssage; c
122: MKdi r 159: NExt CLer k 151: NExt DAY; i a
152: NExt SHi f t ; a 149: PAUse; i ap1 155: PORT
79: Pr i nt ALl oct i on 49: Pr i nt Aut hor i zat i on 95: Pr i nt CAr d
150: Pr i nt COnsol e 15: Pr i nt CRon 50: Pr i nt DAt e
51: Pr i nt DI agnost i cs; a 52: Pr i nt DRawer 53: Pr i nt Headi ng
123: Pr i nt HI st or y; a 54: Pr i nt LI mi t at i on 55: Pr i nt LOckout
56: Pr i nt MEssage 89: Pr i nt MOni t or ; a 16: Pr i nt PHone
57: Pr i nt PRi ce 58: Pr i nt PROduct ; i a 59: Pr i nt PUmp; a
145: Pr i nt QUant i t y; i a 124: Pr i nt RECei pt ; cap1 126: Pr i nt SAl es; i a
125: Pr i nt SI Gnon 18: Pr i nt SUmmar y; i a 60: Pr i nt TAnk
129: Pr i nt TI p; a 61: Pr i nt TOt al s; i a 62: Pr i nt TRansact i on; ap1p2
83: Pr i nt Vehi cl e 130: PUr ge SI Te 131: REBOOT; i ap1
7: RECor d; i 80: REMove ALl ocat i on; ca 63: REMove Aut hor i zat i on; c
132: REMove CRon; ci a 133: REMove Headi ng; c 64: REMove LI mi t at i on; c
134: REMove MEssage; c 17: REMove PRi ce; c 135: REMove PROduct ; ca
84: REMove Vehi cl e; c 138: REName; a 65: REset DI agnost i cs; i
66: REset PUmp 67: REset TOt al s; i a 68: REset TRansact i on; i a
140: RMdi r 69: RUN; i a 167: SCReen
156: SEND COMmand; a 157: SEND FI l e; a 166: SHow
153: SET_var ; i 70: STOP; i a 81: SUbt r act ALl ocat i on; c
71: SUbt r act DRawer ; c 141: SUbt r act I Nvent or y; c 72: SUbt r act TAnk; c
160: SYSt em; a 73: TEst PCu 5: TYpe; a
74: Unl ock CAr d; ca
[ P: ] *
Site Controller III HELP Command
Page 3-16 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 4-1
User ID Numbers Users
4 Users
The system administrator is usually responsible for assigning the initial user-identification
number and a password to each person who will require to use the SC III data terminal for
accessing the CFN III system. Some systems also require users to sign on to the Profit Point.
For these, the system administrator is also responsible for assigning password to people who
use the console.
In its normal configuration the SC III allows up to 99 users; the default number is 5. Each user
has three attributes, a user number (0 through 99), a password of up to 16 alphanumeric
characters, and a permission level (0-10):
User numbers identify users. They are also used in the output of PRINT HISTORY
command to show which user executed which commands.
Passwords are used for security. By controlling who knows the password you can control
who has access to your system. For PCI compliance, each user must have a unique user
number and password. Users must not share passwords.
Permission levels are used for security and safety. By assigning appropriate permission
levels to users and to commands, you can ensure that users have access only to commands
that they require to use. In the default configuration, users with permission level 2 are
allowed to activate only basic SC III commands. Only PCI Administrators are granted
permission level 10 and are allowed to activate all SC III commands. All other users are
only granted permission levels 0-9.
User ID Numbers
The SC III is capable of controlling 99 users. Users 97 and 98 are reserved for backup access
purposes. If there are fewer than 97 employees at a site, each employee must have their own
user number.
How to Add a User
Using the admpass.bin Program
The admpass program is designed for an administrator to setup and control users access to the
system. The admpass program will allow new users to setup, modify some parameters for
existing users, enable or disable a user, and remove a user from the system.
Gasboy I nt er nat i onal Si t e Cont r ol l er I I I
Ver si on 1. 0. 0. 4
Passwor d Admi ni st r at i on Menu
1. Add New User t o Syst em :
2. Enabl e or Di sabl e User :
3. Modi f y User I nf or mat i on :
4. Remove User f r omSyst em:
Ent er I t emNumber , Q- Qui t
At any t i me pr ess ? f or hel p :
Users User ID Numbers
Page 4-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Run admpass. The Password Administration Menu appears.
Adding a New User
To add a new user to the system, proceed as follows:
1 Select item 1.
Note: The User ID will be a number between 0 and 99. User number 97 and 98 must be
reserved and must not be used for general user.
2 If the user already exists, a warning will be displayed and the administrator must answer to the
prompt, to continue or to abort the process.
Adding a new user requires a password to be entered by the administrator. This is also required
to modify other default items, if required. The new password added will expire after the first
login by the user. The user has to setup a new password at the first login. If the user does not
set up a new password to replace the temporary password loaded by the administrator, the user
will not be allowed access to the system until the administrator resets the password again. The
number of days before the password expires is 90 days and the user is enabled, as default.
Enabling or Disabling a User
To enable or disable existing users, select item 2.
Note: Disabling an account will not extend the timing for a password to expire.
Modifying User Account
To modify user account, select item 3.
Note: The administrator can change some account parameters, using new password,
changing the security level, and disabling or enabling the user. If the administrator
changes the password, the user will be required to enter a new password when they first
access the system.
Removing a User from the System
To remove a user from the system, select item 4.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 4-3
User ID Numbers Users
New User Menu
To add a new user, proceed as follows:
1 Select Add a New User. The Password Administration screen appears.
Gasboy I nt er nat i onal Si t e Cont r ol l er I I I
Ver si on 1. 0. 0. 4
Passwor d Admi ni st r at i on Menu
New User 2 Secur i t y Menu
1 New Passwor d f or User : PASSWD REQUI RED
2 Days Al l owed f or Passwor d Use: 90
3 User Per mi ssi on Level : 1
4 User Access t o Syst em : Enabl ed
Ent er I t emNumber , ?- hel p, S- Save, Q- Qui t :
2 If an existing user is selected as a new user, the system will prompt for verification before
allowing the existing user data to be scrubbed and a new user is created for that User ID.
New Password
Following are the guidelines for creating a new password:
The Password is mandatory and must consist of 7 to 16 characters.
The password is case-sensitive and can have numbers mixed with upper case and lower
case letters.
If less than 7 or more than 16 characters are entered, then the administrator will be notified
that the password is invalid and require to try again.
To meet strong password and PCI DSS requirements, a password must consist mixture of
letters and numbers.
Only alphanumeric characters will be accepted for passwords.
The password table works just as it did in prior versions and will follow the same rules as
previous versions. However, the password is not decipherable by viewing the password table,
as it is with prior versions. The commands load sig, add sig, and remove sig are no
longer compatible and cannot be executed.
When a new user logs in for the first time, the user will be notified that the password must be
changed. If the password is not changed, the User ID will expire and the user will be unable to
login. The system will also notify a user before the users password expires.
If a user is remotely logging into the system, the user will be notified 30 days before the
password expires, and every day thereafter.
If the user locally logs into the system, the user will be notified 10 days before the
expiration of the password, and every day thereafter.
If the local user does not update the password before it expires, the user will be given one
chance to change the password on a login after the expiration date.
If the user is logged in locally at the Site Controller console, or is logged in remotely, a
password menu appears. The user must enter the new password. After successfully
completing the password update the system will automatically log the user out and the
user must login again using the new password.
If the user is at the Profit Point they will be notified of the expired password as they log
into the system. But, there is no forced menu for them to update the password.
If they fail to update the password, they will no longer have access to the system.
Users User ID Numbers
Page 4-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Days Allowed
The days allowed for a Password can range from 1 to 999 days. To meet the PCI requirements,
the days allowed cannot exceed 90 (default) for the expiration time of the password. If the
days allowed exceeds 90, the administrator will be in violation of the PCI Security Standard. If
the number of days equals or exceeds 900 days, the system considers this level to be a
non-expiring password. A non-expiring password does not require the new user to create a
new password when the system is accessed for the first time.
User Password Update
Use the command PASWD or PA* to change your password. A password can be 7 to 16
characters long, and does not have to be a word. You can use any combination of characters.
When you load a new password, your previous password is erased. In order to maintain
security, do not write down your password. To update the password, proceed as follows:
1 Type paswd, or pa* to access the password program. The current User ID is displayed in the
Password Update Program screen.
Passwor d Updat e Pr ogr am
Ver si on 1. 0. 1. 0
** User I D 2 **


Ent er Cur r ent Passwor d:
2 Enter the Current Password.
3 Enter the New Password.
4 After entering the new password, you will be prompted to verify it. Enter the new password
again.
Passwor d Updat e Pr ogr am
Ver si on 1. 0. 1. 0
** User I D 2 **



Ent er New 7 t o 16 Di gi t Key Passwor d: ***********
Ver i f y New 7 t o 16 Di gi t Key Passwor d:

The password must be from 7 to 16 characters or the passwords will not be accepted.
After the password is verified, the system will display that the password has been updated.
Notes: 1) If a mistake is made when entering the current password, the new password, or when
verifying the new password, the backspace cannot be used to fix the mistake. Press
Enter. An error message will appear and you will be prompted to change the
password again.
2) When changing a password, you cannot reuse the same password for five sequences
of changing the password.
If a user updates a password from the Profit Point, the entered password will not be hidden. It
is the users responsibility to ensure that their password is entered when others do not have
visual accessibility to the Profit Point screen.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 4-5
User ID Numbers Users
Backup Password
If the system cannot be accessed for any reason, the administrator must sign on as user 97 and
obtain a CPU ID and Pass Key. The administrator must then contact Gasboy Technical
Support at 1-800-444-5529 and provide the CPU ID and Pass Key information. In return, the
technician will supply a password for user 98. This temporary password can be used for one-
time access to the system.
Note: In previous versions of the Site Controller, the system could be accessed using a switch
setting and the backup password configured in sys_par. For increased security, the
switch setting check has been removed.
CPU I D = 11149701
Pass Key = 4CE6 1F67 1885 E6E2
First, the administrator must sign on as user 97 and use the password configured in sys_par.
For example, the default backup password is GASBOY. If this has not been changed, the
administrator must type 97,GASBOY. The SC3 will generate text that looks like the
following:
The administrator will contact Gasboy Technical Support at 1-800-444-5529 and request a
backup password. The technician will provide a temporary password based on the CPU ID and
Pass Key information obtained through user 97.
To enter the temporary password, the administrator must type 98,nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn, where
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn is the 16-digit temporary password provided by Gasboy Technical
Support. The password must be entered with no spaces and all letters included in the password
must be entered in upper case.
Once signed on as user 98, the administrator will have full access to any part of the system.
The new password expires when the system is accessed, thus it can be used only once.
Immediately after gaining access to the system, the administrator must update passwords using
admpass or restore passwords from backup. Otherwise, the administrator must perform the
previous operations to obtain another password from Technical Support.
How to Print a List of User Numbers
Type PRINT SIGNON (or P SIG).
PRI NT SI GNON ( P SI G)
[ P: ] * PRINT SIGNON
User Level
02
19
25
39
[ P: ] *
For security, the password are not printed.
Users Permission Levels
Page 4-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Permission Levels
The standard User Permission Level range is from level 0 to 10.
Every command is associated with a certain permission level. For commands that have the A
or I options, the command used with the option may have a different permission level than the
plain command (refer to the chart in the Command Permission Levels chapter in MDE-4773
CFN III Configuration Manual for Windows XP for details).
Command permission levels may be changed by using the disk-based configuration program
PERM. Disk-based commands are assigned permission levels by the disk-based command
SET_PERM.
Permission levels are usually assigned during the initial configuration of the system, but you
must verify that the permission levels in use are appropriate for your system. Refer to How to
Use Permission Levels on page 4-7 for more information.
Refer to the MDE-4773 CFN III Configuration Manual for Windows XP if you require more
information about assigning permission levels to commands.
Three things determine whether a user has access to a command. They are: the users
permission level, the commands permission level, and the position of the console keyswitch
(if entering commands from a console).
If a user has a permission level that is equal to or greater than the permission level required
for a command, that user may execute that command.
If a user is signed on to a console, the console keyswitch may also raise the users effective
permission level. The permission level associated with each key, when inserted, will be in
effect if it is higher than the users permission level. The key position permission levels
are as follows:
Key Position Permission Level
Profit Point, 5-position:
5 (automatically signs on user 2) user 2s
4 (automatically signs on user 1) user 1s
3 ON 1
2 SUPERVISOR 4
1 MANAGER 8
Profit Point, 3-position:
1 ON 1
2 OFF 0
3 MANAGER 8
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 4-7
New Security.bin Program Users
How to Use Permission Levels
Permission levels can ensure Site Controller security.
It is probably more appropriate to think of Site Controller users as job functions rather than as
individuals. For example, a typical attended site might have separate user IDs for Cashier,
Supervisor, Manager, and System Configuration and Maintenance. The permission levels for
each might be as follows:
Ideally, each user must have access to only the commands required for that users job. This
requires careful planning. You must decide what commands each level of user will require to
use, and assign permission levels to commands accordingly.
Access Allowed
User Access to the system can be Enabled or Disabled.
New Security.bin Program
System Key Management
System key management is controlled from the security.bin program. The program will bring
up a system key management window that is used for setting up and controlling the keys
required for system security. The security.bin program requires separate users to enter the two
parts of the security key to maintain the safety of split knowledge and dual control. The system
key must be updated at least once a year to meet the PCI security standards. The system key
does not expire after one year. The maintenance of the system key is up to each site
administrator.
Syst emKey Management
1. 0. 1. 0
Secur i t y Admi ni st r at i on Menu
1. Ent er New Syst emPass Key : Not Ent er ed
2. Save Pass Key t o di sket t e : N/ A
3. Ent er New Syst emMast er Key : N/ A
4. Save Mast er Key t o di sket t e : N/ A
5. Get Pass Key f r omDi sket t e : Pass Key Not Read Fr omDi sket t e
6. Get Mast er Key f r omDi sket t e : Mast er Key Not Read Fr omDi sket t e
7. Updat e Syst emKeys : Syst emPr evi ousl y Updat ed
Ent er I t emNumber , RETURN- Next Page, Q- Qui t
At any t i me pr ess ? f or hel p :
User Job User Permission Level
Cashier/Attendant 1
Supervisor 4
Manager 8
Maintenance/Programmer 9
PCI Administrator 10
Users New Security.bin Program
Page 4-8 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Menu Item 1: Enter New System Pass Key
Loading the System Pass Key requires a 16 character password. If more or less characters are
entered than required, the system will notify the user of the error and prompt to re-enter the
password. The password must be verified on the second entry. To provide a strong password, a
mix of alpha characters (upper and lower case) and numeric characters must be used. The site
administrator determines the type of strong password to be entered. The system will not check
for a mandatory type or set of characters.
Syst emKey Management
1. 0. 1. 0
Load Pass Key
Ent er 16 Di gi t Key: ****************
Ver i f y 16 Di gi t Key: ****************
Menu Item 2: Save Pass Key to Diskette
Menu item 2 is used for saving the Pass Key in an encrypted file on a diskette. The Master and
Pass Keys cannot be saved on the same diskette. Therefore, two diskettes are required for the
save process. Ensure that the diskette is clearly labeled Pass Key as it cannot be interchanged
with the Master Key diskette.
Saving the Master Key and Pass Key diskettes will allow the administrator a full recovery if
the system is corrupted. The administrator does not have to remember the two passwords.
However, if one or both of the diskettes are bad, the administrators must have the means to
recover by re-entering the passwords from another means.
Note: It is not possible to save the Pass Key to diskette after exiting the program.
After creating and saving the Pass Key, the user must exit and another user with permission
level 10 must log in and run security.bin to enter the Master Key.
Menu Item 3: Enter New System Master Key
Loading the System Master Key requires a 20 to 28 character password. If more or less
characters are entered than required, the system will notify the user of the error and prompt to
re-enter the password. The password must be verified on the second entry. To provide a strong
password, a mix of alpha characters (upper and lower case) and numeric characters must be
used. The site administrator determines the type of strong password to be entered. The system
will not check for a mandatory type or set of characters.
Syst emKey Management
1. 0. 1. 0
Load Mast er Key
Ent er 20 t o 28 Di gi t Key: ****************
Ver i f y 20 t o 28 Di gi t Key: ****************
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 4-9
New Security.bin Program Users
Menu Item 4: Save Master Key to Diskette
Menu item 4 is for saving the Master Key in an encrypted file on a diskette. The Master Key
cannot be saved on the same diskette as the Pass Key. Therefore, another diskette is required
for the save process. Ensure that the diskette is clearly labeled Master Key as it cannot be
interchanged with the Pass Key diskette.
Saving the Master Key and Pass Key diskettes will allow the administrator a full recovery if
the system is corrupted. The administrator does not have to remember the two passwords.
However, if one or both of the diskettes are bad, the administrators must have the means to
recover by re-entering the passwords from another means.
Note: It is not possible to save the Master Key to diskette after updating the System Keys or
exiting the program.
Menu Item 5: Get Pass Key from Diskette
Menu item 5 is used to restore the Pass Key from diskette to allow full recovery, if the system
becomes corrupted or loses its Security key information.
Menu Item 6: Get Master Key from Diskette
Menu item 6 is used to restore the Master Key from diskette to allow full recovery, if the
system becomes corrupted or loses its Security key information.
Menu Item 7: Update System Keys
Menu item 7 is used to update the system with the new keys or the keys restored from diskette.
If the system is not updated, the new keys will not take effect. The menu will let you know
when the system is being updated and when the update is complete.
Security for your company and patrons using your equipment is the uppermost concern. The
key information and diskettes must be kept in a secure location such as a safe. A compromised
system must be reported immediately and can result in fines and other monetary losses if the
compromised cards are the result of poor key management and/or the lack of security.
Users New Security.bin Program
Page 4-10 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 5-1
Audit Trail
5 Audit Trail
To provide traceability for system access and actions taken that may affect sensitive data, an
audit log is created. A directory c:\cfn3audit is used and daily audit files are created and stored
in that directory. The audit files will start with the prefix of AU and will be followed with a
two-digit year, two-digit month, and two-digit day. The file type or suffix is ADX.
The following is a list of items that will be logged in the audit file:
Any command typed from SC3 window or from the Profit Point SPCL Func 30 will be
recorded in the system audit file.
Any command executed by the system as a cron will be logged in the system audit file.
If a script is run, such as in a cmd file, it is possible that every command in the script will
be logged in the audit file.
When a bin command is executed that results in the change to the system configuration a
message is sent to the audit log that the system has been updated.
PC and CFN Time Synchronization
A cron is provided with a command file to allow the two systems to be synchronized. The
command timetont.cmd is used to set the PC clock to the same time as the CFN embedded
system clock. A cron is provided to provide a hidden background task to set the PC clock
every day at 2:30 A.M.
Miscellaneous Items
If the security.cfg is missing, on reboot;a the system will send a message Security File
Missing.. If the security.cfg does not match the file size expected, the system will display
a message, Security File Corrupt.
On page one of sys_par there is a setting used for backup password. Though it is no longer
used for obtaining a backup password it is used by the system and must be left to a default
of GASBOY.
On page one of sys_par there is a setting for using the disk journal. This is set to a default
of yes and must be left in the default state if PCI logging requirements are to be met.
SC3.SYS driver is located in the C:/sc3drv directory. The sc3.ini and sc3drv.exe files used
to configure the SC3 are also located in the same directory. The Gasboy user must not be
allowed to delete these three files.
The audit files are located in the c:\sc3audit directory along with the cfn3audit.exe file.
The gasboy user must not be allowed to access audit files or the cfn3audit.exe file.
Audit Trail
Page 5-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 6-1
Date and Time Receipts, Messages, and Date
6 Receipts, Messages, and Date
Date and Time
The system has a battery-back-up clock, and even after a power failure the clock maintains the
correct date and time, so you normally will not have to enter the date. The Site Controller does
not automatically adjust for daylight-savings time, so you will have to adjust the Site
Controllers clock manually if daylight-savings time is observed in your area.
Also, the Site Controllers clock can gain or lose time over a period, just as a watch can. You
may require to adjust it periodically. For information on how to enter the date and time or
display the date, refer to How to Enter Commands and Data on page 3-4.
Receipt Heading and Footing
The receipt heading is printed above and the receipt footing is printed below the body of each
printed receipt. The information in the receipt heading and footing usually includes the name
of the store or gas station, and may also include the address and some other messages, such as
Thank You and Please Come Again.
Note: If your site is connected to a financial network and allows debit transactions, Federal
regulations for receipts for electronic funds transfers apply (these regulations are
included in an appendix to this manual).
Characters @C, @N, and @O
Note: The card reader device must support track 1 to make use of this feature.
The characters @C are used to center text.
If the characters @N are found, they will be replaced by the customers name if known. The
line will print regardless of whether or not the name has been found.
If the characters @O are found with the @N, the line will not be displayed unless the
customers name is known.
How to Enter Receipt Heading and Footing
Use the command LOAD HEADING or LO H to enter the heading and footing to be printed
on the receipt and to enter the form feed length. The heading and footing you load will print on
all printers at the site.
Receipts, Messages, and Date Receipt Heading and Footing
Page 6-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
The number of receipt heading and footing lines allowed is determined by the Site Controller
configuration. Each heading and footing line can have up to 24-characters. The form feed
length is the number of blank lines between the last line of the receipt and the first line of the
next receipt.
Use line number 0 for the form feed length.
Use 1 through 9 for the heading line numbers; line number 1 is the first heading line, line
number 2 is the second heading line, and so on.
Use the line number plus ten for the footing line number; line number 11 is the first footing
line, line number 12 is the second footing line, and so on.
For credit-card receipts printed by a console, use lines 20-29 to provide space for the
customers signature.
LOAD HEADI NG; C ( LO H; C)
[ P: ] * LOAD HEADING;C
Li ne number ? 1
Headi ng l i ne? SMITTYS STATION
Li ne number ? 2
Headi ng l i ne? 10 MAIN STREET
Li ne number ? 3
Headi ng l i ne? SMITH,, WA 98000
Li ne number ? 11
Foot i ng l i ne? THANK YOU
Li ne number ? 12
Foot i ng l i ne? PLEASE COME AGAIN
Li ne number ? 0
For mf eed l engt h? 5
Li ne number ?
[ P: ] *
For a blank line, press the space bar and then Enter after HEADING LINE? One blank line is
automatically printed after the heading and one blank line is automatically printed before the
footing.
A single comma terminates an item, so to use a comma in your heading or footing, you must
type two commas. You can use the C option with the command LOAD HEADING.
Form feed length is in lines. The user typed two commas on the third heading line. One comma
will be printed on the receipt.
Special Printer Functions
If your site has island card readers equipped with the Novatronics or the Star

printers, you can

create special effects on your receipts. Use the following special characters to perform the
special printer functions. Be aware that other printers, including some stand-alone printers,
ignore these characters.
Console and Island Card Reader
\nn Set left margin to nn spaces.
Console Only
&&B Use bold print
&&C Use condensed print (15-characters per inch).
&&N Use normal print (12-characters per inch).
&&E Use expanded print (7.5 or 6-characters per inch, depending if condensed or normal
in effect).
&&U Use expanded print (return to condensed/normal).
&&Lnn Set margin to nn (nn is one or two digits).
&&V;text Wait for insert, print text on inserted slip (check validation)
LOAD HEADI NG; C ( LO H; C)
[ P: ] * LOAD HEADING;C
Li ne number ? 1
Headi ng l i ne? {SMITTYS STATION}
Li ne number ? 11
Foot i ng l i ne? THANK YOU ~
Li ne number ? 12
Foot i ng l i ne? THANK YOU
Li ne number ?
[ P: ] *
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 6-3
Receipt Heading and Footing Receipts, Messages, and Date
The C and N options may be followed by any combination of B or E. B causes the text to be
struck twice, giving a bold effect. E puts the print into expanded mode. The second footing
line is the same as the first, so it will overstrike the same characters, causing a bold print effect.
If you have other types of printers in addition to the Star printer, they will ignore the special
characters. That means the first heading line will print normally, and the first two footing lines
will be printed on different lines instead of one on top of the other.
How to Print Receipt Heading and Footing
Type: PRINT HEADING (or P H).
PRI NT HEADI NG ( P H)
[ P: ] * PRINT HEADING
N. Headi ng
0 5 BLANK LI NES AT END
1 SMI TTY S STATI ON
2 10 MAI N STREET
3 SMI TH, WA 98000
11 THANK YOU
12 PLEASE COME AGAI N
[ P: ] *
The terminal will display the line number and the text for each heading and footing line. For
more information, refer to Printing an Invoice on page 27-2.
Line numbers 1 through 9 are heading lines.
Line numbers 11 through 19 are footing lines.
Line numbers 20 - 29 are for Credit Card receipts.
Line numbers 30 - 39 are the invoice header.
Line numbers 40 - 49 are the invoice footer.
Line 0 is the form feed length.
How to Change Heading and Footing Lines
To change one heading or footing line, just use the LOAD HEADING command to enter new
text for that line.
To erase all receipt heading and footing lines and reenter new ones, use the command LOAD
HEADING;IC. The I option erases all current heading and footing lines and the blank form
feed lines at the end. The C option allows you to enter new heading and footing lines.
Receipts, Messages, and Date Island Card Reader Messages
Page 6-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Delete Heading and Footing Lines
To remove heading and footing lines, proceed as follows:
1 Type REMOVE HEADING.
2 Enter Line number.
REMOVE HEADI NG ( REM H)
[ P: ] * REMOVE HEADING
Li ne number ? 2
[ P: ] *
You can use the C option.
Island Card Reader Messages
The island card reader messages appear on the reader display when it is inactive. You can use
these as promotional messages, or as instructional messages that tell your customers how to
begin a transaction.
How to Enter Messages
Use the command LOAD MESSAGE or LO ME to enter the messages. The number of
messages allowed is determined by the Site Controller configuration; 20 is the default number
allowed. Each message can be up to 20-characters long.
For a blank display, press the space bar and Enter after Message to display?. A single comma
terminates an item, so to use a comma in your message, you must type two commas. At this
time, curly braces are reserved characters and are not to be used in messages. They are no
longer used to allow text to flash or blink on the reader.
Display Multiple Lines
To display multiple lines, use the C option with the command LOAD MESSAGE. Enter each
line separately and specify the display time.
LOAD MESSAGES ( LO ME)
[ P: ] * LOAD MESSAGE;C
Message number ? 1
Di spl ay i n sec? 2
Message? TRY A HOT SANDWICH
Message number ? 2
Di spl ay i n sec? 2
Message? FROM OUR DELI
Message number ? 3
Di spl ay i n sec? .5
Message? ( space)
Message number ?
[ P: ] *
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 6-5
Island Card Reader Messages Receipts, Messages, and Date
For example, you might want to display the promotional lines Try a hot sandwich from our
deli and have each line be displayed for 2 seconds. The illustration demonstrates how to enter
this information.
Note: Message 3 is a blank displayed for half a second.
Multiple Line Display
If the ICRs at your site have multiple line displays, use ~#at the beginning of the message
display, where #is the line number. A message that starts ~1 will display on the first line of a
multiple line display. Code ~0 will clear the whole screen.
How to Print Messages
Type PRINT MESSAGE.
PRI NT MESSAGES ( P ME)
[ P: ] * PRINT MESSAGE
N. Sec Message
1 2. 00 TRY A HOT SANDWI CH
2 2. 00 FROM OUR DELI
3 0. 50
[ P: ] *
The terminal will display the current message numbers (N.), display times (Sec), and
messages.
How to Change Messages
To change one message line, just use the LOAD MESSAGE command to enter new text for
that message.
Use the command LOAD MESSAGE;IC or LO ME;IC to erase all messages and enter new
messages. The I option erases all current messages. The C option allows you to re-enter more
than one message at a time.
Receipts, Messages, and Date Island Card Reader Messages
Page 6-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Load Messages
Use the LOad MEssage (LO ME) command in the site controller to load broadcast messages.
These messages will appear on the first line of the Island Card Reader (ICR) or in-the-pump
reader display. To access other lines of a multiple line display, use the tilde character (~) and
the line #(1 to 4) before the message. The display times for messages 1 to 3 must be loaded as
0 seconds; message #4 display time must be greater than 0 seconds. This will allow the
messages on all 4 lines to display at the same time instead of one line at a time.
Note: If more than four messages are loaded (5-10), omit the tilde preceding the text for line
four and the messages will be scrolled in line four of the display. Many reader displays
will have less than four lines. In these cases, only load messages for the lines that are
available.
[ P: ] * LO ME;C
Message number ? 1
Di spl ay i n sec? 0
Message? ~1WELCOME TO J OE S
Message number ? 2
Di spl ay i n sec? 0
Message? ~2TODAY S SPECI AL I S
Message number 3: 3
Di spl ay i n sec? 0
Message: ~310W30 OI L
Message number ? 4
Di spl ay i n sec? 9
Message? ~4HAVE A NI CE DAY!
Message number ?
[ P: ] *
If GASBOY ICRs are on a site along with multiple line display readers, the messages are
usually loaded as described in the previous example. If the GASBOY ICRs will be
communicating on the POS loop, the broadcast messages will not be displayed on them. The
GASBOY ICRs will display the message that is in the reader program under step-type 1,
which is usually Slide card or Insert card.
How to Delete Messages
To delete messages, proceed as follows:
1 Type REMOVE MESSAGE.
2 Enter message line number.
REMOVE MESSAGES; C ( REM ME; C)
[ P: ] * REMOVE MESSAGE;C
Message number ? 1
Message number ? 5
Message number ?
[ P: ] *
You can use the C option with REMOVE MESSAGE.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 7-1
How to Add or Change Fuel Products Fuel Products
7 Fuel Products
When you are creating products, you must make several choices about how you will set up
your products, tanks, and price codes. Things to remember include:
Fuel products are usually in category 1 or categories 1 and 2.
The command LOAD FUEL lets you assign the product code, price code, and tank
number that will be used for a transaction. The command does this by letting you assign a
product code, price code, and tank number to a hose.
When fuel is pumped, the price charged is determined by the price code assigned to the
hose by LOAD FUEL. You do not require to assign a price to the product itself.
A product is also assigned to a tank by LOAD TANK. The product you assign this way is
used only for the PRINT TANK report; it is not used for transactions. To avoid confusion,
you must usually assign the same product to a tank with LOAD TANK that is assigned
with LOAD FUEL.
If you charge different prices for the same type of fuel, you may want to create different
products in the system with the LOAD PRODUCT command. For example, if you have a
bulk diesel pump that has a different price from diesel at the other pumps, you may want
to set up a separate bulk diesel product. Or, if you have some pumps on the system that are
full serve, you may want to set up separate full-serve and self-serve products.
(creating different products from the same fuel allows you to separate the products in
reports. If you do not want to separate them in reports, you can use the LOAD PRICE
command to create different price codes for the same fuel).
You normally do not require to use inventory tracking for fuel products. Use Tank
inventory.
How to Add or Change Fuel Products
Use the following procedure to add a new product:
Ensure that the product information has been initialized with REMOVE PRODUCT;A.
Do not use this command if you have already loaded product information into the system;
it will clear all product information.
Create a new product with LOAD PRODUCT;A. The product codes are used to assign
products to tanks and for fuel authorizations for Proprietary Cards. They are included in
the transaction data, and in the product, sales, and totals reports. Each product is assigned
a product code, product name, category.
The low price and high price are not used for fuel products. The tax code for fuel products
is currently ignored (no tax), as taxes are included in the price.
Assign products to pumps or hoses with LOAD FUEL. Price codes are also assigned to
pumps or hoses with this command.
Fuel Products How to Initialize Fuel Product Information
Page 7-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Initialize Fuel Product Information
Before you enter products for your system, you must initialize the product information.
This procedure removes all product information for fuel and merchandise
products.
CAUTION
Type REMOVE PRODUCT;A.
(or REM PRO;A)
REMOVE PRODUCT; A ( REM PRO; A)
[ P: ] * REMOVE PRODUCT;A
[ P: ] *
The A option erases all current product codes, names, and inventory and price information.
How to Create a New Fuel Product
Use the command LOAD PRODUCT;A or LO PRO;A to create a new product. The command
without the A option changes an existing product. If you use the command without the A
option and name a product that does not already exist, the terminal will print an error message.
1 Type LOAD PRODUCT.
2 Enter the Product Code.
3 Enter the Category.
4 Enter the Product Name.
5 Enter the Minimum Price.
6 Enter the Maximum Price.
7 Enter Taxes.
LOAD PRODUCT; A ( LO PRO; A)
[ P: ] * LOAD PRODUCT;AC
Pr oduct code? 1
Cat egor y? 1
Pr oduct name? REGULAR
Mi ni mumpr i ce? 0
Maxi mumpr i ce? 0
Taxes? 0
Pr oduct code?
[ P: ] *
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 7-3
How to Change Fuel Product Information Fuel Products
You may use the C option with the command LOAD PRODUCT;A.
The product code is used in transaction and pump printouts, and can be used for sorting
printouts. Up to 99 products or departments are allowed. Fuel products are usually 1-10
or 20-29, with 30 and above for merchandise products. If you are using a Profit Point
POS, the department #is used as a base for the PLU file.
The category is used for grouping products. For example, you could have fuel and
merchandise categories. Category 1 is usually used for fuel products. You can print out
specified categories with PRINT TOTALS, PRINT SALES, and PRINT PRODUCT.
The product name is displayed on consoles and optionally, island card readers, and is
printed on receipts and sales and product reports. It can be up to 12-characters long. Not
all characters may print, so do not make the first digits of any two names the same or you
will not be able to differentiate between them on reports.
The minimum price and maximum price are used for products that allow price override.
For fuel products, they must both be 0.
The tax code specifies which tax table to use for calculating taxes for a product. Taxes
for fuel products are included in the price. If no taxes are to be added to the product,
specify tax code 0.
How to Change Fuel Product Information
Type LOAD PRODUCT.
LOAD PRODUCT ( LO PRO)
[ P: ] * LOAD PRODUCT
Pr oduct code? 1
Cat egor y? 1
Pr oduct name? DIESEL
Mi ni mumpr i ce? 0
Maxi mumpr i ce? 0
Taxes? 0
[ P: ] *
Note: Do not use the A option.
How to Print Fuel Product Information
Use the command PRINT PRODUCT or P PRO to print the current product data. You can
specify a range of products to print or, with the I option, you can specify a category to print.
PRI NT PRODUCT ( P PRO)
[ P: ] * PRINT PRODUCT;I
Pr Cat Pr oduct I nvent or y Reor der Low pr i ce Hi gh pr i ce Pr i ce Taxes
1 1 Regul ar 0 0 - No Over r i de- 0. 00 None
2 1 Unl eaded 0 0 - No Over r i de- 0. 00 None
3 1 Pr emi um 0 0 - No Over r i de- 0. 00 None
4 1 Di esel 0 0 - No Over r i de- 0. 00 None
[ P: ] *
Fuel Products How to Remove a Fuel Product
Page 7-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
The example below shows all products in category 1, which is the category usually used for
fuel products. No high price has been entered, as is usual for fuel products, so the printout
shows No Override. The 0.00 under Price means the pump price comes next example
subtracts two cents from all levels from the price table and is assigned with the LOAD
FUEL command.
You can also use product ranges with PRINT PRODUCT to print specified product
numbers. For example, the command PRINT PRODUCT 1-4 prints the information for
products 1 through 4.
How to Remove a Fuel Product
Type REMOVE PRODUCT.
REMOVE PRODUCT ( REM PRO)
[ P: ] * REMOVE PRODUCT
Pr oduct code? 1
[ P: ] *
You may use the C option with REMOVE PRODUCT.
Fuel Product Inventory
Product inventory is initially disabled. You may want to keep it disabled for fuel products,
and just use the tank inventory, or you may want to enable product inventory so that
inventory information for fuel products appears in the product information printout.
If you have the same product assigned to more than one tank, the inventory information in
the product printout can be the total for all the tanks. If you have more than one product
assigned to one tank (such as diesel sold at two different prices), the inventory information
in the product printout will not be very meaningful, so you must probably not enable
inventory in this case.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 7-5
How to Enter Fuel Product Inventory Fuel Products
When you use the commands ADD TANK and SUBTRACT TANK, the inventory for the
corresponding products is also adjusted if inventory recording is enabled. However, the ADD
INVENTORY and SUBTRACT INVENTORY commands do not adjust the tank inventory,
since more than one tank could be assigned the same product. This means that it is better to
use the TANK commands to adjust inventory for fuel products.
The LOAD TANK command does not adjust the inventory for products, so enter 0 for the
inventory when you do the LOAD TANK and use ADD TANK to enter the inventory amount
when inventory is enabled.
When the commands ADD or SUBTRACT TANK or INVENTORY are executed, the amount
added or subtracted is logged.
If the site has tank gauges, the gauges can be set up to adjust product inventory, but such an
arrangement is not required by the Site Controller.
How to Enter Fuel Product Inventory
Type LOAD INVENTORY.
LOAD I NVENTORY ( LO I N)
[ P: ] * LOAD INVENTORY;C
Pr oduct ? 1
Quant i t y? 4300
Reor der l evel ? 1000
Pr oduct ? 3
Quant i t y? 2900
Reor der l evel ? 800
Pr oduct ?
[ P: ] *
When inventory goes below the reorder level a message is printed on the log printer.
When the product inventory and tank figures do not match, one use of the LOAD
INVENTORY command is to set the book inventory to equal the physical inventory.
Fuel Products How to Enter Fuel Product Inventory
Page 7-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
This page is intentionally left bank.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 8-1
Tank Commands Tank and Pump Commands
8 Tank and Pump Commands
Tank Commands
How to View Current Tank Inventory
To display the tank inventory for all tanks, use the command PRINT TANK or P TA. The
terminal will display the tank number (T#), total quantity (Totals), and reorder level.
PRI NT TANK ( P TA)
[ P: ] * PRINT TANK
T# Pr oduct Tot al Reor der Gauge Di f f % Temp Ul l age
1 Regul ar 5000. 000 5000. 000 4995 5 0. 1 65. 2 5005
2 Unl eaded 6240. 000 5000. 000 6240 0 0. 0 65. 2 3760
3 Di esel 19840. 000 8000. 000 19844 4 0. 1 65. 2 156
4 Pr emi um 10000. 000 5000. 000 9999 1 0. 1 65. 2 1
[ P: ] *
In addition, if a CFN-compatible Tank Monitor

System (electronic tank gauge) is installed on

the tank and connected to the Site Controller, then the measured tank quantities and tank
ullage will be displayed. Ullage is the amount of remaining space or unused capacity in the
tank.

Commands Description
T# Tank number of tank.
Product Name of product stored in tank.
Total Inventory quantity in tank.
Reorder Reorder level at which a warning message will be logged.
Gauge Measured quantity in tank according to Tank Monitor System (TMS).
Diff Difference between inventory and measured quantities.
% Difference expressed as a percentage over or short.
Temp Measured temperature as reported by the TMS. Used by the TMS to
compute temperature-corrected gallons.
Ullage The amount of usable empty space remaining in the tank.
How to Add to and Subtract from Tank Inventory Counters
If a TMS is present, the site can be configured to automatically add deliveries that are detected
by the TMS to the inventory totals. If your site has this capability, you will not require to add
deliveries to inventory manually and to do so will produce an error in the totals.
You might wish to make this adjustment if a physical measurement of the fuel gives a result
more or less than the amount indicated by the counter, in order to bring the perpetual inventory
amount back into line with the physical inventory amount.
Tank and Pump Commands Tank Commands
Page 8-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
If product inventory is enabled (see set tank inventory counter), ADD or SUBTRACT TANK
will adjust the inventory for the corresponding product. The C option is available for both
commands.
Add Tank
To add to the Site Controller tank inventory counters, proceed as follows:
1 Type ADD TANK.
2 Enter Tank Number.
3 Enter Quantity.
ADD TANK ( AD TA)
[ P: ] * ADD TANK
Tank number ? 14
Quant i t y? 5000
[ P: ] *
The amount added is logged.
Subtract Tank
To subtract from the Site Controller tank inventory counters, proceed as follows:
1 Type SUBTRACT TANK.
2 Enter Tank Number.
3 Enter Quantity.
SUBTRACT TANK ( SUB TA)
[ P: ] * SUBTRACT TANK
Tank number ? 2
Quant i t y? 100
[ P: ] *
The amount subtracted is logged.
How to Set Tank Inventory Counters
Use the command LOAD TANK or LO TA to set the Site Controller tank inventory counters
equal to the amount of fuel in the tanks. The quantity must be in the same units (gallons or
liters) that the pumps use. The Site Controller tank inventory counters decrement each time
fuel is pumped.
The product code entered with the LOAD TANK command associates the tank with a product
so inventory updates for that product can be done when the commands ADD TANK and
SUBTRACT TANK are used. Inventory updates for products are done only if inventory
keeping is enabled for the products, but inventory is always kept for tanks.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 8-3
Method-of-payment Pricing Tank and Pump Commands
You can specify a product and reorder level with the LOAD TANK command. When the tank
inventory level dips below the specified reorder level, the message Tank #xx Below reorder
level is printed on the log printer. An asterisk (*) next to the totals in the printout of the PRINT
TANK command shows that the tank is below the reorder level.
The command LOAD TANK does not update the inventory for products, because there could
be more than one tank with the same product. If you want to keep track of inventory for
products, use the LOAD TANK command to enter the tank information, but enter 0 for the
inventory level. Then use ADD TANK to enter the current inventory level.
When the ADD or SUBTRACT TANK commands are executed, the amount added or
subtracted is logged.
The product codes entered with the LOAD TANK command affect inventory, but do not affect
transactions. The product codes and tank numbers entered with the LOAD FUEL command
are the ones that are used for transactions.
To set the Site Controller tank inventory counters, proceed as follows:
1 Type LOAD TANK.
2 Enter Tank number.
3 Enter Quantity.
4 Enter Product code.
5 Enter Reorder level.
LOAD TANK ( LO TA)
[ P: ] * LOAD TANK
Tank number ? 1
Quant i t y? 30000
Pr oduct code? 1
Reor der l evel ? 5000
Tank number ?
[ P: ] *
Use the C option to load more than one tank.
Method-of-payment Pricing
Some sites want to charge different prices for fuel products depending on what sort of payment
is offered. For example, the cash price for unleaded gasoline might be lower than the credit
price.
The Site Controller stores these multi-level prices in a special table in its memory called the
price table. Price codes are arbitrary numbers assigned to fuel products or hoses to link those
fuels or pump table entries to entries in the price table.
Tank and Pump Commands Method-of-payment Pricing
Page 8-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
The command PRINT PRICE (see below) allows you to see the prices that have been assigned
to existing price codes. Then the command LOAD PRICE can be used to change them.
When pumps and fuel products are first set up on the system, price codes can be assigned
directly to pumps and hoses using LOAD FUEL (the standard method for fuels).
Price codes assigned with LOAD FUEL appear in the PRINT PUMP report, not in PRINT
PRODUCT.
After prices have been initially set up, in almost all cases prices for fuel products will be
changed with the LOAD PRICE command, rather than with the LOAD PLU or LOAD
PRODUCT commands that are normally used with merchandise.
Price Code Levels
If the pump used for a transaction has a price code assigned to it, then that price code is used,
even if another price look up happens to be assigned to the product. The price charged is
determined at the time of the transaction by the customers method of payment. Each price
code can have multiple levels of prices, one for each method of payment that is accepted.
The Site Controller uses a number to refer to each price level. These numbers are fixed and
cannot be changed. Values for particular price levels, such as Debit and Proprietary Card,
require to be loaded for particular price codes only if that method of payment is accepted for
the product or pump assigned to that price code.
Additional price levels, referred to as club prices, are available for use with Proprietary Cards.
If a price level is encoded on a Proprietary Card, that price will be charged. If no price level is
encoded on Proprietary Cards, the credit price will be charged.
Note: You must always load a price for at least level 0 for every price code you use. The pump
will be disabled if you do not load a fallback (level 0) price.
Price Code
Level Description
Level 0 Price level 0 is the default fallback price (though the Site Controller can be configured for a different
fallback price level). This is the price that is displayed on the pump. If no price is loaded for one of
the other price levels, transactions that would normally be charged at that level will be charged at
the fallback price.
If you use only one price level, load only price level 0. Price level 0 must be loaded for every price
code that is used.
Level 1 Price level 1 is the cash price. It is charged when the CASH key on the console is pressed.
Level 2 Price level 2 is the credit price. It is charged when the CREDIT key on the console is pressed or a
credit card is run through the console card reader or an island card reader.
Level 3 Price level 3 is the debit price. It is charged when the DEBIT key on the console is pressed or when
a debit (automated teller) card is run through the console card reader or an island card reader.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 8-5
Method-of-payment Pricing Tank and Pump Commands
How to View Current Price Code Levels and Prices
Use the command PRINT PRICE or P PR. The terminal will display the price levels (Pl) and
prices for each price code (Pc). Price codes are rows and price levels are columns.
[ P: ] * PRINT PRICE 1
Pc Pl Pr i ce
1 0 1. 169 1 1. 169 2 1. 199
[ P: ] *
Type PRINT PRICE.
To specify price codes to display, enter the code number at the command.
How to Enter Price Code Levels and Prices
Use the command LOAD PRICE or LO PR to enter price levels and prices for price codes.
The number of price levels and prices allowed is determined by the Site Controller
configuration.
LOAD PRI CE ( LO PR)
[ P: ] * LOAD PRICE
Pr i ce code? 2
Pr i ce l evel ? 1
Pr i ce? 1.119
Pr i ce l evel ?
[ P: ] *
If you are changing prices when the site is open for business, first shut down the site with the
command STOP. This will allow transactions in progress to finish, but prevent new
transactions from starting when you are changing prices. When you have finished changing
prices, use the command RUN to restart the site.
How to Change Price-code Prices
It is a good idea to write down or print existing prices before making changes, and again after
making changes to check your work.
To change prices for a price code, use LOAD PRICE or LO PR to enter new prices for the
price levels for that price code.
There are two methods for changing prices for price codes.
PRI NT PRI CE ( P PR)
[ P: ] * PRINT PRICE
Pc Pl Pr i ce
1 0 1. 169 1 1. 169 2 1. 199
2 0 1. 229 1 1. 229 2 1. 299
3 0 1. 299 1 1. 299 2 1. 306
[ P: ] *
[ P: ] * LOAD PRICE;C
Pr i ce code? 1
Pr i ce l evel ? 0
Pr i ce? 1.149
Pr i ce l evel ? 1
Pr i ce? 1.169
Pr i ce l evel ? 2
Pr i ce? 1.199
Pr i ce l evel ?
Pr i ce code?
[ P: ] *
Tank and Pump Commands Method-of-payment Pricing
Page 8-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
The first method is to enter the new price for each price code and price level that you wish to
change. This method uses LOAD PRICE;C command.
The other method is to enter the amount of the price change as a quantity to be added to or
subtracted from the old price. This method can be used to raise or lower either all price levels
of one price code or all price codes by a specified amount.
The form for the second command is LOAD PRICE code level change where:
code is replaced by the price code(s) to be changed (either a number or * for all price
codes),
level is replaced by the level(s) to be affected (either a number or * for all levels),
change is replaced by a +or - sign and the amount of the change in dollars and cents.
[ P: ] * LOAD PRICE * * +.05
[ P: ] *
Al l Codes Al l l evel s
[ P: ] * LOAD PRICE 3 * -.02
Pr i ce l evel ?
[ P: ] *
This example raises all prices for all codes (indicated by the first asterisk after LOAD PRICE)
and all levels (the second asterisk) by five cents.
This next example subtracts two cents from all levels in price code 3.
Note: LOAD PRICE;I erases all price levels and price code prices for all pumps that have
been assigned price codes. This will disable all pumps. You must re-enter new prices for
all price codes and re-enable all pumps with ENABLE PUMP after you use this
command.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 8-7
Method-of-payment Pricing Tank and Pump Commands
How to Delete a Price Code or Price Level
Use the command REMOVE PRICE or REM PR to delete one or more price levels for a given
price code.
REMOVE PRI CE ( REM PR)
[ P: ] * REMOVE PRICE
Pr i ce code? 4
Pr i ce l evel ? 3
Pr i ce l evel ?
[ P: ] *
To delete an entire price code, delete all the price levels under that price code.
Use the C option to remove more than one price code.
How to Set Up Day-Night Pricing
You can have day-night pricing by using the RECORD command or one of the editors to
create command files that contain the LOAD PRICE commands for the day and night prices.
Then the command files can be executed automatically at the appropriate times by loading the
proper cron (user-defined commands executed at specified times) entries with LOAD CRON
(refer to Advanced Commands on page 20-12).
[ P: ] * TYPE PRC1.CMD
st op
l o pr i ; c
1 0 . 799 1 . 759 2 . 799
2 0 . 859 1 . 819 2 . 859
3 0 . 919 1 . 879 2 . 919
4 0 1. 069 1 1. 029 2 1. 069
r un
[ P: ] * TYPE PRC2.CMD
st op
l o pr i ; c
1 0 1. 279 1 1. 239 2 1. 279
2 0 1. 339 1 1. 299 2 1. 339
3 0 1. 459 1 1. 419 2 1. 459
4 0 1. 179 1 1. 139 2 1. 179
r un
[ P: ] *
The example above shows two command files used for changing the pricing for day-night
pricing.
Tank and Pump Commands Pump Commands
Page 8-8 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Pump Commands
How to Assign Products, Prices, and Tanks to Hoses
Use the command LOAD FUEL or LO FU to enter the product code, price code, and tank
number to be assigned to each pump, or to each hose for Multi Product Dispensers (MPD

).
LOAD FUEL ( LO FU)
[ P: ] * LOAD FUEL
Pump number ? 13
Hose number ? 1
Pr oduct code? 1
Pr i ce code? 1
Tank number ? 1
Hose number ? 2
Pr oduct code? 2
Pr i ce code? 2
Tank number ? 2
Hose number ?
[ P: ] *
C
Number of Pump, Dispenser or MPD
Number of MPD Hose; All Others Enter 1
Code Created with LOAD PRODUCT
Price Code Created with LOAD PRICE
Number of Fuel Tank used by LOAD
TANK
[ P: ] * LOAD FUEL
Pump number ? *
Hose number ? 1
Pumps that dispense the same product may be assigned different price codes. For example, a
full-service pump that dispenses unleaded regular fuel may be assigned a different price code
than a self-service pump that dispenses the same fuel. Price levels and prices are assigned to
price codes with LOAD PRICE.
The LOAD FUEL command allows you to specify different products, prices, and tanks for
each hose on a pump. If the system uses MPDs, a pump is one side of the MPD. That is, each
dollar and gallon display corresponds to one pump. For regular dispensers and pumps, there is
one hose per pump. The pump, not the hose, is authorized for transactions.
The number of pumps and associated hoses in the system is determined by the Site Controller
configuration.
You may use the C option with the command LOAD FUEL.
To set all pumps to be the same, enter an asterisk when prompted for the pump number in
LOAD FUEL. This will affect all pumps with the same hose number.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 8-9
Pump Commands Tank and Pump Commands
How to View Pump Information
The PRINT PUMP or P PU command displays information for each pump. If MPDs are used,
PRINT PUMP displays the information for each hose under each pump. Hose numbers are not
displayed, but the information under each pump is in order by hose number.
PRI NT PUMP ( P PU)
[ P: ] * PRINT PUMP
P# T# Pr Pc Pr i ce Tot al s $Tot al Rat e Li mi t Sl ow
1 1 1 1 0. 799 178. 770 181. 10 100/ $ $30 0. 500
2 2 2 0. 859 360. 716 322. 74 Pumpi ng
3 3 3 0. 919 740. 360 741. 94
2 1 1 1 0. 799 84. 110 66. 44 100/ $ $30 0. 500 Down
2 2 2 0. 859 2. 140 1. 83
3 3 3 0. 919 462. 540 494. 42
3 3 3 3 0. 919 353. 044 357. 14 100/ $ $30 0. 500
4 4 4 4 1. 069 336. 634 349. 97 100/ $ $30 0. 500 Pumpi ng
5 1 1 1 0. 799 7019. 954 6722. 35 100/ G $500 0. 500
6 2 2 2 0. 859 503. 411 548. 22 100/ G $30 0. 500 Pumpi ng
7 3 3 3 0. 919 464. 840 578. 71 100/ G $30 0. 500
8 4 4 4 1. 069 778. 470 804. 44 100/ G $30 0. 500
========= =========
11284. 99 11169. 30
[ P: ] *
Command Description
P# The pump number is the number of the pump, dispenser, or MPD (in the above example,
pumps 1 and 2 are MPDs).
The hose number is not displayed, but is used to determine the order in which hose
information for an MPD is displayed (pumps 1 and 2 have three hoses). For other pumps
and dispensers, the hose number is 1.
T# The tank number is the number of the fuel storage tank drawn upon by that hose.
Pr The product code is the number of the product assigned to the hose with LOAD FUEL. Use
PRINT PRODUCT to view the product names that correspond to the numbers.
Pc The price code controls what prices will be charged for each method of payment such as
cash or credit. It is the code entered with LOAD FUEL.
Price The price is the current fallback value assigned to the price code with LOAD PRICE (the
fallback price is defined in this chapter under Price codes).
Totals The quantity totalizer is the cumulative quantity pumped for the hose. These totalizers will
roll over periodically when all 9s are displayed.
$Totals The dollar totalizer is the cumulative dollar sales for the hose. Dollar totalizers will also roll
over periodically.
Rate The pulser rate is the number of pulses produced per unit of measure, such as gallons. It
applies only to fuel products, and is an accurate way of measuring flow. $ means that
dollars are being counted, L means that liters are being counted, and G means that gallons
are being counted.
Limit The fill limit is the amount automatically requested, unless overridden, when a customer
asks for a fill (the limit assigned to privately issued cards can be different than the hose fill
limit).
Slow The slow flow cutoff point determines how soon before reaching a limit or preset amount
the slow pump mode is activated. The purpose of slow flow cutoff is to prevent the pump
from coasting past the preset amount or limit. Slow flow cutoff point is always specified in
gallons or liters.
[ P: ] * PRINT PUMP;A
P# T# Pr Pc Pr i ce Tot al s $Tot al Q Pr evi ous $ Pr evi ous
1 1 1 1 0. 799 178. 770 181. 10 29. 700 23. 73
2 2 2 0. 859 360. 716 322. 74 22. 600 19. 41
3 3 3 0. 919 740. 360 741. 94 45. 500 41. 81
2 1 1 1 0. 799 84. 110 66. 44 0. 000 0. 00
2 2 2 0. 859 2. 140 1. 83 0. 000 0. 00
3 3 3 0. 919 462. 540 494. 42 10. 000 9. 19
3 3 3 3 0. 919 353. 044 357. 14 20. 000 18. 38
4 4 4 4 1. 069 336. 634 349. 97 0. 000 0. 00
5 1 1 1 0. 799 7019. 954 6722. 35 55. 900 44. 66
6 2 2 2 0. 859 503. 411 548. 22 33. 700 28. 95
7 3 3 3 0. 919 464. 840 578. 71 15. 500 14. 24
8 4 4 4 1. 069 778. 470 804. 44 44. 000 47. 03
======== ========
11284. 99 11169. 30
[ P: ] *
Tank and Pump Commands Pump Commands
Page 8-10 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
The last column, pump status, which has no heading, shows the current status of the hose.
The A option with PRINT PUMP displays the values of the pump totalizers, as of the end of
the previous shift. (These values are updated whenever the commands LOAD SHIFT, NEXT
SHIFT, RESET TOTALS, and NEXT DAY are run).
The first seven columns with the A option are identical to the PRINT PUMP display. The two
columns on the right display each pumps quantity and dollar totals at the time the shift change
occurred; these two columns are not totaled.
Option Description
Down The pump is out of service. The commands PRINT DIAGNOSTICS 2 and PRINT DIAGNOSTICS 8
give more diagnostic information about pump control units and pumps, respectively.
Pumping The pump is currently activated. The command PRINT TIP gives more information on transactions
in progress.
Reader If this appears for any length of time, the pump is stuck. Type ENABLE PUMP;A followed by the
pump number.
Console If this appears for any length of time the pump is stuck. Type ENABLE PUMP;A followed by the
pump number.
Disabled You have run the DISABLE PUMP command, no price has been entered in the Site Controller, or
the pulser has developed a problem.
Ful Srv The pump is in full-serve mode. It will pump any time the hose is taken off-hook. To get a pump out
of full-serve mode, type DEACTIVATE PUMP;A followed by the pump number.
The pump is idle.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 8-11
Pump Commands Tank and Pump Commands
How to Set the Pump Totalizers
To set pump totalizers, proceed as follows:
1 Type LOAD PUMP.
LOAD PUMP ( LO PU)
[ P: ] * LOAD PUMP
Pump number ? 1
Hose number ? 1
Quant i t y? 5624.8
$ amount ? 3217.95
Hose number ?
[ P: ] *
2 Enter the Pump number.
3 Enter the Hose number.
4 Enter the Quantity.
5 Enter the dollar amount.
How to Reset the Pump Totalizers
To reset the pump totalizers, proceed as follows:
1 Type RESET PUMP.
RESET PUMP ( RE PU)
[ P: ] * RESET PUMP
Ver i f y ( y/ n) ? y
[ P: ] *
2 Verify? Enter yes or no.
How to Enter the Pump-Fill-Limit and Slow-to-Cutoff
The pump limit is the amount the Site Controller will authorize, or request authorization for, if
a customer requests a FILL by pressing that key on the card reader (if you use privately issued
cards, the limit assigned to the cards will be used instead).
The pump limit can be in (units/liters) or dollars. Use a dollar sign ($) before the pump-limit
amount to specify a dollar limit.
The slow-to-cutoff point determines how soon before reaching a limit the slow-pump mode is
activated. The slow-to-cutoff point is in gallons prior to the limit.
A default cutoff point and pump limit for all pumps is determined by the Site Controller
configuration. LOAD CUTOFF overrides the default limit. If the default limit is okay for a
pump, you do not require to enter a new limit.
Tank and Pump Commands Pump Commands
Page 8-12 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
1 Type LOAD CUTOFF.
LOAD CUTOFF ( LO CU)
[ P: ] * LOAD CUTOFF
Pump number ? 1
Pump l i mi t ? $50
Sl ow cut of f ? .25
[ P: ] *
2 Enter the Pump number.
3 Enter the Pump limit.
4 Enter Slow cutoff.
There is also a maximum limit that is set in the Site Controller configuration. You cannot
exceed the Site Controllers maximum limit with LOAD CUTOFF. You may use the C option
with the command LOAD CUTOFF.
Configure all pumps at once by entering an asterisk for the pump number.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 9-1
How to Add or Change Merchandise Products Merchandise Products
9 Merchandise Products
When you are creating products, you must make several choices about how you will organize
your system and how you will handle pricing. Things to consider include:
Do you want inventory levels shown in the product printout?
Do merchandise products represent individual items, departments, or some of each?
Will the system use fixed prices or manually entered prices, or some of each? Will user
override be allowed for fixed prices?
How to Add or Change Merchandise Products
Use the following procedure to add a new product.
Make sure the product information has been initialized with REMOVE PRODUCT;A. Do
not use this command if you have already loaded product information into the system; it
will clear all product information.
Create a new product with LOAD PRODUCT;A. Each product is assigned a product code,
product name, category. If price override is allowed, or if prices are to be entered at the
time of the sale, products are assigned a low and high price.
Use LOAD PLU to enter price look ups for products that have default or non-overridable
prices.
Use LOAD INVENTORY to enter the initial number of items or dollar inventory amount
for products that will use inventory tracking. For dollar inventory, use ENABLE
PRODUCT and specify type 4.
How to Create a New Merchandise Product
Use the command LOAD PRODUCT;A or LO PRO;A to create a new product. The command
without the A option changes an existing product. If you use the command without the A
option and name a product that does not already exist, the terminal will print an error message.
LOAD PRODUCT; A ( LO PRO; A)
[ P: ] * LOAD PRODUCT;AC
Pr oduct code? 10
Cat egor y? 2
Pr oduct name? MILK
Mi ni mumpr i ce? .45
Maxi mumpr i ce? 3.00
Taxes? 0
Pr oduct code? 11
Cat egor y? 3
Pr oduct name? SODA
Mi ni mumpr i ce? .30
Maxi mumpr i ce? 2.00
Taxes? 1
Pr oduct code?
[ P: ] *
You may use the C option with the command LOAD PRODUCT;A.
Merchandise Products How to Create Special Merchandise Products
Page 9-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
The product code is used to add merchandise products to a sale when the product does not
have its own key on the console. It can also be used for sorting printouts. Up to 99
products are allowed, including fuel and merchandise products.
The category is used for grouping products. For example, you could have fuel and
merchandise categories. You can print out specified categories with PRINT TOTALS,
PRINT SALES, and PRINT PRODUCT.
The product name is displayed on consoles and is printed on receipts and sales and product
reports. It can be up to 12-characters long. Visually only the first 5-digits are displayed in
printouts, so do not make the first 5-digits of any two names the same or you will not be
able to differentiate between them on reports.
The minimum price and maximum price are used for products that allow price override. If
override is not allowed, enter 0 for the maximum price.
The tax code specifies which tax table to use for calculating taxes for a product. Tax tables
are loaded in the Site Controller configuration or by TAX.BIN (the actual tax names are
loaded with LOAD TAX).
How to Create Special Merchandise Products
You can create special products for keeping track of cash withdrawals, refunds, bottle deposit
refunds, and such. These are not real products, but they allow you to have information about
cash withdrawals and refunds included in your product and sales reports.
ENABLE PRODUCT ( E PRO)
[ P: ] * LOAD PRODUCT;A
Pr oduct code? 20
Cat egor y? 9
Pr oduct name? Refund
Mi ni mumpr i ce? .01
Maxi mumpr i ce? 150.00
Taxes? 0
[ P: ] * ENABLE PRODUCT
Pr oduct code? 20
Type ? 1
[ P: ] * LOAD PRODUCT;A
Pr oduct code? 21
Cat egor y? 9
Pr oduct name? Withdr
Mi ni mumpr i ce? .01
Maxi mumpr i ce? 150.00
Taxes? 0
[ P: ] * ENABLE PRODUCT
Pr oduct code? 21
Type ? 3
[ P: ] *
To create a cash withdrawal or refund product:
Use LOAD PRODUCT;A to create a new product. Special products must be in their own
category so they can be printed out separately.
Give the product a descriptive name, such as WITHDR or REFUND.
For cash-withdrawal special products, the minimum and maximum prices are the
minimum and maximum amounts that can be withdrawn in one transaction.
For refund special products, the minimum and maximum prices are the minimum and
maximum amounts for a refund.
Special products do not normally have taxes.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 9-3
How to Print Merchandise Product Information Merchandise Products
You do not require to enter inventory or prices for special products.
Use ENABLE PRODUCT to make the product a special product. Specify type 3 for a cash
withdrawal product, type 2 for a payout product, or type 1 for a refund product (refer to the
Product attributes in the table below).
How to Print Merchandise Product Information
Use PRINT PRODUCT;A or P PRO;A to print a list of product attributes for each product.
You may specify a range of products to print. You can use the I option to specify categories
rather than products.
[ P: ] * PRINT PRODUCT;AI 37
Pr Cat Name Enabl ed
24 37 Chi ps 5
25 37 Candy 5
26 37 Snakes 5
[ P: ] *
Whenever a LOAD FUEL command is executed, a bit is set to indicate that this is a fuel
product. The bit is displayed as type 8 in PRINT PRODUCT;A. The bit is not reset if a
subsequent LOAD FUEL changes the product.
The following table shows the product attributes that may be enabled.
Number Description
9 Use category number as the department number in the journal. This is useful in putting several products
into the same department for disk-journal reports.
8 This is the fuel product.
7 Low inventory is indicated by an asterisk in PRINT PRODUCT.
5 Inventory tracking was enabled with ADD INVENTORY or ENABLE PRODUCT.
4 Inventory is in dollars, not units (enabled with ENABLE PRODUCT).
3 Product is a special cash-withdrawal product (enabled with ENABLE PRODUCT).
2 Product is a special payout product (enabled with ENABLE PRODUCT). Note: Payout products
assigned to type 2 will subtract from the sales total.
1 Product is a special refund product; cash flow direction is reversed (enabled with ENABLE PRODUCT).
0 Console prompts Amount? rather than Price?; used for payout special products (enabled with ENABLE
PRODUCT).
15 Enables patronage (Buypass only).
10 Product is tax exempt. For example, if you have a tax exempt key assigned on the Profit Point, and the
clerk presses that key during a sale, any items with an attribute of 10 have the tax removed.
Merchandise Products How to Change Merchandise Product Information
Page 9-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Change Merchandise Product Information
To change the category, name, maximum or minimum price, or tax codes for a product.
LOAD PRODUCT ( LO PRO)
[ P: ] * LOAD PRODUCT
Pr oduct code? 10
Cat egor y? 2
Pr oduct name? DELI
Mi ni mumpr i ce? .5
Maxi mumpr i ce? 5.00
Taxes? 1
[ P: ] *
Type LOAD PRODUCT.
Do not use the A option.
Change Price Lookup
Type LOAD PLU.
You may use the C option with LOAD PRODUCT.
How to Print Merchandise Product Information
Use the command PRINT PRODUCT or P PRO to print the current product data. PRINT
PRODUCT prints product codes, names, and inventory and price information entered with
LOAD PRODUCT, LOAD PLU, and LOAD INVENTORY.
PRI NT PRODUCT ( P PRO)
[ P: ] * PRINT PRODUCT
Pr Cat Pr oduct I nvent or y Reor der Low pr i ce Hi gh pr i ce Pr i ce Taxes
1 1 Regul ar 0 0 - No Over r i de- 0. 00 None
2 1 Unl eaded 0 0 - No Over r i de- 0. 00 None
3 1 Pr emi um 0 0 - No Over r i de- 0. 00 None
4 1 Di esel 0 0 - No Over r i de- 0. 00 None
Pr Cat Pr oduct I nvent or y Reor der Low pr i ce Hi gh pr i ce Pr i ce Taxes
5 2 Ci gs $321. 05 100 0. 75 1. 50 1. 20 5
6 2 Ti r es $400. 00 150 35. 00 125. 00 98. 00 5
7 2 Br ead $21. 12 10 0. 69 1. 10 0. 98 None
8 2 Soda $250. 25 110 0. 25 0. 75 0. 45 2
[ P: ] *
[ P: ] * PRINT PRODUCT 5-8
Pr Cat Pr oduct I nvent or y Reor der Low pr i ce Hi gh pr i ce Pr i ce Taxes
5 2 Ci gs $321. 05 100 0. 75 1. 50 1. 20 5
6 2 Ti r es $400. 00 150 35. 00 125. 00 98. 00 5
7 2 Br ead $21. 12 10 0. 69 1. 10 0. 98 None
8 2 Soda $250. 25 110 0. 25 0. 75 0. 45 2
[ P: ] *
[ P: ] * PRINT PRODUCT;I 2
Pr Cat Pr oduct I nvent or y Reor der Low pr i ce Hi gh pr i ce Pr i ce Taxes
5 2 Oi l 321 100 0. 75 1. 50 1. 20 5
6 2 Ti r es 400 150 35. 00 125. 00 98. 00 5
7 2 Br ead 20 10 0. 69 1. 10 0. 98 None
8 2 Soda 250 110 0. 25 0. 75 0. 45 2
[ P: ] *
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 9-5
How to Remove a Merchandise Product Merchandise Products
You can use ranges with PRINT PRODUCT to print specified product numbers. For example,
the command PRINT PRODUCT 5-8 prints the information for products 5 through 8.
When you specify ranges with PRINT PRODUCTS with the I option, the ranges refer to the
category number rather than the product number. This allows you to print only specified
categories of products.
How to Remove a Merchandise Product
Type REMOVE PRODUCT.
REMOVE PRODUCT ( REM PRO)
[ P: ] * REMOVE PRODUCT
Pr oduct code? 10
[ P: ] *
You may use the C option with REMOVE PRODUCT.
Merchandise Products How to Enter Merchandise Product Price Lookups
Page 9-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Enter Merchandise Product Price Lookups
Use LOAD PLU or LO PLU to assign prices to products (PLU stands for price lookup). Prices
assigned with LOAD PLU appear in the PRINT PRODUCT printout. Prices for merchandise
products can be overridable or non-overridable. If you have a Profit Point POS, use the PLU
price book resident on the Profit Point for PLU pricing. You may use the C option with LOAD
PLU.
LOAD PLU ( LO PLU)
[ P: ] * LOAD PLU;C
Pr oduct ? 11
Pr i ce? $1.05
Pr oduct ? 12
Pr i ce? $0.98
Pr oduct ? 13
Pr i ce? $4
[ P: ] *

Default Price: You can specify a default price for the product with the LOAD PLU
command. The price can be preceded by a dollar sign but it is not required.
If you enter a High price with the LOAD PRODUCT command, the user can override the
default price within the range of the low and high price fields.
If you enter 0 as the high price, the console user cannot override the price and the product
printout will show -No Override- in the price range fields.
Manually Entered Price: If you do not enter a price for a product, or enter a price of $0,
the user must always enter the price within the range of the high and low price fields. If
you have a price of $0, you must specify a high price.
Merchandise Product Inventory
Inventory for products is initially disabled. The commands LOAD INVENTORY and ADD
INVENTORY enable inventory recording. You may also use ENABLE PRODUCT to
explicitly enable inventory recording.
Inventory is normally kept by item. You may specify that inventory be kept as a dollar amount
instead. This is also done with ENABLE PRODUCT.
Inventory amounts appear in the PRINT PRODUCT printout. You can use PRINT
PRODUCT;A to see if inventory is enabled for product.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 9-7
Merchandise Product Inventory Merchandise Products
How to Enter Merchandise Product Inventory
Use the command LOAD INVENTORY or LO IN to load the initial inventory amounts and
the reorder levels for products. Once you have loaded the initial inventory amount, use ADD
INVENTORY or SUBTRACT INVENTORY to adjust the inventory. The amount added or
subtracted will be logged.
LOAD I NVENTORY ( LO I N)
[ P: ] * LOAD INVENTORY
Pr oduct ? 1
Quant i t y? 400
Reor der l evel ? 100
[ P: ] *
The quantity will normally be interpreted as number of items. If type 4 has been specified with
ENABLE PRODUCT, the quantity will be interpreted as a dollar amount. You may use the C
option with LOAD INVENTORY.
How to Add to Merchandise Product Inventory
Use the command ADD INVENTORY or AD IN to add to the inventory amount for a product.
ADD I NVENTORY ( AD I N)
[ P: ] * ADD INVENTORY;C
Pr oduct ? 2
Quant i t y? 500
Pr oduct ? 3
Quant i t y? 230
Pr oduct ?
[ P: ] *
The quantity will normally be interpreted as number of items. If type 4 has been specified with
ENABLE PRODUCT, the quantity will be interpreted as a dollar amount. You may use the C
option with ADD INVENTORY.
How to Subtract from Merchandise Product Inventory
Use the command SUBTRACT INVENTORY or SU IN to subtract from the inventory
amount for a product.
SUBTRACT I NVENTORY ( SU I N)
[ P: ] * SUBTRACT INVENTORY;C
Pr oduct ? 2
Quant i t y? 300
Pr oduct ? 4
Quant i t y? 65
Pr oduct ?
[ P: ] *
The quantity will normally be interpreted as number of items. If type 4 has been specified with
ENABLE PRODUCT, the quantity will be interpreted as a dollar amount. You may use the C
option with SUBTRACT INVENTORY.
Merchandise Products Merchandise Product Inventory
Page 9-8 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Enable Merchandise Dollar Inventory
To enable inventory recording for a product with dollar inventory rather than item inventory,
use ENABLE PRODUCT and specify type 4 (type 4 tracks inventory in dollars, not units).
There will be a dollar sign before the inventory amount in the PRINT PRODUCT printout.
ENABLE PRODUCT ( E PRO)
[ P: ] * ENABLE PRODUCT
Pr oduct Code? 11
Type? 4
[ P: ] *
How to Disable Merchandise Inventory Tracking
Inventory tracking is initially disabled. It is disabled automatically when LOAD
INVENTORY, ENABLE PRODUCT type 5, or ADD INVENTORY is executed.
DI SABLE PRODUCT ( DI PRO)
[ P: ] * DISABLE PRODUCT
Pr oduct Code? 10
Type? 5
[ P: ] *
To disable inventory tracking once it has been enabled, use DISABLE PRODUCT and specify
type 5.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 10-1
Tax Types Setting Up Tax Tables
10 Setting Up Tax Tables
Tax Types
There are three tax types on the Site Controller:
Each sales tax in most areas can be calculated as a percentage of the price of the items to
which the tax applies. For all or most tax percentage rates, you are able to simply specify
the tax rate and the rounding rule. These taxes are called type 0 on the Site Controller, and
they are the default type.
Taxes that the law requires to be calculated according to a tax table are type 1.
Type 2 taxes use a combination of percentage and tax table. The tax on the whole-dollar
amount of the price is calculated by multiplying by the taxs percentage rate, and then a
table is used to calculate the tax on any remaining fraction of a dollar ($0.01-0.99) of the
price. For example, if the price of an item is $10.45, the tax on $10 would be calculated as
a percentage of $10, and the tax on the 45 cents would be looked up on a tax table by the
Site Controller.
You can configure the CFN3 application to recognize up to eight different taxes, depending on
what the law in your area requires.
Tax Accumulators
The Site Controller can have up to eight tax accumulators, which keep a running total of taxes
collected in up to eight categories. Most sites will probably use only one or two. The tax
percentages are specified in the Site Controller configuration. Taxes are assigned to products
with LOAD PRODUCT. Each time a taxable product is sold, the tax is calculated, charged to
the sale, and credited to the correct tax accumulator.
Cumulative tax totals are also maintained. The cumulative tax accumulators are reset by
RESET TOTALS;A or RESET TOTALS;I.
Setting Up Tax Tables Tax Accumulators
Page 10-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Enter Tax Accumulator Names
To enter tax accumulator names, proceed as follows:
1 Type LOAD TAX.
LOAD TAX ( LO TAX)
[ P: ] * LOAD TAX
Tax #? 3
Name? Alc.Tx
[ P: ] *
2 Enter the Tax.
3 Enter the Name (limited to seven characters).
The command LOAD TAX with the I option initializes all tax accumulators. All tax names
and amounts are cleared.
How to Print Tax Accumulators
Use the command PRINT SALES;I 0 or P SA;I 0 to print the tax accumulators. This will print
the amount in each tax accumulator for each shift or day.
PRI NT SALES; I 0 ( P SA; I 0)
[ P: ] * PRINT SALES;I 0
- Shi f t 1 f r omThu 08/ 19/ 04 8: 00 AM t o Thu 08/ 19/ 04 4: 00 PM -
Pr Cat Name Cl ub Debi t Cr edi t Cash Tot al
T1 0 Sal e Tx 0. 00 0. 00 51. 31 49. 39 100. 70
T2 0 Tob. Tx 0. 00 0. 00 22. 97 31. 18 54. 15
T3 0 Al c. Tx 0. 00 0. 00 13. 33 16. 88 30. 21
==== ==== ===== ===== ======
0. 00 0. 00 87. 61 97. 45 185. 06

- Tot al s f r omSun 08/ 22/ 04 8: 00 AM t o Thu 08/ 26/ 04 4: 00 PM -
Pr Cat Name Cl ub Debi t Cr edi t Cash Tot al
T1 0 Sal e Tx 26. 00 10. 50 251. 31 489. 39 777. 20
T2 0 Tob. Tx 10. 88 3. 55 112. 97 231. 18 358. 58
T3 0 Al c. Tx 4. 20 2. 77 113. 33 116. 84 237. 14
===== ===== ====== ====== =======
41. 08 16. 82 477. 61 837. 41 1372. 92
[ P: ] *
The product number for taxes is shown as the tax number preceded by a T.
How to Reset Cumulative Tax Totals
Cumulative tax totals are automatically reset with other totalizers when the RESET
TOTALS;A or RESET TOTALS;I command is run.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 10-3
Tax as Percentage Setting Up Tax Tables
Tax as Percentage
If the tax laws in your area allow type-0 tax calculations for all items-and most areas do allow
this, you do not require to use this chapter. Instead, refer to the Tax Rate and Tax Rounding
Boundaries parameters on menu 3 of the CONSOLE configuration program (which is
discussed in MDE-4773 CFN III Configuration Manual for Windows XP) for instructions on
setting up a type 0 tax.
For each product you define through the LOAD PRODUCT command, you will use
CONSOLE to specify the tax that applies. Tax rates are specified in hundredths of a percent.
For example, a 7.8 percent tax is specified as 780, though it displays as 7.80.
You can also specify the upward rounding breakpoint, in tenths of a cent (which is hundredths
of a dollar). For example, if taxes are to be rounded up at $0.005 and down below $0.005, you
will use CONSOLE to enter a 5 for the tax rounding boundary.
Note: The tax rates and tax rounding boundaries are ignored if the tax tables are loaded using
the TAX program.
When to Use Tax Tables
Setting up tax tables is a complicated procedure, so use tax tables only if the law in your area
requires them. If you are required by your local or state tax laws to use a tax table instead of
tax percentages, read through this entire chapter carefully before starting to construct the table;
then come back to the beginning of the chapter and start to work.
For each different tax lookup table the law requires you to use, use the TAX program
explained in this chapter to build a tax table. The table you build through the TAX program is
similar to the kind traditionally used in many (POS) terminals and cash registers.
You may set up 1-8 different taxes using these tables. Determine how many tax lookup tables
you require to build. Then for each one, follow the instructions in the remainder of this
chapter.
How to Set Up a Tax Table
The following are the five major steps involved in setting up a tax table:
Preparing a Compressed Description of Tax Data on page 10-4.
Allot Storage Space for Your Tax Information on page 10-7.
Assign a Tax Number and Name to Each Table on page 10-7.
Build a Tax Table on page 10-7.
Back Up Your Tax Data on page 10-10.
This chapter explains how to complete all those steps. It also explains how to use TAX to print
your tax information and how to update a tax table when tax rates change.
Setting Up Tax Tables How to Set Up a Tax Table
Page 10-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Preparing a Compressed Description of Tax Data
If your local taxing authorities require a tax lookup table, Gasboy or your local distributor may
already have a compressed (short and concise) description of it. Otherwise, use the
instructions in this section to compose a compressed description of each tax table you will use.
(an example of a compressed description follows item 7 in the list immediately below).
1 Obtain a complete tax lookup table from the taxing authorities. Using the instructions in this
section, you will examine your tax table and prepare a compressed description of it. Then you
will enter the compressed description into the CFN3 software.
2 You will require to determine what type of tax table you are using, type 1 or type 2.
Type 1 taxes are determined from a lookup table only.
Type 2 breaks the taxable amount into two parts. The first part is a whole dollar amount,
with its tax calculated at a percentage, possibly rounded. The second part of the taxable
amount is the remainder after the whole dollar amount is taken out. Its tax is calculated by
the table lookup (similar to the type 1 lookup table). The total tax is the sum of the tax on
the two parts.
3 Construct a worksheet for the tax table. Include the following columns (refer to the sample
graphic that follows):
Option Description
From In this column, write the low amount in each range of taxable amounts
for which a constant tax amount applies. For example, a customer may
pay a tax of $0.03 on any sales amounts from $0.46 to $0.63. You will
place $0.46 in the From column for that range.
To In this column, write the high amount in the range, for example, $0.63 in
the example immediately above.
Tax For each range, write the tax charged on the amounts in the range.
Amt Diff Subtract the From amount of the preceding range from the From amount
of the current range, and write the result in this column.
Tax Diff Subtract the Tax amount on the preceding row from the Tax amount on
the current row, and write the result in this column.
The sample graphic below shows information from a typical tax table. The columns labeled
From, To, and Tax correspond to the columns on a tax table like those issued by taxing
authorities. The columns labeled Amt Diff and Tax Diff have been calculated from the tax
table information. The Tax Diff is usually a constant.
Note: In the sample table, it is always $0.01.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 10-5
How to Set Up a Tax Table Setting Up Tax Tables
Figure 10-1: Sample Tax Table
Amt Tax Amt Tax
From To Tax diff diff From To Tax Diff Diff
0. 00 0. 09 0. 00 - - 8. 10 8. 27 0. 45 0. 19 0. 01
0. 10 0. 27 0. 01 - - 8. 28 8. 45 0. 46 0. 18 0. 01
0. 28 0. 45 0. 02 0. 18 0. 01 8. 46 8. 63 0. 47 0. 18 0. 01
0. 46 0. 63 0. 03 0. 18 0. 01 8. 64 8. 81 0. 48 0. 18 0. 01
0. 64 0. 81 0. 04 0. 18 0. 01 8. 82 8. 99 0. 49 0. 18 0. 01
0. 82 0. 99 0. 05 0. 18 0. 01 9. 00 9. 18 0. 50 0. 18 0. 01
1. 00 1. 18 0. 06 0. 18 0. 01 9. 19 9. 36 0. 51 0. 19 0. 01
1. 19 1. 36 0. 07 0. 19 0. 01 9. 37 9. 54 0. 52 0. 18 0. 01
1. 37 1. 54 0. 08 0. 18 0. 01 9. 55 9. 72 0. 53 0. 18 0. 01
1. 55 1. 72 0. 09 0. 18 0. 01 9. 73 9. 90 0. 54 0. 18 0. 01
1. 73 1. 90 0. 10 0. 18 0. 01 9. 91 10. 09 0. 55 0. 18 0. 01
1. 91 2. 09 0. 11 0. 18 0. 01 10. 10 10. 27 0. 56 0. 19 0. 01
2. 10 2. 27 0. 12 0. 19 0. 01 10. 28 10. 45 0. 57 0. 18 0. 01
2. 28 2. 45 0. 13 0. 18 0. 01 10. 46 10. 63 0. 58 0. 18 0. 01
2. 46 2. 63 0. 14 0. 18 0. 01 10. 64 10. 81 0. 59 0. 18 0. 01
2. 64 2. 81 0. 15 0. 18 0. 01 10. 82 10. 99 0. 60 0. 18 0. 01
2. 82 2. 99 0. 16 0. 18 0. 01 11. 00 11. 18 0. 61 0. 18 0. 01
3. 00 3. 18 0. 17 0. 18 0. 01 11. 19 11. 36 0. 62 0. 19 0. 01
3. 19 3. 36 0. 18 0. 19 0. 01 11. 37 11. 54 0. 63 0. 18 0. 01
3. 37 3. 54 0. 19 0. 18 0. 01 11. 55 11. 72 0. 64 0. 18 0. 01
3. 55 3. 72 0. 20 0. 18 0. 01 11. 73 11. 90 0. 65 0. 18 0. 01
3. 73 3. 90 0. 21 0. 18 0. 01 11. 91 12. 09 0. 66 0. 18 0. 01
3. 91 4. 09 0. 22 0. 18 0. 01 12. 10 12. 27 0. 67 0. 19 0. 01
4. 10 4. 27 0. 23 0. 19 0. 01 12. 28 12. 45 0. 68 0. 18 0. 01
4. 28 4. 45 0. 24 0. 18 0. 01 12. 46 12. 63 0. 69 0. 18 0. 01
4. 46 4. 63 0. 25 0. 18 0. 01 12. 64 12. 81 0. 71 0. 18 0. 01
4. 64 4. 81 0. 27 0. 18 0. 01 12. 82 12. 99 0. 72 0. 18 0. 01
4. 82 4. 99 0. 27 0. 18 0. 01 13. 00 13. 18 0. 72 0. 18 0. 01
5. 00 5. 18 0. 28 0. 18 0. 01 13. 19 13. 36 0. 73 0. 19 0. 01
5. 19 5. 36 0. 29 0. 19 0. 01 13. 37 13. 54 0. 74 0. 18 0. 01
5. 37 5. 54 0. 30 0. 18 0. 01 13. 55 13. 72 0. 75 0. 18 0. 01
5. 55 5. 72 0. 31 0. 18 0. 01 13. 73 13. 90 0. 76 0. 18 0. 01
5. 73 5. 90 0. 32 0. 18 0. 01 13. 91 14. 09 0. 77 0. 18 0. 01
5. 91 6. 09 0. 33 0. 18 0. 01 14. 10 14. 27 0. 78 0. 19 0. 01
6. 10 6. 27 0. 34 0. 19 0. 01 14. 28 14. 45 0. 79 0. 18 0. 01
6. 28 6. 45 0. 35 0. 18 0. 01 14. 46 14. 63 0. 80 0. 18 0. 01
6. 46 6. 63 0. 36 0. 18 0. 01 14. 64 14. 81 0. 81 0. 18 0. 01
6. 64 6. 81 0. 37 0. 18 0. 01 14. 82 14. 99 0. 82 0. 18 0. 01
6. 82 6. 99 0. 38 0. 18 0. 01 15. 00 15. 18 0. 83 0. 18 0. 01
7. 00 7. 18 0. 39 0. 18 0. 01 15. 19 15. 36 0. 84 0. 19 0. 01
7. 19 7. 36 0. 40 0. 19 0. 01 15. 37 15. 54 0. 85 0. 18 0. 01
7. 37 7. 54 0. 41 0. 18 0. 01 15. 55 15. 72 0. 86 0. 18 0. 01
7. 55 7. 72 0. 42 0. 18 0. 01 15. 73 15. 90 0. 87 0. 18 0. 01
7. 73 7. 90 0. 43 0. 18 0. 01 15. 91 16. 09 0. 88 0. 18 0. 01
7. 91 8. 09 0. 44 0. 18 0. 01 16. 10 16. 27 0. 89 0. 19 0. 01
4 Complete your worksheet, indicating the amount differences and the tax differences for each
range of taxable amounts.
5 Examine the Amt Diff column on the sample worksheet. Note that there is a regular pattern.
Five $0.18 taxable amount increments are followed by one $0.19 increment, then there are
four $0.18 increments, and one $0.19 increment. This pattern repeats-or loops-itself eight
times. Now examine the Amt Diff column of your worksheet. Try to find a repeating pattern in
the tax amount increments.
6 Find a repeating pattern to the increments in the Tax Diff column (it may be that they are
always the same, as in the sample).
7 Then find a single repeating pattern that accounts for the increments in both Diff columns. If
the increments in the Tax Diff column are not all the same, this may be more difficult, and the
pattern will almost certainly repeat itself less often. You will use the repeating patterns you
find to build the tax table through the TAX program.
Setting Up Tax Tables How to Set Up a Tax Table
Page 10-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
To compose your compressed description, write down the following:
The tax number (1-8: defined in configuration).
The tax type. For tax tables, it is type 1 or 2.
The method for figuring taxes on amounts that exceed the largest amount in the table: you
can use a fixed rate with a rounding rule, or you can apply the table to the excess amounts.
The tax increment; almost always 1 cent.
The smallest taxable amount.
The formula for determining the individual entries in the table. You do this by means of
three TAX program commands: increment, loop, and end loop.
An increment tells the TAX program an Amt Diff and a Tax Diff and the number of
consecutive times to apply those differences. For example, in the sample worksheet, the first
Amt Diff is 0.18, and that difference occurs five consecutive times. For the sample table, and
for most tax tables, the tax increment is always $0.01.
A loop tells the TAX program to repeat the commands within the loop the number of times
you specify. You start a loop with a loop command and end it with an end loop command. So,
when two or more increments occur in a repeating pattern, you can describe the repeating
pattern in terms of a loop. Loops may be nested-that is, the steps repeated by a loop may
include other loops.
An end loop terminates the last loop that was started. Thus, if there are two loop commands
and then an end loop, the end loop will terminate the second loop. Another end loop is
required to terminate the first loop.
A compressed description of the sample table follows:
Tax number: 1
Tax type: 1
Tax increment: 1 cent
Smallest taxable amount: $0.10
Loop 8 times
Increment taxable amount by $0.18 and tax by $0.01 five times
Increment taxable amount by $0.19 and tax by $0.01 one time
Increment taxable amount by $0.18 and tax by $0.01 four times
Increment taxable amount by $0.19 and tax by $0.01 one time
End loop
The sample table is a simple example. In your table, you may have a non-repeated sequence of
increment commands before the first loop. Or, you may have many loops, or loops within
loops. Or, you may have a non-repeated sequence of increment commands at the end of the
table, after all loops are ended.
Most tax tables must reduce to a compressed description. However, if you encounter some
difficulty, consult your salesman or distributor for help.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 10-7
How to Set Up a Tax Table Setting Up Tax Tables
Allot Storage Space for Your Tax Information
The CFN3 software already has eight records in its storage space for its 1-8 tax rates, and it
must create additional records for the information in your tax tables.
When you have a compressed table description, count the additional records it will require.
Allow one additional record for each of the following:
The table beginning.
Each increment command.
Each loop command.
Each end-loop command.
The end of the table.
After you have prepared a compressed description of all your tax tables, determine the total
number of additional records you will require for all of them. Then add eight to your total.
This gives the total number of records you require for your tax.
You may use up to 200 records for tax. If your total is larger than 200, consult your ASR or
distributor to help you reduce the commands in your compressed descriptions.
When you have determined the number of records you require, use the TABLE program to
define the number of records in table number 27, the tax table (for instructions, refer to
MDE-4773 CFN III Configuration Manual for Windows XP). Ensure that your total includes
the original eight records required by the CFN3 software and all the additional records
required for your tax tables.
Assign a Tax Number and Name to Each Table
Use the LOAD TAX command to assign a tax number (1-8) and name for each table you will
use. Be sure you also assign a number and name to each of the taxes you want the CFN3
software to calculate as percentages with a rounding factor-that is, those taxes for which you
do not require to build a table.
Build a Tax Table
The example that follows shows the prompts and user responses to enter the sample table into
the CFN3 software. After entering the compressed description, the user requests a printed
summary of the table, then quits and saves the table.
Study the sample and compare it with the compressed description to help you see how to use
the TAX program.
If you respond with n at the All tax increments one cent prompt, you will subsequently be
prompted for the tax increment amount after each Increment how many times? prompt.
Otherwise, the command assumes that one cent applies to all increments.
Note: The printed summary is a representation of the commands (increment, loop, and end
loop) that are defined in the table.
The Loop Level column shows each loop. A plus sign (+) marks the beginning and end of
the loop, and a dashed vertical line extends over the interior of the loop. If there were loops
nested within loops, other pairs of plus signs and dashed lines would be printed, indented so
they would not overlap.
TAX
[ P: ] * TAX
TAX pr ogr am.
Ent er ? f or hel p.
Tabl e st at us: si ze = 20 r ecor ds, used = 8, avai l abl e = 12
Tax number , P, P#, T, T#, or Q t o qui t ? 1
Tax t ype, Q t o qui t , RETURN f or same? 1
New cal cul at i on number ent er ed.
I ni t i al i zi ng new t ax cal cul at i on t abl e.
Smal l est t axabl e amount ( cent s) ? 10
Ent er command ( I , L, E, Q, D, P, M, or S) ? L
Loop how many t i mes ( 0 = unt i l done) ? 8
Ent er command ( I , L, E, Q, D, P, M, or S) ? i
I ncr ement how many t i mes ( 0 = unt i l done) ? 5
Taxabl e amount i ncr ement ( cent s) ? 18
Al l t ax i ncr ement s one cent ( Y/ N) ? y
Ent er command ( I , L, E, Q, D, P, M, or S) ? i
I ncr ement how many t i mes ( 0 = unt i l done) ? 1
Taxabl e amount i ncr ement ( cent s) ? 19
Ent er command ( I , L, E, Q, D, P, M, or S) ? i
I ncr ement how many t i mes ( 0 = unt i l done) ? 4
Taxabl e amount i ncr ement ( cent s) ? 18
Ent er command ( I , L, E, Q, D, P, M, or S) ? i
I ncr ement how many t i mes ( 0 = unt i l done) ? 1
Taxabl e amount i ncr ement ( cent s) ? 19
Ent er command ( I , L, E, Q, D, P, M, or S) ? e
End l oop
Ent er command ( I , L, E, Q, D, P, M, or S) ? p
Tax number 1: SALES T
Type 1: t abl e l ookup
Loop Rec Recor d Appl y Amount Tax
Level Nbr Type Ti mes I ncr ement I ncr ement
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1 I ni t i al - $0. 10 - -
+ 2 Loop 8 - - - - -
| 3 I ncr ement 5 $0. 18 $0. 01
| 4 I ncr ement 1 $0. 19 $0. 01
| 5 I ncr ement 4 $0. 18 $0. 01
| 6 I ncr ement 1 $0. 19 $0. 01
+ 7 End l oop - - - - - - - - - - -
Ent er command ( I , L, E, Q, D, P, M, or S) ? q
End t abl e
Tabl e st at us: si ze = 20 r ecor ds, used = 17, avai l abl e = 3
Save t he updat ed t ax t abl e ( Y, N, or P) ? y
Tax t abl e saved
Tabl e st at us: si ze = 20 r ecor ds, used = 17, avai l abl e = 3
Tax number , P, P#, T, T#, or Q t o qui t ? q
[ P: ] *
Setting Up Tax Tables How to Set Up a Tax Table
Page 10-8 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
The Rec Nbr column shows the number of each record in the table.
The Record Type column lists each command in the table.
The Apply Times column shows the number of times the command is to be applied. For
increment commands, this means the number of rows for which the specified increments
apply. For loops, this means the number of times the commands inside the loop are to be
repeated.
TheAmount Increment column shows the smallest taxable amount, and for the increment
commands, it shows the increment from the Amt Diff column of the worksheet.
The Tax Increment column shows the increment from the Tax Diff column of the
worksheet.
TAX Program: Options and Arguments
You can use several options and arguments with TAX when you initially run the program.
The table below shows the options preceded by a semicolon and the arguments preceded by a
dash.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 10-9
How to Set Up a Tax Table Setting Up Tax Tables
To enter an option, type a semicolon, then the option letter. To enter an argument, type a space,
then a dash, then the argument character. Options and arguments for TAX are not
case-sensitive. That means you may type them in upper case or lower case. They are shown
below in upper case.
If you specify an option not on this list, TAX will print Invalid option and quit. If you specify
an argument not on this list, it will print a list of valid options and arguments, then quit.
When you are ready to build your tax table, use the TAX program. The following paragraphs
list the prompts that TAX displays and explains how to respond to them.
Tax number, P, P#, T, T#, or Q to quit?
Enter a tax number to create or edit a table for that tax code number (remember that you
must already have assigned, with the LOAD TAX command, the number you enter to
create a new table). If you enter a tax number, the next prompt appears.
Enter P to print a summary of all taxes whose names have been loaded with LOAD TAX.
The summary is the same report that prints if you use the -P argument with the TAX
program.
Enter P# to print a summary of the specified tax (specify the taxs number in place of the #
sign).
Enter T to print a tax table. Then, in response to the next prompt, enter the number of the
table you want to print. You can compare this printout with the tax table you obtained from
the taxing authorities or a bank to verify that the tax has been entered correctly.
Enter T# to print a table of the specified tax (specify the tables number in place of the #
sign).
To exit the program, enter Q or press RETURN.
Tax type, Q to quit, RETURN for same?
Enter 0, 1, or 2 to specify the tax type for the tax number you entered. The default is zero.
0 (zero) indicates a tax rate with rounding. If the tax number you specified had been
defined as a type 1 or 2, entering a zero here redefines it as a type 0. For taxes of type 0,
TAX does not do anything other than set tax type and table maximum.
1 (one) indicates a table created through a compressed description (as explained in this
chapter). The program continues the prompts through Smallest taxable amount (cents)?
Then it begins at the point where it was when you last entered data for the table. You can
add commands to the end of the table or delete commands from the end of the table.
Option Effect
;I CAUTION: Do not use this option after you have entered tax information you want to save. It initializes
the tax tables-that is, it erases all the tax information. All taxes become type 0 (rate tables rather than
lookup tables), but tax numbers and names remain unchanged. The program prompts you to confirm
that you want to initialize, then it erases the tax information and quits.
-P Used with this argument, TAX prints a summary of all taxes whose names have been loaded with LOAD
TAX.
-R Used with this argument, TAX prints all information from the tax rate table in a raw form suitable for the
RESTORE command to use in restoring the tax table. The standard command file SYSBACK calls TAX
with this argument. Normally, you will not use this argument.
-? Used with this argument, TAX runs in tutorial mode. When any prompt is displayed for the first time, it is
preceded by its help message. You can print the help message again by entering a question mark (?) in
response to the prompt when it appears again. This mode is useful if you have not run TAX many times.
Setting Up Tax Tables How to Set Up a Tax Table
Page 10-10 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
2 (two) indicates a tax that is calculated as a percentage of the whole dollar amount, and
then uses a lookup table for any remaining cents
Press RETURN to use the same type-that is, to indicate you are not changing the tax type.
If the tax number is type 0, the program returns to the first prompt. Zero is the default type,
so if you have not defined the tax number as a type 1 or 2, it is a type 0.
To exit the program, enter Q.
Enter command (I, L, E, Q, D, P, M, or S)?
This prompt will be repeated until you enter Q to quit. Enter the commands, in order, that
define the compressed description of your tax table. Each command you enter causes the
program to ask for other information:
Enter I to give an increment command. You will be prompted for the number of times the
increment applies and the taxable amount increment (Amt Diff on your worksheet).
Enter L to start a loop. You will be prompted for the number of times to repeat the
commands that occur before the end loop command (the program will not allow you to
quit until you end all the loops you start).
Enter E to end the last loop that was started.
Enter Q to quit the program. You will be asked whether or not you want to save the
changes you have made to the table. You may respond with Y to save the changes, N not
to save the changes, or P to print the current table definition so you can decide whether or
not to save it (ensure that you cannot quit if there are loops that have been started but not
ended).
Enter D to delete the last command you entered, including your responses to the command
prompts. If you enter D again, the previous command is deleted. You can continue
entering D until you delete as many entries as you wish, back to the Smallest taxable
amount prompt.
Enter P to print the current table definition so you can review it. Refer back to the example
for a sample printout of the table definition.
Enter M to modify a record. You will be asked for the number of the record to be
modified, then you can change that records smallest taxable amount.
Enter S to see a display of the tables status showing the record size and the number of
records used and available.
If you want to quit the program without saving any changes or ending your loops, use ^C
(press and hold the CTRL key, then press C).
Back Up Your Tax Data
After you have used the TAX program to enter a tax table, run SYSBACK to back up the data.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 11-1
Reports Reports, Cash Drawer, and Shifts
11 Reports, Cash Drawer, and Shifts
Note: The material covered in this chapter is not the same as the material in the Point Of Sale
(POS) and Shift Change manual. For example, the reports discussed in this chapter
contain dollar and quantity amounts of fuel and merchandise; the POS and Shift
Change reports include everything that occurred at a site during a shift or day.
The following similar commands are not identical in their functions: NEXT SHIFT and
NEXTSHFT, NEXT DAY and NEXTDAY, LOAD DRAWER and LDDRAWER, ADD
DRAWER and ADDDRAWER.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
Reports
The Site Controller maintains sales totals for the last three shifts, the current shift, daily totals
for the current and previous days, and cumulative totals.
The shift totals are changed when a shift change is entered with the LOAD SHIFT, NEXT
SHIFT, and NEXT DAY commands. Up to a total of nine shifts can be loaded.
The daily totals are reset with the RESET TOTALS command. This command moves the
current daily totals to the previous days totals.
The daily, cumulative, and shift totals are reset to zero with the A option (RESET
TOTALS;A). The I option (RESET TOTALS;I) resets only the cumulative totals to zero.
Each transaction is entered in three places: daily totals, current shift totals, and cumulative
totals (see Figure 11-1 on page 11-2).
The cumulative, current day, and current shift totals are running totals, and they are added to
whenever a sale takes place. All other totals are buffered totals. The RESET TOTALS
command resets the buffered totals to zero.
Cash drawer totals are also kept for one days worth of shifts plus the current shift. Sales totals
and cash drawer totals are usually printed at shift-change time, but they can be printed at any
time, since the totals are available until the next days shifts.
Reports, Cash Drawer, and Shifts Reports
Page 11-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Figure 11-1 shows the relationships between the various types of totals.
Figure 11-1: Relationship Between Various Types of Totals
Transactions
Daily
Previous
Day
Current
Shift
Cumulative
RE TO;A RE TO
NE DAY
Previous
Shift 1
Previous
Shift 2
Previous
Shift 3
RE TO;I
*RE TO
RE TO;A
RE TO;A
RE TO;A
RE TO;A
RE TO;A
RE TO;A
* if configured
LO SH
NE SH
How to Print Sales Reports
Use the command PRINT SALES or P SA to print the total cash, debit, club, and credit sales
in dollars from the time the total was last reset. The shift, daily, and cumulative totals can be
printed with the command PRINT SALES.
The default printout format includes the current-shift totals and the cumulative totals, which
are the totals since you last used the RESET TOTALS;A or RESET TOTALS;I command (the
examples in this chapter assume that the RESET TOTALS;A command is used every 24 hours
or so).
Products that have zero amounts all the way across are not displayed. Also, totals are not
shown for subcategories that have only one entry.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 11-3
Reports Reports, Cash Drawer, and Shifts
Note: In the printouts, the product names in the PRODUCT column are the names assigned
the product codes with the command LOAD PRODUCT. Product codes are assigned to
tanks with the command LOAD TANK. Product codes are assigned to pumps or hoses
with the command LOAD FUEL. Product names and tank assignments in the examples
may be different from those in your system.
PRI NT SALES ( P SA)
[ P: ] * PRINT SALES
- - - - - Shi f t 1 f r omSun 8/ 15/ 04 7: 51 AM t o Sun 8/ 22/ 04 6: 34 PM - - - - -
Pr Cat Name Cl ub Debi t Cr edi t Cash Tot al
1 1 Regul ar 87. 89 56. 45 89. 12 99. 25 332. 71
2 1 Unl eaded 151. 77 96. 34 111. 56 120. 32 479. 99
3 1 Pr emi um 138. 36 83. 68 108. 95 119. 59 450. 58
4 1 Di esel 160. 16 112. 26 180. 24 207. 69 660. 35
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
538. 18 348. 73 489. 87 546. 85 1923. 63
5 2 Candy 22. 43 12. 18 18. 97 19. 67 73. 25
6 2 Dai r y 21. 18 14. 97 19. 40 20. 43 75. 98
7 2 Br ead 14. 21 12. 33 9. 78 10. 14 46. 46
8 2 Soda 25. 18 23. 26 28. 99 21. 87 99. 30
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
83. 00 62. 74 77. 14 72. 11 294. 99
====== ====== ====== ====== =======
621. 18 411. 47 567. 01 618. 96 2218. 62
- - - - - Tot al s f r omSat 8/ 21/ 04 6: 59 PM t o Sun 8/ 22/ 04 6: 35 PM - - - - -
Pr Cat Name Cl ub Debi t Cr edi t Cash Tot al
1 1 Regul ar 240. 03 114. 21 183. 94 168. 34 706. 52
2 1 Unl eaded 305. 75 182. 14 211. 00 243. 46 942. 35
3 1 Pr emi um 242. 54 161. 23 221. 32 209. 59 834. 68
4 1 Di esel 326. 87 224. 98 362. 65 402. 69 1317. 19
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1115. 19 682. 56 978. 91 1024. 08 3800. 74
5 2 Candy 44. 16 25. 99 36. 14 38. 89 145. 18
6 2 Dai r y 41. 35 28. 75 37. 76 42. 38 150. 24
7 2 Br ead 29. 56 25. 87 36. 90 22. 18 114. 51
8 2 Soda 51. 12 26. 52 57. 31 42. 19 177. 14
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
166. 19 107. 13 168. 11 145. 64 587. 07
======= ====== ======= ======= =======
1281. 38 789. 69 1147. 02 1169. 72 4387. 81
[ P: ] *
The command PRINT SALES with the A option prints dollar totals for the period you request.
The periods are (use the letters and numbers shown in parentheses to specify the period):
Current shift (C)
Previous shifts (123)
Todays daily totals (totals since last reset with RESET TOTALS or
NEXT DAY) (D)
Yesterdays daily totals (Y)
Cumulative totals (totals since last reset with RESET TOTALS;A or
RESET TOTALS;I) (T)
Cumulative totals at last day-change (totals at last RESET TOTALS or NEXT DAY) (P, if
configured). This function is useful at day changes so you do not have to stop the site to
obtain cumulative totals.
You can request totals for any combination of up to seven periods. If you do not specify a
period on the command line, the prompt Which totals? will be printed. Enter the periods you
want in response to the prompt. Totals for periods will be printed in the order they were
requested:
[ P: ] * PRINT SALES 1-4
- - - - - Shi f t 1 f r omSun 7/ 18/ 99 7: 51 AM t o Sun 7/ 18/ 99 6: 34 PM - - - - -
Pr Cat Name Cl ub Debi t Cr edi t Cash Tot al
1 1 Regul ar 17. 00 0. 00 0. 00 18. 25 35. 25
2 1 Unl eaded 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00 18. 55 18. 55
3 1 Pr emi um 38. 36 0. 00 0. 00 9. 59 47. 95
4 1 Di esel 19. 22 0. 00 0. 00 7. 69 26. 91
====== ===== ===== ===== =======
74. 58 0. 00 0. 00 54. 08 128. 66
- - - - Tot al s f r omSat 7/ 17/ 99 12: 59 PM t o Sun 7/ 18/ 99 6: 35 PM - - - - -
Pr Cat Name Cl ub Debi t Cr edi t Cash Tot al
1 1 Regul ar 118. 03 4. 21 13. 94 68. 34 204. 52
2 1 Unl eaded 5. 75 2. 14 1. 00 43. 46 52. 35
3 1 Pr emi um 42. 54 0. 00 0. 00 9. 59 52. 13
4 1 Di esel 26. 87 0. 00 0. 00 7. 69 34. 56
====== ==== ===== ====== =======
193. 19 6. 35 14. 94 129. 08 343. 56
[ P: ] *
[ P: ] * PRINT SALES;I 2
- - - - - Shi f t 1 f r omSun 7/ 18/ 99 7: 51 AM t o Sun 7/ 18/ 99 6: 34 PM - - - - -
Pr Cat Name Cl ub Debi t Cr edi t Cash Tot al
5 2 Candy 22. 43 12. 18 18. 97 19. 67 73. 25
6 2 Dai r y 21. 18 14. 97 19. 40 20. 43 75. 98
7 2 Br ead 14. 21 12. 33 9. 78 10. 14 46. 46
8 2 Soda 25. 18 23. 26 28. 99 21. 87 99. 30
====== ===== ===== ===== =======
83. 00 62. 74 77. 14 72. 11 249. 99
- - - - - Tot al s f r omSat 7/ 17/ 99 12: 59 PM t o Sun 7/ 18/ 99 6: 35 PM - - - - -
Pr Cat Name Cl ub Debi t Cr edi t Cash Tot al
5 2 Candy 44. 16 25. 99 36. 14 38. 89 145. 18
6 2 Dai r y 41. 35 28. 75 37. 76 42. 38 150. 24
7 2 Br ead 29. 56 25. 87 36. 90 22. 18 114. 51
8 2 Soda 51. 12 26. 52 57. 31 42. 19 177. 14
====== ====== ====== ====== =======
166. 19 107. 13 168. 11 145. 64 587. 07
[ P: ] *
Reports, Cash Drawer, and Shifts Reports
Page 11-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
PRINT SALES;A 1D prints the totals for the previous shift 1 and the current daily totals.
PRINT SALES;A 123C prints the totals for the previous shifts 1, 2, and 3, and the current
shift.
You can use ranges with the PRINT SALES command to print information for specified
products for the current shift and the cumulative total since you last RESET TOTALS;A or
RESET TOTALS;I.
You can use the I option and ranges with PRINT SALES to print information for specified
categories instead of for products.
You can use PRINT SALES with any combination of the A option and the I option and ranges,
to print sales totals for specified periods and products or categories. Separate the periods and
the ranges of products or categories with a comma. For example:
PRINT SALES;AI 3,2 prints sales totals for previous shift 3, category 2;
PRINT SALES;AI YD,1-5 prints yesterdays and todays daily sales totals for categories 1
through 5; and
PRINT SALES;A 123,1-5 prints sales totals for the previous shifts 1, 2, and 3 for products 1
through 5.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 11-5
Reports Reports, Cash Drawer, and Shifts
How to Print Quantity Reports
Use the command PRINT QUANTITY or P QU to display sales in terms of quantity sold.
Quantities sold are categorized by method of payment and kept by shift, current day, previous
day, and cumulative. Quantities are printed in hundredths of a unit.
PRI NT QUANTI TY ( P QU)
[ P: ] * PRINT QUANTITY
- - - - - Shi f t 1 f r omSun 7/ 18/ 99 7: 51 AM t o Sun 7/ 18/ 99 6: 34 PM - - - - -
Pr Cat Name Cl ub Debi t Cr edi t Cash Tot al
1 1 Regul ar 87. 89 56. 45 89. 12 99. 25 332. 71
2 1 Unl eaded 151. 77 96. 34 111. 56 120. 32 479. 99
3 1 Pr emi um 138. 36 83. 68 108. 95 119. 59 450. 58
4 1 Di esel 160. 16 112. 26 180. 24 207. 69 660. 35
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
538. 18 348. 73 489. 87 546. 85 1923. 63
5 2 Candy 22. 00 12. 00 18. 00 19. 00 71. 00
6 2 Dai r y 21. 00 14. 00 19. 00 20. 00 74. 00
7 2 Br ead 14. 00 12. 00 9. 00 10. 00 46. 00
8 2 Soda 25. 00 23. 00 28. 00 21. 00 97. 00
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
83. 00 61. 00 74. 00 70. 00 288. 00
====== ====== ====== ====== ======
621. 18 409. 73 563. 87 618. 85 2211. 63
- - - - - Tot al s f r omSat 7/ 17/ 99 6: 59 PM t o Sun 7/ 18/ 99 6: 35 PM - - - - -
Pr Cat Name Cl ub Debi t Cr edi t Cash Tot al
1 1 Regul ar 240. 03 114. 21 183. 94 168. 34 706. 52
2 1 Unl eaded 305. 75 182. 14 211. 00 243. 46 942. 35
3 1 Pr emi um 242. 54 161. 23 221. 32 209. 59 834. 68
4 1 Di esel 326. 87 224. 98 362. 65 402. 69 1317. 19
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1115. 19 682. 56 978. 91 1024. 08 3800. 74
5 2 Candy 44. 00 25. 00 36. 00 38. 00 143. 00
6 2 Dai r y 41. 00 28. 00 37. 00 42. 00 148. 00
7 2 Br ead 29. 00 25. 00 36. 00 22. 00 112. 00
8 2 Soda 51. 00 26. 00 57. 00 42. 00 176. 00
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
165. 00 104. 00 166. 00 144. 00 579. 00
======= ====== ====== ====== ======
1280. 19 786. 56 1144. 91 1168. 08 4379. 74
[ P: ] *
PRINT QUANTITY can be used with the same options and arguments as PRINT SALES. The
default printout format includes the current shift totals and the cumulative totals.
The command PRINT QUANTITY with the A option prints quantity totals for the period you
request. The periods are (use the letters and numbers shown in parentheses to specify the
period):
Current shift (C).
Previous shifts (123).
Todays daily totals (totals since last reset with RESET TOTALS or NEXT DAY) (D).
Yesterdays daily totals (Y).
Cumulative totals (totals since last reset with RESET TOTALS;A or RESET TOTALS;I)
(T).
Cumulative totals at last day-change (totals at last RESET TOTALS or NEXT DAY) (P, if
configured). This function is useful at day changes so you do not have to stop the site to
obtain cumulative totals.
Reports, Cash Drawer, and Shifts Reports
Page 11-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
You can request totals for any combination of up to seven periods. If you do not specify a
period on the command line, the prompt Which totals? will be printed. Enter the periods you
want in response to the prompt. Totals for periods will be printed in the order they were
requested:
PRINT QUANTITY;A 1D prints the totals for the previous shift 1 and the current daily totals.
PRINT QUANTITY;A 123C prints the totals for the previous shifts 1, 2, and 3, and the current
shift.
[ P: ] * PRINT QUANTITY 1-4
- - - - - Shi f t 1 f r omSun 7/ 18/ 99 7: 51 AM t o Sun 7/ 18/ 99 6: 34 PM - - - - -
Pr Cat Name Cl ub Debi t Cr edi t Cash Tot al
1 1 Regul ar 17. 00 0. 00 0. 00 18. 25 35. 25
2 1 Unl eaded 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00 18. 55 18. 55
3 1 Pr emi um 38. 36 0. 00 0. 00 9. 59 47. 95
4 1 Di esel 19. 22 0. 00 0. 00 7. 69 26. 91
====== ===== ===== ===== =======
74. 58 0. 00 0. 00 54. 08 128. 66
- - - - Tot al s f r omSat 7/ 17/ 99 12: 59 PM t o Sun 7/ 18/ 99 6: 35 PM - - - - -
Pr Cat Name Cl ub Debi t Cr edi t Cash Tot al
1 1 Regul ar 118. 03 4. 21 13. 94 68. 34 204. 52
2 1 Unl eaded 5. 75 2. 14 1. 00 43. 46 52. 35
3 1 Pr emi um 42. 54 0. 00 0. 00 9. 59 52. 13
4 1 Di esel 26. 87 0. 00 0. 00 7. 69 34. 56
====== ==== ===== ====== =======
193. 19 6. 35 14. 94 129. 08 343. 56
[ P: ] *
[ P: ] * PRINT QUANTITY;I 2
- - - - - Shi f t 1 f r omSun 7/ 18/ 99 7: 51 AM t o Sun 7/ 18/ 99 6: 34 PM - - - - -
Pr Cat Name Cl ub Debi t Cr edi t Cash Tot al
5 2 Candy 22. 43 12. 00 18. 00 19. 00 71. 00
6 2 Dai r y 21. 18 14. 00 19. 00 20. 00 74. 00
7 2 Br ead 14. 21 12. 00 9. 00 10. 00 46. 00
8 2 Soda 25. 18 23. 00 28. 00 21. 00 97. 00
====== ===== ===== ===== =======
83. 00 61. 00 74. 00 70. 00 288. 00
- - - - - Tot al s f r omSat 7/ 17/ 99 12: 59 PM t o Sun 7/ 18/ 99 6: 35 PM - - - - -
Pr Cat Name Cl ub Debi t Cr edi t Cash Tot al
5 2 Candy 44. 00 25. 0 36. 00 38. 00 143. 00
6 2 Dai r y 41. 00 28. 00 37. 00 42. 00 148. 00
7 2 Br ead 29. 00 25. 00 36. 0 22. 00 112. 00
8 2 Soda 51. 00 26. 00 57. 00 42. 00 176. 00
====== ====== ====== ====== =======
165. 00 104. 00 166. 00 144. 00 587. 00
[ P: ] *
You can use ranges with the PRINT QUANTITY command to print information for specified
products.
You can use the I option and ranges with PRINT QUANTITY to print information for
specified categories instead of for products.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 11-7
Reports Reports, Cash Drawer, and Shifts
You can use PRINT QUANTITY with any combination of the A option and the I option and
ranges, to print quantity totals for specified periods and products or categories. Separate the
periods and the ranges of products or categories with a comma. For example:
PRINT QUANTITY;AI 3,2 prints quantity totals for previous shift 3, category 2;
PRINT QUANTITY;AI YD,1-5 prints yesterdays and todays daily quantity totals for
categories 1 through 5; and
PRINT QUANTITY;A 123,1-5 prints quantity totals for the previous shifts 1, 2, and 3 for
products 1 through 5.
PRINT QUANTITY does not display products that have zero amounts all the way across, or
show totals for subcategories that have only one entry shown.
How to Print Quantity and Dollar Totals
Use the command PRINT TOTALS or P TO to print quantity and dollar totals by product.
The plain command prints the current shift and cumulative totals.
PRI NT TOTALS ( P TO)
[ P: ] * PRINT TOTALS
- - - - - Shi f t 1 f r omSun 7/ 18/ 99 7: 51 AM t o Sun 7/ 18/ 99 6: 34 PM - - - - -
Pr Cat Name Quant i t y $ Tot al
1 1 Regul ar 38 35. 25
2 1 Unl eaded 21 18. 55
3 1 Pr emi um 47 47. 95
4 1 Di esel 38 26. 91
- - - - - - - -
144 128. 66
5 2 Ci gs 0 0. 00
6 2 Ti r es 0 0. 00
7 2 Br ead 0 0. 00
8 2 Soda 0 0. 00
- - - - - - -
0 0. 00
==== =====
144 128. 66
- - - - - Tot al s f r omSat 7/ 17/ 99 12: 59 PM t o Sun 7/ 18/ 99 6: 35 PM - - - - -
Pr Cat Name Quant i t y $ Tot al
1 1 Regul ar 224 204. 52
2 1 Unl eaded 57 52. 35
3 1 Pr emi um 52 52. 13
4 1 Di esel 43 34. 56
- - - - - - - - -
376 343. 56
5 2 Ci gs 0 0. 00
6 2 Ti r es 0 0. 00
7 2 Br ead 0 0. 00
8 2 Soda 0 0. 00
- - - - - - - - -
0 0. 00
==== ======
376 343. 56
[ P: ] *
The command PRINT TOTALS with the A option prints quantity and dollar totals for the
period you request. The periods are (use the letters and numbers shown in parentheses to
specify the period):
Current shift (C).
Previous shifts (123).
Todays daily totals (totals since last reset with RESET TOTALS or NEXT DAY) (D).
Yesterdays daily totals (Y).
Reports, Cash Drawer, and Shifts Reports
Page 11-8 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Cumulative totals (totals since last reset with RESET TOTALS;A or RESET TOTALS;I)
(T).
Cumulative totals at last day-change (totals at last RESET TOTALS or NEXT DAY) (P, if
configured). This function is useful at day changes so you do not have to stop the site to
obtain cumulative totals.
You can request totals for any combination of up to seven periods. If you do not specify a
period on the command line, the prompt Which totals? will be printed. Enter the periods you
want in response to the prompt. Totals for periods will be printed in the order they were
requested. For example:
PRINT TOTALS;A 1D prints the totals for the previous shift 1 and the current daily totals.
PRINT TOTALS;A 123C prints the totals for the previous shifts 1, 2, and 3, and the current
shift.
[ P: ] * PRINT TOTALS 1-4
- - - - - Shi f t 1 f r omSun 8/ 15/ 04 7: 51 AM t o Sun 8/ 15/ 04 6: 34 PM - - - - -
Pr Cat Name Quant i t y $ Tot al
1 1 Regul ar 38 35. 25
2 1 Unl eaded 21 18. 55
3 1 Pr emi um 47 47. 95
4 1 Di esel 38 26. 91
- - - - - - - -
144 128. 66
- - - - - Tot al s f r omSat 8/ 14/ 04 12: 59 PM t o Sun 8/ 15/ 04 6: 35 PM - - - - -
Pr Cat Name Quant i t y $ Tot al
1 1 Regul ar 224 204. 52
2 1 Unl eaded 57 52. 35
3 1 Pr emi um 52 52. 13
4 1 Di esel 43 34. 56
- - - - - - - - -
376 343. 56
[ P: ] *
[ P: ] * PRINT TOTALS;I 2
- - - - - Shi f t 1 f r omSun 8/ 15/ 04 7: 51 AM t o Sun 8/ 15/ 04 6: 34 PM - - - - -
Pr Cat Name Quant i t y $ Tot al
5 2 Ci gs 0 0. 00
6 2 Ti r es 0 0. 00
7 2 Br ead 0 0. 00
8 2 Soda 0 0. 00
==== =====
0 0. 00
- - - - - Tot al s f r omSat 8/ 14/ 04 12: 59 PM t o Sun 8/ 15/ 04 6: 35 PM - - - - -
Pr Cat Name Quant i t y $ Tot al
5 2 Ci gs 0 0. 00
6 2 Ti r es 0 0. 00
7 2 Br ead 0 0. 00
8 2 Soda 0 0. 00
==== ======
0 0. 00
[ P: ] *
You can use ranges with the PRINT TOTALS command to print specific product information.
You can use the I option and ranges with PRINT TOTALS to print information for specified
categories instead of for products.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 11-9
Reports Reports, Cash Drawer, and Shifts
You can use PRINT TOTALS with any combinations of the A option and the I option and
ranges, to print quantity and dollar totals for specified periods and products or categories.
Separate the periods and the ranges of products or categories with a comma. For example:
PRINT TOTALS;AI 3,2 prints quantity and dollar totals for previous shift 3, category 2;
PRINT TOTALS;AI YD,1-5 prints yesterdays and todays daily quantity and dollar totals
for categories 1 through 5; and
PRINT TOTALS;A 123,1-5 prints quantity and dollar totals for the previous shifts 1, 2, and 3
for products 1 through 5.
How to Print a Sales Summary Report
The PRINT SUMMARY or P SU command prints a shortened form of the sales report. This
format includes only dollar totals by type of payment.
PRI NT SUMMARY ( P SU)
[ P: ] * PRINT SUMMARY
- Shi f t 1 f r omSun 8/ 15/ 04 5: 51 PM t o Sun 8/ 15/ 04 6: 35 PM -
Cl ub Debi t Cr edi t Cash Tot al
74. 58 0. 00 0. 00 54. 08 128. 66
- Tot al s f r omSat 8/ 14/ 04 12: 59 PM t o Sun 8/ 15/ 04 6: 35 PM -
Cl ub Debi t Cr edi t Cash Tot al
193. 19 6. 35 14. 94 129. 08 343. 56
[ P: ] *
This report is generated from the same information used in the PRINT SALES and PRINT
TOTALS commands and is also affected by the RESET TOTALS and LOAD SHIFT
commands.
The command PRINT SUMMARY with no options prints the current shift and cumulative
totals.
You can use the A option with the PRINT SUMMARY command to specify the periods to
summarize. You can also specify productsor categories, with the I optionto summarize.
These options work like they do with the PRINT SALES and PRINT TOTALS commands:
PRINT SUMMARY;A 1D prints a totals summary for the previous shift 1 and the current
daily totals.
PRINT SUMMARY;A 123C prints a totals summary for the previous shifts 1, 2, and 3, and
the current shift.
PRINT SUMMARY;A DT prints a totals summary for the current daily totals and the
cumulative totals.
PRINT SUMMARY 1-4 prints a totals summary for the current shift and the cumulative
totals for products 1 through 4.
PRINT SUMMARY;AI D,2 prints a totals summary for the daily totals for category 2.
How to Reset Sales Totals
The command RESET TOTALS or RE TO resets the daily totals. It moves todays totals to
yesterday, clears todays totals, and marks the begin time for each product and payment type.
If so configured, the command also moves the running cumulative totals to the previous shift
3, where the totals are buffered.
RESET TOTALS affects the daily totals printed by PRINT SALES, PRINT TOTALS,
PRINT SUMMARY, PRINT QUANTITY, and PRINT DRAWER.
RESET TOTALS ( RE TO)
[ P: ] * RESET TOTALS
Ver i f y ( y/ n) ? Y
[ P: ] *
[ P: ] * RESET TOTALS;A
Ver i f y ( y/ n) ? Y
[ P: ] *
Reports, Cash Drawer, and Shifts Cash Drawer Commands
Page 11-10 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Execute this command daily, at the beginning of the daily accounting period.
Use the command RESET TOTALS;A or RE TO;A to reset the daily, previous shift, and
cumulative sales totals (including tax totals) to zero. It also sets the shift to one and clears
totals.
You might use this command to reset the cumulative total at the beginning of the fiscal year,
for example (the maximum total the Site Controller can accommodate is $999,999.99, then it
starts at zero again).
Use the I option (RESET TOTALS;I) to reset only the cumulative sales totals. This is helpful
to those sites that use the cumulative figures for monthly or quarterly totals.
Cash Drawer Commands
Use the command LOAD DRAWER or LO DR to enter the initial amount in the cash drawer.
Use the commands SUBTRACT DRAWER or SU DR and ADD DRAWER or AD DR to
reconcile a cash drawer amount when you put money into or take money out of a cash drawer
to adjust the till.
The amount loaded into, subtracted from, and added to the drawer is logged.
How to Enter Cash Drawer Amount
Use the command LOAD DRAWER to enter the initial amount of cash in a cash drawer. The
new amount you enter will replace the former amount. You can use the C option with this
command.
LOAD DRAWER ( LO DR)
[ P: ] * LOAD DRAWER
Dr awer number ? 1
$ amount ? 150
[ P: ] *
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 11-11
Cash Drawer Commands Reports, Cash Drawer, and Shifts
How to Add To or Subtract From Cash Drawer
Use the command ADD DRAWER or AD DR to add to a cash drawer amount. You can use the
C option with this command.
ADD DRAWER ( AD DR)
[ P: ] * ADD DRAWER
Dr awer number ? 1
$ amount ? 150
[ P: ] *
SUBTRACT DRAWER ( SU DR)
[ P: ] * SUBTRACT DRAWER
Dr awer number ? 1
$ amount ? 593.87
[ P: ] *
Use the command SUBTRACT DRAWER or SU DR to subtract from the cash drawer
amount. The amount you subtract from a cash drawer is added to the safe drop. You can use
the C option with this command.
How to Print Cash Drawer Totals
Use the command PRINT DRAWER or P DR to print the shift and daily totals for the cash
drawers. The terminal will print the following:
the drawer number (Dr)
shift number (Shift)
amount of cash taken in (Cash in)
amount of cash paid out (Paid out)
the balance remaining in the drawer (Balance)
the amount in the safe (Safe drop)
the shift begin date and time for the current shift
the beginning time for today and the cumulative amounts
the ending time for yesterday
PRI NT DRAWER ( P DR)
[ P: ] * PRINT DRAWER
Dr Shi f t Cash i n Pd out Bal ance Saf e dr op
1 1 830. 12 0. 00 830. 12 0. 00 Began Sat 8/ 21/ 99 8: 00 AM
Pr ev 1 791. 35 0. 00 00. 00 791. 35 Began Fr i 8/ 20/ 99 4: 00 PM
Pr ev 2 1239. 87 0. 00 00. 00 1239. 87 Began Sat 8/ 21/ 99 12: 00PM
Pr ev 3 692. 44 0. 00 00. 00 692. 44 Began Sat 8/ 21/ 99 8: 00 AM
Today 830. 12 0. 00 830. 12 0. 00 Began Sat 8/ 21/ 99 8: 00 AM
Yest dy 2723. 66 0. 00 0. 00 2723. 66 Began Sat 8/ 21/ 99 8: 00 AM
Cuml t v 87107. 56 0. 00 0. 00 87107. 56 Began Sun 8/ 22/ 99 8: 00 AM
[ P: ] *
RESET TOTALS or NEXT DAY moves todays totals (Today) to yesterday (Yestdy) and
resets todays totals to zero.
RESET TOTALS;A resets the daily (Today and Yestdy) and cumulative totals (Cumltv) to
zero, sets the shift to one, and clears all shift totals. RESET TOTALS;I resets just the
cumulative totals.
Reports, Cash Drawer, and Shifts Shift Change
Page 11-12 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Shift Change
The exact procedures performed at shift change vary from site to site.
NEXT SHIFT Command
The NEXT SHIFT or NE SH command stops the site, closes the current shift, loads the next
shift number, restarts the site, and opens the cash drawer for a safe drop. There is no screen
display with this command, but the shift change is logged.
NEXT SHI FT ( NE SH)
[ P: ] * NEXT SHIFT
[ P: ] *
A system parameter sets the number of hours required between changing shifts with NEXT
SHIFT. This parameter prevents shift changes from occurring too close together. If you use the
A option (NEXT SHIFT;A), the time limit is ignored.
A system parameter sets the beginning drawer balance each time NEXT SHIFT is run. A
negative amount in the parameter means that the balance must be carried forward from the
preceding shift.
Other Shift Change Commands
If you do not use the NEXT SHIFT command, you can still synchronize the system when the
shift is being changed. Use the command STOP to shut down the site. After the new shift
number has been loaded (see the following paragraph), use RUN to restart the site.
LOAD SHI FT ( LO SH)
[ P: ] * LOAD SHIFT
Shi f t number ? 1
[ P: ] *
If you do not use the NEXT SHIFT command to change shifts, you can use the command
LOAD SHIFT or LO SH to enter the number of the next shift. Often some reports are printed
at shift change time. These could include some combination of PRINT TOTALS, PRINT
SALES, PRINT SUMMARY, PRINT PUMP, PRINT TANK, PRINT QUANTITY, PRINT
DRAWER, and PRINT TRANSACTION.
Reports must be printed after the site is restarted, so the site does not have to remain shut down
when the reports are printing. Or you can redirect the reports to a disk file and print them at
any time.
If day-night pricing is used, prices can also be changed at shift-change time.
If your sites shift-change procedure involves using several commands, consider creating
command files (described later in this manual) for shift change.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 11-13
Shift Change Reports, Cash Drawer, and Shifts
NEXT DAY Command
The NEXT DAY or NE DAY command stops the site, closes the current day, restarts the site,
opens the cash drawer for a safe drop, and loads shift 1. There is no screen display with this
command, but the change is logged.
NEXT DAY ( NE DAY)
[ P: ] * NEXT DAY
[ P: ] *
A system parameter sets the number of hours required between changing days with NEXT
DAY. This parameter prevents next-day changes from occurring too close together. If you use
the A option (NEXT DAY;A), the time limit is ignored.
The I option with NEXT DAY does not restart the site. This is useful for sites that are not open
24 hours a day.
A system parameter sets the beginning drawer balance each time NEXT DAY is run. A
negative amount in the parameter means that the balance must be carried forward from the
preceding day.
Reports, Cash Drawer, and Shifts Shift Change
Page 11-14 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 12-1
Printing Transactions Transactions
12 Transactions
Printing Transactions
Transactions are stored so that they can be used later for bookkeeping purposes or for billing
proprietary-card customers. A record for each transaction is printed on the log printer as the
transaction is completed.
The Site Controller can be configured to not save or not print cash transactions, in which case
they will not appear on the log (you might not want to save or to not print your cash
transactions if they are taking up too much memory in the Site Controller). The Site Controller
can also be configured to not save hand-authorized transactions.
Transactions that are not saved in the main transaction file, but are logged, are numbered with
negative numbers, so they are easily distinguished from normal transaction numbers. The
numbers range from -2 to -999. These numbers allow you to easily tell if any logged
transactions are missing from a given printout.
Merchandise items in transactions are not saved in itemized form, but are recorded in the log
following the main transaction entry. They are printed three per line in the same format that is
displayed on the console.
Whenever a merchandise item is voided on the console, a void is recorded in the log for that
item. If all merchandise in a sale is voided, that is printed also.
The format of the transaction printout is specified in the Site Controller configuration.
Transactions printed on the log printer and transactions printed in response to the PRINT
TRANSACTION command use the same format. The transaction printout format at your site
may be different from the format used in the examples in this manual.
From time to time stored transactions must be cleared out to make room for new transactions.
If transactions are not polled from your site periodically by a host computer, you must reset the
transaction-begin pointer manually. Before doing so, it is important that a record of the
transactions be produced, either electronically on another computer or as a report in a Site
Controller disk file or on paper.
The transaction-begin pointer in the transaction file determines which transaction the
transaction printout begins with. Also, transactions before the transaction-begin pointer are
overwritten by new transactions as they occur. So if transactions from your site are not
collected and processed electronically by a host computer, you will require to reset the
transaction-begin pointer after you print the current transactions to make room to store new
transactions (refer to Transaction File on page 12-5).
Transactions Printing Transactions
Page 12-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Print Transactions
Use the command PRINT TRANSACTION or P TR to print transactions from the
transaction-begin pointer to the end of the file. The terminal will print the transaction number
and data for each transaction. Transactions are printed in order of transaction number.
Note: The format of the transaction printout is determined by the Site Controller
configuration, and may be different from the example.
Note: Credit and Debit account numbers are masked. Local Club account numbers are not
masked.
How to Sort a Transaction Printout
You can use the P1 and P2 options (the P stands for parameter) with the PRINT
TRANSACTION command to sort and print transactions.
Transactions can be sorted by any field (or parameter) in the transaction printout. In the
example below, the parameters are Tran, Card, Account, Veh, Date, Time, P#, Pr, Qty,
Price, $Total, and Error.
P2 determines how the data will be divided into sections.
P1 determines how the data will be sorted within each section.
Quantity and dollar totals are printed for each section specified by P2 and subtotals are printed
for each group specified by P1, if the Site Controller is configured to do so.
To sort transactions, type PRINT TRANSACTION;P2=value2,P1=value1. Substitute the
names of the fields you want to sort by for value2 and value1.
[ P: ] * PRINT TRANSACTION
Tr ansact i ons at si t e 9999.
Tr an Car d Account Veh Dat e Ti me P# Pr Pr i ce Quant i t y $Tot al
Er r or
3617 6900* ********** 4566 3/ 16 12: 53 14 1 3. 966 2. 388 9. 47
3618 37901 6483927566 0012 3/ 16 13: 32 14 1 3. 966 2. 521 10. 00
3619 6011* *******000 0 3/ 16 13: 32 21 1 3. 966 2. 521 10. 00
3620 37902 6654678004 0983 3/ 16 13: 33 13 5 1. 699 5. 508 9. 36
3621 37901 9483008677 0188 3/ 16 13: 38 0 0 0. 000 0. 000 5. 99
3622 56012 3799826877 1054 3/ 16 13: 38 14 1 3. 966 6. 304 25. 00
3623 5454* *******545 4 3/ 16 13: 39 19 3 1. 799 8. 338 15. 00
Li mi t
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3646 37901 6483927566 0012 3/ 16 14: 01 16 3 1. 799 9. 450 17. 00
Li mi t
3647 7088* ********** 6856 3/ 16 14: 01 15 1 3. 966 3. 782 15. 00
Li mi t
3648 5569* *******666 5 3/ 16 14: 02 17 5 1. 699 10. 594 18. 00
Li mi t
3649 37901 9483008677 0188 3/ 16 14: 02 18 2 2. 099 9. 528 20. 00
Li mi t
3650 56012 3799826877 1054 3/ 16 14: 02 20 3 1. 799 13. 341 24. 00
Li mi t
3651 37901 8933402764 0876 3/ 16 14: 01 21 1 3. 966 2. 521 10. 00
Li mi t
3652 3566* *******000 6 3/ 16 14: 02 19 3 1. 799 12. 229 22. 00
Li mi t
========= =========
298. 866 636. 23
[ P: ] *
[ P: ] * PRI NT TRANSACTI ON; P2=ACCOUNT, P1=PR
Tr an Car d Account Veh Dat e Ti me P# Pr Pr i ce Quant i t y $Tot al
Er r or
3624 37901 6483927566 0012 3/ 16 13: 53 0 0 0. 000 0. 000 6. 41
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
0. 000 6. 41
3618 37901 6483927566 0012 3/ 16 13: 32 14 1 3. 966 2. 521 10. 00
Li mi t
3638 37901 6483927566 0012 3/ 16 13: 59 15 1 3. 966 3. 782 15. 00
Li mi t
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
6. 303 25. 00
3646 37901 6483927566 0012 3/ 16 14: 01 16 3 1. 799 9. 450 17. 00
Li mi t
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
9. 450 17. 00
3639 37901 6483927566 0012 3/ 16 13: 59 22 6 1. 999 20. 010 40. 00
Li mi t
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
20. 010 40. 00
========= =========
35. 763 88. 41
[ P: ] *
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 12-3
Printing Transactions Transactions
The following example shows the command PRINT TRANSACTION with the account
number as P2 and the product as P1.
Note: Local Club account numbers are not masked.
How to Print Specified Types of Transactions
The P1 and P2 options, used to specify fields to be sorted, can be used to restrict the printout to
only those transactions with a given value in the specified field.
If the authorization code field is used, the case (upper or lower) of the authorization code
must be correct.
For the authorization code and account number fields, only the first characters in the field
require be specified. Any fields that begin with the specified characters will be matched.
For other fields, you must specify all the characters in the field to be matched.
You may specify only one type of transaction for each command. That is, you may not
specify the type with both the P1 and P2 options.
For example:
PRINT TRANSACTION;P2=ACCOUNT=54,P1=PR does a P2 sort by account number
and includes only transactions whose account number begins with 54.
PRINT TRANSACTION;P1=AUTH=SC prints transactions whose authorization code
begins with SC.
PRINT TRANSACTION;P2=AUTH=CASH prints out only transactions whose
authorization code begins with CASH.
PRINT TRANSACTION;P1=P#=1 prints out only transactions that were completed on
pump number 1.
PRINT TRANSACTION;P1=PR=1 prints out only transactions that used product
number 1.
To specify a date, insert the last two digits of the year before the date and do not use any
punctuation.
Transactions Printing Transactions
Page 12-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
For example, PRINT TRANSACTION;P2=DATE=930610 prints out transactions that
occurred on J une 10, 1993.
To specify amounts-either quantity or dollar totals - do not use any punctuation. For example,
to see all $5.00 sales, enter PRINT TRANSACTION;P1=$TOTAL=500.
You must always enter quantity in thousandths, even if your site displays quantity only in
hundredths (the PRINT TRANSACTION examples in this chapter show thousandths). For
example, to see all ten-gallon sales, enter PRINT TRANSACTION;P1=QTY=10000.
How to Print a Range of Transactions
You can specify a range of transactions to print with the PRINT TRANSACTION command.
A range has the form N-M, which means transaction numbers N through M. N stands for
the beginning number you specify, and M stands for the ending number.
A -N means transaction numbers from the beginning of the file through transaction N.
An N- means transaction number N through the end of the file.
An N means print only transaction number N.
If the starting transaction number specified is not in the file, no transactions are printed.
The printout stops after the last transaction number specified or at the end of the file if the
ending number is not in the file:
PRINT TRANSACTION 23-150 prints transactions 23 through 150.
PRINT TRANSACTION 23- prints transaction number 23 through the end of the
transaction file.
PRINT TRANSACTION -5 prints transactions from the beginning of file through
transaction 5.
PRINT TRANSACTION 34 prints only transaction number 34.
PRINT TRANSACTION;P2=ACC=54, 1-10 prints transactions whose account number
starts with 54, in the transaction range 1 through 10.
How to Print Transactions in Progress
The command PRINT TIP or P TI prints transactions in progress. You can use this command
before changing prices to verify that there are no transactions in progress.

Command Description
Seq is the transaction sequence number.
P# is the number of the pump being used.
Pr is the product number of the product being pumped.
Device is the type of device the transaction was started from: reader (island card
reader), POS console, site (full serve mode or ACTIVATE PUMP).
As per PCI requirements, the permission level for P TIP is now at level 10 [PCI
Administrator level].
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
PRI NT TI P ( P TI )
[ P: ] * PRINT TIP
Seq P# Pr Devi ce Acct Car d # Quant i t y $Tot al St at us
340 11 1 POS Cash 5. 490 4. 77 Pumpi ng
339 1 1 Reader Cl ub 25555877413335922 0. 000 0. 00 Need ver f
330 12 2 POS Cash 5. 330 4. 90 Pumpi ng
[ P: ] *
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 12-5
Transaction File Transactions
The last four items may be preceded by Payable if pumping is complete or if there are
merchandise items on the sale.
How to Print Receipts from the Transaction File
The command PR_REC allows you to print a receipt directly from the transaction file. This is
useful if the receipt printer has run out of paper or is jammed. This command must be run
before a PURGE SITE is run. The command format is: PR_REC reader # trans# where
reader number is the reader to which the receipt will be printed and trans number is the number
of the transaction which can be obtained from the logger file or the print transactions command.
Transaction File
Transaction numbers go up to 9999 before starting over at 0001 (skipping 0000), but the
transaction file does not hold that many transactions. The number of transactions the
transaction file can hold is set with a special table-configuration disk-based command
described in MDE-4773 CFN III Configuration Manual for Windows XP.
The transaction-begin pointer and begin-print pointer in the transaction file are set with RESET
TRANSACTION or RE TR or by a remote host. Transactions before the begin pointer can be
overwritten by new transactions. The transaction-end pointer is at the most recent transaction
added to the file. PRINT TRANSACTION prints transactions from the print-begin pointer to
the end pointer. The last transaction settled pointer (if supported by the router) points to the last
transaction that was settled with a network host. All transactions after this still require to be
settled with the host. If this is not supported by the router, all transactions are assumed to be
settled.
Acct is the payment type: cash, club, credit, checking, or savings (checking
and savings cards are also called Debit Cards).
Card # is the account number for card sales.
Quantity is the number of gallons pumped so far. This is the most current value
available for the type of pump being used.
$Total is the dollar value of fuel pumped so far. This is the most current value
available for the type of pump being used.
Status is the status of the transaction. The status may be:
Pumping
All done
Need verf
Get verf
Aborting
Got verf
Command Description
Transactions Transaction File
Page 12-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
When the end pointer reaches the begin pointer, the transaction file is full and no new
transactions can be added. Before that happens, you must save the transactions, then use
RESET TRANSACTION (see below) to reset the begin pointer to one greater than the last
transaction, clearing the transaction file and making room for new transactions.
How to Reset the Transaction-begin Pointer
The transaction-begin pointer determines which transaction number will begin the next
transaction printout. It also determines which transactions are kept safe and which transactions
can be recorded over as new transactions occur. Transactions after the transaction-begin
pointer are kept safe. Transactions before the transaction-begin pointer can be recorded over
by new transactions.
If your site is not polled electronically by a host computer, you must reset the
transaction-begin pointer regularly to make memory available for recording new transactions.
If your site is polled by a remote computer, that computer will reset the transaction-begin
pointer after it finishes collecting transactions, and you must never do so manually.
The transaction-begin pointer will not go beyond the last transaction-settled pointer or the
print-begin pointer unless forced to do so with the FIX_TRAN command. This protects the
system from overwriting transactions that are required for settlement or by polling a host
computer.
Figure 12-1: Transaction Pointers
End Pointer
Begin Pointer
RESET TRANSACTI ON ( RE TR)
[ P: ] * RESET TRANSACTION
Tr ans #? 4
Ver i f y ( y/ n) ? y
[ P: ] *
Use the command RESET TRANSACTION or RE TR to reset the transaction-begin pointer
and print-begin pointers.
Usually you set the begin pointer to the transaction after the last transaction that was printed
with PRINT TRANSACTION. Reset the transaction-begin pointer after you have printed the
current transaction data. If you are using a network router that supports the last
transaction-settled pointer, the transaction-begin pointer will always protect unsettled
transactions and you will require to settle before RESET TRANSACTION which will move
the transaction-begin pointer beyond those transactions. The print-begin pointer will be reset
even if not settled.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 12-7
Transaction File Transactions
The A option resets all transaction table pointers, including the next transaction to send to the
CFN host and the next transaction to log, as well as the first transaction to print. If a number
is provided with the A option, the CFN host poll pointer is set to that transaction number.
Notes: 1) Transactions before the transaction-begin pointer will be erased as new
transactions are recorded over them. This means that if you make a mistake and
reset the transaction-begin pointer without first printing or otherwise saving the
transactions, you must correct your error immediately by resetting the
transaction-begin pointer to the correct place; otherwise transaction data could be
lost.
2) Ensure that you reset the transaction begin pointer to the next consecutive number.
If you skip numbers, some transactions will never be printed, and you will see the
message Does not exist.
3) If the number option is used it will sometimes cause some transactions not to be sent
when other transactions are sent twice or will not stop at the end of the file and will
wrap around and send all the transactions in the file to the CFN host.
How to Automatically Reset the Transaction Pointer
Use the command PURGE SITE or PU SIT to automatically reset the transaction pointer to
one greater than the last transaction number.
PURGE SI TE ( PU SI T)
[ P: ] * PURGE SITE
Ver i f y ( y/ n) ? y
[ P: ] *
This is handy to use in a command file that contains PRINT TRANSACTION to print the
transaction, and PURGE SITE to reset the transaction-begin pointer.
Note: You will ordinarily use the PURGE SITE command only if you are manually printing
transactions and using the printed record as a basis for billing.
PURGE SITE;A will reset (catch up) the transaction-begin pointer to the oldest transaction
that must remain protected without affecting the print-begin pointer. You may want to use this
command if the print-begin pointer was reset before a network settlement, followed by the
network settlement leaving the transaction-begin pointer protecting already settled
transactions.
Detailed Report
The Shift Change Package gives you the ability to have a more detailed report with a PJ
option. The disk-based PJ command gives a more detailed report on transactions than the
PRINT TRANSACTION command.
The name PJ stands for Print J ournal, but is not an abbreviation for print journal. In other
words, you have to type PJ to run this command; typing print journal will not work.
The journal referred to by the PJ command is the disk journal. To use PJ , first make sure that
you have configured your Site Controller to store a disk journal. This configuration is under
page 1 of the SYS_PAR program (refer to the Systems parameters chapter in MDE-4773
CFN III Configuration Manual for Windows XP).
Transactions Transaction File
Page 12-8 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
In using SYS_PAR to configure your site for a disk journal, specify Yes or No. If you respond
yes, J OURNAL.LOG is assumed as the name for the disk journal; the PJ command uses
J OURNAL.LOG as the default name of the file it searches to compile information.
Note: For PCI compliance, the disk journal must be enabled, even if the site is not using the
program for reports.
The PJ command has many options to give you flexibility in reviewing transactions or
tracking down a problem. These options are as follows:
For example:
PJ -C2 lists transactions on console 2.
PJ -C1-2 -S3 lists transactions on consoles 1 and 2 for POS shift 3.
PJ -N300-350 -I lists the fuel transactions within transactions 300-350.
Note: Due to PCI requirements, the account data for some Credit Cards, such as Visa

and
MasterCard

, must be masked or encrypted if stored in a file. Therefore, the card

account data displayed using the PJ command is masked for those card types.
Option Description
-Cn[-m] list journal entries for Checkpoint/Profit Point n (to m)
-Rn[-m] list journal entries for Island Card Reader n (to m)
-Un[-m] list journal entries for User/Clerk n (to m)
-Sn[-m] list journal entries for Shift n (to m)
-Dn[-m] list journal entries for Date n (to m)
-Hn[-m] list journal entries for Hour n (to m)
-An[-m] list journal entries for Pump n (to m)
-Bn[-m] list journal entries for department n (to m)
-Nx[-y] list journal entries for transaction number x (to y)
-Tx[ss] list tender type x (sub-tender type ss, for patronage entries, x=p)
-Oy[:z] length of the first and second fields of club cards
-x compressed listing (Figure 12-2 instead of Figure 12-3)
-w raw data listing
-v[n[-m]] list events only, plus for range n to m
-e include events
-g list general events only
-l print total without transaction records
-i do not include Merch records
-f do not include fuel records
-m do not include Tender records
-p list journal entries for previous days journal; (PREVIOUS.LOG)
-? print usage help
-oy(:z) length of the first (and second) field(s) of club card account numbers
[filename] if no filename is specified, J OURNAL.LOG is default
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 12-9
Transaction File Transactions
Figure 12-2: Format of Compressed Output
4792 65480 Sf t - 01 POS- 02 Cl er k- 01 01/ 18 3: 58PM $2. 99 t ax 0. 00 $4. 55
Pump- 15 Fuel - 01 Cr edi t - 3 1. 000G @1. 560 $1. 56 odo- aux-
1 2. 99 Aut o Access |
Pai d: Amex 371449*****8431 Aut h#990484 $4. 55 Chg: 0. 00
pr t Cmpr es
4793 65486 Sf t - 01 POS- 02 Cl er k- 01 01/ 18 4. 00PM $22. 18 t ax 0. 09 $22. 36
1 5. 99 C- St or e1 | 1 1. 29 Oi l Qt . | 1 14. 99 Aut o Access
Pai d: J CB 356600******0498 Aut h#777544 $22. 36 Chg: 0. 00
pr t Cpr ess
4794 65497 Sf t - 01 I CR- 13 Cl er k- 00 01/ 18 4: 01PM $0. 0 t ax 0. 00 $43. 52
Pump- 13 Fuel - 02 Cr edi t - 6 54. 404G @0. 800 $43. 52 odo- aux-
Pai d: Di scov 601100******5851 Aut h#777543 $43. 52 Chg 0. 00
pr t Cmpr es
4795 65502 Sf t - 01 POS- 02 Cl er k- 01 01/ 18 4: 01PM $0. 0 t ax 0. 00 $22. 82
Pump- 24 Fuel - 01 Cr edi t - 2 14. 625 @1. 560 $22. 82 odo- 000111110 aux- 000000031
Pai d: Wr t Exp 6900460420001234566 Aut h#200424 $22. 82 Chg 0. 00
pr t Cmpr es
4796 65505 Sf t - 01 I CR- 14 Cl er k- 00 01/ 18 4: 01PM $0. 0 t ax 0. 00 $13. 45
Pump- 14 Fuel - 02 Cr edi t - 4 16. 808G @0. 800 $13. 45 odo- aux-
Pai d: Vi sa 400555******1114 Aut h#028213 $13. 45 Chg: 0. 00
pr t Cmpr es
4797 65508 Sf t - 01 I CR- 01 Cl er k- 00 01/ 18 4. 001PM $0. 00 $35. 39
Pump- 30 Fuel - 06 Cr edi t - 5 43. 163G @0. 820 $35. 39 odo- aux-
Pai d: MC 36555****0009 Aut h#777545 $35. 39 Chg: 0. 00
$Tot al : $142. 09 $Fuel : $116. 74
Note: Account numbers are masked for some Credit Cards.
Transactions Transaction File
Page 12-10 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Figure 12-3: Format of Expanded Output
4792 65480 Sf t - 01 POS- 02 Cl er k- 01 01/ 18/ 10 3: 58PM
1. 000G @1. 560 Fuel - 01 $ 1. 56 Pump- 15 Cr edi t - 3 odo- aux-
1 2. 99 Aut o Access 2. 99 Dept # 38
Tax 0. 00
Tot al 4. 55
Pai d 4. 55 Amex 371449*****8431 Aut h# 990484
Change 0. 00
4793 65486 Sf t - 01 POS- 02 Cl er k- 01 01/ 18/ 10 4. 00PM
1 5. 99 C- St or el 5. 99 Dept # 10
1 1. 29 Oi l Qt . 1. 29 Dept # 23
1 14. 99 Aut o Access 14. 99 Dept # 38
Tax 0. 09
Tot al 22. 36
Pai d 22. 36 J CB 356600******0498 Aut h#777544
Change 0. 00
4794 65497 Sf t - 01 I CR- 13 Cl er k- 00 01/ 18/ 10 4: 01PM
54. 404G @0. 800 Fuel - 02 $ 43. 52 Pump- 13 Cr edi t - 6 odo- aux-
Tot al 43. 52
Pai d 43. 52 Di scov 601100******5851 Aut h#777543
Change 0. 00
4792 65502 Sf t - 01 POS- 02 Cl er k- 01 01/ 18/ 10 4: 01PM
14. 625G @1. 560 Fuel - 01 $ 22. 82 Pump- 24 Cr edi t - 2 odo- 000111110 aux- 000000031
Tot al 22. 82
Pai d 22. 82 Wr t Exp 6900460420001234566 Aut h#200424
Change 0. 00
4797 65508 Sf t - 01 I CR- 14 Cl er k- 00 01/ 18/ 10 4: 01PM
16. 808G @0. 800 Fuel - 02 $ 13. 45 Pump- 14 Cr edi t - 4 odo- aux-
Tot al 13. 45
Pai d 13. 45 Vi sa 400555******1114 Aut h#028213
Change 0. 00
4797 65508 Sf t - 01 I CR- 01 Cl er k- 00 01/ 18/ 10 4: 01PM
43. 163G @. 820 Fuel - 06 $35. 39 Pump- 30 Cr edi t - 5 odo- aux-
Tot al 35. 39
Pai d 35. 39 MC 365555****0009 Aut h#777545
Change 0. 00
$Tot al : $142. 09 $Fuel : $116. 74
Note: Account numbers are masked for some Credit Cards.
The first two numbers in each transaction are the transaction number and the record sequence
number from the transaction header (which is explained in the Disk journal layout chapter in
the C35923 Point of Sale and Shift Change manual).
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 13-1
Proprietary Card Format Proprietary Cards
13 Proprietary Cards
This chapter discusses the authorization and limitation codes on Proprietary (also called club
or private) Cards.
When a card is offered as payment on a CFN system, where the system looks to see if the card
must be accepted (that is, if it is a valid card) depends on how the system is configured and
what type of card is offered. The system may contact a remote computer or CFN host, or it
may consult its own local restrictions, called lockouts, which are discussed in this chapter.
Note: Proprietary Cards cannot be used to buy a car wash at Unitec

sites.
Proprietary Card Format
Privately issued cards used with the Gasboy CFN system have the following format for
information which is optically or magnetically encoded on the card:
Format: #ssssss#CCCCCCVVVVEEEE#yymmllaapx
# is a field separator.
ssssss is the CFN III system ID number, which can be 4-6 digits. It is encoded on the card
and is assigned by Gasboy. Leading zeros are significant in system ID numbers.
CCCCCCVVVVEEEE is the card information, totaling 1-19 digits in subfields (card
number, vehicle number, and employee number). These digits are encoded on the card and
may also be shown in the numbers on the front of the card.
The remaining fields are optional information, which is encoded on the card. These fields,
which are discussed in the Card Encoding Manual and in the System parameters chapter of
MDE-4773 CFN III Configuration Manual for Windows XP, include:
yymm is the expiration date: year and month. This can be 2 or 4 digits; if its 2, it is only
the year.
ll is the limitation code, which can be one or two digits.
aa is the authorization code, which can be one or two digits.
p is the price level, which can be one or two digits.
x is the restriction code, which can be one or two digits.
Once you know the format for the Proprietary Cards you want to issue, you can make the cards
with a Gasboy card encoder, have Gasboy make the cards for you, or go to a card-encoding
company.
Proprietary Cards How to Restrict Purchases
Page 13-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Restrict Purchases
There are three ways you can restrict the fuel and merchandise that can be purchased on your
Proprietary Cards that conform to the standard Gasboy format; you may assign authorization
codes, limitation codes, and/or cumulative limits to the cards.
Authorization codes determine the types of fuel and merchandise a card can access.
Limitation codes determine how much fuel can be purchased on the card in a single
transaction.
Cumulative limits are explained in Fuel Allocation and Miles-per-Gallon on page 15-1.
Lockouts
There are two types of lockout available for the CFN system, bit-mapped lockout and limited
lockout. In addition, either type of lockout may be set up as a positive or negative system. The
type of lockout used is determined by the Site Controller configuration.
Bit-mapped lockout is used with Proprietary Cards. Limited lockout can be used with
Proprietary Cards and bank cards.
A typical format for the customer information field of privately issued cards is
ccccccvvvveeee where
cccccc is the card number (a six digit number can lock out up to 999,999 cards; a five-digit
number can lock out up to 99,999 cards)
vvvv is the vehicle number
eeee is the employee number, and
ccccccvvvveeee is the account number. Account number here refers to the entire
customer-information field of the Proprietary Card. This field is usually divided into
subfields that may include a card number, vehicle number, employee number, customer
account number, or other fields. Although it may seem confusing to call the entire field the
account number, when it can contain a subfield called account number, this terminology
conforms with the track II standard as defined by the American Bankers Association
(cards have three tracks and CFN card readers read track II).
With bit-mapped lockout, only the card number (six digits in this example) is used for lockout.
With limited lockout, the entire customer information field (14 digits in this example) must be
entered for lockout.
An offset can now be set in SYS_PAR to determine what card data is used. Refer to
MDE-4773 CFN III Configuration Manual for Windows XP for more information.
Bit-mapped Lockout
Bit-mapped lockout uses less memory than limited lockout, but is less flexible.
In a system that uses bit-mapped lockout, the card number is the configurable offset group of
digits (4-8) of the section of the card that identifies the customer. The number of digits used is
configured in SYS_PAR.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 13-3
Lockouts Proprietary Cards
If your site has bit-mapped lockout, you do not require to type leading zeros when you enter a
card number. For example, to lock out card number 0056, just type 56.
How to Use Card Ranges
If your system uses bit-mapped lockout, you can specify a range of cards to be acted on by the
commands LOCK CARD, UNLOCK CARD. Use a hyphen (-) between two card numbers to
specify the range of cards to be acted on. For example, 56000-56999 specifies all cards with
card numbers 56000 through 56999. When using CHECK CARD, specifying 100-200 checks
100 cards.
Limited Lockout
Note: Only an administrator can use the limited lockout feature.
Limited lockout lets you lock out privately issued cards and other cards as well. It is more
flexible than bit-mapped lockout, but it takes up more memory.
For a system that uses limited lockout, the account number includes all the fields on the card
that identify the customer. To lock out or unlock a card, you must enter the entire account
number, and the fields must be in the order they appear on the card. The order in which the
fields appear on the transaction printout may not be the same as the order in which they appear
on the card.
For example, if your system uses Proprietary Cards with a five-digit card number, a 10-digit
account number, and a four-digit vehicle number, the number used for lockout is a 19-digit
number.
For bank cards, the account number is the entire account number as defined by the ABA
track II standards.
If your site has limited lockout you must type the leading zeros of a number, and you must
type a C before the number of a privately issued card. For example, to lock out or unlock
privately issued card number 0056300044000121132, use the LOCK CARD or UNLOCK
CARD command and type C0056300044000121132. To lock out or unlock bank card number
4842150958999, type the appropriate command and 4842150958999.
How to Use Wildcards
If your system uses limited lockout, you can use wildcards in the account numbers you specify
for the commands LOCK CARD, UNLOCK CARD, and CHECK CARD. Use a period (.) in
the account number to denote a wildcard. The period matches any digit at that position. More
than one period can be used in an account number.
For example, if you use LOCK CARD to lock out number ...464..., all cards with nine digit
account numbers, whose middle three digits are 464, will be locked out. Similarly,
...........9 specifies all 12-digit account numbers that end in 9.
484215095899. specifies account numbers 4842150958990 through 4842150958999.
Proprietary Cards Positive and Negative Lockout Options
Page 13-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
You can use wildcard lockout to lock out selected fields of the customer information. For
example, if a system uses a 14-digit account number, where the first six digits are the card
number, the next four digits are the employee number and the last four digits are the vehicle
number, you can lock out only the card number, only the employee number, only the vehicle
number, or any combination of card number, employee number, or vehicle number.
If the account number format is as given above,
To lock out employee number 1234, enter: LOCK CARD ......1234....
To lock out vehicle number 4567, enter: LOCK CARD ..........4567
To lock out the exact combination of employee number 1234 and vehicle number 4567,
enter: LOCK CARD ......12344567
If you use wildcards with the commands LOCK CARD, UNLOCK CARD, or CHECK
CARD, and there is not an exact match, the terminal will print Some valid, some not. This
does not necessarily mean that there are both valid and invalid card numbers in the group.
If you use wildcards to lock out or unlock account numbers, you cannot unlock or lock an
account number that matches the wildcard number. For example, if you use LOCK CARD to
lock out number 11.4, you cannot unlock account number 1114. If you try to unlock an account
number that matches a wildcard number that is locked out, the terminal prints Card is not
valid. If you try to lock an account number that matches a wildcard number that is unlocked,
the terminal prints Card is valid.
Positive and Negative Lockout Options
You must choose one of two card lockout options, positive lockout or negative lockout.
If you choose the negative lockout option, all cards are initially valid and you enter invalid
card numbers into the Site Controller.
If you choose the positive lockout option, all cards are initially invalid and you enter all
valid card numbers into the Site Controller.
How to Select Negative Lockout
Type UNLOCK CARD;A.
UNLOCK CARD; A ( UN CA; A)
[ P: ] * UNLOCK CARD;A
[ P: ] *
Makes all cards valid.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 13-5
Disk-based Bit-mapped Lockout Proprietary Cards
How to Select Positive Lockout
Type LOCK CARD;A.
LOCK CARD; A ( LOC CA; A)
[ P: ] * LOCK CARD;A
[ P: ] *
Makes all cards invalid.
Disk-based Bit-mapped Lockout
Disk-based bit-mapped lockout is available, depending on your configuration in SYS_PAR.
The data is stored in a file called P:LOCKOUT?.DTA, where ? is N or P, meaning negative or
positive lockouts, respectively.
If you use disk-based bit-mapped lockout, you still must have at least one lockout record in
TABLE configuration, since this is where the positive or negative status of lockout is stored.
The SYSBACK.CMD command does not backup a lockout table if the file LOCKOUT?.DTA
exists.
The LOCKOUT?.DTA file is created when either the UNLOCK CARD;A or LOCK CARD;A
command is entered. A file descriptor is opened the first time lockout is accessed. Since the
file descriptor stays open, if the lockout file is subsequently modified by means other than
lockout commands (such as copying a file over the top of it), you must reboot the site to read
in the new information.
How to Check a Cards Lockout Status
Type CHECK CARD.
CHECK CARD ( C CA)
[ P: ] * CHECK CARD;C
Account number ? C0056300044000121132
C0056300044000121132: Car d i s not
val i d
Account number ? 4842150958999
4842150958999: Car d i s val i d
Account number ?
[ P: ] *
The terminal will print the cards status. You may use the C option with the command CHECK
CARD. The site in this example has limited lockout.
Proprietary Cards How to Lock Out and Unlock Cards
Page 13-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Lock Out and Unlock Cards
To lock out invalid cards, type LOCK CARD.
LOCK CARD ( LOC CA)
[ P: ] * LOCK CARD;C
Account number ? 56
Account number ? 109
Account number ? 145
Account number ?
[ P: ] *
[ P: ] * LOCK CARD;C
Account number ?
C0056300044000121132
Account number ?
C0109200036000121159
Account number ?
C0145100029000121145
Account number ?
[ P: ] *
UNLOCK CARD ( UN CA)
[ P: ] * UNLOCK CARD;C
Account number ? 563
Account number ? 1092
Account number ? 1451
Account number ?
[ P: ] *
[ P: ] * UNLOCK CARD
Account number ? 6500-6599
[ P: ] *
[ P: ] * UNLOCK CARD;C
Account number ?
C0056300044000121132
Account number ?
C0109200036000121159
Account number ?
C0145100029000121145
Account number ?
[ P: ] *
You may use the C option with the command LOCK CARD. The site in this example has
bit-mapped lockout.
This example has limited lockout.
To unlock valid cards, type UNLOCK CARD.
You may use the C option with the command UNLOCK CARD. The site in this example has
bit-mapped lockout.
The site in this example has bit-mapped lockout; the example shows a range of numbers.
The site in this example has limited lockout.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 13-7
How to Print a Lockout List Proprietary Cards
How to Print a Lockout List
Use the command PRINT LOCKOUT or P LO to print all invalid card numbers, if you use
negative lockout, all valid card numbers, or if you use positive lockout, a range of cards.The
site in this example has limited lockout with the positive lockout option.
PRI NT LOCKOUT ( P LO)
[ P: ] * PRINT LOCKOUT
Val i d car ds ( l i mi t ed)
C0056300044000121132
C0145100029000121145
C0109200036000121159 4842150958999
[ P: ] *
[ P: ] * PRINT LOCKOUT
I nval i d car ds ( bi t _mapped)
56 102 245 534 1204 2173 2637 2739
7925 8175
[ P: ] *
The site in this example has bit-mapped lockout with the negative lockout option.
Print Card can also be used to print the lockout file in a special format.
Note: The PRINT LOCKOUT or P LO command cannot be stopped with ^C. It will continue
to run in the background until it is complete.
Authorization Codes
An authorization code is a code found on the card that lets the Site Controller look up a list of
products the card is authorized to purchase.
Authorization codes generally apply to all island transactions and console prepay
transactions. However, it is possible to configure the Site Controller to also enforce
authorization codes on postpay and to require alternate payment types if the customer is not
authorized to purchase a product (refer to SYS_PAR, page 11, Check fuel authorization
codes on postpay? Set to Yes in MDE-4773 CFN III Configuration Manual for
Windows XP (this arrangement can be used if there have been complaints of account
employees using their company cards to fill their own vehicles and bypassing the
authorization codes by postpay use of Proprietary Cards).
Since the authorization code is one or two digits, there are either 9 or 99 different codes
available. The 9 or 99 authorization codes, in turn, can each contain up to 99 fuel product
codes and merchandise codes:
The fuel product codes arepositive codes: the card holder can purchase only those fuels
whose product codes are contained in the authorization code on his or her card.
Merchandise codes, which are codes for specific products and for categories of products,
are negative codes: the card holder cannot purchase merchandise whose product code or
category code is contained in the authorization code on his or her card; the card holder
can purchase only merchandise whose code is not included in the authorization code.
Put another way, you can regard fuel product codes as unrestricted authorization codes and
merchandise codes as restricted authorization codes.
Proprietary Cards Authorization Codes
Page 13-8 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
To specify the types of products for which each privately issued card is authorized:
Determine the products you want to authorize for each card.
Decide on a unique authorization code (one or two digits long) for each group of
products you want authorized for a single card.
Encode the authorization codes on the cards, one to each card.
Assign the fuel and merchandise product codes to the corresponding authorization codes.
Products and/or categories authorized by a code are assigned with the LOAD
AUTHORIZATION command.
Each card is then authorized to pump only those fuel products assigned to the authorization
code and to purchase only those merchandise products not assigned to the authorization code
on the card.
You will probably want to set up one authorization code for each individual fuel and one for
all fuels, in addition to the combinations you require.
How to Assign Product Codes to Authorization Codes
Use the command LOAD AUTHORIZATION or LO A to define your authorization codes
and assign one or more fuel and merchandise product codes to each authorization code (fuel
and merchandise product codes-which you must set up first, before assigning product codes
to authorization codes-were assigned with the LOAD PRODUCT command).
In entering product codes with LOAD AUTHORIZATION, plain numbers indicate specific
fuel or merchandise products, and numbers preceded by an upper case or lower case c (for
example, C3 or c3) indicate merchandise categories.
You may use the C option with the command LOAD AUTHORIZATION to define more
than one authorization code at a time.
Each product code assigned to each authorization code takes up 6 bytes in the Authorization
table (refer to the Table sizes chapter of MDE-4773 CFN III Configuration Manual for
Windows XP for more information).
LOAD AUTHORI ZATI ON; C ( LO A; C)
[ P: ] * LOAD AUTHORIZATION;C
Aut h #? 1
Pr oduct code? 2
Pr oduct code? C3
Pr oduct code?
Aut h #? 2
Pr oduct code? C1
Pr oduct code? 4
Pr oduct code?
Aut h #?
[ P: ] *
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 13-9
Authorization Codes Proprietary Cards
How to Print Authorization Code Definitions
Type PRINT AUTHORIZATION.
PRI NT AUTHORI ZATI ON ( P A)
[ P: ] * PRINT AUTHORIZATION
Code Al l owed pr oduct s
1 2 C3
2 C1 4
[ P: ] *
How to Remove Product Codes
To remove product codes, proceed as follows:
1 Type REMOVE AUTHORIZATION.
REMOVE AUTHORI ZATI ON ( REM A)
[ P: ] * REMOVE AUTHORIZATION
Aut h #? 1
Pr oduct Code? 3
Pr oduct Code?
[ P: ] *
2 Enter Authorization Code.
3 Enter the Product Code.
Do not use the I option unless you are initializing in order to redefine all your
authorization codes.
CAUTION
To remove an authorization code, remove all its product codes. An authorization code is
defined only when it has product codes assigned to it.
You may use the C option with the command REMOVE AUTHORIZATION to remove
product codes from more than one authorization code.
Use the command LOAD AUTHORIZATION;I to remove all product codes from all
authorization codes, thus removing all authorization codes.
Proprietary Cards Fuel Limitation Codes
Page 13-10 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Fuel Limitation Codes
Limitation codes determine (limit) how much fuel can be purchased on the card in each
transaction.
To limit the amount of fuel that can be locally authorized for a single sale on a Proprietary
Card, you:
Determine the fuel limitations for each card, in gallons (or litres) or dollars.
Decide on a unique limitation code (one or two digits long) to represent each limitation.
Encode the limitation codes on the cards, one to each card, as with authorization codes.
Assign the limitation amounts to the appropriate limitation codes with the LOAD
LIMITATION command (discussed below).
Each card is then limited for any single transaction to the amount designated by the limitation
code on the card. Note that the limitation code on the card overrides the pumps fill limit, but
not the pumps maximum limit.
The card limit may not be exceeded in a single transaction; to purchase amounts greater than
the card limit, the card holder has to use multiple transactions.
How to Assign Fuel Limits to Fuel Limitation Codes
Use the command LOAD LIMITATION or LO LI to set the maximum fuel quantity allowed
for a limitation code. The limit can be in gallons (or litres) or dollars. To specify a dollar limit,
type a dollar sign ($) before the limit amount.
LOAD LI MI TATI ON; C ( LO LI ; C)
[ P: ] * LOAD LIMITATION;C
Li mi t at i on code? 1
Li mi t ? 20
Li mi t at i on code? 2
Li mi t ? $30
Li mi t at i on code?
[ P: ] *
You may use the C option with the command LOAD LIMITATION to assign a limit amount to
more than one limitation code at a time.
How to Print Fuel Limitation Codes
Use the command PRINT LIMITATION or P LI to print the limitation codes and the limit
amount for each code. If the limit is in dollars, a dollar sign prints in front of the amount.
PRI NT LI MI TATI ON ( P LI )
[ P: ] * PRINT LIMITATION
Li mi t at i ons
1 20. 000 2 $30. 000
[ P: ] *
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 13-11
Patron/Loyalty Cards Proprietary Cards
How to Remove a Fuel Limitation Code
Use the command REMOVE LIMITATION or REM LI to remove a limitation code.
REMOVE LI MI TATI ON ( REM LI )
[ P: ] * REMOVE LIMITATION
Li mi t at i on code? 2
[ P: ] *
You may use the C option with the command REMOVE LIMITATION to remove more than
one limitation code at a time. Use the command LOAD LIMITATION;I to remove all
limitation codes. Do not use the I option unless you are initializing in order to redefine all your
limitation codes.
Patron/Loyalty Cards
Patron numbers can now be assigned to all sales, not just to CASH sales. In addition to using
special function 67 from the console to assign a patron number to a sale, the site can be
configured to assign a patron number if the entry matches a pre-configured layout or to require
a matching patron number for reader and/or console sales.
If the site is configured to require a patron card Before then the user must enter a patron card
first, then the site will prompt Enter payment card (currently, if the site is configured to
require the patron card first, the reader prompt may be configured in the reader program, but
the console will not indicate that it requires a patron entry, it will only prompt for card swipe
the same as it prompts for payment). If it is configured to require a patron card After, then
the user must enter their payment card first, then the site will prompt Enter patron card. In
both cases, the sale will not complete until both cards are swiped. If it is configured as
Maybe, then if a user swipes a patron card before a payment card, then the site will assign
the patron number to the sale and request a payment card. Conversely, if the customer swipes a
payment card first then no patron options will apply. Refer to MDE-4773 CFN III
Configuration Manual for Windows XP for configuring this setting in the Console and Reader
sections of sys_par.
Up to ten card layouts can be configured for the site to recognize as a patron card. This
configuration is stored in the patron.ini file on the P: drive of the site controller.
Example of the Patron.ini file
The following is an example of the patron.ini file.
[CARDS]
CARD_LIST=Patron1,GBClub,Patron3
Proprietary Cards Patron/Loyalty Cards
Page 13-12 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
[Patron1]
CARD_NAME=Patron1
CARD_UPPER=9001
CARD_LOWER=9001
CARD_IS_PATRON=yes
CARD_LEN=16
CARD_LIMIT_CODE=16
CARD_AUTH_CODE=17
CARD_PRICE_LEVEL=18
[Patron2]
CARD_NAME=GBClub
CARD_UPPER=D1234D9999
CARD_LOWER=D1234D0000
CARD_IS_PATRON=yes
CARD_LEN=25
CARD_AS_PAYMENT=yes
[Patron3]
CARD_NAME=Patron3
CARD_UPPER=0001
CARD_LOWER=0000
CARD_IS_PATRON=yes
CARD_LEN=10
CARD_UPPER and CARD_LOWER identify the card range. Enter just enough digits to
uniquely identify the cards. CARD_IS_PATRON identifies this card as a patron card and must
always be yes. CARD_LEN identifies the length of the account data (up to the field separator
after the card account). This length includes the field separators and system ID of a Gasboy
club card.
Price Levels, Authorization Codes, and Limitation Codes
The keyword CARD_PRICE_LEVEL in the parton.ini file determines the price level used,
CARD_AUTH_CODE determines the authorization code used, and CARD_LIMIT_CODE
determines the limitation code use. If any of these are not defined the system default values
will be use. For Patron cards that match the Gasboy club card format, these values will be
taken from the patron (club) card (refer to Proprietary Card Format on page 13-1 for more
information).
Using the Patron Card as Payment
If the keyword CARD_AS_PAYMENT is set to yes in the parton.ini file, they system will
attempt to pay the sale with the patron card without requiring an additional card swipe.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 13-13
Attendant Cards Proprietary Cards
Attendant Cards
Attendant cards are Gasboy access cards containing the attendant ID in the last 2 digits of the
account field. The site can be configured to require an attendant card to be swiped following
any card from the island and/or consoles. It will check the system ID, the length of account
data, and the length of expiration date from the attendant card. It sets the sale limitation,
authorization, restriction and allocation number to that of the attendant card. Site lockout will
be checked for the attendant card if configured in SYS_PAR. After cards are swiped, sale will
proceed as a typical sale based on the site's configuration. Refer to CNF3 Configuration
Manual. This feature gives you the ability to track sales by full serve attendant number and can
be configured for either console or reader (or a single reader cluster) transactions.
Procedure
The attendant swipes the customer card, is prompted to enter attendant card, swipes their
attendant card, then completes the fueling.
For all credit sales, the attendant number will be stored as the clerk number. Cash purchases
are charged to the Attendants card as if it were a club card. This will be charged as tender 005
with the Attendants number as the clerk number.
Attendant responsibility can be traced using the Attendant reports configured to use the clerk
number as the attendant number. The standard clerk reports can now be used.
Other tools include:
prattend -c (this is used by the standard attendant package)
PJ -u
prtender -c
Note: For more information, refer to C35923 Point of Sale Shift Change Manual.
Reports
The reports package must be configured so that the standard attendant reports track these sales.
To set up the reports package to use the Attendant, run the SETUP command. The following
screen displays.
***** St andar d Repor t i ng Package Par amet er s *****
1. Conf i gur e End of Day r epor t s
2. Conf i gur e Shi f t r epor t s
3. Conf i gur e Cl er k r epor t s
4. Conf i gur e At t endant r epor t s
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Ent er par amet er #, or Q t o qui t :
Proprietary Cards Key Option
Page 13-14 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
1 Select option 4. Configure Attendant reports. The following screen displays.
********** St andar d Repor t i ng Package Par amet er s **********
1. Copi es t o pr i nt t o l og pr i nt er : 0
2. Copi es t o pr i nt t o r ecei pt pr i nt er : 1
3. Audi t Copi es t o pr i nt t o l og pr i nt er : 0
4. Audi t Copi es t o pr i nt t o r ecei pt pr i nt er : 0
5. Number of di gi t s i n at t endant number : 2
6. Of f set of at t endant number i n car d dat a: 0
7. Use cl er k number as at t endant number : Y
8. Tender at t endant i s r esponsi bl e f or : 0
9. Opt i onal second at t endant Tender : 3
10. Opt i onal t hi r d at t endant Tender : 005
11. Di spl ay t axes separ at e i n at t endant r epor t : N
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Ent er par amet er #, or Q t o qui t :
2 Change option 7. Use clerk number as attendant number to Y.
3 Change options 8 - 10 to required tenders.
Note: For attendant cash sales, use tender 005. This must be the last tender specified.
Key Option
The Key Option allows the operator to use smart keys at an Islander II site.
Note: The Key Option may not be compatible with 1000 Fleetkey/TopKAT and the Fleet Key
Manager Plus will not be compatible with the CFN Key Option system (refer to
Restrictions Using the CFN with Key Option System on page 13-15).
Communicating with the Site Controller
The Site Controller must be configured to work the Key Option just as other Proprietary
Cards. See the chapter Key Option in the Site Controller II Configuration Manual for specific
information.
To communicate with the Site Controller, the Key is converted into a club card format before
the data is sent. The Key Option reads the following keys:
Single Key
Employee Key (dual)
Vehicle Key (dual)
Supervisor Key (supervisor option only)
Delivery Key (fuel drop option only)
Dipstick key (dipstick option only)
Code Key
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 13-15
Key Option Proprietary Cards
Restrictions Using the CFN with Key Option System
The restrictions in using the CFN with key option system are listed below:
1 You cannot use a 1000 FleetKey key that uses PINs in a CFN system and vice-versa. On a
1000 FleetKey system, the PIN number is encrypted. On a CFN Key Option the PIN number is
decrypted.
2 In a CFN with Key Option system, if you use a code key, the odometer is not stored on the key
(for more information, refer to Lookup Program on page 13-1).
3 In a CFN w/Key Option system, if you use a code key with PIN loaded in the Lookup Table,
verification will be done by the Site Controller (for more information, refer to Lookup
Program on page 13-1).
4 The following Key data will not be used on the CFN Key Option system and their values will
be ignored:
Previous Odometer (old location)
Last Odometer (old location)
Vehicle Class
Maintenance A Odom
Maintenance A Date
Maintenance B Odom
Maintenance B Date
Maintenance C Odom
Maintenance C Date
5 CFN w/Key Option system single, dual and supervisor key limitation codes, authorization
codes, price level and restriction codes are restricted as follows:
Cannot be omitted.
Digits must be set to one for each.
Offsets at the Site Controller must be set to the following:
Limitation code =0
Authorization code =1
Price Level =2
Restrictions =3
Dollar amount restriction code is not available.
6 CFN w/Key Option system single, dual, supervisor, dipstick and delivery key Expiration
Dates are restricted as follows:
Cannot be omitted.
Digits must be set to four.
7 CFN w/Key Option system allows a Key/Card combination for dual cards with the following
restrictions:
The key/card combinations is limited to a vehicle key and an employee card.
The check digit on the vehicle key cannot include a pin check.
If the check digit on the employee card includes a pin check, the pin verification is done
by the Site controller.
8 CFN w/FleetKey system Key ID characters can only be numbers, field separators and
Supervisor characters. The Key Option system allows them to be alpha characters, as well.
Proprietary Cards Fueler ID - Fleet Packages Only
Page 13-16 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
9 CFN w/Key Option system account number on a key is 1 to 19 of the 20 key ID characters.
10 CFN w/Key Option keys may not be compatible with 1000 FleetKey/TopKAT keys. They may
be if encoded under the 1000 FleetKey/TopKAT mode and no PIN.
11 The CFN w/Key Option system does not use key numbers.The KE200 Key Encoder in the
CFN mode sets key numbers to a default value of 9999.
12 The Key Option Manager Plus will not be compatible with the CFN w/Key Option system.
13 TopKAT keys are not compatible with the CFN w/Key Option system.
Fueler ID - Fleet Packages Only
Fueler ID cards are now supported. For the card to be accepted, the system ID and site ID must
be correct for that site. The Fueler ID is set by either swiping a card or entering the ID in the
FUELER.BIN program. From then on the Fuel Point

and island reader transactions will be

marked in the disk journal with the clerk ID as the fueler ID. All pumps in the cluster assigned
to the reader the card was swiped on belong to that fueler.
Assigning a Fueler ID to a Cluster
Use the program FUELER.BIN to set the fueler ID for a cluster. The syntax is:
fueler [<cluster><fueler-ID>]
If the arguments are not provided, the current state of all fuelers is shown. Currently only
clusters 1-9 can have a fueler. Entry of a Fuel ID card generates a disk journal event type 197
with the first two characters of the text field containing the cluster number.
For reference, the Fueler ID card format is:
.xxxxxx.ssssssii.yymm2
Symbols Description
. field separator
xxxxxx system ID
ssssss site ID
ii fueler ID
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 14-1
Definitions Lookup Program
14 Lookup Program
The Lookup program is part of the Fleet Options package (which is briefly described in Site
Controller III Optional Packages on page 28-1), and it requires version 3.0 or later of the Site
Controller software.
The Lookup program lets you quickly set up accounts for customers, using these types of
cards:
code card-which can also be cardless, when a user manually enters the account number at
a keypad. In this manual, discussions of code cards must be taken as also referring to
cardless accounts.
club card (private-issue)
bank card (credit or debit card)
Under the Lookup program you do not have to encode restrictions on the cards. The
restrictions and customer information are contained in records in a lookup file.
Before the Lookup program, all the restrictions-such as gallon limit per purchase or types of
merchandise that could be bought-on a club card had to be encoded on the card itself. Now,
you can make up a group of numbered cards, say 990-999, in advance, and quickly pass them
out to your next ten club card customers. Then, in the lookup file under records 990, 991, and
so on, you enter the restrictions for each card.
If the restrictions subsequently change (for example, a company decides to let its employees
purchase 25 gallons at a time, instead of only 10) you no longer have to make up and issue
new cards. Instead, you quickly and easily change the lookup file.
Also, you do not have to create a lookup file record for each card. You can, for instance, use as
a records lookup number the field in a cards number that identifies a companys account, and
keep all cards for that company in one record. In other words, if you have a thousand cards,
you do not have to have a thousand records as long as some cards have a field in common.
Definitions
The Lookup program contains a series of menus. This section defines the prompts and fields
used on the menus.
Lookup number - the number assigned to a card or account. This number can be up to
19 digits (numeric characters only; alphabetic characters are not allowed).
Lookup type - the type of the lookup number.
There are three lookup types that apply to code cards:
N =this type of lookup matches the entire number on the code card (or cardless entry).
Applies only to code cards or manually entered code numbers.
Lookup Program Definitions
Page 14-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
P =this type of lookup matches the first part of the number on the card (P stands for the
primary or first part; the length of the primary part is set in the configuration menu).
Applies only to code cards or manually entered code numbers.
S =this type of lookup matches the last part of the number on the card (S stands for the
secondary or last part of the code that comes after the primary part). Applies only to code
cards or manually entered code numbers.
There are four types that apply to club cards:
C =club-card type. This type uses the entire number on a club card (up to a
maximum of 19 digits).
1 =this type of lookup matches field 1 of a club card. Applies only to club cards.
2 =this type of lookup matches field 2 of a club card. Applies only to club cards.
3 =this type of lookup matches field 3 of a club card. Applies only to club cards.
There is one type that applies to bank cards:
B =bank-card type, including credit and Debit Cards.
Each lookup number is not necessarily unique because two or more lookup types could have
the same lookup number, especially when P, S, 1, 2, or 3 is the lookup type. However, each
combination of lookup number and lookup type is unique. For example, there could be two
lookups 444, one of type S and another of type C, but there can be only one 444S or one 444C.
Tender type - usually 0. The choices are: 0=Club, 1=Checking, 2=Savings, 3=Credit,
SPACEBAR=User-entered (to be entered by customer)
Tender subtype - usually 0. If the tender type is club (0) or credit (3), the tender subtype is
a way of specifying which type of club or credit account is used, according to the table on
the next page. The first digit in each number is the tender type and the other two digits are
the tender subtype:
Code Tender Code Tender
000 Gasboy club card 332 Tesoro
SM
001 Country Energy
SM
regional club card 333 Sinclair

Fleet
002 Country Energy local club card 334 Gascard
005 Attendant/Access card 335 Amerada Hess
SM
100 Debit checking 336 Voyager
200 Debit savings 337 J CB
SM
300 Bank credit card 338 Gulf

301 Hand Authorized credit card 339 Fuelman

SM
302 Wright Express
SM
card 340 IAES
303 American Express

card 341 Country Mark

304 VISA card 342 Southern States
305 MasterCard 343 Amoco

Multi card
306 Discover
SM
card 344 Amoco Torch
307 FINA

card 345 Amoco Transi card

308 AMOCO card 346 MasterCard Fleet
309 CITGO

Plus card 347 VISA Fleet

310 Diamond Shamrock
SM
card 348 Amoco Co Brand
311 Texaco

card 349 API

312 Sinclair card 350 Citgo Fleet
313 Carte Blanche
SM
card 351 Gasboy Fleet One
314 Diners Club
SM
card 352 Gasboy Debit
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 14-3
Definitions Lookup Program
(Tender subtype is also discussed in the C35923 Point of Sale and Shift Change Manual).
Account fields 1-3 - one-three fields of your choosing, such as employee number, vehicle
number, license plate number. Set these fields with the programs Configuration menu.
Account fields 1-3 constitute the number assigned to a card; the same number in one
or two account fields can be assigned to more than one card, but no two cards can have all
three fields identical.
The factor that determines how many account fields can be used is the tender type
assigned to the record, not the type of card used. Any record whose tender type is not 0-for
example, bank-card records with a tender type of 3-uses only the first account field. Club
records (tender type 0) can use one, two, or all three account fields.
The first account field can have up to 20 digits if it is the only account field used.
If the tender type is not 0, only numeric digits are allowed in the one field that can be used. If
the tender type is 0, there are five exceptions to the numbers-only rule:
a blank account field means the customer is to enter the digits for this field before he can
pump fuel. This applies to all lookup types.
an account field with N as its only character means the Site Controller will use the entire
lookup number (or as much of it as fits in the field) to identify the account in the
transaction printout. This applies to lookup types N, P, or S.
an account field with P as its only character means the Site Controller will use the primary
part of the lookup number to identify the account in the transaction printout. This applies
to lookup types N, P, or S.
an account field with S as its only character means the Site Controller will use the
secondary part of the lookup number to identify the account in the transaction printout.
This applies to lookup types N, P, or S.
an account field with R as its only character means the Site Controller will duplicate the
corresponding field on the card to identify the account in the transaction printout. This
applies to lookup types C, 1, 2, or 3.
315 Customer charge 353 Gasboy Program 1
316 Employee charge 354 Gasboy Program 2
317 Phillips 66

card 355 Gasboy Program 3

318 Comdata

card 356 SPS Fleet

319 CCIS card 357 T-Chek
320 Coastal

card 358 Shell

Go
321 Buypass Fleet card 359 United Farmers Association (UFA)
322 Generic fleet card 360 Ultramar
SM
Diamond Shamrock Fleet
323 PHH Fleet Amer card 361 Quarles
SM
324 CITGO Red card 365 CITGO PrePaid
325 CITGO Silver card 366 CITGO Black (Plus)
326 Quick Fuel 400 Cash
327 Transcash 401 Food stamps
328 NTS Fuel 402 Checks
329 TIC 403 Full-serve
330 EFS 500 Unpaid
331 Trendar 501 Instant-on denial
Code Tender Code Tender
Lookup Program Definitions
Page 14-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Two account field examples:
1 A customer has account 123456 and he swipes a code card encoded with that number or enters
it at a PIN pad. The primary code length is configured to 3. In the lookup file, there is a record
123 type P (and no record 123456 type N). The tender type of that record is 0 (club). Account
field 1 is P and is configured to be 6 digits long; account field 2 is S, configured to be 9 digits
long; account field 3 is blank and configured to be 4 digits long.
When the card is used, the customer is asked to enter account field 3-for example, 7890. The
Lookup program then substitutes the club card (from tender type 0) numbered
0001230000004567890 in place of the code card in the transaction printout, just as if the
customer had swiped/entered that club cards number. Note the leading zeros automatically
added to fill out account fields 1 and 2 to 6 and 9 digits.
2 A customer uses club card 1234 123456789 1234. In the lookup file there is a record 1234 type
1 (and no 1234 123456789 1234 type C). The tender type for the record is 0 (club). Account
fields 1, 2, and 3 are each set to R.
The club card shown in the transaction printout is 1234 123456789 1234, but the limitation,
authorization, price level and other restrictions enforced on that transaction were those in the
record, not those encoded on the club card.
Exp date: The expiration date of the account. Enter the date as MM/YY or M/YY. For
example, J anuary of 2000 would be 1/00.
Limitation code: Limitation code; determines how much fuel can be purchased on the card in
a single transaction. These codes are loaded with the LOAD LIMITATION command.
Auth code: Authorization code; determines the types of fuel and merchandise a card can
access. These levels are entered with the LOAD AUTHORIZATION command.
Price level: Determines what price will be charged per gallon. 0=fallback; 1=cash price;
2=credit price; 3=debit price; 4-79=club prices. These levels are entered with the LOAD
PRICE command.
Message: The optional message displayed when the card is used.
Rejection code: 0=okay; any other number means the card will be rejected when presented by
the customer and Denied will be displayed on the reader. This can be useful to temporarily
block access when payment is overdue.
PIN: The optional PIN for this account.
Require odometer: Indicates whether the card user is required to enter the odometer reading;
the default is no. If an odometer reading is required, the Enter odometer step in the Site
Controllers READER configuration program must be set to optional. If an odometer reading
is required and the Ask for $ amount field is set to no, set the Digits in restriction code in
SYS_PAR to 1 or 2; if an odometer reading is required and the Ask for $ amount field is set to
yes, set the Digits in restriction code in SYS_PAR to 2.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 14-5
Menus Lookup Program
Require manual #: Indicates whether the card user is required to manually enter a number,
such as a vehicle number; the default is no. If a manual number is required, the Enter
auxiliary number step in the Site Controllers READER configuration program must be set
to optional. If a manual number is required and the Ask for $ amount field is set to no, set the
Digits in restriction code in SYS_PAR to 1 or 2; if a manual number is required and the Ask
for $ amount field is set to yes, set the Digits in restriction code in SYS_PAR to 2.
Require PIN: Indicates whether the card user is required to enter a Personal Identification
Number; the default is no. If a PIN is required, the Enter PIN step in the Site Controllers
READER configuration program must be set to optional. If a PIN is required and the Ask for
$ amount field is set to no, set the Digits in restriction code in SYS_PAR to 1 or 2; if a PIN is
required and the Ask for $ amount field is set to yes, set the Digits in restriction code in
SYS_PAR to 2.
Ask for $ amount: Should the customer be asked to enter a dollar amount for fuel to be
purchased; the default is no. If the customer enters an amount, the pump will stop once that
amount has been pumped. The customer can either enter an amount or press FILL. If a
$ amount is required, the Enter amount step in the Site Controllers READER configuration
program must be set to optional. If a $ amount is required, set the Digits in restriction code in
SYS_PAR to 2.
Records
The Lookup program stores its data in records. Each lookup number and lookup type together
require one record (more than one record can contain the same lookup number, but in that
case, each record will have a different lookup type).
All records have the same number of fields (18 at the time this manual was written), but few, if
any, records will have all fields filled in.
The records are stored in a file named LOOKUP.DTA.
Menus
You call up the Lookup program by typing LOOKUP at the system prompt [P:]* and press
Enter. You run the Lookup program through a series of menus and submenus.
Note: The menus in this chapter are shown as they initially appear on the screen, where one
field (usually the first) is automatically selected. However, as you select other fields, the
instructions at the bottom of the menu change, depending on which field is selected.
Short and Long Menus
Most menus are one of two types: short or long. A short menu lets you enter only a lookup
number and, optionally, a lookup type.
Once you enter the lookup number (and lookup type) on a short menu, a long menu is
displayed that contains all fields. You can then add or delete records, edit fields, and so on.
Lookup Program Main Menu
Page 14-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Default Actions in Fields
When you first see some long menus-such as Search and replace, Output everything to ASCII
merge file, or List lookup records-the fields will be filled in with a default action with
parentheses around it. For instance, you might see (any), (replace), or (print).
These default actions are explained in the sections on the menus that contain them.
Main Menu
When you enter LOOKUP to run the program, the Main menu automatically comes up on the
screen. You can select an item from a menu by typing its number, its first letter, or the whole
name. You can also use the up and down cursor keys to place the cursor arrow beside the item
you want to select. Once you have selected an item, press Enter to call up that item.
Mai n menu
Lookup f i l e mai nt enance
0. Qui t
1. Updat e f r omkeyboar d
2. Mer ge updat es t o/ f r omf i l e
3. Li st l ookup r ecor ds
4. Conf i gur at i on
5. Opt i mi ze
Pl ease sel ect f r omt he above menu
and pr ess Ent er - >
Each of the main menus items 1-5 is explained below in its own section.
To use the Lookup program for the first time, youll probably want to start with Configuration
to set up the three optional account fields. When you have set up those three fields (or only one
or two of them, as you prefer), go to the Update from keyboard item.
Update from Keyboard
Item 1 on the Main menu is Update from keyboard.
Updat e f r omkeyboar d
Add/ Del et e/ Edi t l ookup r ecor ds
0. Qui t
1. Add new r ecor ds
2. Del et e r ecor ds
3. Edi t exi st i ng r ecor ds
4. Sear ch and r epl ace
Pl ease sel ect f r omt he above
menu and pr ess Ent er - >
Start with the Add new records item.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 14-7
Update from Keyboard Lookup Program
Add New Records
The first menu in this item has the short form.
Add new r ecor ds
Pr ess ESCAPE t o exi t
Lookup number - > :
Lookup t ype :
Ent er l ookup number
Once you enter a lookup number and press Enter, the prompt changes to:
Enter lookup type (N,P,S=Number,Pri,Sec; C,1,2,3=Club,sub; B=Bank).
Add new r ecor ds, l oad f i el ds f or new r ecor d
up/ down ar r ows move cur sor , pr ess - > when done, Pr ess ESCAPE t o exi t
Lookup number * 123
Lookup t ype * N
Tender t ype - > : 0
Tender subt ype : 0
Acct 1 :
Acct 2 :
Acct 3 :
Exp dat e : 0/ 0
Li mi t at i on code : 0
Aut h code : 0
Pr i ce l evel : 0 Requi r e odomet er : No
Message : ( none) Requi r e manual # : No
Rej ect i on code : 0 Requi r e PI N : No
PI N : ( none) Ask f or $ amount : No
Ent er t ender t ype ( 0=Cl ub, 1=Checki ng, 2=Savi ngs, 3=Cr edi t ) .
Pr ess SPACE t hen Ent er f or user ent er ed
N is preselected as the default. Press Enter to select N, or type another entry, and press
Enter. When you press Enter, the screen changes to a long menu:
To add data to the fields, use the up and down arrow keys to position the cursor beside the
field you want. Type your data, then press Enter.
When you finish entering data into fields for this record, press the right arrow key, . A
prompt asks Is all the above correct? [y]. Press N and then Enter and make any required
changes, or press Enter or Y to continue on.
When you press Enter or Y you are returned to the previous Add new records short menu
so you can enter additional codes. If you have no additional records to enter, press ESC to
return to the Update menu.
Note: In the above menu, the * (asterisk) in front of the first two fields (lookup number and
lookup type) means that you cannot change the data in those fields.

Lookup Program Update from Keyboard

Page 14-8 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Delete Records
The Delete item starts with a short menu. From this menu, you can delete records either
individually or globally. Global deletes include deleting a range of records, say, 1000-1050.
Sel ect and del et e r ecor ds, sel ect r ecor d t o del et e
Pr ess ESCAPE t o exi t
Lookup number - > :
Lookup t ype :
Ent er l ookup number
Pr ess Ent er or ent er r ange f or gl obal del et e
Individual Record Deletions
At the menu shown above, enter a lookup number and press Enter. The prompt changes to:
Enter lookup type (N,P,S=Number,Pri,Sec; C,1,2,3=Club,sub; B=Bank)
Press Backspace then Enter for ANY.
N is preselected as the default. Press Enter to select N, or type another entry, and press
Enter. (See above for selecting ANY). When you press Enter, the screen changes to a long
menu if the record is found.
Sel ect and del et e r ecor ds, sel ect r ecor d t o del et e
Pr ess ESCAPE t o exi t
Lookup number : 123
Lookup t ype : N
Tender t ype : 0
Tender subt ype : 0
Acct 1 :
Acct 2 :
Acct 3 :
Exp dat e : 0/ 0
Li mi t at i on code : 0
Aut h code : 0
Pr i ce l evel : 0 Requi r e odomet er : No
Message : ( none) Requi r e manual # : No
Rej ect i on code : 0 Requi r e PI N : No
PI N : ( none) Ask f or $ amount : No
Del et e t hi s r ecor d? ( y/ n)
Press Y to delete or N to leave the record. You are then returned to the short menu so you
can delete additional records. If you have no further records to delete, press Esc to return to
the Update menu.
If the record you entered at the short menu is not found, the long menu does not appear and
this prompt is displayed: Record not found, press any key to continue.
Global Delete and (any) Fields
At the short Delete menu (the one where just the lookup number and lookup type are listed),
you can select global delete in one of two ways:
with no lookup number or lookup type entered
with a range of lookup numbers and, optionally, a lookup type entered. Enter a range of
lookup numbers with no spaces: 1200-1250. You can also shorten the second number
where applicable, like this: 1200-50.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 14-9
Update from Keyboard Lookup Program
If you select global delete with no lookup number or type, this long menu is displayed with
all fields initially shown with the default (any):
Gl obal del et e, sel ect f i el ds t o mat ch
up/ down ar r ows move cur sor , pr ess - > when done, Pr ess ESCAPE t o exi t
Lookup number : ( any)
Lookup t ype - > : ( any)
Tender t ype : ( any)
Tender subt ype : ( any)
Acct 1 : ( any)
Acct 2 : ( any)
Acct 3 : ( any)
Exp dat e : ( any)
Li mi t at i on code : ( any)
Aut h code : ( any)
Pr i ce l evel : ( any) Requi r e odomet er : ( any)
Message : ( any) Requi r e manual # : ( any)
Rej ect i on code : ( any) Requi r e PI N : ( any)
PI N : ( any) Ask f or $ amount : ( any)
Ent er l ookup t ype ( C=Cl ub, B=Bank, N=Number , A=Al l )
If you select global delete with a range of lookup numbers and, optionally, a lookup type on
the short Delete menu, a long menu is displayed that shows the range of lookup numbers and
optional type you entered. All other fields have the (any) default, like the menu shown
above.
The any default for each field is a search parameter that matches any value for that field-for
example, any price level, any tender type, any PIN, etc.
In place of any, you can substitute a specific value-for example, a price level of 3, a tender
type of credit, a 1482 PIN number, and so on. However, you cannot use a range of values in
any field other than lookup number; you cannot enter price levels of 2-5, for instance.
When you replace any in a field with a specific value, you are limiting the search
parameters. For instance, if you want to delete some or all of the records that have a tender
type of checking, you would enter 1 (1=checking) into the tender-type field, and the program
would then find all those records and only those records; it would not find records with club,
savings, credit, or customer-entered tender types.
When you have entered specific values for records you want to delete, press to begin the
search. The program will search through all records, stopping at each one that matches the
specific value(s) you have entered and asking if you want to delete that record. If you want
the program to automatically delete all matching records without asking you about them one
by one, press A.
Edit Existing Records
The short Edit menu looks like this. Enter a lookup number or a range and a lookup type.
Alternatively, you can select global edit, with or without a range.
Edi t exi st i ng r ecor ds, sel ect r ecor d t o edi t
Pr ess ESCAPE t o exi t
Lookup number - > :
Lookup t ype :
Ent er l ookup number
Pr ess Ent er or ent er r ange f or gl obal edi t

Lookup Program Update from Keyboard

Page 14-10 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
If you enter the lookup number and lookup type, the long menu appears, with its fields filled
in with that records data.
If you select global edit, the long menu appears with each field shown with the default (any).
Replace any in one or more fields with the search parameters for the records you want to edit.
The program will then search through the lookup file, stopping at each record that meets the
search parameters and asking if you want to edit that record. Note that the records will not be
displayed in numeric order.
Edit a record by using the up and down arrow keys to position the cursor at the fields you
want to change and enter your changes.
Search and Replace
When you select the Search and replace item, the long menu appears with each field shown
with the (any) default. For each field you want to change, replace any with the existing value.
For instance, if you want to change J anuary 2004 expiration dates to J anuary 2005, enter 1/04
in the expiration field.
Make t he same changes on sever al r ecor ds, set r epl acement val ues
up/ down ar r ows move cur sor , pr ess - > when done, Pr ess ESCAPE t o exi t
Sear ch f or Repl ace wi t h
Lookup number * ( any) * ( l eave al one)
Lookup t ype * ( any) * ( l eave al one)
Tender t ype : ( any) - > : ( l eave al one)
Tender subt ype : ( any) : ( l eave al one)
Account f i el d 1 : ( any) : ( l eave al one)
Account f i el d 2 * ( any) * ( l eave al one)
Account f i el d 3 * ( any) * ( l eave al one)
Exp dat e : 1/ 97 : ( l eave al one)
Li mi t at i on code : ( any) : ( l eave al one)
Aut h code : ( any) : ( l eave al one)
Pr i ce l evel : ( any) : ( l eave al one)
Message : ( any) : ( l eave al one)
Rej ect i on code : ( any) : ( l eave al one)
PI N : ( any) : ( l eave al one)
Ent er t ender t ype ( 0=Cl ub, 1=Checki ng, 2=Savi ngs, 3=Cr edi t )
r epl acement val ue
Pr ess SPACE t hen Ent er f or user ent er ed
_______
Press to call up the second Search menu, which in this expiration-date example looks like
this:
(The Search and replace menu is too long to fit on one screen. If you want to replace the
remaining four items, scroll down to them with the down arrow).
To change the expiration date, press the down arrow until the cursor is beside the
expiration-date field in the Replace with column and enter 1/05.
After you press to start the search-and-replace operation, the Lookup program begins to
search all the records. It stops at the first one that matches the J anuary 2003 expiration date
and prompts you:
Replace this record? (y/n or A=replace all matching records without prompting).
Follow the instructions. The bottom of the screen will show the percentage of records that the
program has examined for a match to your search parameters.

MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 14-11
Merge Updates to/from File Lookup Program
Merge Updates to/from File
The Merge menu looks like this. The Merge menu, in general, applies to companies with more
than one site. It helps you transfer lookup files, usually from one computer to another.
Mer ge updat es t o/ f r omf i l e
Mer ge changes t o/ f r omanot her comput er
0. Qui t
1. Out put ever yt hi ng t o ASCI I mer ge f i l e
2. Append changes t o ASCI I mer ge f i l e
3. I nput f r omASCI I mer ge f i l e
4. Mer ge i nput f r omASCI I mer ge f i l e
Pl ease sel ect f r omt he above menu and pr ess Ent er -
>
The LOOKUP.DTA file that the data is being transferred from is the source file; the
LOOKUP.DTA file that will receive the data is the target file. The ASCII merge file is the
vehicle for transferring the data from the source to the target (when the output is in ASCII
files, these files are not in a form that can be easily read by people; they are designed to be
read by another Lookup program).
Usually, it is not a good idea to update a target LOOKUP.DTA file by simply copying the
source LOOKUP.DTA file. Replacing one file with another will change the configuration in
the target LOOKUP.DTA file, as well as erase any records that may have come from a third
Lookup program. Instead, use the Merge menu items to update LOOKUP.DTA files.
Copying from a Source File
You copy records from a source file with either the Output everything to ASCII merge file
item or the Append changes to ASCII merge file item:
The Output everything to ASCII merge file item lets you copy all records to an ASCII
merge file from the source file. Any data in an old version of the ASCII merge file will be
erased.
The Lookup program then keeps track of any records you change in the source file after
you use the Output everything or Append changes item.
The Append changes to ASCII merge file item lets you copy to an ASCII merge file all
the changes that have occurred in the source file since you last used the Output or Append
item. The ASCII merge file can then be used to create or update the data in target files on
other PCs or Site Controllers.
When you output or append to an ASCII merge file, you see the long menu listing the fields.
For each field, the default (replace) is shown. Replace does not affect the data to be included
in the ASCII merge file; all the data in all fields will be in the file. Instead, replace indicates
whether or not the data for a given field in the ASCII merge file will replace (overwrite) the
data for that same field when the Merge input from ASCII merge file item uses the ASCII
merge file to update a target file.
Lookup Program Merge Updates to/from File
Page 14-12 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Output Everything to ASCII Merge File
The Output item starts with a long menu. Each field has the designation (replace) or (leave).
The very first time you use the Output item, (replace) is shown for each field. If you have
used Output before, fields that you changed to (leave) will be shown that way, on the
assumption that you may well want to make the same changes again.
Out put ever yt hi ng i n mer ge f or mat t o f i l e, sel ect f i el ds t o mer ge
Pr ess ESCAPE t o exi t
Lookup number * ( r epl ace)
Lookup t ype * ( r epl ace)
Tender t ype : ( r epl ace)
Tender subt ype : ( r epl ace)
Account f i el d 1 : ( r epl ace)
Account f i el d 2 : ( r epl ace)
Account f i el d 3 : ( r epl ace)
Exp dat e : ( r epl ace)
Li mi t at i on code : ( r epl ace)
Aut h code : ( r epl ace)
Pr i ce l evel : ( r epl ace) Requi r e odomet er : ( r epl ace)
Message : ( r epl ace) Requi r e manual # : ( r epl ace)
Rej ect i on code : ( r epl ace) Requi r e PI N : ( r epl ace)
PI N : ( r epl ace) Ask f or $ amount : ( r epl ace)
I s al l t he above cor r ect ? [ y]
If you want to change any of the fields, enter N to respond to the Is all the above correct?
prompt. Use the up and down arrow keys to position the cursor beside the field(s) you want to
change. For each field, the prompt Merge this field? (y/n) is displayed.
If you decide not to replace the data in a field in the target file, (replace) changes to (leave).
Leave means that, when you use this ASCII merge file for input, the data for that field in a
target file will not be overwritten by the data in this ASCII merge file.
Make the changes you want, then press when you are finished.
When you press Enter to respond to the Is all the above correct? [y] prompt, you are asked
to enter the name of the ASCII merge file. Do not add an extension to the files name because
.ASC will be added automatically.
The program copies all records to the ASCII merge file. When finished, it displays the
number of records processed, which is also the number of records in the lookup file.
If the program encounters a problem in creating the ASCII merge file, an error message
appears. The most common problem is a full disk, especially if the output file is on a floppy
diskette. Check the disk or diskette, delete some files if required, and recreate the ASCII
merge file.
Append Changes to ASCII Merge File
This item appends to the designated ASCII merge file all changes that have occurred in the
source file since the last time you used the Output everything to ASCII merge file or
Append changes to ASCII merge file item. Follow the instructions above for the Output
item to use this Append item.

MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 14-13
Merge Updates to/from File Lookup Program
Copying to a Target File
Use the Input and Merge items to read data into a target LOOKUP.DTA file through an ASCII
merge file created from a source LOOKUP.DTA file.
The Input item lets you select which fields in the target file will be replaced (overwritten)
by the data for those fields in the ASCII merge file.
The Merge item automatically overwrites all fields in the target file that were tagged with
replace when the Output or Append item was used to make the ASCII merge file.
Input from ASCII Merge File
The version of the long Input menu that you see the very first time you use it shows each field
with (replace). However, if you have used the menu previously, the changes you made from
replace to leave will still be shown-the assumption being that what you have done before, you
may well want to do again in the same way.
Mer ge sel ect ed f i el ds f r omASCI I mer ge f i l e, sel ect f i el ds t o mer ge
Pr ess ESCAPE t o exi t
Lookup number * ( r epl ace)
Lookup t ype * ( r epl ace)
Tender t ype : ( r epl ace)
Tender subt ype : ( r epl ace)
Account f i el d 1 : ( l eave)
Account f i el d 2 : ( l eave)
Account f i el d 3 : ( l eave)
Exp dat e : ( r epl ace)
Li mi t at i on code : ( l eave)
Aut h code : ( r epl ace)
Pr i ce l evel : ( l eave) Requi r e odomet er :
( r epl ace)
Message : ( r epl ace) Requi r e manual # :
( r epl ace)
Rej ect i on code : ( r epl ace) Requi r e PI N :
( r epl ace)
PI N : ( r epl ace) Ask f or $ amount :
( r epl ace)
I s al l t he above cor r ect ? [ y]
A sample version of the Input menu looks like this:
Replace means that the current data for that field in the target LOOKUP.DTA file will be
overwritten by the data in the ASCII merge file.
Leave means that the data for that field in the target LOOKUP.DTA file will not be changed
by the data in the ASCII merge file.
To change fields, answer the Is all the above correct? [y] prompt by entering N. Use the up
and down arrow keys to position the cursor by each field you want to change, then respond to
the Merge this field? (y/n) prompt. At the end of the menu or when you press , you will
again be asked if all the above is correct.
When you press Enter at the Is all the above correct? [y] prompt, you are prompted:
Enter filename of ASCII merge file without the extension (.ASC assumed)
When you enter a filename, the Lookup program processes the ASCII data and copies the
fields you indicated to the target LOOKUP.DTA file. When finished, it displays the number of
records processed, which is also the number of records in the ASCII merge file.

Lookup Program List Records

Page 14-14 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Merge Input from ASCII Merge File
As explained above, the Input from ASCII merge file item lets you override the
replace/leave choices that were made when the ASCII merge file was created. The Merge
input from ASCII merge file item does not let you override those choices.
The long menu is displayed with all fields shown as replace, and you are asked for the name
of the ASCII merge file to merge from. When you enter the name, the merging process
automatically starts.
List Records
Three of the List menu items, List records to a text file, Unsorted list of records, and Sorted
list of records, place lookup records in a text file or on the screen. These three items each use
two long menus.
Li st l ookup r ecor ds
Li st r ecor ds i n var i ous f or ms
0. Qui t
1. Li st r ecor ds t o a t ext f i l e
2. Di spl ay a t ext f i l e
3. Unsor t ed l i st of r ecor ds
4. Sor t ed l i st of r ecor ds
Pl ease sel ect f r omt he above menu and pr ess Ent er -
>
The first long menu shows each Lookup field with either print or skip; use this menu to
specify which fields will be included in the list you are compiling. For instance, you
might reduce the screen full of fields to, say, only 3 or 4 fields.
The second long menu sets search parameters for which fields are to be included in the
file you are compiling; each field starts with any, and you change that to limit the
included records-for example, only those with an expiration date of 6/99 and a price
level of 2.
Unlike the ASCII merge files created in the Merge menu, the files created in the List menu
can be easily read by people.
List Records to a Text File
This item copies (or prints) records to a file. The file is stored under a filename with a
.PRT extension.
You will usually use this item if you want to subsequently print the text file on a printer or
display it on the screen. You would first list selected records to a file, then later print the file
at a printer or use the Display a text file item to put it on the screen.
Sor t ed l i st of r ecor ds t o t ext f i l e, sel ect f i el ds t o pr i nt
Pr ess ESCAPE t o exi t
Lookup number * ( pr i nt )
Lookup t ype * ( pr i nt )
Tender t ype : ( pr i nt )
Tender subt ype : ( pr i nt )
Account f i el d 1 : ( ski p)
Account f i el d 2 : ( ski p)
Account f i el d 3 : ( ski p)
Exp dat e : ( pr i nt )
Li mi t at i on code : ( pr i nt )
Aut h code : ( pr i nt )
Pr i ce l evel : ( ski p) Requi r e odomet er : ( ski p)
Message : ( ski p) Requi r e manual # : ( ski p)
Rej ect i on code : ( ski p) Requi r e PI N : ( ski p)
PI N : ( ski p) Ask f or $ amount : ( ski p)
I s al l t he above cor r ect ? [ y]
Sor t ed l i st of r ecor ds t o t ext f i l e, sel ect f i el ds t o mat ch
up/ down ar r ows move cur sor , pr ess - > when done, Pr ess ESCAPE t o exi t
Sear ch f or
Lookup number - > : ( any)
Lookup t ype : ( any)
Tender t ype : ( any)
Tender subt ype : ( any)
Account f i el d 1 : ( any)
Account f i el d 2 : ( any)
Account f i el d 3 : ( any)
Exp dat e : 6/ 99
Li mi t at i on code : ( any)
Aut h code : ( any)
Pr i ce l evel : 2 Requi r e odomet er : ( any)
Message : ( any) Requi r e manual # : ( any)
Rej ect i on code : ( any) Requi r e PI N : ( any)
PI N : ( any) Ask f or $ amount : ( any)
Ent er l ookup number or r ange
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 14-15
List Records Lookup Program
Here is a sample of the first List records menu:
The version of the List records menu you see the very first time you use it shows each field
with (print). However, if you have used the menu previously, the changes you made from
print to skip will still be shown-the assumption being that what you have done before, you
may well want to do again in the same way.
If you want to change any of the fields, enter N to respond to theIs all the above correct?[y]
prompt. Use the up and down arrow keys to position the cursor beside any field whose status
you want to change from print to skip. Those fields will not be copied to the file you are
creating.
When you press Enter to respond to the Is all the above correct? [y] prompt, a second long
menu is displayed:
Enter the parameters to designate which records you want the new file to be compiled from,
such as the example cited above of an expiration date of 6/99 and a price level of 2.
When you finish entering fields to match and press , you are prompted to enter the
filename of the output file without an extension (.PRT will automatically be added as the
extension).

Lookup Program List Records

Page 14-16 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Display a Text File
Use the Display item to display on the screen files that you created with the List records to a
text file item. You can use this item to inspect a file before sending it to the printer.
When you select this item, you see this prompt:
Enter filename to list
When you enter a filename, include its extension. That file will then be displayed on
the screen. Note that the bottom lines of the display contain these instructions:
Display contents of file filename. ### lines found
Use arrows to scroll screen. Press ESCAPE to exit.
Use the cursor arrow keys to display any parts of the file that might run off the screen, either
to the right if the line length is too long, or down if there are too many records for one screen.
If you enter the name of a file that does not exist, this message appears:
File filename not found, please re-enter.
Unsorted List of Records
The Unsorted item creates a list of unsorted records and displays it on the screen (or prints
it to the screen).
Unsor t ed l i st of r ecor ds on t he scr een, sel ect f i el ds t o pr i nt
Pr ess ESCAPE t o exi t
Lookup number * ( pr i nt )
Lookup t ype * ( pr i nt )
Tender t ype : ( pr i nt )
Tender subt ype : ( pr i nt )
Account f i el d 1 : ( pr i nt )
Account f i el d 2 : ( pr i nt )
Account f i el d 3 : ( pr i nt )
Exp dat e : ( pr i nt )
Li mi t at i on code : ( pr i nt )
Aut h code : ( pr i nt )
Pr i ce l evel : ( pr i nt ) Requi r e odomet er : ( pr i nt )
Message : ( pr i nt ) Requi r e manual # : ( pr i nt )
Rej ect i on code : ( pr i nt ) Requi r e PI N : ( pr i nt )
PI N : ( pr i nt ) Ask f or $ amount : ( pr i nt )
I s al l t he above cor r ect ? [ y]
The first time you use this item, the long menu will be displayed with all fields at the (print)
default:
If you have used this item before, any changes you made from print to skip will still be
shown-the assumption being that what you have done before, you may well want to do again
in the same way.
If you want to change any of the fields, enter N to respond to the Is all the above correct? [y]
prompt. Use the up and down arrow keys to position the cursor beside any field whose status
you want to change from print to skip.
Unsor t ed l i st of r ecor ds on t he scr een, sel ect f i el ds t o mat ch
up/ down ar r ows move cur sor , pr ess - > when done, Pr ess ESCAPE t o exi t
Sear ch f or
Lookup number - > : ( any)
Lookup t ype : ( any)
Tender t ype : ( any)
Tender subt ype : ( any)
Account f i el d 1 : ( any)
Account f i el d 2 : ( any)
Account f i el d 3 : ( any)
Exp dat e : ( any)
Li mi t at i on code : ( any)
Aut h code : ( any)
Pr i ce l evel : ( any) Requi r e odomet er : ( any)
Message : ( any) Requi r e manual # : ( any)
Rej ect i on code : ( any) Requi r e PI N : ( any)
PI N : ( any) Ask f or $ amount : ( any)
Ent er l ookup number or r ange
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 14-17
Configuration Lookup Program
When you press Enter to respond to the Is all the above correct? [y] prompt, a second long
menu is displayed:
When you finish entering fields to match and press , the program starts processing the
lookup file. When it finishes, it will automatically display the list on the screen.
Sorted List of Records
The Sorted item performs the same function in the same way as the Unsorted item except that
the records are sorted by lookup number.
Configuration
Use this configuration menu to set the three account fields to be whatever you want.
Enter:
the new name of each field (to replace Field # name)
the prompt that you want to have displayed on the long menu when the cursor is at this
field
the length of the field (the number of digits to be entered into the field when you are filling
out records). If you change the length of any of the fields or the primary code, you must
then use the Optimize item to change all the records to match the new lengths.
Set gl obal par amet er s
up/ down ar r ows move cur sor , pr ess - > when done, Pr ess ESCAPE t o exi t
Fi el d 1 name - >:
Fi el d 2 name :
Fi el d 3 name :
Fi el d 1 pr ompt : Ent er acct f i el d 1
Fi el d 2 pr ompt : Ent er acct f i el d 2
Fi el d 3 pr ompt : Ent er acct f i el d 3
Fi el d 1 l engt h : 6
Fi el d 2 l engt h : 9
Fi el d 3 l engt h : 4
Pr i mar y l ookup l engt h : 5
Ent er f i el d 1 name

Lookup Program Optimize

Page 14-18 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
If you want to use only two fields, set the length of field 3 to 0. If you want to use only one
field, set the length of fields 2 and 3 to 0.
When you have changed the three fields on the Configuration menu, your changes to names
and prompts will automatically show up on all long menus in the Lookup program.
The Primary lookup length item sets how long, in digits, the primary part of a code cards
lookup number will be. For example, a primary lookup length of 5 would mean that the
primary part of lookup number 984638729 is 98463.
Optimize
When you select the Optimize item, a prompt similar to this one appears on the screen.
Opt i mi ze f i l e or change si ze of f i l e

Ent er t he maxi mumf i l e si ze i n r ecor ds
( at l east 80 r ecor ds r ecommended, 40 Ent er )
or Pr ess Ent er t o l eave i t at 100:
The number of records recommended and the number required will change depending on how
many records you have already created. The more you have created, the higher those numbers
will be.
For technical reasons, you usually want twice as many records as the number that have been
created. The maximum you can have is dependent on how much space is available on your
disk.
Use optimization to increase the number of records. You can also use optimization, without
changing the number of records, to speed up the program whenever searches through the
lookup file seem slower than usual-for instance, when a customer has to wait several seconds
for approval after swiping the card, or when you have to wait longer to locate a specific record
when editing the lookup file.
You must always optimize whenever you use the configuration menu to change the length of
any of the three account fields or the primary code.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 15-1
Fuel Allocation Fuel Allocation and Miles-per-Gallon
15 Fuel Allocation and Miles-per-Gallon
Fuel Allocation
The CFN III system allows you to allocate a set amount of fuel to a customer or group of
customers with Proprietary Cards. The allocation number is a field on the Proprietary Card.
The CFN III uses allocation totalizers to track the amount used. When all of the allocated
amount has been used, the Site Controller denies access to the customer or customer group.
You can use a fuel allocation system to ration fuel or to ensure that only a designated amount
of fuel will be available to a specific customer group.
This chapter explains how to set up and maintain an allocation system.
Do not confuse this type of allocation with hourly allocation. Hourly allocation limits the
amount of fuel that may be accessed by a card within a specified time period. It applies to bank
cards as well as Proprietary Cards. Hourly allocation is set up in the Site Controller
configuration (refer to the Cumulative Limit Time parameter in the System parameters
chapter of MDE-4773 CFN III Configuration Manual for Windows XP for details).
How to Set Up an Allocation System
To set up an allocation system:
Determine the allocation numbers you want to use, and the number of gallons (or liters) or
dollars you want to assign to each one. Refer to the allocation bulleted list below to help
you decide how you want to allocate fuel.
Decide the length of the allocation numbers and the location of the allocation number
within the card account number (for more information, refer to Proprietary Cards on
page 13-1 and the Allocation Account Offset parameter in the System parameters
chapter of MDE-4773 CFN III Configuration Manual for Windows XP).
Encode the allocation numbers on the cards in the location you decided. The allocation
numbers can be from 0 through 32,766. The allocation field must be the same length on all
cards.
Configure the Site Controller for the maximum number of allocation numbers you will
use, the number of digits in allocation numbers, and the location of the allocation number
within the card account number. The CFN III system maintains allocation totalizers only
for allocation numbers currently defined. Configure for as many allocation numbers as
you will require; you can remove one temporarily if you are not currently using it.
However, do not configure for more than you plan to use since extra numbers needlessly
take up memory space.
Use the commands in the rest of this chapter to maintain the amounts in the allocation
totalizers.
Fuel Allocation and Miles-per-Gallon Fuel Allocation
Page 15-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Allocations
You can allocate either dollar amounts or gallon (or litre) amounts on each allocation number.
Before you decide which units to use, consider the following:
The highest dollar amount you can allocate is $99,999.99. The highest gallon (or litre)
amount is 99,999.999.
It is usually more practical to use the same units (either dollar or volume) for all allocation
numbers, so that the grand total in the PRINT ALLOCATION printout (see below in this
chapter) is meaningful and does not mix dollar and volume subtotals.
Gallon allocation applies to fuel sales only. Merchandise sales do not affect gallon
totalizers. Dollar allocation applies to both fuel and merchandise.
If you specify the allocated amount in gallons, use gallons also as the units for pump limits
(defined in configuration), fill limits (entered with the LOAD CUTOFF command), and
card limits (entered with the LOAD LIMITATION command).
Some multi-product dispensers allow only dollar allocations, limitations, pump fill limits,
and so on. Sites with this type of multiproduct dispenser must use dollar allocation. If
these sites try to use gallon allocation, transactions on accounts with allocation will always
act as if they exceeded allocation.
How to Initialize the Allocation File
Do not use this command after you have set up your allocation system. It erases
all your allocation information and you will have to enter it all again.
CAUTION
Before you set up allocation numbers in the CFN3 software, you must initialize the allocation
file. Initializing the file erases all the information currently in it. That means you begin without
any cards on an allocation system.
REMOVE ALLOCATI ON; A ( REM AL; A)
[ P: ] * REMOVE ALLOCATION;A
[ P: ] *
Type REMOVE ALLOCATION;A to initialize the allocation file.

How to Set Up Allocation Numbers
Use the command LOAD ALLOCATION or LO AL to set up the allocation numbers and the
initial dollar or gallon (or litre) amount you want allocated to each one. For dollar allocation,
precede the amount by a dollar sign. For gallon (or litre) allocation, omit the dollar sign.
You can enter a single number to affect one group of cards in other words, all the cards that
have that allocation number or a range of numbers to affect several groups of cards. If you
enter a range of numbers, the amount you specify will be allocated for each number in the
range. To enter a range of numbers, type the first number in the range, then a hyphen, then the
last number.
LOAD ALLOCATI ON ( LO AL)
[ P: ] * LOAD ALLOCATION
Al l ocat i on no. ? 145
Amount ? 100.000
[ P: ] *
[ P: ] * LOAD ALLOCATION;C
Al l ocat i on no. ? 123
Amount ? $250.00
Al l ocat i on no. ? 300-310
Amount ? $120.00
Al l ocat i on no. ?
[ P: ] **
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 15-3
Fuel Allocation Fuel Allocation and Miles-per-Gallon
This example shows how to set up an allocation number of 145 with an initial amount of
100 gallons.
You can use the C option with the command LOAD ALLOCATION to set up more than one
allocation number or range at a time. This example shows how to set up a single allocation
number, then a range, and how to enter the dollar amount allocated to both.
How to Change Allocated Amounts
To change an allocated amount, you add to or subtract from the amount currently remaining in
the allocation totalizer. You do not specify the units (dollars or gallons). The CFN3 software
adds or subtracts the value you specify, using the same units you used when you first set up the
allocation number. If you include a dollar sign, the Site Controller ignores it.
Add to Allocated Amount
Use the command ADD ALLOCATION or AD AL to add an amount to the amount currently
remaining in an allocation totalizer. You can add to a single number or a range of numbers. If
you enter a range of numbers, the amount you specify will be added to the current amount for
each number in the range. To enter a range of numbers, type the first number in the range, then
a hyphen, then the last number.
ADD ALLOCATI ON ( AD AL)
[ P: ] * ADD ALLOCATION
Al l ocat i on no. ? 145
Amount ? 23.50
[ P: ] *
[ P: ] * ADD ALLOCATION;C
Al l ocat i on no. ? 123
Amount ? 40
Al l ocat i on no. ? 300-310
Amount ? 120
Al l ocat i on no. ?
[ P: ] *
The example below shows how to add 23.50 units to the totalizer used for allocation number
145.
You can use the C option with ADD ALLOCATION to add to more than one allocation
totalizer at a time. The example shows how to add to a single number and a range of numbers
with one command.
Fuel Allocation and Miles-per-Gallon Fuel Allocation
Page 15-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Subtract from Allocated Amount
Use the command SUBTRACT ALLOCATION or SU AL to subtract an amount from the
amount currently remaining in an allocation totalizer. You can subtract from a single number
or a range of numbers. If you enter a range of numbers, the amount you specify will be
subtracted from the current amount for each number in the range. To enter a range of numbers,
type the first number in the range, then a hyphen, then the last number.
SUBTRACT ALLOCATI ON ( SU AL)
[ P: ] * SUBTRACT ALLOCATION
Al l ocat i on no. ? 145
Amount ? 23.50
[ P: ] *
[ P: ] * SUBTRACT ALLOCATION;C
Al l ocat i on no. ? 123
Amount ? 40
Al l ocat i on no. ? 300-310
Amount ? 120
Al l ocat i on no. ?
[ P: ] *
The example shows how to subtract 23.50 units from the totalizer used for allocation number
145.
You can use the C option with SUBTRACT ALLOCATION to subtract from more than one
allocation totalizer at a time. The example below shows how to subtract from a single number
and a range of numbers with one command.
How to Print Currently Allocated Amounts
You can print a listing of all your current allocation numbers, the amount still remaining in the
totalizer for each one, and a grand total remaining in all totalizers. Note that the grand total
makes sense only if all your allocations are in the same units, either dollars or volume. Use the
command PRINT ALLOCATION or P AL, without any options, to print the listing. This
example shows how to print the listing for all allocation numbers, and it shows a sample listing
in dollar units.
PRI NT ALLOCATI ON ( P AL)
[ P: ] * PRINT ALLOCATION
Pr oduct Al l ocat i on
1 $432. 65 4 $35. 56 6 $237. 89
7 $154. 00 8 $211. 34 9 $187. 65
11 $94. 13 12 $165. 92 13 $305. 02
Tot al = 1824. 160
[ P: ] *[ P: ] *
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 15-5
Miles per Gallon System Fuel Allocation and Miles-per-Gallon
To limit the scope of the report by specifying a range of allocation numbers, type:
PRINT ALLOCATION 100-102.
[ P: ] * PRINT ALLOCATION 100-102
Pr oduct Al l ocat i on
100 432. 651 101 654. 455 102 12. 120
Tot al = 1099. 226
[ P: ] *
This will list the allocation numbers 100 - 102, with gallon units.
How to Remove an Allocation Number
You can remove a single allocation number or a range of numbers from the allocation file. It is
not required for all the numbers within a range to be defined before you can remove the range.
If you remove a range of numbers, all the currently defined numbers within that range are
removed.
REMOVE ALLOCATI ON ( REM AL; C)
[ P: ] * REMOVE ALLOCATION;C
Al l ocat i on no. ? 23
Al l ocat i on no. ? 100-199
Al l ocat i on no. ?
[ P: ] *
If you remove an allocation number that is encoded on one or more cards, the CFN3 software
treats those cards as if there were no allocation number encoded on them. This means that fuel
can be pumped on the card until some other limitation, such as a pump fill limit, is reached.
Removing an allocation number is not the same as allocating a zero amount for an allocation
number. Allocating a zero amount locks out all cards with that number encoded on them.
Type: REMOVE ALLOCATION.
You may use the C option with the command REMOVE ALLOCATION to remove more than
one number or range of numbers at a time.
Miles per Gallon System
The miles-per-gallon system is part of the Fleet Options package (which is briefly described in
Site Controller III Optional Packages on page 28-1. The MPG system tracks fuel-usage
information for customers who use cards. It tracks the total fuel used during a period, and it
can also track the miles per gallon and the dollars spent per mile. For the MPG system to work
properly, the customer must fuel at your site every time.
Fuel Allocation and Miles-per-Gallon Miles per Gallon System
Page 15-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Set Up an MPG System
You set up the system by assigning a vehicle number to each customer with a Proprietary Card
or Bank Card, then tracking the fuel-usage information by vehicle number. This means you
can provide this service to all customers who use cards to purchase fuel.
There are two ways for the vehicle number to be entered during a fuel purchase. It can be
encoded on Proprietary Cards, so the number is entered automatically when the card is read.
Or, you can have the customer enter the number manually at the card reader. For customers
who use bank cards, the number must be entered manually.
To set up the system, follow these steps:
In the CFN3 configuration, define the number of digits in the vehicle number and the
location of the vehicle number within the account number. Refer to the chapter on System
parameters in MDE-4773 CFN III Configuration Manual for Windows XP for
instructions.
Encode a unique vehicle number on each Proprietary Card in the location you specified in
configuration. Ensure that you keep track of the vehicle numbers you assign and the
customers to whom they are assigned.
If you want to track only the fuel usage, and not miles driven, set up the reader terminal to
not request the odometer reading, set up the Proprietary Card restriction code to not
require an odometer entry, set retries to 0, and use the LOAD VEHICLE command
explained in this chapter to enter an initial odometer reading of zero for all vehicle
numbers.
If you want to track odometer readings to calculate miles per gallon and dollars per mile,
set up the reader terminal to request the customers odometer reading at the time of sale,
but let the odometer entry be optional. Also, configure the Site Controller for the number
of times the customer can re-enter the odometer reading to try to be within a reasonable
range of the reading at the last fueling, and how the Site Controller will handle an out-of-
range entry.
When a customer enters an odometer reading that indicates the miles driven are outside
the range of miles specified in configuration for all vehicles, the Site Controller allows the
customer to try again as many times as you specify in configuration. Once the customer
has exhausted the retry limit, the Site Controller will accept the reading. The printout for
that vehicle will indicate the odometer reading was BAD. The Site Controller can be
configured to record a bad odometer reading as a new, valid entry (refer to SYS_PAR,
page 13 in MDE-4773 CFN III Configuration Manual for Windows XP); this will appear
on a PRINT VEHICLE printout as NEW.
If the odometer reading is accepted the first time, the printout shows whether the miles
driven were HIGH or LOW.
If you want to include bank card customers in the system, set up the reader terminal to
request the vehicle number at the time of sale.
If the Site Controller tracks the miles per gallon and dollars per mile, you can set up the
reader terminal receipt to print that information.
Use the commands in this chapter to maintain the vehicle numbers, fueling periods, and
odometer readings.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 15-7
Miles per Gallon System Fuel Allocation and Miles-per-Gallon
How MPG Information is Calculated
The MPG information is cumulative. That is, the Site Controller continues calculating the
miles driven, fuel usage, and dollars spent based on all the information gathered since the
MPG period was last reset. So the Site Controller calculates the average miles per gallon since
the MPG period started, rather than just since the last fill-up.
If the Site Controller is configured to record odometer entries even if they are bad, the
customer can reset the MPG period for that vehicle number by entering zero miles as the last
odometer retry. At the next fueling, the odometer reading the customer enters becomes the
initial reading for the period. When this happens, the vehicle status reported in the printout
will be NEW.
This is convenient for a customer who buys a new car, and therefore has an odometer reading
outside the range allowed in configuration. The customer can reset the MPG period and start
the new calculations based on the odometer reading for the new car.
How to Set Up Vehicle Numbers
Use the LOAD VEHICLE or LO V command to set up all vehicle numbers for which MPG
calculations are to be done. You enter the initial odometer reading for each vehicle. If you
enter zero for the initial value, the first odometer reading entered by the customer will be used
as the initial value for the MPG period.
LOAD VEHI CLE ( LO V)
[ P: ] * LOAD VEHICLE
Vehi cl e number ? 100
Odomet er r eadi ng? 0
[ P: ] *
You may use the C option with the LOAD VEHICLE command to set up more than one
vehicle number at a time.
The example shows how to set up a vehicle number so the customers first odometer entry will
be used as the starting value for that vehicle. This is the same as resetting the MPG period for
the vehicle.
How to Reset MPG Period for All Vehicles
When you reset the MPG period, the Site Controller starts a new set of readings. That is, the
cumulative totals for miles per gallon and dollars per mile start anew. So, the information since
the last fill-up becomes the complete MPG information for the period.
[ P: ] * LOAD VEHICLE;A
[ P: ] *
Use the command LOAD VEHICLE;A to reset the MPG periods for all vehicles. The ending
odometer reading becomes the beginning reading for the new period, the number of gallons is
set to zero, and the status of the vehicle number is NEW.
Fuel Allocation and Miles-per-Gallon Miles per Gallon System
Page 15-8 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Print MPG Report
Use the command PRINT VEHICLE or P V to print the MPG report. The MPG report lists the
vehicles numbers, and for each vehicle number, it gives:
Command Description
B Odom The vehicles beginning odometer reading for the MPG period.
E Odom The vehicles ending odometer reading for the MPG period.
Miles The number of miles driven this MPG period.
Gals The number of gallons used during this MPG period.
Cost The amount spent (at the current price) during this MPG period.
MPG The average miles per gallon for this period.
$/Mile The average dollars per mile for this period.
PRI NT VEHI CLE ( P V)
[ P: ] * PRINT VEHICLE
Vehi cl e B Odom E Odom Mi l es Gal s Cost MPG $/ Mi l e
10 7536. 8 7732. 1 195. 3 7. 81 7. 61 25. 0 0. 038
11 9320. 4 9530. 7 210. 3 9. 31 9. 04 22. 6 0. 042
12 8021. 3 8313. 4 292. 1 10. 11 9. 93 28. 9 0. 033
13 8421. 5 8725. 6 304. 1 11. 21 10. 94 27. 1 0. 035
14 New
[ P: ] *
If the status of the vehicle is NEW, HIGH, LOW, or BAD, the status is also printed on the
report. For example:
How to Remove a Vehicle Number
When you remove a vehicle number from the MPG system, the Site Controller no longer
tracks the fuel-usage information for that vehicle. Use the command REMOVE VEHICLE or
REM V to remove a vehicle from the MPG tracking.
REMOVE VEHI CLE ( REM V)
[ P: ] * REMOVE VEHICLE
Vehi cl e number : 10
[ P: ] *
Use the command LOAD VEHICLE with the I option to remove all vehicles from the MPG
system.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 16-1
Why Take Backups? Backup System Data and Disk Files
16 Backup System Data and Disk Files
Why Take Backups?
Backups prevent data disasters.
A backup is a copy of data or files that is kept separate from the original for safety and
security. For example, you must make a backup copy of the Site Controller release disk. You
must also make backup copies of command files that you use on your Site Controller. Gasboy
provides some programs and command files that allow you to back up Site Controller system
data. You must use these to back up data that has been loaded into or collected on the Site
Controller.
There are several reasons for keeping current backups of files and system data.
When you install a new release of the operating system, some of the tables that contain
system data may be reconstructed and the data will be lost. If you have a current backup,
you can restore the data from the backup.
The software for a Site Controller is supplied on the hard disk and also on a backup floppy
disk. During normal system use, any configuration changes or command files that you add
to the Site Controller are can be placed on the hard disk. These changes must be copied
onto the backup floppy disk to keep your backup current.
The tables that contain system data may be reconstructed if the Site Controller crashes.
Data may inadvertently become corrupted through user error.
Files may be deleted or changed by accident.
Floppy disks or hard disks can become damaged or corrupted.
Although unlikely, the system could fall victim to deliberate sabotage.
In spite of every precaution in the design and installation of the system, it could
experience a physical failure (or fire, flood, or other disaster).
To ensure you always have an up-to-date backup, it is a good idea to back up the system data
every day. If your site is polled for transactions by a remote system at least once a day, you do
not require to back up transactions, as there will be a record of them on the remote system.
The amount of time it takes to back up the system is very small compared to the time it would
take to reconstruct the data if a current backup were not available when required.
At a minimum, you must back up system data before you install a new release, and after you
change any system data, such as price or product data.
You must always make a backup copy of the release disk and any other diskettes that are
shipped to you. You must also make a backup copy of FRAMOS.CFG every time you change
the configuration, and you must make backup copies of any command files or other important
files you create.
Backup System Data and Disk Files Backup Files
Page 16-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Floppy Diskettes
Gasboy recommends that you make backups on double-sided, high-density, 3.5-inch floppy
diskettes. Format the diskette before use if you did not purchase pre-formatted diskettes.
Pre-formatted diskettes are readily available and will save you the time of formatting.
BACKUP requires blank, formatted diskettes.
Backup Files
The command files for backing up system data are:
File Description
SYSBACK.CMD Command file to back up all system tables in RAM, except transactions,
to a file called SYSBACK.DTA.
TRANBACK.CMD Command file to back up transaction data to a file called
TRANBACK.DTA.
BACKTRAN.BIN Disk-based program to back up transaction data to a file with a name of
your choosing.
RESTORE.BIN Disk-based program to restore system tables and transaction data
backed up with SYSBACK, TRANBACK, or BACKTRAN. Note:
RESTORE.BIN cannot restore a transaction data file if the size of the
trans table has changed between the time of running BACKTRAN and
RESTORE.BIN.
INSTALL.CMD Command file to restore data backed up with HARDBACK.
TAX.BIN Optional program for setting up tax tables.
All these files are in the C:\SC3\BIN directory.
The batch files used to backup your CFN3 files are:
How to Back Up System Data
Note: Before backup, run TRANBACK and SYSBACK to backup items in the SC III memory.
The SYSBACK command backs up all the system data. Data will be put in a file called
SYSBACK.DTA. Type the command SYSBACK. The backup will take a few minutes.
Replace the disks every three months if you do daily backups. If you do less frequent backups,
you do not require to replace the disks as often.
File Description
BACKUP This command is used to backup your CFN3 files onto diskettes.
Command file that takes all files excluding .BINs, .EXEs, and HTML files,
and using a compression program places them onto floppy diskette(s).
RESTORE Command file that extracts the files compressed with the BACKUP
command and returns the files to the SC3 directory.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 16-3
How to Back Up System Data Backup System Data and Disk Files
Backing Up CFN3 Files with Backup
To back up files, proceed as follows:
1 Log in as an Administrator.
2 Sign on to SC III and run TRANBACK and SYSBACK.
3 Open a Windows XP command window (Select Start >Programs >Command Prompt).
4 Go to the SC3 directory using the command:
C:\ cd SC3
5 Insert a BLANK diskette in the A:drive.
6 At the Windows XP command prompt type:
C:\ SC3 \ BACKUP
You will be prompted to insert diskettes, if more than one is required.
7 When backup is completed, quit the command window.
The command will take all files except for any .EXE, .BIN and HTML files, compress them
using a compression program and place them on blank diskettes in the A: drive. You do not
require to backup the .BIN, .EXE, and HTML files. These can be found on the software CD or
diskettes that came with your system.
How to Do a Custom System Backup
The above procedure will back up all system data, but sometimes you may want to back up
just a part of the system data. To back up system data, other than transactions, use the
following procedure (it is easier to do this with a command file).
1 Shut down the Site Controller with STOP so that the system data does not change when you
are doing the backup.
2 Use ENABLE RAW to enable raw mode.
3 Use the PRINT commands with the output redirection options to print the data to a backup file.
Refer to How to Restore System or Transaction Data on page 16-6 for examples.
4 Use DISABLE RAW to disable raw mode.
5 Restart the Site Controller with RUN.
[ P: ] * TYPE MY_BCKUP.CMD
st op
enabl e r aw
pr i nt cr on; >backup. dt a
pr i nt dr awer s; >>backup. dt a
pr i nt headi ng; >>backup. dt a
pr i nt pr i ces; >>backup. dt a
pr i nt pr oduct s; >>backup. dt a
pr i nt pumps; >>backup. dt a
pr i nt sal es; >>backup. dt a, A
c123dyt
pr i nt si t es; >>backup. dt a
pr i nt t anks; >>backup. dt a
pr i nt t ot al s; >>backup. dt a, A
c123dyt
di sabl e r aw
r un
[ P: ] *
Backup System Data and Disk Files How to Back Up Transactions
Page 16-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
In your backup command file, the first PRINT command must use the >option to redirect its
output to the backup file. This will overwrite any old data in the file. Subsequent PRINT
commands must use the >>option to append to the backup file.
With PRINT SALES and PRINT TOTALS, be sure to use the A option and to specify that all
totals be printed (usually C123DYT).
How to Back Up Transactions
TRANBACK
You do not require to back up transactions if your site is polled for transactions by a remote
system, since they will already be stored on that system. You also do not require to back up
transactions if you do only cash transactions.
The procedure for backing up transactions is similar to the procedure for backing up system
data. Special transaction backup commands are included on the applications disk provided
with the Site Controller. The command file TRANBACK.CMD on the applications disk will
back up all transaction data. Data will be put in a file called TRANBACK.DTA.
Shut down the Site Controller with STOP before you back up transactions so that the
transaction data does not change when you are doing the backup. When the backup is
complete, restart the Site Controller with RUN. You may include these commands in a
command file.
BACKTRAN
The BACKTRAN command operates like TRANBACK. The difference is that TRANBACK
backs up data to a file called TRANBACK.DTA, but BACKTRAN allows you to name the file
it creates.
Use the disk-based command BACKTRAN and the redirection option >with the name of the
file the transaction data must be stored in:
BACKTRAN;>filename
Because BACKTRAN is a disk command, a copy of it must be in your search path.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 16-5
How to Restore Your Backup Data Backup System Data and Disk Files
How to Restore Your Backup Data
To restore backup data, proceed as follows:
1 Log in as Administrator.
2 Open an Windows XP command window (Select Start >Programs >Command Prompt).
3 Go to the SC3 directory using the command:
C:\ cd SC3
4 Insert the first BACKUP diskette in the A:drive.
5 At the Windows XP command prompt type:
C:\ SC3 \ RESTORE
You will be prompted to insert diskettes if more are required.
6 When Backup is completed, quit the command window.
RESTORE will extract all compressed data from the backup diskette(s) and place it in the SC3
directory. This will over write any possibly newer data that could exist there.
How to Write-protect Backup Diskettes
You must set the write-enable tab on your backup diskette to the write-protect position before
you try to restore data from the diskette. That way, you cannot accidentally write over or erase
the data you are trying to restore. Figure 16-1 shows the write-enable tab and indicates the
write-protect position.
When the little window on the disk is open, you cannot overwrite the data already on that disk.
When the window is closed, you can overwrite the data.
Figure 16-1: Floppy Diskette
High Density (HD)
will have an
Additional Tab here.
Backup System Data and Disk Files How to Restore System or Transaction Data
Page 16-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Restore System or Transaction Data
Use the command RESTORE to restore system data from backups made with SYSBACK. The
RESTORE command also restores transaction data that has been backed up with TRANBACK
and BACKTRAN.
Note: RESTORE is a disk command, so a copy of it must be on the hard disk.
You may specify key words with RESTORE to selectively restore only part of a full backup (a
partial backup is handy because you might not want to restore data that is several hours old).
The following list gives the key words that may be used with RESTORE to restore individual
tables.
The following additional key words may also be used with RESTORE.
If you request that a type of table be restored, but the data for it does not exist in the input file,
no error message will be printed. The name of each table type is printed as it is restored.
Command Description
allocation restores the allocation table from PRINT ALLOCATION.
authorization (or au) restores the authorization table from PRINT AUTHORIZATION.
cron restores the cron table from PRINT CRON.
drawers restores the cash drawer table from PRINT DRAWER.
heading (or he) restores the receipt heading table from PRINT HEADING.
limitation restores the fuel limitation table from PRINT LIMITATION.
lockout restores the card lockout table from PRINT LOCKOUT.
messages restores the island card reader broadcast messages from PRINT MESSAGE.
phone restores the dial-out phone number table from PRINT PHONE.
prices restores the price code table from PRINT PRICE.
products restores the product table from PRINT PRODUCT.
pumps restores the pump table from PRINT PUMP.
sales restores the sales data table from PRINT SALES.
tanks restores the tank inventory table from PRINT TANK.
totals restores the sales totals table from PRINT TOTALS.
transactions restores the transaction data table from BACKTRAN.
vehicles restores the miles per gallon package vehicle table from PRINT VEHICLE.
tax restores tax tables.
signon restores signon information.
Command Description
corrupt restores the records contained in a line with a bad checksum; when an error is found, the
type of table along with the line number in the file is reported.
everything restores the entire contents of the backup file.
except excludes tables that have already been specified.
from file specifies that the tables be restored from the backup file (for example, TRANBACK.DTA). If
this keyword is not used, the default file SYSBACK.DTA will be used as the input file.
reconstructed restores all files that have been reconstructed. It is used to restore files that have been
reconstructed when a new release is installed.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 16-7
How to Restore System or Transaction Data Backup System Data and Disk Files
Below are some examples of commands for restoring system data from backups.
RESTORE EVERYTHING restores all tables that are backed up in the file
SYSBACK.DTA and prints the name of each table as it is restored.
RESTORE EVERYTHING CORRUPT FROM filename (where filename is
SYSBACK.DTA, TRANBACK.DTA, or whatever you named the backup file you made
your custom system backup) restores the records contained in a line, even if they have a
bad checksum. When an error is found, the type of table along with the line number in the
file is reported.
RESTORE EVERYTHING EXCEPT TANKS TOTALS FROM filename (where
filename is SYSBACK.DTA, TRANBACK.DTA, or whatever you named the backup file
restores all tables that are backed up in the file filename except tanks and totals tables, and
prints the name of each table as it is restored.
RESTORE RECONSTRUCTED restores all tables that are backed up in the file
SYSBACK.DTA and that have been reconstructed. This is useful after installing a new
release of the software that has caused some tables to be reconstructed.
RESTORE TRANSACTIONS FROM filename (where filename is TRANBACK.DTA,
or whatever you named the backup file you made with BACKTRAN) restores the
transaction table that has been backed up with TRANBACK or BACKTRAN.
RESTORE PUMPS PRODUCTS PRICES restores the pump, product, and price tables
from the file SYSBACK.DTA.
Backup System Data and Disk Files How to Restore System or Transaction Data
Page 16-8 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 17-1
What is a CFN3 File CFN3 File System
17 CFN3 File System
The CFN3 file system is compatible with Windows XP version 2002 and greater. This chapter
is a basic introduction to files and the Site Controller file system. It contains the information
you require to use files on the Site Controller, but it is not an exhaustive study of Windows XP
or MS-DOS

type file system the Site Controller uses. For more complete information about
Windows XP or MS-DOS file system, refer to one of the many books available about
Windows XP or MS-DOS.
The Site Controller files reside in a directory called SC3 on the C: drive of your PC (C:\SC3\).
To check the files use the following command in the SCIII command window:
[P:]* dir C:\SC3\
A listing of the file will scroll on the screen. You can not change drives from the [P:]* prompt
but you can view other drives and their directories.
To check the drive with Windows XP, use the Windows XP Explorer.
1 Select Start with the left mouse button.
2 From the menu displayed, select Programs.
3 Go to Accessories and click once on the Windows XP Explorer. A window will open.
4 Double-click on the C: drive.
5 From the folders listed, double-click on SC3. The contents will appear on the right hand side
of the window.
What is a CFN3 File
A CFN3 file is a collection of data stored on a disk and given a filename. A file can contain:
a program you can execute.
a set of Site Controller commands you can execute as a group.
data you want to store, such as backup system data, printouts of sales or other information,
or hand-entered data or messages.
Filename Restrictions
Filenames for CFN3 files follow the Windows XP or MS-DOS conventions. Names can be
eight characters long, plus a three-character extension. The name and extension are separated
by a period.
The following characters are allowed in Windows XP or MS-DOS filenames:
A-Z 0-9 ! @ #$ % ( ) - ~{ }
CFN3 File System File System
Page 17-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
The following characters are not allowed in XP or MS-DOS filenames:
* =+[ ] ; : | \ / , <>?
The CFN3 application does allow some of these characters, but you must avoid using them to
maintain XP or MS-DOS compatibility.
Filename Extensions
For executable files, the CFN3 application uses a different extension than Windows XP or
MS-DOS does, to avoid confusion between the two systems. Command files (also called batch
files) for the CFN3 application use the extension .CMD (similar to Windows XP). Executable
files use the extension .BIN.
Extension File Type
BIN executable program
CMD interpretable list of commands
CFG system configuration file - NEVER DELETE!
Never delete a file with a .CFG extension.
CAUTION
Wildcards in Filenames
You can use wildcard characters to match a group of filenames. A ? (question mark) matches
any single character. For example, ??.TXT matches all filenames with two letters and the
extension TXT.
An * (asterisk) matches one or more characters up to the end of the filename, or up to the
extension if there is one. For example, *.* matches every filename and extension, *.DTA
matches every filename with the extension DTA and PR*.CMD matches every filename that
begins with PR and has the extension CMD.
File System
The CFN3 application uses a hierarchical file system similar to the file system used by
MS-DOS version 2.0 and later versions, such as 3.3 and 6.0. This type of file system is often
described as being like a tree, with a root and branches. The file system is made up of
directories, and each directory can contain files and further directories-thus the tree-branching
analogy (the structure is really more like a bush, since it has no trunk).
Different directories may contain files having the same filenames. In order to uniquely identify
a file, its full name-called the pathname-is used. The pathname includes the directory (and any
subdirectories) that contains the file; for example:
/directoryname/subdirectoryname/filename.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 17-3
File System CFN3 File System
The root directory is called / (slash) on the CFN3 application and directory names are
separated by a /. (On NT or MS-DOS systems \ [a backslash] is used instead of /.) So, for
example, the filename /BIN/TREE.BIN refers to the file TREE.BIN in the directory BIN
under the root directory (/). Figure 17-1 shows this directory structure.
Figure 17-1: Sample Directory Tree Structure
/
BIN
TREE.BIN
FRAMOS.CFG FRAMOS.BIN
/
BIN
TREE.BIN
FRAMOS.CFG FRAMOS.BIN
There are two special directory names: . (dot) and .. (dot dot). The . (dot) represents the current
directory, and .. (dot dot) represents the parent directory (one level up) of the current directory.
The current directory is the directory you are in at the present time. Whenever the CFN3
application is turned on, one directory is always the current directory (just as whenever you are
inside a house, you are always in one room or another).
You can give a full pathname or relative pathname (using the dots and slash) to name a file that
is not in the current directory. For example, ../FRAMOS.BIN names the file FRAMOS.BIN in
the parent of the current directory, and /FRAMOS.BIN names the file FRAMOS.BIN in the
root directory.
Disk Drive Names
Disk drives are referred to by drive letter. The disk drive names are as follows:
Name Description
A: First floppy disk drive
B: Second floppy disk drive (if present)
C: PCs hard disk drive
D: CD-ROM drive
P: SC3 root directory and the default SC III drive
R: RAM drive
Each drive has its own file system. This means there is a root directory on each drive. The
[P:*] represents your site controller.
CFN3 File System Site Controller Files
Page 17-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Specify Files on Other Drives
To specify files on a drive other than the current drive, put the drive letter, followed by a colon
(:), before the pathname. For example, TYPE A:PR_DATA.CMD will print the contents of the
file PR_DATA.CMD in the root directory on the A drive. You do not require to include the
initial/before the pathname when you specify the drive name, but it is allowed. The command
TYPE A:/PR_DATA.CMD is equivalent to the command above.
Site Controller Files
You can create files containing either data or a list of commands that can be executed. All
CFN3 files are stored on disk.
You can use files to:
Record manually collected data such as dipstick readings.
Record messages, such as a file of instructions for each employee or each shift.
Save data from Site Controller commands, such as transaction and sales totals. For
information about how to save the output of Site Controller commands in a file, refer to
Making Your Own Commands on page 19-1.
Record a sequence of commands that is executed when the name of the file is typed as a
command. You can use command files for frequently executed sequences of commands,
such as the commands executed at shift changes. For information about how to create and
use Site Controller command files, refer to Making Your Own Commands on page 19-1.
How to Create Site Controller Files
There are several ways to create user files. You can use the RECORD or REC command, use a
text editor, save output from commands in a file or download a file from a another computer.
This section covers the use of the RECORD command. Use the Windows XP text editor that
comes with your PC or the SCIII editor FRED, which is covered in a separate chapter.
Making Your Own Commands on page 19-1 explains how to save the output of Site
Controller commands in a file.

Do not use blank spaces in a file name.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
RECORD ( REC)
[ P: ] * RECORD
Fi l e name? PRDATA.CMD
Dat a? PRINT DATE
Dat a? PRINT DRAWER
Dat a? PRINT TANK
Dat a? ^C
[ P: ] *
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 17-5
Site Controller Files CFN3 File System
RECORD without any options creates the specified file or appends to it if it already exists.
RECORD;I creates the specified file or overwrites it if it already exists. The command will
prompt for the filename and each line of data to be entered in the file.
To terminate the RECORD command, type CTRL-C or a period (.) by itself at the beginning
of a line, right after the DATA? prompt. Prompt (^C) will be displayed in the DATA? line.
[ P: ] * RECORD
Fi l e name? DIPSTICK
Dat a? 2/8/95 TANK 1 5530
Dat a? 2/8/95 TANK 2 4230
Dat a? ^C
[ P: ] *
[ P: ] * RECORD
Fi l e name? MSG1
Dat a? RESTOCK THE POTATO CHIPS
Dat a? THANKS, DAN
Dat a? .
[ P: ] *
How to Print the Contents of Files
Use the command TYPE or TY to print the contents of a file. You must specify the name of the
file on the command line (the command line is the line starting with the name of the current
drive and an asterisk; for example, [P:]*); you will not be prompted for the name of the file.
TYPE ( TY)
[ P: ] * TYPE PRDATA.CMD
PRI NT DATE
PRI NT DRAWER
PRI NT TANK
[ P: ] * TYPE DIPSTICK
2/ 8/ 95 TANK 1 5530
2/ 8/ 95 TANK 2 4230
[ P: ] *
How to Remove User Files
Use the command DELETE or DEL to remove user files. You must specify a filename on the
command line; you will not be prompted for it. You may specify more than one file to delete.
You do not require to use the C option with DEL.
DELETE ( DEL)
[ P: ] * DELETE PRDATA.CMD
[ P: ] *
CFN3 File System Site Controller Files
Page 17-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Copy Files
Use the command COPY (COP) or CP to make a copy of a file. You must specify the original
file and the file to copy to on the command line (the command line is the line starting with the
name of the current drive and an asterisk; for example, [P:]*). If you do not specify the
filenames, you will not be prompted for them.
COPY ( COP)
[ P: ] * COPY PRICE.CMD PRICE.BAK
[ P: ] *
CP
[ P: ] * CP PRICE.CMD BIN/PRICE.BAK

PRI CE. CMD copi ed t o PRI CE. BAK

[ P: ] *
You can use the wildcards ? and * with either copy command. The commands can copy files
between directories, but you must use full pathnames.
CP without Error Messages
The CP command with the I option suppresses error messages. CP;I silently skips copying any
files it is told to copy that does not exist. For example, if there is no NOPE.TXT file, then the
CP command without the I option results in an error message.
[ P: ] * CP R:NOPE.TXT A:
Can t f i nd NOPE. TXT
[ P: ] *
[ P: ] * CP;I R:NOPE.TXT A:
[ P: ] *
With the I option, there is no error message. The I option is useful in command files when you
are copying files, some of which may legitimately be absent. In such cases, this option avoids
confusing error messages.
How to Rename Files
Use the command RENAME or REN to change the name of a file. You must specify the
original filename and the new filename on the command line. If you do not specify the
filenames, you will not be prompted for them.
RENAME ( REN)
[ P: ] * RENAME PRICE.CMD PRICE.BAK

[ P: ] * *
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 17-7
Site Controller Files CFN3 File System
If you are not in the directory where the original file is located, you must also specify the
original files path.
When you use the COPY command, you end with two identical copies of the same file, but
under two different names. With RENAME you end up with only one copy of a renamed
file.
With RENAME, both the original file and the new file must be in the current directory. Use
RENAME;A (described in the following section) when different directories are involved.
How to Move Files Between Directories of the RAM Drive
Use the RENAME;A command to move a file to a different directory. You must specify the
original filename and the new filename on the command line. If you do not specify the
filenames, you will not be prompted for them.
[ P: ] * RENAME;A TEST.CMD /
LOADTEST.BAK
[ P: ] * *
If a file already exists in the destination directory with the name you have chosen
for the destination file, the existing file will be overwritten.
CAUTION
Provide the path for whichever of the two directories, original or destination, you are not
currently in. If you are in a third directory, provide the path for both the original and
destination files.
When you use RENAME;A to move a file from one directory to another, you do not have to
choose a different name for the destination file. Both the original and destination filenames
can be identical; only the paths will change.
How to Set Permissions of Files
The SET_PERM command allows you to control which users have access to which
disk-based command files.
Here is a summary of the SET_PERM command:
SET_PERM disk-based command to change file attributes and permissions.
Options: [-R] [-H] [-N] [-Uuser_no][-Pperm_level] file1 [file2]
Command
Description
[-R] file1 [file2] sets read-only status on file1 [file2]
[-H] file1 [file2] sets hidden status on file1 [file2]
[-N] file1 [file2] allows any user to execute the disk-based command(s) file1, file2, and so on.
-Uuser_no file1 [file2] ... only user number user_no may execute the disk-based command(s) file1, file2,
and so on.
-Pperm_level file1 [file2] ... only users having a permission level greater than or equal to perm_level may
execute the disk-based command(s) file1, file2, and so on.
[ P: ] * SET_PERM
Fi l e Read onl y Hi dden User
Per m
FRAMOS. BI N NO NO Any 0
[ P: ] *
CFN3 File System Directory Commands
Page 17-8 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
After changing permissions, run SET_PERM to confirm your settings.
Note: Permission levels do not affect .CMD files.
Directory Commands
How to List Files in a Directory
Use the command DIRECTORY or DIR to print a listing of files in a directory.You can specify
the name of one or more directories to list. If you do not specify a directory, the listing for the
current directory will be printed. The SC3 files are located on the C: directory of your hard
disk. This is an example, your site will have more files.
DI RECTORY ( DI R)
[ P: ] * DIRECTORY C:
9- 18- 99 4: 58p <DI R> C: \ SC3\ .
9- 18- 99 4: 58p <DI R> C: \ SC3\ . .
9- 29- 99 6: 59a 0 C: \ SC3\ SC3. LOG
9- 25- 99 1: 04p 487808 C: \ SC3\ FRAMOS. BI N
( t he l i st wi l l cont i nue down t he scr een)
[ P: ] *
Note: For commands, like DIRECTORY, whose output may fill more than a screen, you can
stop the data from scrolling off the screen by using the scroll lock key. Press Enter to
resume the scrolling.
Use DIRECTORY;A to list hidden files or directories on the RAM drive only. When you list a
directory other than the root directory, the directories . and .. will be listed with
DIRECTORY;A.
How to Print a Short File List
Use DIRECTORY;I to print a directory listing that includes only file and subdirectory names.
This is only an example, your site will have more files.
DI RECTORY ( DI R)
[ P: ] * DIRECTORY;I C:
Di r ect or y
SC3. EXE DEMO. BI N SC3. sys SC3. exe FRAMOS. BI N
FRAMOS. CFG BI N PROM LOCAL
[ P: ] *
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 17-9
Directory Commands CFN3 File System
How to List All Files Below a Directory
DIRECTORY lists files in the current directory or in a specified directory, but if other
directories are under that directory, you have to use DIRECTORY again to list them. The
disk-based command TREE lists all the files on the [P:]* RAM drive and any subdirectories
only.
[ P: ] * TREE
RESTORE. BI N
BACKTRAN. BI N
SYSBAC K. CMD
TRANBACK. CMD
TREE. BI N
[ P: ] *
How to Create Directories
Use the command MKDIR or MK to create a new directory on the RAM drive. You must
specify the name of the directory on the command line. If you do not specify the name, you
will not be prompted for it. The directory will be created as a subdirectory of the current
directory, so first make sure the current directory is indeed where you want to add the new
directory.
MKDI R ( MK)
[ P: ] * MKDIR MY_CMDS
[ P: ] *
How to Change to a Different Directory
Use the command CHDIR or CHD to change the current directory. You must specify the name
of the directory you want to change to on the command line. CHDIR .. changes directory to the
parent of the current directory. CHDIR / changes directory to the root directory.
MKDI R ( MK)
[ P: ] * MKDIR MY_CMDS
[ P: ] *
How to Change to a Different Disk Drive from a Remote Site
To change to a different drive, you must exit the SC3 prompt. You do not change drives as you
do in DOS. Your prompt will always remain [P:]*. This command is meant for remote access
use only.
[ P: ] * sys
[C:\SC3]
[C:\SC3]exit
[ P: ] *[ P: ] *
When using the PC, make changes to different directories on other drives using a PC
command window (DOS) not the SCIII command window.
CFN3 File System Directory Commands
Page 17-10 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Print the Current Directory Name
Use the disk-based command WHERE to print the name of the current directory.
WHERE
[ P: ] * WHERE
Cur r ent di r ect or y - R:
[ P: ] * CHDIR BIN
[ P: ] * WHERE
Cur r ent di r ect or y = R: BI N/
[ P: ] *
How to Copy a Directory
NEVER use RCP to copy a parent directory to one of its subdirectories. You will
fill, and very possibly damage, the disk containing the directories. If you
accidentally start such a recursive copy, press ^C (CONTROL - C) to halt it.
CAUTION
RCP
[ P: ] * RCP TRAN_BAK /tran/
TRAN_BAK
SEP_30. TRN
OCT_01. TRN
OCT_02. TRN
OCT_O3. TRN
[ P: ] *
Use the disk-based command RCP to copy all the files in a directory, including subdirectories,
to a new directory. The new directory must already exist. The name of each file is printed as
the file is copied. RCP works only with the Ram Drive. You cannot copy to other drives.
RCP stands for Recursive CoPy. RCP is a program to use for backing up.
How to Remove a Directory
Use the command RMDIR or RM to remove a directory. You must first remove all the files
from a directory before you can remove that directory.
RMDI R ( RM)
[ P: ] * RMDIR MY_CMDS
[ P: ] *
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 17-11
Disk Commands CFN3 File System
Disk Commands
How to Format the RAM Drive
Use the command FORMAT to format the RAM drive (R). All RAM drive information will be
erased, so use this command carefully.
FORMAT
[ P: ] * FORMAT
Ver i f y ( y/ n) ? N
[ P: ] *
It is strongly recommended that you do not use this command unless instructed by
your Gasboy Representative.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
The Verify option gives you one last chance to cancel the format command if you must realize
that you are about to do something that could be disastrous. If you press N, the command is
canceled; press Y to proceed with formatting.
How to Check a Disk for Errors
Use the disk-based command CHKDSK to check a drive for errors involving bad sectors or
lost clusters. The plain command will report the errors, but not fix them. CHKDSK with a
hyphen F (CHKDSK -F) will attempt to fix any errors it finds and delete any lost clusters
(clusters of data that are no longer linked to their proper file-a very unusual occurrence). If you
do not specify the name of a disk to check, it will check the current drives disk.
CHKDSK
[ P: ] * CHKDSK
878592 byt es t ot al di sk space
3072 byt es i n 2 user f i l es
875520 avai l abl e on di sk
[ P: ] *
Use this command if, for instance, there was a power failure when the Site Controller was in
the midst of executing a command or if you are encountering strange, usually minor,
problems.
The CHKDSK -R command checks the disk and reads all files on the disk.
The CHKDSK -A command checks the entire disk.
CFN3 File System Disk Commands
Page 17-12 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 18-1
Windows XP Text Editors Using Text Editors
18 Using Text Editors
There are three available text editors on the CFN3 PC application. Two are located in the
Windows XP system and the other is called FRED on the Site Controller. The Windows XPs
editors are easier to use and will only be discussed briefly. The Windows XP has an online
help section that is very good. Please refer to this on-line help for questions. The Site
Controllers text editor, FRED, will be discussed in greater detail.
Windows XP Text Editors
On the desktop, open either NotePad or WordPad. For small files such as the ones that work
with the SC III, use NotePad. This application is located in the Accessories directory of the
Program directory. Use the Start button on the bottom of the screen to access this program.
Note: To edit text in WordPad, see step 6.
Figure 18-1: Opening NotePad
1 Left-click on Start at the bottom of the screen.
2 Select Programs.
3 Select Accessories.
4 Click once on the program that you want to open (Notepad is suggested).
Using Text Editors FRED
Page 18-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
5 For help, select Help from the Menu bar at the top of Notepads window.
6 If you are logged in as gasboy, to edit the text in WordPad, right-click the file you are trying
to edit and select Open With >WordPad (see Figure 18-2).
Figure 18-2: Editing Text in Wordpad
FRED
The screen editor FRED (FRamos EDitor) is for editing files. This chapter shows you how to
use the editor FRED to create and modify files. You can use the editor to create a file, save it,
and recall it later for modification.
Note that FRED is a disk command, so a copy of it must be in the search path (for information
on the search path, refer to Making Your Own Commands on page 17-1).
You can use FRED to modify a file that was downloaded or was created by redirecting output
of commands, or with the RECORD command.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 18-3
Editors Modes Using Text Editors
Editors Modes
The editor has three modes: Insert Mode, Edit Mode, and Command Mode. When you use the
editor you will mostly use insert mode.
In Insert Mode the editor accepts regular characters as text. Text that is inserted on a line
pushes characters on the right side of the cursor to the right.
In Edit Mode the editor accepts regular characters as commands. There are some special
characters-control characters and the arrow keys-that are accepted as commands in both
insert and edit modes.
When you enter Command Mode a prompt (#) appears on the last line of the screen, and
the cursor moves to the last line of the screen. In Command Mode the editor accepts
commands of one or more letters. You must press Enter after you type command-mode
commands. Some Command Mode commands require additional information, which they
prompt for.
How to Change Editor Modes
When you first invoke the editor (by typing FRED filename), it is in edit mode. From edit
mode you can enter insert mode or command mode. To enter insert mode from command
mode or edit mode, type ^N (remember, the ^character means you are to hold down the
CONTROL key when you type N).
To enter edit mode from command mode or insert mode, type ^E. To enter command mode
from insert mode or edit mode, type ^C.
Command Mode
You will do most of your editing in insert mode or edit mode, but you will return to Command
Mode to save your files and exit the editor.
Command Mode is also used for global search-and-replace functions and a few other complex
editing functions, but these are seldom required for editing Site Controller files.
All commands used in Command Mode require you to type several characters then press
Enter.
1 To enter command mode from insert or edit mode, type ^C.
The cursor will go to the bottom (command) line of the screen.
2 Type the command-mode command you want to execute.
What you type will be displayed on the command line. (If you make a mistake typing, use
BACKSPACE to delete the last character typed. To delete the entire line, use ^U or ^X).
3 Press Enter to enter the command.
If the command requires an argument (additional information), it will prompt you to enter the
information.
Some Command Mode commands take arguments that specify line numbers or a file name.
Depending on the command, line-number arguments can specify a single line or a range of
lines. Range arguments specify the range of lines in a file that a command will act upon. To
specify a range, enter the lower line number, a space, and the higher line number. For example,
10 15 will cause the command to act on lines 10 through 15.
Using Text Editors Using the Editor
Page 18-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
If you do not specify a range, the command will act on the whole file. If you specify only one
line number, the command will act on lines from the specified line to the end of the file.
Using the Editor
To edit an existing file, type FRED filename.
Line: 1 column: 0 no file edit:
To create a new file, just type FRED to begin. You will name the new file later. The editor will
come up on the screen, as shown.
The status line on the top of the screen shows where you are in the file by line and by column;
the name of your current file if it is named or no file if it is unnamed; and the Editor Mode you
are in. Columns are numbered starting at 0. The screen in the figure above indicates that the
editor is in Edit Mode. The editor always starts out in Edit Mode.
How to Enter Text
You must be in Insert Mode to enter text. If you are not in Insert Mode, type ^N to get into
Insert Mode. When you are in Insert Mode, the word edit on the status line changes to insert.
Once in Insert Mode, you can start typing text.
How to Correct Text as You Type It
When you are entering text in Insert Mode or entering a command in Command Mode, you
can use DEL to delete the last character you typed and ^X to delete the current line.
Command Case
Commands in Edit Mode and command mode may be typed in upper case or lower case.
Work Buffer
The editor does all its work in the work buffer (the work buffer is not something you can see;
it is part of the Site Controllers memory).
When you invoke the editor to edit a previously created file, it reads the file from the disk into
the work buffer. As you edit the file, the editor makes the changes to the copy of the file in the
work buffer. It does not change the disk file until you write the contents of the work buffer to
the disk.
You usually write the contents of the work buffer to the disk-with the SAVE or RESAVE
command-at the end of your editing session. When you create a new file, the editor does not
actually create the file on disk until you give the file a name and write the contents of the work
buffer to the disk.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 18-5
Using the Editor Using Text Editors
How to Name Files
When you create a new file you must name it before you can save it.
Filenames can be up to 8 characters long, plus an extension (the characters that follow the
period) of up to three characters: filename.ext. For restrictions on the characters that can be
used in filenames, refer to CFN3 File System on page 17-1.
To name a file:
Ensure that you are in command mode. If you are not in command mode, type ^C to get
into command mode.
Type the command NAME filename after the command mode prompt (#).
The file name will appear on the status line at the top of the screen.
Note: Naming a file does not automatically also save it. You must subsequently use the SAVE
command too.
How to Save New Files
Use the SAVE command to save a file when it is initially created. Once the file has been saved
for the first time, use the RESAVE command to resave the file. You must name the file with
the NAME command before you can save it with SAVE.
To save a new file, proceed as follows:
1 Ensure that you are in command mode.
If you are not in command mode, type ^C to get into command mode.
Ensure that you have named the file with the name command.
2 Type save. The file name is not required.
If the file has not been named, the editor displays the message Use name command to name
file first.
How to Resave Files
Use the RESAVE command to resave files that have already been saved with SAVE. To resave
a file, proceed as follows:
1 Ensure that you are in command mode.
If you are not in command mode, type ^C to get into command mode.
2 Typeresave. The file name is not required.
How to Exit the Editor
The q command exits the editor and returns to the operating system.
To exit the Editor, proceed as follows:
1 Ensure that you are in command mode.
If you are not in command mode, type ^C to get into command mode.
Using Text Editors Using the Editor
Page 18-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
2 Save the file.
If it is a new file, use save; if it has been saved before, use RESAVE.
3 Type q to exit the Editor.
How to Exit the Editor without Saving
Normally before you exit the editor you will use the SAVE or RESAVE command to save the
changes you made. But sometimes you may make changes to a file that you decide you do not
want to keep.
You can use the command-mode command q to exit without saving. The editor will ask File
not saved, proceed? Type a Y to exit without saving. The disk file will contain whatever was
saved the last time you used the SAVE (or RESAVE) command. Type N to stay in the editor.
How to Move the Cursor
To move around in the file you must be in Edit or Insert Mode. Type ^E to enter Edit Mode, or
^N to enter Insert Mode. The commands to move the cursor a character or line at a time work
in both Edit Mode and Insert Mode.
In Edit Mode and Insert Mode you can move the cursor with the arrow keys or with control
characters. The right arrow key and ^L move the cursor one character to the right. The left
arrow key and ^H move the cursor one character to the left. The up arrow key and ^K move
the cursor up one line. The down arrow key and ^J move the cursor down one line.
The following table gives the cursor movement keys:
Press the tab key or type ^I to move the cursor to the next tab stop. In Insert Mode this will
insert tabs.
Moving Rapidly Forward/Backward through File
To move rapidly forward or backward through a file, proceed as follows:
1 If you are not in Edit Mode, type ^E to get into edit mode.
2 Type u or U to start moving rapidly backward or up through the file. Type anything else to
stop.
The cursor will automatically stop when it gets to the first line of the file.
3 Type d or D to start moving forward or down through the file. Type anything else to stop.
The cursor will automatically stop when it gets to the last line of the file.
Action Keys
Move one right right arrow or ^L
Move one left left arrow or ^H
Up one line up arrow or ^K
Down one line down arrow or ^J
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 18-7
Using the Editor Using Text Editors
Moving the Cursor to the Beginning or End of a Line
To move the cursor to the beginning or to the end of the line, proceed as follows:
1 If you are not in Edit Mode, type ^E to get into Edit Mode.
2 To move the cursor to the beginning of the current line, type b or B. To move the cursor to
the end of the current line, type e or E.
How to Insert Text
To enter text you must be in insert mode. If you are not already in insert mode, type ^N to
switch to Insert Mode.
Text inserted in the file pushes characters on the right side of the cursor to the right. Text does
not automatically wrap from the end of one line to the beginning of the next. You must press
Enter to end a typing line and start a new one.
How to Delete Text
The Delete command works in edit mode and insert mode. ^D deletes the character at the
cursor, moving the rest of the line one character to the left.
To delete a character, move the cursor to the character, then type ^D.
Use the DEL key to delete a character to the left of the cursor.
Note: DEL works in Edit and Insert Mode.
How to Open a Line
The command to Open a line may be executed in edit or insert mode. To open a line above
the current typing line, use ^O.
How to Undo Changes to a Line
The command to Undo changes to a line may be executed in edit or insert mode. Use ^U to
undo changes to a line. You must type ^U when you are still on the line, before you move to
another line or make any new changes. ^U will restore the line to the way it was before you
made any changes.
How to Join Two Lines
The command to join two lines can be executed from Edit or Insert Mode. To join two lines,
place the cursor anywhere on the second line and type ^R. The command joins the line
containing the cursor to the line immediately above it. The command will not work if the
resulting line would be 80 or more characters long.
How to Split Two Lines
The command to Split a line can be executed from edit or insert mode. Lines can be broken at
the cursor by using ^S. Place the cursor where you want the lines to be split and type ^S (if
this does not work on your remote terminal, change your terminals setting from XON-XOFF
to DTK).
Using Text Editors Advanced Editing
Page 18-8 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Copy a Line
You can use the commands to copy a line in edit mode and insert mode. ^Y Yanks a copy of
the current line into a temporary buffer, and ^P puts the copy below the current line.
1 Move the cursor to the line you want to copy.
2 Type ^Y. The current line is unchanged, and a duplicate of it is placed in a temporary buffer.
3 Move the cursor to the line above where you want the copied line to go.
4 Type ^P. The copied line will be placed below the current line.
How to Replace One Character
The command to replace one character with another can be executed only in Edit mode. The
command x or X replaces one character with another.
1 If you are not in edit mode, type ^E to get into edit mode.
2 Put the cursor on the character you want replaced.
3 Type x.
The status line will display edit: eXchange.
4 Type the character that will replace the one under the cursor.
You can cancel the x command by typing ^H (H for halt) instead of entering the exchange
character (^H functions only to terminate the command).
Advanced Editing
The commands described in this section allow you to do complex editing functions. They are
not usually required for editing Site Controller files.
How to Move the Cursor to a Specified Character
Use the Edit Mode SEARCH command to search for a specified character on the current line
only (not in the entire document). The search starts to the right of the cursor. You must be in
Edit mode to use the search command.
1 If you are not in Edit mode, type ^E to get into Edit mode.
2 Type s or S.
The status line will display edit: search.
3 Enter the character you want to search for.
The cursor will move to the next occurrence of that character to the right on the current
line.
If the character is not on the current line, the cursor will move to the end of the line.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 18-9
Advanced Editing Using Text Editors
How to Move the Cursor to Specified Line
You must be in edit or Command mode to use the goto command to move the cursor to a
specified line.
1 If you are not in edit mode, type ^E to get into edit mode.
2 Type g or G.
The cursor will move to the status line, which will display edit: goto:.
3 Type the number of the line you want to go to, and press Enter.
The cursor will move to the line you specified.
If you type a line number that is greater than the number of lines in your file, the cursor
moves to the last file line.
How to Search for a Specified String
Use the Command Mode FIND command to search for the next occurrence of a specified
string of characters. The cursor will move to the beginning of the next occurrence of the
specified string, and the editor will enter Insert Mode. If the string is not found, the editor
remains in command mode.
A question mark (?) in the search string is treated as a wild card. It will match any character
in that position.
A caret (^) as the first character of the string indicates the beginning of a line. A caret that is
not the first character is not treated specially. (Note that the ^symbol does double duty. It
usually stands for holding down the CONTROL key when you press another key, or it can
stand for itself as the first character of a string).
FIND Command
To search for a specified string, proceed as follows:
1 If you are not in command mode, type ^C to enter command mode.
2 Type find. The command line will display the prompt Search mask.
3 Type the character or characters to search for.
The cursor will move to the first character in the specified string and the editor will enter
insert mode.
If the string is not found, the editor stays in command mode.
How to Search for and Print a String
Use the command-mode SEARCH command to print all lines containing a specified string.
To execute the search command, the editor must be in command mode.
1 If you are not in command mode, type ^C to enter command mode.
2 Type search. The command line will display the prompt Search mask?
3 Type the character or characters to search for.
FRED will print the line numbers and the lines that contain the specified string.
Using Text Editors Advanced Editing
Page 18-10 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Execute a Global Search and Replace
Use the command-mode CHANGE command to search the specified line range for a specified
string of characters and replace it with a specified replacement string.
A question mark (?) in the search string is treated as a wild card. It will match any character in
that position. A caret (^) as the first character of the string indicates the beginning of a line. A
caret that is not the first character is not treated specially.
Only the first occurrence of the search string in a line will be changed.
CHANGE Command
To globally search for a specified string and replace it, proceed as follows:
1 If the editor is not in Command Mode, type^C to enter Command Mode.
2 Type change and, optionally, the line range you want to change.
To specify a range, enter the lower line number, a space, and the higher line number. If you do
not specify a range, the command will act on the whole file. If you specify only one line
number, the command will act on lines from the specified line to the end of the file.
The command line will display the prompt Search mask?.
3 Type the character or characters to change, and press Enter.
The command line will display the prompt Change mask?
4 Type the replacement string.
The editor will print the line numbers, as well as the lines themselves, at the change.
How to Erase the Entire Work Buffer
If you want to start working on a new file, use the command-mode CLEAR command to erase
the entire copy of the file in the work buffer. To protect you from losing a file that you might
really want, the command line will display File buffer not saved, proceed? if you have not
saved or resaved the file since you last made changes.
Note: If you erase the work buffer and then resave, the empty file will overwrite whatever was
in the file on disk.
How to Delete Specified Lines
Use the Command Mode DEL command with, optionally, a line range to erase all or part of a
file. To specify a range, enter the lower line number, a space, and the higher line number. For
example, del 1 3 will delete the first three lines in the file.
If you do not specify a line range the entire file will be erased. If you specify only one line
number, the lines from the specified line to the end of the file will be erased.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 18-11
Advanced Editing Using Text Editors
How to Delete Up to a Specified Character
Use the Edit Mode KILL command to delete text up to a specified character. The KILL
command deletes everything from the cursor up to, but not including, a specified character. It
deletes within a single line only.
If the search character is not found to the right of the cursor, everything to the end of the
current line is deleted. This is an easy way to delete everything on a line to the right of the
cursor position.
1 If you are not in edit mode, type ^E to get into Edit Mode.
2 Typek or K.
The status line will display edit: kill.
3 Type the search character.
Everything from the cursor up to the specified character will be erased.
You can cancel the command before entering the search character by typing ^H (^H functions
only to terminate the command).
How to Append a File to the Current File
Use the APPEND command to append a file to your current file. You can also use this
command to insert a file in the middle of the current file.
To append or insert a file, proceed as follows:
1 Enter the Edit or Insert Mode and position the cursor where you want the file to be inserted.
2 Enter the command mode and type,
append filename
where filename is the name of the file that you want to insert.
A copy of the named file will be inserted above the line the cursor was on. The original file is
not deleted.
How to Set Tab Stops
Use the command-mode TABS n command to set tab stops every n columns. Tabs 0 is
equivalent to tabs 1.
As on a typewriter, TAB is used to move the cursor to the next tab stop. If you print the file,
the spacing will depend on how the printers tab stops are set.
Using Text Editors Editor Command Summary
Page 18-12 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Edit a New File without Leaving FRED
Use the command-mode LOAD command to edit a new file without leaving the editor. To edit
a new file:
1 If you are not in command mode, type^C to enter command mode.
2 Use the command SAVE or RESAVE to save the current file that you have been editing.
3 Type
load filename
to edit the new file.
The following page contains the FRED editor command summary.
Editor Command Summary
The following table summarizes the editor commands.
Command Argument Mode(s) Function
^O i, e open line above
ENTER i, e open line below
or ^K
i, e cursor up one line
or ^J
i, e cursor down one line
or ^H
i, e cursor left one character
or ^L
i, e cursor right one character
SPACEBAR e cursor right one character
b e move cursor to beginning of line
e e move cursor to end of line
^E i, e, c enter edit mode
^C i, e, c enter command mode
^N i, e, c enter insert mode
c e enter command mode
i e enter insert mode
DEL i, e delete one character left of cursor
^D i, e delete one character at cursor
^X i, e delete current line
k char e kill line from cursor up to character char
^U i, e undo changes to current line
^S i, e split line at cursor
^R i, e join current line to line above
^Y i, e save current line
^P i, e put saved line below current line
u e scan backward (up) through file
d e scan forward (down) through file
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 18-13
Editor Command Summary Using Text Editors
g n e, c go to line number n
x char e exchange character at cursor with character char
s char e search for character char
change line range c make changes to lines in line range
find c search for a pattern, enter insert mode
search line range c print all lines in line range that match a pattern
clear c erase entire file
del line range c deletes lines in line range
append filename c insert filename at cursor
load filename c replace buffer with filename
name filename c set name of current filename
save c save file
resave c resave existing file
q c quit editor, exit to operating system
tabs n c set tab stops every n columns
Command Argument Mode(s) Function
Using Text Editors Editor Command Summary
Page 18-14 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 19-1
Restrictions on Command File Names Making Your Own Commands
19 Making Your Own Commands
Many times you will have procedures at your site that require the use of several Site Controller
commands. The most common example is a shift-break procedure. When you break shift at
your site you may want to load the new shift, reset some totals, and print reports.
You can create a command file that contains several Site Controller commands, then have your
users execute that single command file rather than having to give a series of complicated
commands. When you execute a command file, all the commands in it are automatically
performed. You can even create command files that can be executed from the console.
As another example, other procedures may require you to enter a lot of data to load prices for
fuel price codes or to load broadcast messages. You can use one of the editors to create a
command file that will load the data. Once you have created the command file, you can easily
make small changes in it to reload new data.
Command files must contain only Site Controller system commands, disk-based commands,
and comments.
Restrictions on Command File Names
Command files must follow MS-DOS filename restrictions given in CFN3 File System on
page 17-1. Command files also have two additional name restrictions:
First, command file names must have the extension .CMD. That is how the Site Controller can
tell they are command files.
Second, the first part of the command file name (the part before the period and the extension)
cannot match any of the names reserved for Site Controller system commands, including any
abbreviations for commands. For example, P, PR, PRI, PRIN, and PRINT are all reserved
names. But PRXX is not a reserved name, because the third and fourth characters do not match
a reserved name.
Program Space
Only one disk-based program or command file can be run at once. If a cron or command file
attempts to run a disk-based program and finds another program is running, it will wait until
the program space is free (however, if you invoke a disk-based command directly at the
prompt and another program is running, the command will be terminated with the error
message Program space is busy).
Making Your Own Commands Search Path for Commands
Page 19-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Search Path for Commands
Before the Site Controller can execute a disk-based command, it must locate it. The Site
Controller looks for disk-based commands in certain directories in a certain order. This order
is called the search path. The Site Controller executes the first command it finds that matches
the command name given.
Standard Search Path for a CFN3 application
(The paths shown above are the default. You can configure a different path with menu page 7
of the SYS_PAR program, as explained in MDE-4773 CFN III Configuration Manual for
Windows XP).
A command file (.CMD extension) with the same name as a regular executable command
(.BIN extension) will not be executed if the .BIN file is in the same place on the search path.
The .BIN file will be executed instead because .BIN files have precedence over .CMD files.
For example, if TREE.BIN and TREE.CMD are in the directory BIN, when you type TREE,
TREE.BIN will be executed.
How to Execute User Command Files
To execute a user command file, type the files name without the extension. If the command
file is not in the search path, you must type the pathname of the command.
[ P: ] * PRDATA
- DATE -
Tue 9/ 12/ 99 11: 40AM, Tr ans=57, Seq=624 SCI I I v3. 3
- DRAWER -
Dr Sh Cash i n Pai d Out Bal ance Saf e dr op
1 1 830. 12 0. 00 830. 12 0. 00 Began Tue 9/ 10/ 99 8: 00 AM
Pr ev 1 791. 35 0. 00 00. 00 791. 35 Ended Mon 9/ 09/ 99 4: 00 PM
Pr ev 2 1239. 87 0. 00 00. 00 1239. 87 Ended Tue 9/ 10/ 99 12: 00 PM
Pr ev 3 692. 44 0. 00 00. 00 692. 44 Ended Tue 9/ 10/ 99 8: 00 AM
Today 830. 12 0. 00 830. 12 0. 00 Began Tue 9/ 10/ 99 8: 00 AM
Yest dy 2723. 66 0. 00 00. 00 2723. 66 Began Mon 9/ 10/ 99 8: 00 AM
Cuml t v 9832. 47 0. 00 830. 12 9002. 35 Began Sun 9/ 01/ 99 8: 00 AM
- TANK -
T# Pr oduct Tot al s Reor der Gauge Di f f % Temp Ul l age
1 Regul ar 30000. 000 5000. 000
2 Unl eaded 30000. 000 5000. 000
3 Di esel 30000. 000 8000. 000
4 Pr emi um 30000. 000 5000. 000
[ P: ] *
Output of command files is printed on the command terminal unless you redirect it by using
either ENABLE DUMP (see below in this chapter) or the redirection options (>or >>) in the
command file.
Path Description
R: the RAM drive
. current directory
P:BIN BIN on hard drive
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 19-3
Comments in Command Files Making Your Own Commands
Comments in Command Files
A line in a command file that begins with an asterisk (*) is a comment. A comment is usually
an informative note to yourself or to the next person who might edit the file; the note is usually
about the previous or next command in the file. The command interpreter ignores any line in a
command file that begins with an asterisk.
If the very first character in the whole command file is an asterisk, it has a special meaning.
When the first character is an asterisk, the lines in the command file are not printed on the
command terminal when that command file is executed. So, if you are having problems with a
command file, removing the first asterisk can be useful in debugging.
If the first character is not an asterisk, all the lines in the command file, including comment
lines, are printed on the command terminal when the file is executed. Except when you are
testing your command files, you almost always want an asterisk as the first character.
If a line in a command file has a backquote () as its last character, the command may be
continued on the next line. This is useful for echo strings that are too long to fit in 80 columns.
How to Use Terminal Input with Command Files
To have a command in a command file print prompts and take input from the terminal, you can
use the T (terminal) option with that command in the command file. The T option disables
redirection for that command and causes the command to prompt for all input from the
terminal instead of taking input from the file. Any other output from the command will also be
printed on the terminal.
[ P: ] * TYPE NEWSHIFT.CMD
st op
* st op hal t s any new t r ansact i ons
* f r omst ar t i ng unt i l shi f t change
* i s compl et ed
l oad shi f t ; t
pr i nt t ot al s; at
r un
* r un r esumes oper at i ons af t er
st op
[ P: ] *
[ P: ] * NEWSHIFT
st op
l oad shi f t ; t
Shi f t number ? 1
pr i nt t ot al s; at
Whi ch t ot al s? 3
- - - Shi f t 3 f r omSun 9/ 19/ 99 9: 51 PM t o Mon 9/ 20/ 99 6: 35 AM - -
-
1 1 Regul ar 38 35. 25
2 1 Unl eaded 20 18. 55
3 1 Pr emi um 41 47. 95
4 1 Di esel 33 26. 91
- - - - - - - - - -
132 128. 66
r un
[ P: ] *
Making Your Own Commands Command File Commands
Page 19-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
When the command with the T option ends, input is taken from the file again and redirection is
enabled. When the command file above is executed, the commands LOAD SHIFT and PRINT
TOTALS will print their normal prompts and take input from the terminal.
Command File Commands
How to Print a Line with ECHO
ECHO or EC sends its arguments to standard output. Standard output normally prints on the
command terminal, but can be redirected to a file. If you use ECHO in a command file that is
executed by cron, the output will disappear unless it is redirected to a file.
ECHO adds a new line after the line it prints by adding a carriage return after the printed line.
ECHO;A does not put a carriage return after the echoed text.
For command files that will be executed from the console, use ECHO;T to have output
displayed on the console. Without the T option, ECHO will send its output to the log printer
when executed from the console.
You can use ECHO to, for instance, display a reassuring message that the command is in the
process of working.
[ P: ] * TYPE SHIFT1.CMD
* l oad shi f t command
* t akes one ar gument , t he new shi f t number .
echo Loadi ng shi f t %1
st op
l oad shi f t %1
r un
[ P: ] * SHIFT1 3
Loadi ng shi f t 3
[ P: ] *
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 19-5
Command File Commands Making Your Own Commands
The example in action would look like this
How to Wait with SLEEP
The SLEEP command causes the Site Controller to wait the specified number of seconds
before it executes the next command. For example, SLEEP 2 causes a wait of two seconds.
[ P: ] * TYPE TEST.CMD
ECHO; T %D
SLEEP 2
ECHO; T %T
SLEEP 2
[ P: ] *
You can use SLEEP to display a message for a specified time before you go on to the next
command, or to give transactions a few seconds to stop after a STOP;I command. The
command below displays the date, then the time. The %D and %T in this example are
variables, which are explained later in this chapter.
From Command File to Command File
A command file contains one or more commands, which are executed sequentially; that is, the
command file executes its first command, then returns to itself and executes the second
command, and so on.
However, a command file cannot call up another command file and then return to itself for
subsequent commands. Once the first command file has called up the second command file,
there is no way to return to the first command file.
Therefore, if you want to have a routine that involves two or more command files, have the
first command file finish all its commands then call the second command file, which, in turn,
will execute all its commands and then call a third command file and so on (this procedure is
known as chaining files together).
Wait for User Input
Sometimes you require to have a command file wait for input from the user before it continues
executing. For example, you may want to give a user time to read a message before
continuing. The command PAUSE or PAU displays its arguments and waits for the user to
enter a line of input. The program continues when the user presses Enter.
Like ECHO, the PAUSE command adds a new line to the line it prints. Use the A option
(PAUSE;A) to keep it from printing the new line.
You can use PAUSE with the I option (PAUSE;I) to store user input for use by the next
command that requires user input.
Making Your Own Commands Line Length Limitations
Page 19-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Line Length Limitations
One line on a command terminal can display 80 characters. The Profit Point can display up to
40 characters on a line. If there are 24 or fewer characters on a Profit Point line, they will be
shown in larger type.
~0A Control Code
The text to be displayed by the ECHO or PAUSE command may be longer than one line. If so,
insert a ~0A where you want a new line in the text display (note that the middle character is a
zero, not an upper case O). 0A is a hex number, and the tilde tells the Site Controller to
translate that hex number into a new line.
[ P: ] * TYPE PUMP&TAX.CMD
* command f i l e f or pr i nt i ng r epor t s
ECHO Pr ess 1 t o pr i nt pump r epor t
ECHO Pr ess 2 t o pr i nt t ax r epor t
[ P: ] * TYPE PUMP&TAX.CMD
* command f i l e f or pr i nt i ng r epor t s
ECHO Pr ess 1 t o pr i nt pump r epor t ~0APr ess 2 t pr i nt t ax r epor t
Using ~0A, the same command file could also start out like this.
@P Console Destinations
The line messages displayed on the Profit Point system begin with @P.
Note that sending a ^T to the Profit Point system opens the cash drawer.
Command Files Executed from a Console
Use the T option with ECHO and PAUSE to have prompts displayed on the console display.
Without the T option, ECHO will send its output to the log printer.
Ask for numeric responses to the IF -y and IF -!y commands (refer to Advanced Command
Files on page 3-1). A 0 means No, and a 1 means Yes.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 19-7
Command Files at Sign On Making Your Own Commands
Command Files at Sign On
You can set up a sequence of commands to be executed whenever a user signs on. The
commands can differ, depending on whether you are signing on to the local or remote port.
The command file is R:SIGNON?.CMD, where ? is 1 for local port sign on and 2 for remote
port.
The SIGNON?.CMD file cannot be activated by a user at the console or by a cron file.
How to Save Output from a Command File
Output of a Single Command
For a single command, you can save the output to a file by using the >or >>options. The >
option overwrites any existing file with the specified filename. The >>option appends data
to the end of an existing file with the specified filename.
[ P: ] * P PU;>PUMP.LST
[ P: ] *
This example saves the output of the PRINT PUMP command to a file named PUMP.LST.
Output of Several Commands
You can have the output of several commands redirected to a file by using the ENABLE
DUMP or E DU command and specifying a filename. This is mostly used in command files
to have the output of the commands in the file redirected to a file. Use DISABLE DUMP or
DI DU to terminate redirection.
[ P: ] * TYPE PR_SALES.CMD
ENABLE DUMP SALE_OUT
PRI NT SALES
PRI NT TOTALS
PRI NT PRODUCT
[ P: ] *
The ENABLE DUMP command normally overwrites the specified file if it exists. With the
A option, the command appends to the specified file, if it already exists.
The >, >>, and <options work when ENABLE DUMP is in effect. They override output
dumping.
The command file in the above example puts the output of the commands PRINT SALES,
PRINT TOTALS, and PRINT PRODUCT in the file SALE_OUT.
Making Your Own Commands How to Output to Log Printer
Page 19-8 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Output to Log Printer
Refer to Site Controller III on page 3-1 for more information on output to the log printer.
How to Output to a Receipt Printer
The PRINT RECEIPT or P REC command lets you print text on a receipt printer (its name
reflects the fact that it involves the receipt printer, not that it prints receipts).
The simple use of the PRINT RECEIPT command is to test the receipt printer. However, it
can also be used to print reports, and for this reason, you might want to use it in command
files.
PRINT RECEIPT allows long receipts with widths up to the maximum of the receipt printer.
This allows reports, as well as receipts, to be printed by a receipt printer (also, a full-carriage
printer could be tied to a console through a parallel port).
The address of the receipt printer either comes from the first data in the standard input, or it
can be specified as a P1 option (this avoids having to require the printer number to be put in
the file that is being redirected to a receipt printer). The printer address can be specified in
four ways:
If only a number is given, it is the address of the printer.
If the address is only C, the output is sent to the printer associated with the console where
the command file is being run.
If the command is run from the local or remote port (in human mode) and C is specified,
the output goes to the printer associated with console #1.
If the address is C1 - C4 the output goes to the printer associated with the specified
console number (which is set in console parameters).
When you send a file to a printer, you may want to put a heading line or to include printer-
control codes that do not appear in the file. If so, put the heading or codes on the same line in
the command file as the PRINT RECEIPT command; the extra characters will be sent to the
printer before the file text. Any text sent to the printer is checked for ~and ^control codes,
such as ^M for a new line.
Note: Sending a ^T to the console opens the cash drawer.
See your printer and command terminal manuals for these control codes, as they may vary
from device to device. If the control codes are given as hex numbers, insert a ~before the hex
number; if the codes are letters or characters, insert a ^before the letter or character.
Use the C option to print more than one line with PRINT RECEIPT. Unlike most Site
Controller commands, in this case you do not indicate the end of the lines you want printed by
responding to the last Line to print? prompt with only a carriage return. Instead, type only a
period (.) and press Return (this is so you can include blank lines in what is printed on the
receipt printer, if you want).
You can use PRINT RECEIPT to print the entire contents of a file on the receipt printer. The
format is:
PRINT RECEIPT;<filename
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 19-9
How to Add an Event to the Disk Journal Making Your Own Commands
How to Add an Event to the Disk Journal
You can add an event to the journal log by using the command LOG EVENT (LOG EV). This
will mark an event in the journal log by placing an event line at the specified point.
C* LO EV 20 45 0 13 0 0 335
C*
There are several parameters available with this command:
You must include one parameter, the event type, the others are optional but a place holder
must be included in the command if a parameter is skipped. For example, to assign an event
type of 20, with an amount of $45.00, a clerk number of 13, and a shift sequence number of
335, the command would look like the example.
Notice that there are zeros representing the parameters that are not used because the last
parameter was required. Any fields not provided will default to their correct system values.
Variables for Use in Command Files
System Variables
The following system variables can be used in command files (these variables are also called
percent variables).
Note: The variables are case-sensitive. That means they must be upper case or lower case, as
shown here:
Option Description
et Event type 0-99: Enter a number, 0 through 99. It will appear with as 100 - 149 in the journal
(150 - 199 are reserved).
amt Amount in current monetary units: Do not use a decimal.
d Descriptive text (up to 20-characters): If you have any spaces, enclose the description in quotes.
c# Console number: Must be 2 or less characters.
cl# Clerk number: Must be 2 or less characters.
sh# Shift number: Must be 2 or less characters.
sq# Shift sequence number: Must be 4 or less characters.
Name Definition
%D Date (MM/DD/YY format)
%T Time (HH:MM AM/PM format)
%W Day of week (Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat)
%Y Date and time in YYMMDDHHMM format
%U User number of user currently signed on
%P Permission level of user currently signed on
%S Current shift number (1, 2, or 3)
%Q Shift sequence number: each shift change increments this number; wraps at 9999
Making Your Own Commands Variables for Use in Command Files
Page 19-10 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
%B# Current drawer balance for drawer #
%I Site ID of the site
%A Number of input lines from command terminal waiting to be read (to test if user
pressed Enter)
%V Site version number
%J J ournal state:
0 =normal
1 =tmp.log on RAM drive has not been flushed to journal.log on the PC drive.
%L Locale name:
0 =locale code
1 =quantity power
2 =money power
3 =fuel price power
4 =date format
5 =money character
6 =decimal character
7 =separation character
%K Position of console keyswitch:
0 =off
1 =on
4 =supervisor
8 =manager
%E Last error code from last command. A 00 means the command was completed
successfully, greater than 00 usually means the command failed. (Note that FIND uses
the error code in a special way.)
00 =completed
01 =transaction(s) in progress
02 =not found (does not exist)
03 =invalid data
04 =card is valid
05 =card is not valid
06 =device is out of service
07 =pump is in use
08 =pump is not on
09 =illegal command
10 =completed, failed
11 =file full
12 =command is protected
13 =site is stopped
14 =invalid option
15 =valid card, bit-mapped
16 =valid card, limited
17 =invalid card, bit-mapped
18 =invalid card, limited
19 =expecting NC, NW
20 =string too long
21 =print a heading before this record
22 =some valid, some not
23 =print a subtotal before this record
24 =no price
25 =cannot open file
26 =site not stopped
27 =cannot activate
Name Definition
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 19-11
Variables for Use in Command Files Making Your Own Commands
In two of the last three variables above, %M7C#and %M8C#, the #can be replaced by the
console number, as described, or it can be replaced by a %a-%z user variable (discussed in this
chapter and the Advanced command files chapter) to allow variable selection of the console
number.
Command-line-argument Variables
These are the variables that can be used in command-line arguments:
Name Definition
%0 Number of arguments on command line.
%1 - %9 Command line arguments one through nine.
You can use command-line arguments in command files. Command-line arguments are strings
typed on the command line after the command and separated by spaces. The form is the same
as is used by Windows XP or MS-DOS.
Where you want to use the argument in the file, put a percent sign (%) followed by the position
number of the arguments on the command line. Arguments entered after a command are
numbered from left to right, starting with 1. The first argument after the command is %1, the
second argument is %2, and so on.
%C Where command is being executed from:
1 =local command port (command terminal)
2 =remote command port
3 =cron
8 =Profit Point #1
9 =Profit Point #2
10 =Profit Point #3
11 =Profit Point #4
%R Site run level:
0 =running
1 =blocking new transactions
2 =stopped
3 =emergency stopped
4 =memory full
5 =crashed
%Fd Returns the amount of free space on the specified drive (where d is the drive)
%M Miscellaneous options where #stands for:
0 =returns the value (in cents) contained in a non-resettable totalizer that adds the
absolute value of all sale-related items; that is, all sales add to the totalizer,
regardless if they are reversals, returns, payouts, etc. (Must have J OURNAL.LOG
enabled.)
1 =returns the initial drawer balance in SYS_PAR
2 =transaction number of first transaction in file
3 =transaction number of last transaction in file
4 =status of bank modem (0=down, 1=available, 3=connected)
5 =status of CFN modem (0=down, 1=available, 3=connected)
(for 6 - 8 see the discussion in the NEXT CLERK command about the unique shift #s
for every console parameter in SYS_PAR)
6 =if the SYS_PAR parameter is enabled, returns a 1; if disabled, returns a zero
7C#=if the SYS_PAR parameter is enabled, returns the shift number of console #;
if disabled, returns the systems shift number
8C#=if the SYS_PAR parameter is enabled, returns the shift serial number of
console #; if disabled, returns the systems shift serial number
9 =returns CFN Remote port config 0=Dumb, 1=ANSI, 2=VT52
Name Definition
[ P: ] * TYPE NEWSHIFT.CMD
* t akes t wo ar gument s, t he ol d and new shi f t number s
st op
l oad shi f t %2
r un
pr i nt t ot al s; a %1
pr i nt dr awer
[ P: ] *[ P: ] *
Making Your Own Commands Variables for Use in Command Files
Page 19-12 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
For example, you could create a command file called NEWSHIFT.CMD to be executed at shift
changes. Under this example, an employee would later use the NEWSHIFT.CMD file by
typing only its name, NEWSHIFT, without the extension. The employee would also add two
arguments: first, the number of the just-completed shift and, second, the number of the new
shift. The NEWSHIFT command would then perform a LOAD SHIFT upon the second
argument (the number of the new shift) and a PRINT TOTALS upon the first argument (the
number of the just-completed shift).
The command:
NEWSHIFT 2 3
typed at the prompt will load shift 3 and print the totals for the previous shift 2.
User Variables
Name Definition
%a - %z User string variables set by SET_VAR; up to 118 characters long.
The variables %a-%z can be used in your command files.
However, you must use them on a temporary basis because, if you write several command
files, you will find it difficult to make sure that another file does not use the same variable for
a different purpose (refer to Advanced Command Files on page 3-1).
EXECUTE Command
The EXECUTE, or EXE, command causes the rest of the text on a command line to be
executed immediately and in the background. The output will not be displayed on the console
or command window, nor will the process hold up normal console operations. Without
EXECUTE, you cannot ring up sales until all the commands in a command file have been
executed.
The syntax for EXECUTE is:
EXECUTE command
EXECUTE filename
where command is the name of a command and filename is the name of a command file.
EXECUTE is especially useful for shift-break command files where you do not want to hold
up console operations when shift processing is underway.
A minus sign (-) is automatically added to the command, so the output is not printed.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 19-13
How to Exit from Command Files Making Your Own Commands
As many commands as there are available entries in the cron table may be queued
simultaneously.
Since cron and the console use the same command processor, commands queued with
EXECUTE will not start until the console is logged off remote command mode.
Since EXECUTE runs commands in the background, make sure all your command files that
are run with EXECUTE do not contain any indefinite loops. Otherwise, you can lock up the
program space. If you must fill the program space, use the REMOVE CRON;AI command to
remove all running or pending executable or cron commands.
How to Exit from Command Files
The Site Controller command EXIT, if encountered in a command file, will cause the
command file to terminate. This will not log the user off the data terminal or console. To
terminate the command file and log off the user, use QUIT.
Making Your Own Commands How to Exit from Command Files
Page 19-14 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 20-1
How to Use the IF Command Advanced Command Files
20 Advanced Command Files
If you have had some computer programming experience, this chapter must be
self-explanatory. If you have not had any computer programming experience, you might want
to discuss this chapter with the person in your organization who has the most knowledge about
computers.
How to Use the IF Command
The IF command allows conditional execution of the next one or more commands in a
command file. IF uses several switches that allow you to specify conditions.
IF supports block-structured statements, and uses Pascal-type blocking. The format of an IF
statement is:
IF condition [text]
BEGIN
command1
command2
command3
. . . .
END
ELSE
BEGIN
command1
command2
command3
. . . .
END
If condition is true, the commands following IF will be executed. If condition is not true, the
commands following the optional ELSE will be executed. The ELSE part is optional and may
be omitted if not required.
BEGIN and END, on lines by themselves, delimit the commands. They are not required if only
one command line follows IF or ELSE.
IF statements can be nested.
Note: The indents are not required. Blank lines and tabs and spaces at the beginning of lines
are ignored (but is a good way to keep track of subsections in your code).
Advanced Command Files How to Use the IF Command
Page 20-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
The following conditions can be used with IF.
Switch Function
-y With a -y switch, text is echoed to the data terminal or console, and if the user
enters a 1, Y, or y from the console or data terminal keyboard, the commands
following the IF statement are executed.
If the user enters a 0, N, or n, the commands following the IF statement are
skipped, and, if an ELSE follows, the commands following ELSE are
executed.
If the user enters anything else, the text is printed again.
-!y A -!y switch is similar to a -y switch, but works in reverse. Text is echoed to the
data terminal or console, and if the user enters a 1, Y, or y from the console or
data terminal keyboard, the commands following the IF statement are skipped.
If an ELSE follows, the commands following ELSE are executed.
If the user enters a 0, N, or n, the commands following the IF statement are
executed. If the user enters anything else, the text is printed again.
arg1=arg2 With a =switch, the next two arguments are compared for literal equality.
If they are equal, the commands following the IF statement are executed.
If the arguments are not equal, the IF commands are skipped, and, if an
ELSE follows, the commands following ELSE are executed.
arg1!=arg2 The !=switch is similar to the =switch, but works in reverse.
If the next two arguments are equal, the commands following the IF
statement are skipped, and, if an ELSE follows, the commands following
ELSE are executed.
If the arguments are not equal, the commands following the IF statement are
executed.
arg1<arg2 With the <switch, the next two arguments must be numbers.
If the first argument is less than the second argument, the commands
following the IF statement are executed.
If the first argument is not less than the second argument, the IF commands
are skipped, and if an ELSE follows, the commands following the ELSE are
executed.
arg1<=arg2 With the <=switch, the next two arguments must be numbers.
If the first argument is less than or equal to the second argument, the
commands following the IF statement are executed.
If the first argument is not less than or equal to the second argument, the IF
commands are skipped, and if an ELSE follows, the commands following the
ELSE are executed.
arg1>arg2 With the >switch, the next two arguments must be numbers.
If the first argument is greater than the second argument, the commands
following the IF statement are executed.
f the first argument is not greater than the second argument, the IF
commands are skipped, and if an ELSE follows, the commands following the
ELSE are executed.
arg1>=arg2 With the >=switch, the next two arguments must be numbers.
If the first argument is greater than or equal to the second argument, the
commands following the IF statement are executed.
f the first argument is not greater than or equal to the second argument, the
IF commands are skipped, and if an ELSE follows, the commands following
the ELSE are executed.
-e filename With the -e switch the next argument is treated as a file name.
If the file exists, the commands following the IF statement are executed.
If it does not exist, the commands following the IF statement are skipped,
and, if an ELSE follows, the commands following ELSE are executed.
(Unless the command is executed upon a file in the current directory,
filename must include the path.)
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 20-3
How to Use the IF Command Advanced Command Files
When using the IF statement the next line must not wrap into the following line or the system
will bypass the first command line and pick up the second line and only execute it. For
example:
IF (condition)
pause;a ~10~14Switch Drawers~0AInsert new drawer containing
$%M1
~0APress Enter to continue
The system will bypass the pause;a ... command line and only execute the ~0APress Enter to
continue line.
It is possible to link the Boolean options together with and and or. An & (ampersand) is
the AND operator and an | (pipe or vertical bar) is the OR operator.
The & and | functions are evaluated left to right:
& terminates when the first false result is obtained
| terminates when the first true result is obtained
Avoid using both & and | in the same IF statement because your result may not be what you
expect.
-!e filename With the -!e switch the next argument is treated as a file name.
If the file does not exist, the commands following the IF statement are
executed.
If it exists, the commands following the IF statement are skipped, and, if an
ELSE follows, the commands following ELSE are executed. (Unless the
command is executed upon a file in the current directory, filename must
include the path.)
Switch Function
[ P: ] * TYPE TEST2.CMD
i f - y Ar e you sur e?
BEGI N
pr da
pr pu
END
el se
BEGI N
echo Not sur e.
i f - y Ar e you r eal l y REALLY not sur e?
BEGI N
echo Def i ni t el y not sur e.
exi t
END
el se
echo Not sur e i f not sur e.
END
[ P: ] * TEST2
Ar e you sur e? y
pr da
Sat 9/ 18/ 99 11: 40AM, Tr ans=57, Seq=624 SCI I I v3. 3
pr pu
P# T# Pr Pc Pr i ce Tot al s $Tot al Rat e Li mi t Sl ow
1 1 1 1 0. 799 178. 770 181. 10 100/ $ $30 0. 500
2 2 2 0. 859 360. 716 322. 74
3 3 3 0. 919 740. 360 741. 94
2 1 1 1 0. 799 84. 110 66. 44 100/ $ $30 0. 500
3 2 3 0. 919 2. 140 3. 13
3 3 3 0. 919 462. 540 494. 42
3 3 3 3 0. 919 353. 044 357. 14 100/ $ $30 0. 500
4 4 4 4 1. 069 336. 634 349. 97 100/ $ $30 0. 500
5 1 1 1 0. 799 7019. 954 6722. 35 100/ G $500 0. 500
6 2 2 2 0. 859 503. 411 548. 22 100/ G $30 0. 500
7 3 3 3 0. 919 464. 840 578. 71 100/ G $30 0. 500
8 4 4 4 1. 069 778. 470 804. 44 100/ G $30 0. 500
======== =======
11284. 99 11170. 60
[ P: ] * TEST2
Ar e you sur e? n
Not sur e.
Ar e you r eal l y REALLY not sur e? y
Def i ni t el y not sur e.
[ P: ] *
Advanced Command Files How to Use the IF Command
Page 20-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
The following example is for demonstration purposes. It does not do anything useful.
How to Use Loops in Command Files
Two commands, LOOP and RETURN, support looping in command files. When the command
LOOP is executed, the current position in the command file is recorded. If the command
RETURN is executed, processing will resume at the location where the last LOOP was found.
If a RETURN is executed and there was no LOOP, the command file is restarted. To get out of
a loop, use IF to skip over the RETURN.
Note: You cannot perform nested loops.
The three forms of LOOP-RETURN are:
do . . . while
do . . . until
while . . . do
The do . . . while form uses an IF with a positive statement and looks like this:
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 20-5
How to Use the IF Command Advanced Command Files
LOOP
command1
command2
.
.
.
commandn
IF -[condition]
RETURN
The do . . . until form uses an IF with a negative statement and looks like this:
LOOP
command1
command2
.
.
.
commandn
IF -![condition]
RETURN
The while . . . do form uses an IF with a positive statement and looks like this:
IF -[condition]
BEGIN
LOOP
command1
command2
.
.
.
commandn
IF -[condition]
RETURN
END
How to Use Case Statements in Command Files
The command CASE, when used in a command file, allows the user to pick one command to
execute from a list of several. The maximum number of cases in a CASE statement is 99.
There are two forms of case statement. The first is:
CASE [-d] -p n1 n2
command1
command2
. . . .
commandn1
[default command]
[ P: ] * TYPE TEST3.CMD
case - p 3 %1
shi f t 1
shi f t 2
shi f t 3
[ P: ] *
Advanced Command Files How to Use the IF Command
Page 20-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
In the first form, with the -p switch, the number of the case selected is passed from the
command line. The n1 argument is the total number of cases. The n2 argument is the case to
execute.
If the optional -d switch is used, the number of cases is one greater than the number indicated
by n1. The last command, the default command, will be executed if none of the other cases
matches.
The second form of the case statement is:
CASE [-d] -e n1 text
command1
command2
. . . .
commandn1
[default command]
[ P: ] * TYPE TEST4.CMD
case - e 3 Shi f t ( 1- 3) :
shi f t 1
shi f t 2
shi f t 3
[ P: ] *
In the second form, with the -e switch, the number of the case selected is entered by the user
from the data terminal or console. The n1 argument is the total number of cases. Text is
displayed on the command terminal or console. The user then enters the number of the case to
execute. If the user enters a number that is greater than n1, text is displayed again.
If the optional -d switch is used, the number of cases is one greater than the number indicated
by n1. With the -d option, if the user enters a number that is greater than n1, the default
command is executed, and text is not displayed again.
Prompt String
You can provide a prompt string for an IF or CASE command that follows a PAUSE
command. This prompt will be displayed if the user enters a response that is not accepted by
the program. You can use this second prompt to list the acceptable responses. Note that the
second prompt will not be printed if the -d switch is used with CASE.
PAUSE; AI Do you want t o see f i l es on dr i ve A: ? ( Y/
N)
I F - y Type Y f or yes, N f or no:
di r a:
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 20-7
How to Use the IF Command Advanced Command Files
How to Set User Variables in Command Files
The names %a through %z are user variables (a percent sign followed by an uppercase letter
is a system variable, discussed in the Making your own commands chapter). They are set with
the command SET_VAR or SET.
The full syntax of SET_VAR is:
Options: [;I] |
{variable {=| @ } [string] |
variable {+| - | * | / | % | ^} number_value |
variable $ filename [line [column[length]]] |
variable ~string [column [length]] |
variable ? filename |
variable #string}
variable <format number

Argument Function
none list contents of all variables
;I deletes all variables
variable = string sets variable equal to value (literal text, %
parameter number, or % variable name)
variable @ string echoes string text as prompt, sets variable
equal to line typed by user
variable {+| - | * | / | % | ^}number_value sets variable to the result of performing the
given mathematical operation on the current
value of variable and number_value; % =mod,
^=exclusive or
variable $ filename [line [column [length]]] sets variable to the substring at location line
column in filename, for length characters
variable ~ string [column [length]] sets variable to string; if string is followed by a
blank space and a number, column, that number
is the offset into the string, from the left, before
the remainder of string will be set to variable;
(any blank spaces in the string itself must be
enclosed in quotation marks.); the second
number, length, if present, specifies how many
characters after the offset will be included in
variable
variable ? filename sets variable to exact length in bytes of disk file
named by filename
variable # string sets variable to length in characters of string
variable <format number allows a number to be formatted into a user
variable using the same format options available
for the p1 option in EHCO. This is useful for
converting the internal format of numbers in
command files (which do not have decimal points
in them) into a form that can be used as input for
commands that require decimal points in the
correct place for different international formats.
For example, if the current international format is
USA:
set x <@M 12345
would place 123.45 into variable x.
Advanced Command Files How to Use the IF Command
Page 20-8 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
The variables, which are stored on the RAM disk as strings, are implemented as the contents
of the file R:CMD#.VAR, where #is a number one greater than the command processor
number. SET_VAR will create this file as a hidden file, so it will not normally be seen.
Note that when you are setting a variable with the SET_VAR command, you do not preface it
with a percent sign (%). However, when you use a variable, such as in an ECHO command
(see the example that follows this section), you do preface the variable with a percent sign.
When user variables are stored as strings, they can be used as numbers. Strings may be up to
118 characters in length.
In SET_VAR,
M stands for configured monetary units (in the United States, the default configuration is
for two decimal places, xx.xx, for cents as hundredths of a dollar).
Q stands for configured quantity units; the default configuration is for three decimal
places, xx.xxx, for thousandths of a unit.
@ denotes an entry made at a terminal.
SET_VAR has the forms shown in the following chart. Note that square brackets, [ ], mean
that the contents enclosed within the pair of brackets are optional. A vertical bar, |, means or; it
separates alternatives.
SET_VAR Form Function
set_var Lists contents of all variables
set_var;i Deletes all variables
set_var x =hello world Stores hello world in %x
set_var x +5 Adds 5 to current contents of %x
set_var x - 1 Subtracts 1 from current contents of %x
set_var x * %b Multiplies current contents of %x by %b
set_var x / 10 Divides current contents of %x by 10
set_var x %10 Stores the remainder of %x divided by 10
in %x
set_var x ? filename Stores the length of the designated file in
%x
set_var x #string Stores the length of the designated string
in %x
set_var x ^%y Stores the exclusive-or of %x and %y in
%x
set_var x =M | Q xx.xx[x] Stores the entered monetary (if M) or
quantity (if Q) amount (xx.xx[x]) in %x
set_var x @[M | Q] promptstring Echoes promptstring to command
terminal, and waits for text (if @), a
monetary amount (if @M), or a quantity (if
@Q) to be entered at the terminal. That
text or amount will then be stored in
variable %x
set_var x :=%y +5 Stores the sum of %y +5 in %x
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 20-9
How to Use the IF Command Advanced Command Files
Commands to the Site Controller can be entered from four devices: the keyboard, a remote
computer, the console, and cron files (which are discussed in the next chapter).
The keyboard, remote, and console sources each have their own file of user variables, %a-%z.
(Cron commands use the consoles file of user variables.) These three sets of user variables
are stored in hidden files on the RAM disk called CMD1.VAR, CMD2.VAR, and
CMD3.VAR.
Therefore, it is important to realize that %a in a console command file is not the same variable
accessed by, for instance, typing ECHO %a on the keyboard or from a remote computer.
ECHO with the p1 Option
If you use the SET_VAR command to store a number with decimal values in a percent
variable, the ECHO command will display that number without a decimal point. For example,
if you set x =M 1.23, and then enter the command echo %x, the display will show 123, not
1.23.
Use the p1 option to display numbers with decimal points, such as a dollar amount of $1.23 or
a quantity amount of 1.234 gallons. Note that a number of digits can be represented using
<@#M> where the number symbol represents the number of characters, including the
decimal point and a space, between <and >.
set_var x ~[M | Q*] %y [col [length]] Stores in %x the string in %y. The string
will be stored as text unless M or Q is
entered to denote a monetary or quantity
amount If col is specified, the string will
begin col characters from the beginning
of the line. If length is specified, the string
will be length characters long.
set_var x $[M | Q] file [line | S#| Sy [col [length]]] Stores in %x the specified line of the
designated file. (The $ indicates the
characters to be stored are coming from a
file.)
The line will be stored as text unless M or
Q is entered to denote a monetary or
quantity amount.
If line or S# or Sy is not specified, the first
line of file will be used. The S in S# and
Sy indicates seek. S# is the offset from
the beginning of the file. Sy takes the
offset value currently stored in %y, reads
the string at that offset into %x, then
resets %y to the offset that is the
beginning of the next line in file.
If col is specified, the string will begin col
characters from the beginning of the line.
If length is specified, the string will be
length characters long.
set_var x @M XXXX Allows a number to be formatted into a
user variable.
SET_VAR Form Function
Advanced Command Files How to Use the IF Command
Page 20-10 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
In the first line of the example, note that there is a space before the equals sign (=), but not
after.
[ P: ] * SET x =M 1.23
[ P: ] * SET
x = 123
[ P: ] * ECHO %x
123
[ P: ] * ECHO; p1=Money=@M %x

Money=1. 23
[ P: ] *
New for internationalization, a number can be formatted into a user variable using the same
format options available for the p1 option. This converts the internal format of numbers in
command files (which do not have decimal points in them) in to a form that can be used as
input for commands that require decimal points in the correct place for different international
formats. For example, if the current international format is USA:
set x <@M 12345
would place 123.45 into variable x.
How to Use Branching and Subroutines
The command GOTO allows branching to arbitrary locations in a command file. The format
of GOTO is:
GOTO [-Svar|-Rvar] label
The format of label is:
*label: any comments here
The -Svar parameter of GOTO sets the value of the one-character variable var to the address
of the next line of the command file. The -Rvar tells GOTO to go to the location previously
set by GOTO -Svar for variable var.
The -S and -R parameters allow a limited form of subroutine. The call to the subroutine will
have a -S and the return a -R. Note that these variables are the same ones that are set by
SET_VAR.
Be careful to keep track of the variable names you have used, so you do not try to use the
same variable for more than one thing.
The first character on the line of a label for GOTO must be an asterisk; the label must come
right after the asterisk, with no spaces in between; a colon must come right after the label,
also with no spaces. Since the label is implemented as a comment line, the normal command
processor ignores it.
You can use GOTO to jump to anywhere in your command file, forward or backward. There
is no limit to the number of labels and GOTOs you can use in a file. GOTO starts its search
for the label at the beginning of the command file, so if you use subroutines, you must put
them at the beginning of your command file to improve performance.
[ P: ] * TYPE TEST6.CMD
* shor t exampl e of GOTO usage
* f i r st go t o mai n pr ogr am
got o MAI N
* - - - - - CHECKPERM subr out i ne - - - -
* CHECKPERM i s a subr out i ne t o check user s per mi ssi on l evel
* %P i s cur r ent user s per mi ssi on l evel
*CHECKPERM:
i f - %P 4
BEGI N
echo Per mi ssi on deni ed; has l evel %P, needs l evel 4
exi t
END
got o - Rb
* - - - - mai n pr ogr amst ar t s her e - - - -
*MAI N:
echo Mai n pr ogr amst ar t i ng
* check per mi ssi on l evel
got o - Sb CHECKPERM
* pr ogr amr et ur ns t o her e af t er doi ng CHECKPERM subr out i ne
echo Mai n pr ogr amcont i nui ng
[ P: ] *
[ P: ] * TYPE TESTGOTO.CMD
* uncomment t hi s l i ne f or t r ace whi l e debuggi ng
* ================ TESTGOTO. CMD ===================
* Exampl e of how t o use got o f or subr out i nes
*
* usage: TESTGOTO
*
* - - - - - - - - j ump t o mai nl i ne - - - - - - - - -
got o MAI N
* ================ SUBROUTI NES ====================
* - - - - - FI RST LEVEL A SUBROUTI NES - - - - -
* - - - - - - your f i r st subr out i ne - - - - - - -
*SUBONE:
echo somet hi ng
got o - Sb SUBSUB
echo somet hi ng el se
got o - Ra
* - - - - - - your second subr out i ne - - - - - - -
*SUBTWO:
echo do somet hi ng new
got o - Sb SUBSUB
echo do somet hi ng el se new
got o - Ra
* - - - - - SECOND LEVEL B SUBROUTI NES - - - - - >
*SUBSUB:
echo do somet hi ng agai n
got o - Rb
* ================= MAI N LI NE =====================
*MAI N:
got o - Sa SUBONE
got o - Sa SUBTWO
* =============== END OF PROGRAM ==================
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 20-11
How to Use the IF Command Advanced Command Files
You can also use LOOP and RETURN. Here is an example of a subroutine you could use with
LOOP and RETURN.
Here is an example of a skeleton for a more complex program that uses subroutines.
Advanced Command Files Advanced Commands
Page 20-12 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Search for a String in a File
Use the disk-based program FIND to find and print all occurrences of a specified string in one
or more files. The format of FIND is:
FIND[;[A][I]] pattern file1 [file2] . . .
[ P: ] * TYPE TEST5.CMD
* t est f or number of i sl and car d
r eader s down
PRI NT DI AG; >SCRATCH 3
FI ND; >NULL went down SCRATCH
ECHO I sl and r eader s down = %E
DEL SCRATCH
[ P: ] *
FIND prints all lines that include one or more occurrences of the specified pattern. If pattern
contains spaces, it must be enclosed in double quote marks (). With A option, FIND prints the
name of the file and the line number of each occurrence of the pattern.
FIND maintains a counter with how many times the pattern was found. The value of this
counter (up to 9999) is returned as the error code from FIND. The %E variable contains the
error code from the last command executed. If a line has more than one occurrence of the
pattern on it, the line will be printed only once, but the counter will reflect the correct number
of total occurrences. With the I option, the counter will give the total number of lines the
pattern was found on, rather than the total number of occurrences of the pattern.
Advanced Commands
NEXT CLERK Command
The NEXT CLERK or NE CL command allows the disk journal to keep separate shifts for
each console. Separate shift numbers (1-99) and separate shift serial numbers (1-999) can be
kept for each console.
NEXT CLERK ( NE CL)
[ P: ] * NEXT CLERK
Consol e number ? 1
[ P: ] *
Before the command can be used, set the Unique shift #s for every console parameter on page
9 of SYS_PAR to Yes. If this SYS_PAR parameter is set to No, when you try to run the
command, a Command failed message appears.
When the NEXT CLERK command is run, there is no screen display, but the change in shift
number for the designated console is noted in the disk journal.
If non-fuel sales have not been paid off on the designated console, the command will terminate
with a Transaction(s) in progress message.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 20-13
Advanced Commands Advanced Command Files
CLOSE Command
The CLOSE command allows you to make a retroactive safe drop to the previous shift.
The command is used only in command files, never by itself on a command line at a terminal.
There is no screen display with CLOSE.
SCREEN Command
SCReen Allows command files to perform screen functions independent of the type of
terminal connected. The command is SCReen with the following parameters.
Screen Command Action
SCREEN CLEAR clears the screen
SCREEN EOLN erases to end of line
SCREEN EOS erases to end of screen
SCREEN ENHANCE enhanced text (ANSI/VT100 only)
SCREEN NORMAL normal text (ANSI/VT100 only)
SCREEN HOME homes the cursor
SCREEN POSITION row col moves cursor to location row col
Note: 0 0 is upper left hand corner
Advanced Command Files Advanced Commands
Page 20-14 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 21-1
What Conditions can be Specified for Cron Automatic Cron Commands
21 Automatic Cron Commands
The CFN3 applications cron (chronological) function allows you to have commands executed
automatically at specified times or when certain events occur.
Like EXECUTE commands, cron commands run in background and do not delay normal sales
operations.
Each cron entry loaded by LOAD CRON is numbered and has two parts:
a string of characters representing the conditions for execution
a command that will be executed every time the conditions become true. The Site
Controller tests the conditions of each entry at least once per minute as part of its normal
housekeeping activities.
An entry remains in effect until it is overwritten with LOAD CRON or erased with REMOVE
CRON or LOAD CRON;I.
Commands executed by cron can be regular Site Controller system commands, disk-based
commands (.BIN commands), or command files (.CMD commands). Most of the time, cron is
used to execute user command files.
Almost any sequence of commands that can be executed interactively by a human user can be
put into a command file to be executed automatically by cron. Commands that require data
must have data supplied, either by including the data in the command file or by redirecting it
from a separate file. Cron will search the normal command search path for command files.
The commands that can be executed by a cron entry follow the permission level of the user
that loads the cron.
Note: If a cron or command file attempts to run a disk-based program and finds that the
program space is busy, it will wait until the space is free. This is the opposite of the case
where if you invoke a disk-based command directly at the prompt and the program
space is busy, the command will be terminated with an error.
What Conditions can be Specified for Cron
The first character of a cron entry determines what condition will cause that entry to be
executed. The four types of cron entries are:
timed entry
restart entry
boot entry
transaction memory full
The most common type of cron entry is a timed entry. A timed entry begins with an at sign
(@). Timed entries will be executed whenever the system date and time matches the date and
time specified in the entry.
Automatic Cron Commands What Conditions can be Specified for Cron
Page 21-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
A restart entry begins with an exclamation mark (!). It will be executed whenever the system
suffers a general failure (crash). A restart entry could execute a command file that saves the
diagnostics and history reports in a disk file for later examination, then restarts the system
automatically. Cron must not have more than one restart entry. Shows in When column as
RESTART.
A reboot entry begins with caret (^). It will be executed whenever the system is rebooted. It
works when the REBOOT command is executed and when the system is rebooted after a
power failure. Like the restart entry, it can be used to execute a command file that saves
diagnostic and status information in a disk file. Cron must not have more than one reboot
entry. Shows in When column of P CR as REBOOT.
A transaction-memory-full entry begins with a percent sign (%). It will be executed at the
same time as the message on transaction memory, Transfile XX% full, is logged. (The XX% at
which the Transfile full message is logged is set in SYS_PAR).
Transaction memory shows up as Memory in the When column of PRINT CRON output.
Timed Cron Entry
A cron entry that begins with an at sign (@) is taken as a timed cron command. You can
specify the day of the week, month, date, year, hour, and minute that you want the command
executed. Days of the week are numbered from 01 starting with Sunday. The hour is specified
in 24-hour time.
You must use leading zeros, if required, so each number is two digits. For example, Sunday is
01, not just 1, and J une is 06, not 6.
The format of a timed cron entry is:
@DWMMDDYYHHMM [-]command
DW is the day of the week as a two digits number (Sunday=01, Monday=02, Tuesday=03,
and so on).
MM is the month as a two digits number (J anuary=01, February=02, and so on).
DD is the day of the month as a two digits number.
YY is the last two digits of the year (97 for 1997).
HH is the hour as a two digits number, in 24-hour time.
MM is the minute as a two digits number.
[-] The optional hyphen (-) before the command name suppresses output to the printer.
This allows the command to execute when someone is logged on to the command
terminal. CRON runs using command processor 33. If console is in command mode,
CRON waits.
command is the name of the Site Controller command or user command file to execute.
The time field is right justified, which means that it is read by the Site Controller from the
right, not from the left. That is, if you do not care about one or more of the left-most time
intervals, you do not have to specify them.
An ** also indicates that you do not care about that time interval. For example,
@01********00 indicates every hour on Sundays, @1200 indicates at 12:00 noon every day,
and @01**0400 indicates at 4:00 A.M. on the first of every month.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 21-3
What Conditions can be Specified for Cron Automatic Cron Commands
Restart Cron Entry
A cron entry that begins with an exclamation mark (!) will be executed in the event of a system
crash. The format of a restart cron entry is:
! [-]command
The exclamation mark is all that is required to specify this condition. Remember to leave a
space between the exclamation mark and the command. There must be only one restart cron
entry. If there is more than one restart cron entry, only the first one will be executed.
The optional hyphen (-) before the command name suppresses output to the printer. This
allows the command to execute when someone is logged on to the command terminal. Will
display RESTART in the When column of P CR output.
Uses of the Restart Cron Entry
System crashes are unlikely and must be reported to your field service representative. You can
use restart cron to save diagnostic information after a crash. Then you can restart the site
without taking the chance of losing information that could help your service technician
diagnose the cause of the crash.
[ P: ] * TYPE CRASH.CMD
* t o be execut ed by cr on af t er a cr ash
di sabl e hi st or y
l og message - - Savi ng Cr ash Log - -
* t he f ol l owi ng commands save di agnost i c i nf or mat i on
* i n a di sk f i l e
enabl e dump; a CRASH. LOG
pr i nt dat e
pr i nt t i p
pr i nt di agnost i cs 1
pr i nt hi st or y 80-
* t he f ol l owi ng command r est or es r econst r uct ed
* t abl es f r omBACKUP. DTA
* use onl y i f you keep cur r ent backups
* of syst emdat a
r est or e r econst r uct ed except sal es t r ansact i ons f r omBACKUP. DTA
pr i nt moni t or
* t he f ol l owi ng command r est ar t s t he si t e
* af t er a sever e cr ash
* use RUN wi t hout opt i ons t o r est ar t si t e onl y
* i f cr ash was not sever e
r un
echo - - - - - - - - - - - -
di sabl e dump
l og message - - Rest ar t i ng Si t e - -
enabl e hi st or y
[ P: ] *
Below is an example of a restart command file to use with cron. This command-file example
appends the diagnostic reports to the end of a file called CRASH.LOG, which can be inspected
or printed later.
Since circumstances surrounding crashes and reboots vary, be careful in designing command
files intended to execute after these events, so that the benefit of having operations resume
automatically is balanced against the risk of not checking out the system before allowing
customers to get fuel.
Automatic Cron Commands What Conditions can be Specified for Cron
Page 21-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Severe crashes that are likely to have serious consequences require the command RUN;I to
restart, when RUN will work after mild ones. You might wish to omit RESTORE from the
above command file and change RUN;I to RUN so that the system will not restart
automatically after severe crashes or if tables are reconstructed.
If you have cron restore reconstructed tables automatically after a crash, make sure a current
and complete backup is present in the root directory on the default drive. You can use a cron
command to automatically back up system data every day.
Reboot Cron Entry
A cron entry that begins with a caret (^) will be executed when the Site Controller is rebooted.
The caret is all that is required to specify this condition. Remember to leave a space between
the caret and the command. If there is more than one of this type of entry, only the first will be
executed.
^[-]command
[ P: ] * TYPE MYBOOT.CMD
* t o be execut ed by cr on af t er a r eboot
di sabl e hi st or y
echo - - Savi ng Boot Log - -
* t he f ol l owi ng commands save
* t r ansact i on- i n- pr ogr ess i nf or mat i on
* i n a di sk f i l e, t hen pr i nt t he f i l e
* on t he l og pr i nt er
enabl e dump MYBOOT. LOG
echo - - - - - -
pr i nt dat e
pr i nt t i p
di sabl e dump
l og f i l e MYBOOT. LOG
[ P: ] *
The optional hyphen (-) before the command name suppresses output to the printer. This
allows the command to execute when someone is logged on to the command terminal. Will
display REBOOT in the When column of P CR output.
Below is an example of a command file for the reboot cron entry.
Transaction-memory Cron Entry
A cron entry that begins with a percent sign (%) will be executed when the Transfile XX% full
message is logged. The format of a transaction-memory cron entry is:
% [-]command
The optional hyphen (-) before the command name suppresses output to the printer. This
allows the command to execute when someone is logged on to command terminal.
The transaction-memory cron entry will display Memory in the When column of PRINT
CRON output. The point at which this cron executes is set in configuration.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 21-5
Where To Put Command Files for Cron Automatic Cron Commands
Where To Put Command Files for Cron
Cron will search the normal command search path for command files and disk-based
commands. The command search path used depends on how the site is configured.
Standard search path for a CFN3 application
If you want to keep your command files for cron in a separate directory that is not on the
command search path, you can always use the full pathname to execute the command. For
example, you could keep your command files for cron in /CRON. Another approach is to
reconfigure the site.
How To Enter Cron Commands
Use the command LOAD CRON or LO CR to enter cron commands. You may use the C
option with LOAD CRON to load more than one entry with a single command.
LOAD CRON ( LO CR)
[ P: ] * LOAD CRON;C
Command number ? 1
Command? @0800 SHIFT1
Command number ? 2
Command? @1201 PRINT PUMP;>PUMPLOG
Command number ? 3
Command? ! CRASH
Command number ? 4
Command? ^ MYBOOT
[ P: ] *
How To Keep Cron Command Output from the Log
Unless it is redirected, the output from cron commands is printed on the log. To prevent output
from printing on the log, put a hyphen (-) before the command. If you want to save the output
of a cron command, you may redirect its output to a file by using the redirection options (>or
>>) or by putting the commands in a command file and using ENABLE DUMP in the file
(refer to How to Use Options with Commands on page 3-6). The cron entry in the example
below executes a command file and prints nothing on the log.
[ P: ] * LOAD CRON
Command number ? 5
Command? @1203 -PR_DATA
Path Destination
P: the RAM drive
. CFN3 root directory
P:\BIN \BIN on hard drive
Automatic Cron Commands How To Print a Listing of Cron Entries
Page 21-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How To Print a Listing of Cron Entries
Use the command PRINT CRON or P CR to print a listing of cron entries. The listing shows
the command number, when the command will be executed, and the name of the command.
PRI NT CRON ( P CR)
[ P: ] * PRINT CRON
# When Command
1 *** **/ **/ ** 8: 00 SHI FT1
2 *** **/ **/ ** 12: 01 PRI NT PUMP; >>PUMPLOG
3 RESTART MYCRASH
4 REBOOT MYBOOT
5 *** **/ **/ ** 12: 03 - PR_DATA
6 *** **/ **/ ** 17: 00 SHI FT2
7 *** **/ **/ ** 1: 00 SHI FT3
[ P: ] *
Asterisks are substituted for time fields that were not specified. For example, if no day of the
week were specified, only three asterisks would appear where Mon, Tue, and so on would
otherwise be printed. Also, the listing will automatically separate the time fields by spaces or
slashes.
How to Remove Cron Commands
To remove a single CRON entry, use REMOVE CRON or REM CR and specify the entry
number. You may use the C option with the REMOVE CRON command.
REMOVE CRON ( REM CR)
[ P: ] * REMOVE CRON;C
Command number ? 4
Command number ? 6
Command number ?
[ P: ] *
The REMOVE CRON command has two options:
The A option attempts to terminate a currently running disk-based program. It also
terminates any currently running cron command and any Site Controller commands
running from a console.
The I option deletes any pending EXECUTE commands.
[ P: ] * LOAD CRON;I
[ P: ] *
Use the command LOAD CRON with the I option to clear all cron entries from the cron file.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 22-1
Remote Authorizations Communications
22 Communications
Remote Authorizations
Dial-out Phone Numbers
If your site uses a dial-out line for card-transaction authorization, you require to enter the
remote phone numberand the backup phone number, if there is oneinto the Site
Controller. This is for CFN remote verification only. For bank networks, refer to the specific
manual.
How To Enter Dial-out Phone Numbers
Use the command LOAD PHONE or LO PH to enter the remote phone number(s).
LOAD PHONE ( LO PH)
[ P: ] * LOAD PHONE
Mai n ( m) or Backup ( b) ? M
Phone number ? 367-6892
[ P: ] *
1 Type LOAD PHONE.
2 Main or Backup? Enter M or B.
3 Phone number? Enter the phone number.
The main number is the number the Site Controller will call first; the backup number is the
number the Site Controller will call if it does not connect to the main number.
Usually the main and backup numbers are the same. That way the Site Controller will try to
dial the number again if it does not get through the first time.
You may specify other information about how the Site Controller is to dial the phone number:
Use two commas in the phone number to insert a 2-second pause in dialing.
Use a P before the phone number to specify pulse dialing, or use a T to specify tone
dialing. If you do not specify P or T, tone dialing will be used (if you have a PBX phone
system, you may require to first use pulse to obtain a line out, then switch to tone, which is
much faster, to dial the number of the remote host).
You may use hyphens and parentheses in the phone number, but they are not required. The
Site Controller ignores the hyphens; they are for your convenience only.
Communications Remote Authorizations
Page 22-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
You may use the C option with the command LOAD PHONE to load both phone numbers.
The phone numbers are set up to dial out through a PBX system. The modem will dial 9
(pulse), wait 2 seconds, then dial the number using tone.
[ P: ] * LOAD PHONE;C M P9,,T543-9974,B,P9,,T543-3245
Phone number ?
[ P: ] *
A single comma separates the command arguments, and two commas enter a 2-second
pause.
How To Print Dial-out Phone Numbers
Use the command PRINT PHONE or P PH to print the dial-out phone numbers that have been
entered. The printout will show whether the phone numbers are for the following:
the Main (or 1) number and the Backup (or 2) number
PRI NT PHONE ( P PH)
[ P: ] * PRINT PHONE
Mai n Backup
CFN P9, T543- 9974 P9, T543- 3245
[ P: ] *
the bank host (Bank)the 3 and 4 numbers,
the auxiliary phone number (Aux)the 5 and 6 numbers
How to Initiate a Call
Dial-out sites call the remote number automatically when they require to get authorization for
a transaction. You can use the command CALL to manually initiate a call.
CALL
[ P: ] * CALL
Di al i ng . . . . Connect ed.
[ P: ] *
If the remote modem is down, or if the site is not configured to dial out, the terminal will print
host unavailable when you try to execute CALL. If the connection is never established or is
broken off, the terminal will print Failed.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 22-3
Kermit Communications
Kermit
Kermit is a disk-based program for data transfer to another computer, either another SC III or
a PC. A summary of the KERMIT command looks like the following.
KERMIT disk-based program for file transfer to external computer.
Note: Press CTRL-SHIFT-6 to exit from connect mode.
Options: [baud][D][L#] {R | S file1 [file2] ...}
Kermit can be used for three things:
To download files to the Site Controller
To upload files from the Site Controller
To connect from the local terminal through the Site Controller to the remote port (you can
take advantage of this feature to test or use the modem that is connected to the Site
Controller).
To download a file from another PC to the SC III, first call and connect to the Site Controllers
modem using a PC communications package such as ProComm, CrossTalk, Telix, PC Kermit,
Qmodem, and so on.
Then do the following:
When done, the Site Controller gives its [P:]* prompt.
To upload a file from the SC III, first call and connect to the Site Controllers modem using a
PC communications package such as ProComm, CrossTalk, Telix, PC Kermit, Qmodem, and
so on. Then do the following:
Options Definition
baud data transmission rate to use, in bytes-per-second
D debug mode (used in development only)
L# Site Controller RS-232 port number to use; where #is the port number. Note ports 7-10 are
not accessible on the SCIII through Kermit.
(without R or S) connect mode; default is port number 1
R receive-file(s) mode
S file1 [file2] ... send the specified file(s) to the connected computer
Site Shows Action
signon password Enter
[P:]* KERMIT R Enter
Do command on local PC to initiate upload transfer using Kermit protocol.
Local PC communications program will usually give status when transfer takes place.
Site Shows You Do
signon password
[P:]* KERMIT S [path/filename] Enter
Do command on local PC to start download transfer using Kermit protocol.
Local PC communications program will usually give status when transfer takes place.
When done the Site Controller gives its [P:]* prompt.
Communications Kermit
Page 22-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 23-1
Disk-based Configuration Commands Configuration Command Summary
23 Configuration Command Summary
Configuration commands affect operation of the system and must be used only by trained
personnel or with the advice of technical services.
The configuration commands are fully documented in MDE-4773 CFN III Configuration
Manual for Windows XP.
In the following summary forms of the configuration commands, square brackets, [...], mean
that the contents enclosed within the pair of brackets are optional.
Disk-based Configuration Commands
Options for each command: [-P][-V] [filename]
-P for print current configuration
-V display in TTY form if port is configured as a CRT in the system parameters, or vice
versa
Commands Definition
CONSOLE disk-based configuration program for a console
FUELPT disk-based configuration program for Fuel Point Readers (FPRs)
GATE disk-based gate-reader configuration program.
PERM disk-based command to change permission levels of system
resident commands
PUMP disk-based configuration program for pumps
READER disk-based configuration program for island card reader
SYS_PAR disk-based configuration program for system parameters; main
configuration program for Site Controller
TABLE disk-based configuration program for data table sizes
TRFMT disk-based configuration program for local transaction format
Configuration Command Summary Disk-based Configuration Commands
Page 23-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 24-1
Island Card Reader Preventive Maintenance
24 Preventive Maintenance
The SC III comes housed in a standard PC mini-tower case. For information on routine
maintenance of equipment, consult the supplied PC manuals.
How to Clean the Diskette Drive
Like the more familiar magnetic read and write heads in tape recorders and VCRs, diskette
drive heads benefit from periodic cleaning. J ust how often you require to clean the diskette
drive heads at your site depends on how much you use the diskette drive(s). This will vary
from site to site. Many sites will not use the diskette drive at all for day-to-day operation.
Others may choose to store reports, such as shift-break reports, in diskette files. If your site has
a hard-disk drive, then you probably will not use the diskette drive very often.
If you use a diskette drive three or four times a day, you must probably clean the heads every
six months. In any case you must clean the diskette heads once a year whether or not the drives
have been used. This removes any accumulated dust.
Special diskette drive cleaning kits are available from Gasboy and other vendors, and must be
used to clean the diskette drive on the Site Controller. A kit is available for the 3.5-inch drive.
When Batteries Fail
If your Site Controller logs the message Battery X failed, it means that battery number X, used
to back up RAM memory, has failed. There are two coin batteries that maintain the memory
when AC power fails. A red light on the SC III memory PCB indicates that one of the batteries
is bad. Close S2 position 2 and open position 1 to switch to battery 2. When any one battery
must maintain the memory without AC power for a short period of time, you must replace a
battery as soon as it goes bad.
Do not turn off power to the Site Controller if this message has occurred, or memory may be
lost.
Island Card Reader
How to Clean the Magnetic Strip Reader
If your system reads magnetic cards in one or more island card readers or consoles, then you
require to clean the magnetic strip reader units periodically. A magnetic strip reader that
requires cleaning has a harder time reading cards, requiring several passes to read some cards.
How often magnetic strip readers require to be cleaned depends on how often they are used
and also the type of environment. Generally, island card readers require to be cleaned about
once a month, but island card readers with many diesel fuel transactions may require to be
cleaned weekly.
Preventive Maintenance POS Terminals
Page 24-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
A special cleaning card is used to clean magnetic strip card reader units. Magnetic strip
cleaning cards are available from Gasboy (part number C08757). These cards are individually
packed in foil wrappers containing an alcohol-based cleaning solution. After removing the
card from the wrapper, pass it several times in the usual direction through the strip reader, then
discard it.
POS Terminals
Magnetic Card Reader
Follow the procedure discussed above under Island Card Reader for cleaning the magnetic
strip reader.
Keyboard
You require to clean the keyboard only if the key caps become noticeably grimy or if loose
debris has collected in the key wells.
To clean the key caps, use a soft, lint-free cloth. Spay a small amount of general purpose wall
cleaner (products such as 409

or Fantastik

) on the cloth. Never spray anything directly on

the keyboard. Turn the keyswitch to OFF and remove the key. Wipe the key caps with a
circular motion until clean. Replace the key and you are ready to resume normal operation.
To clean debris from the key wells, use a vacuum cleaner with a drapery attachment. Use a
plastic attachment only, not a metal one, to avoid scratching the case. First make sure all clear
key covers are firmly seated by pressing down on each key. Then pass the vacuum attachment
over the keys without actually touching them. Any loose matter that has fallen into the
keyboard will be removed.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 25-1
System Diagnostics Diagnostic Commands
25 Diagnostic Commands
System Diagnostics
How to Print System Diagnostics
Use the command PRINT DIAGNOSTICS or P DI to print the diagnostics. The terminal will
print the status of each site device. If any errors have occurred since the diagnostics were last
reset, it will also print the error codes and the number of times the error has occurred.
Diagnostics must be printed monthly, or whenever a problem occurs. The most common errors
that you might observe are:
No response (NOR) from a pump control unit, reader terminal, or console. This means that
the device did not respond to a Site Controller poll or command.
A card-read error (RDE) from a island card reader or console. This could be the result of
an user error or a bad card, or could mean that a card reader is malfunctioning.
A no-quantity transaction (NQN) from a pump. This could mean a pump is not registering
fuel sold. After several no-quantity transactions, a pump will shut down.
PIN errors are from the reader and console. They indicate a customer entered an incorrect
PIN number.
DIE means the device went down.
PRI NT DI AGNOSTI CS ( P DI )
[ P: ] * PRINT DIAGNOSTICS
D I A G N O S T I C S
Di agnost i cs r eset : Tue 6/ 22/ 04 4: 52 PM
Si t e Cont r ol l er ( 1001, 1) came up Mon 5/ 31/ 04 9: 31 AM
Reader t er mi nal ( s) down POS t er mi nal ( s) down Pump( s) down
Fuel Poi nt r eader s( s) down SDI ( s) down
Pr i nt er / PI Npad #1 on l oop 4 went down Wed 6/ 09/ 04 3: 24 PM
DI E 41
I sl and Car d Reader #2 never came up
I sl and Car d Reader #3 on l oop 4 went down Fr i 5/ 21/ 04 9: 58 AM
Pr i nt er down
DI E 2
I sl and Car d Reader #4 on l oop 4 went down Fr i 5/ 21/ 04 9: 56 AM
Pr i nt er down
DI E 1
Pr i nt er / PI Npad #5 never came up
Pr of i t poi nt #1 on l oop 4 went down Wed 6/ 02/ 04 3: 24 PM
DI E 47
Checkpoi nt #2 on l oop 2 went down Thu 5/ 27/ 04 12: 06 PM
DI E 2 NOR 14
DI E 1
Fuel Poi nt Reader #1 never came up
SDI #1 never came up
[ P: ] *
The diagnostic error codes are given later in this chapter. If any of these errors occur
frequently, report the problem to your service representative.
[ P: ] * PRINT DIAGNOSTICS 3
D I A G N O S T I C S
I sl and Car d Reader # 1 on l oop 1 came up Mon 5/ 10/ 04 12. 18 PM
Pr i nt er / PI Npad #3 on l oop 3 came up Mon 5/ 10/ 04 12. 18 PM
Pr i nt er / PI Npad #10 on l oop 3 came up Mon 5/ 10/ 04 12. 18 PM
[ P: ] *
Diagnostic Commands System Diagnostics
Page 25-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
You may use numerical options with the command PRINT DIAGNOSTICS to print the
diagnostics for specified types of devices.
The device type numbers are:
0 =when diagnostics were last reset
1 =site information
2 =PCUs
3 =readers
4 =consoles
5 =fuel point readers
6 =gate controllers
7 =tank gauges
8 =pumps
12 =SDI
How to Reset System Diagnostics
Use RESET DIAGNOSTICS or RE DI to set the diagnostic error totals to zero. Reset the
diagnostics monthly after you print the current diagnostics with PRINT DIAGNOSTICS. This
will maintain a current error diagnosis.
RESET DI AGNOSTI CS ( RE DI )
[ P: ] * RESET DIAGNOSTICS
[ P: ] *

How to Reset System Diagnostics after Reconfiguration
RESET DIAGNOSTICS without any options just clears the counters for existing diagnostics
records. RESET DIAGNOSTICS with the I option removes all the diagnostic records and
re-creates records for the current configuration.
You can use RESET DIAGNOSTICS;I to delete the diagnostics records for the non-existent
devices. This can be useful if you reconfigure the site to have fewer of some type of device.
After you reconfigure the site, diagnostic records will still exist for the devices that have been
removed.
Diagnostic Error Codes
You may use the A option with PRINT DIAGNOSTICS. The following error codes may
appear in response to PRINT DIAGNOSTICS;A.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 25-3
System Diagnostics Diagnostic Commands
Pump Control Unit Error Codes
Errors in pump control unit-to-Site Controller messages:
CRC bad cyclical redundancy check (CRC)
DIE device went down
NOR no response
NQN no quantity
Errors in Site Controller-to-pump control unit messages:
NB0 invalid hose number or price level
NB1 pump in use
NB2 transaction data unavailable
NB4 not hexadecimal
NB5 invalid command
NB6 invalid pump number
NB7 overrun
NB8 buffer overflow
NB9 test
NBA bad cyclical redundancy check (CRC)
NBD power failure
NBE RAM contains transaction data
Island Card Reader or Gate Reader Error Codes
Errors in island card reader-to-Site Controller messages:
CRC bad cyclical redundancy check (CRC)
DIE device went down
NOR no response
PIN PIN errors
RDE read error
Errors in Site Controller-to-island card reader messages:
NB3 buffer in use
NB4 not hexadecimal
NB5 invalid command
NB6 undefined EE command number
NB7 overflow/framing error
NB8 input buffer overrun
NB9 alphanumeric display busy
NBA bad cyclical redundancy check (CRC)
Console Error Codes
Errors in console-to-Site Controller messages:
CRC bad cyclical redundancy check (CRC)
DIE device went down
NOR no response
PIN PIN errors
RDE card read error
Errors in Site Controller-to-console messages:
NB3 buffer busy
NB5 invalid command
NB7 receiver overrun
NBA bad cyclical redundancy check (CRC)
Diagnostic Commands Event History
Page 25-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Fuel Point Reader Error Codes
Errors in FPR-to-Site Controller messages:
CRC bad cyclical redundancy check (CRC)
DIE device went down
NOR no response
PIN PIN errors
Errors in Site Controller-to-FPR messages:
NB4 not hexadecimal
NB5 invalid command
NB7 receiver overrun
NB8 input buffer overrun
Event History
The CFN3 application remembers the last one hundred significant events. Events remembered
in history include:
any command execution, except disk-based programs (which are files with the .BIN
extension).
changes in switch detect on pumps.
low level state changes for all transactions.
other miscellaneous system events.
The event history is mainly useful for tracking down problems. Your service technician may
have you print out the history file if you call with a problem.
How to Enable and Disable Event History
The history mechanism is initially enabled, and may be disabled and enabled by command.
DI SABLE HI STORY ( DI HI )
[ P: ] * DISABLE HISTORY
[ P: ] *
ENABLE HI STORY ( E HI )
[ P: ] * ENABLE HISTORY
[ P: ] *
Use the command DISABLE HISTORY or DI HI to disable history recording.
Use the command ENABLE HISTORY or E HI to re-enable event history recording.
Use the command EN HIS;I to clear the history file.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 25-5
System Status Diagnostic Commands
How to Print the Event History List
Use the command PRINT HISTORY or P HI to display the history list. You can use ranges
with the command to print selected events.
PRI NT HI STORY ( P HI )
[ P: ] * PRINT HISTORY
1 Cmd pr oc #1 User #0: l oad pr oduct 107
2 Cmd pr oc #1 User #0: l oad t ank 130
3 Cmd pr oc #1 User #0: pr i nt pr oduct 149
4 Cmd pr oc #1 User #0: pr i nt t ank 107
[ P: ] *
In the example, Cmd proc stands for Command processor. The command processor is where
commands to the Site Controller are entered from. Command processor 1 is the keyboard; 2
is a remote computer terminal; and 3 is either the console or cron-command files.
When you use the A option with the PRINT HISTORY command, the history up to the
present moment is printed, but the display does not then return to the prompt. Instead, PRINT
HISTORY remains active and the command continues to print out historical entries as they
occur until you press ^C.
System Status
How to Print System Monitor Messages
The Site Controller is constantly monitoring the status of its system.
PRI NT MONI TOR ( P MO)
[ P: ] * PRINT MONITOR
Pump Cont r ol Uni t #1 came up Sat 15/ 25/ 99 12: 01 PM
Pump Cont r ol Uni t #12 came up Sat 15/ 25/ 99 12: 01 PM
I sl and car d r eader #1 Case Open. Thu 9/ 15/ 99 5: 09 PM
I sl and car d r eader #1 Case Cl osed Thu 9/ 15/ 99 5: 11 PM
Pump Cont r ol Uni t #1 came up Thu 9/ 15/ 99 5: 23 PM
Tank #3 7476 Gal Del i ver y Thu 9/ 15/ 98 8: 03 PM
Check Pt / Pr of i t Pt #1 came up Thu 9/ 15/ 98 10: 34 PM
Check Pt / Pr of i t Pt #1 EMERGENCY STOP Thu 9/ 15/ 99 10: 45 PM
Check Pt / Pr of i t Pt #1 end emer gency st op Thu 9/ 15/ 99 10: 45 PM
[ P: ] *
Use the command PRINT MONITOR or P MO to display the most recent system monitor
messages. This allows you to print the messages as a group, without any intervening
transactions. This command is also handy to use when dialing the Site Controller from a
remote location.
PRI NT MONI TOR ( P MO)
[ P: ] * PRINT MONITOR;A
007 Pump Cont r ol Uni t #1 came up Sat 15/ 25/ 99 12: 01 PM
008 Pump Cont r ol Uni t #12 came up Sat 15/ 25/ 99 12: 01 PM
009 I sl and car d r eader #1 Case Open. Thu 9/ 15/ 99 5: 09 PM
000 I sl and car d r eader #1 Case Cl osed Thu 9/ 15/ 99 5: 11 PM
001 Check Pt / Pr of i t Pt #1 came up Thu 9/ 15/ 98 10: 34 PM
002 Check Pt / Pr of i t Pt #1 EMERGENCY STOP Thu 9/ 15/ 99 10: 45 PM
003 Check Pt / Pr of i t Pt #1 end emer gency st op Thu 9/ 15/ 99 10: 45 PM
[ P: ] *
Diagnostic Commands System Status
Page 25-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Use the A option with PRINT MONITOR to print the record number of each system
monitor message. If the record numbers do not start at 000, they will wrap back to 000 and
then continue on; do not worry about this, you will see all the messages sequentially.
You can use ranges with PRINT MONITOR to print specified messages.
PRINT MONITOR -nn prints the last nn messages.
[ P: ] * PRINT MONITOR -3
Pump Cont r ol Uni t #1 came up Thu 9/ 15/ 99 5: 23 PM
Tank #3 7476 Gal Del i ver y Thu 9/ 15/ 99 8: 03 PM
Check Pt / Pr of i t Pt #1 came up Thu 9/ 15/ 99 10: 34 PM
Check Pt / Pr of i t Pt #1 EMERGENCY STOP Thu 9/ 15/ 99 10: 45 PM
Check Pt / Pr of i t Pt #1 end emer gency st op Thu 9/ 15/ 99 10: 45 PM
[ P: ] *
[ P: ] * PRINT MONITOR @9309172230
Check Pt / Pr of i t Pt #1 came up Thu 9/ 15/ 99 10: 34 PM
Check Pt / Pr of i t Pt #1 EMERGENCY STOP Thu 9/ 15/ 99 10: 45 PM
Check Pt / Pr of i t Pt #1 end emer gency st op Thu 9/ 15/ 99 10: 45 PM
[ P: ] *
[ P: ] * PRINT MONITOR;A 1
002 Tank #3 7476 Gal Del i ver y Thu 9/ 15/ 99 8: 03 PM
003 Check Pt / Pr of i t Pt #1 came up Thu 9/ 15/ 99 10: 34 PM
004 Check Pt / Pr of i t Pt #1 EMERGENCY STOP Thu 9/ 15/ 99 10: 45 PM
005 Check Pt / Pr of i t Pt #1 end emer gency st op Thu 9/ 15/ 99 10: 45 PM
[ P: ] *
PRINT MONITOR @yymmddhhmm prints all messages since date and time specified, in
order by record number. If you enter a partial argument, the Site Controller uses the current
date and time except for the data you enter to replace it. It uses the data you enter starting at
the right-hand side of the argument.
For example, if you enter @1245, the Site Controller will use the current year, month, and
day, but will use 12:45 for the time. If you enter @061245, the system will use the current
year and month, but will use the 6th day of the month and 12:45 for the time.
You must specify the time in 24-hour time. For example, 10:00PM is 2200.
PRINT MONITOR ##prints messages starting with the record number following ##. You
can use this type of range to print system monitor messages that have occurred since the last
time you used the command.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 25-7
System Status Diagnostic Commands
How to Display Current System State
The disk-based program WOW displays the current state and history of the system. It must
be run from a CRT terminal. To quit the program, press any character key.
The command WOW -h displays only the current state.
How to Display Buffers in Use
On a CRT display, the disk-based command BUFFERS shows a continually updated display
of buffer usage by type. On a printer, the command prints only the buffers currently in use.
Fr ee = 90 TI Ps = 40 Pol l = 5
02 #######
04 #######
BUFFERS shows how many of each type of buffer are in use. This command may help spot
Malloc: out of buffers errors (Malloc stands for memory allocator). Use ^C to terminate the
command.
An example of the BUFFERS display is shown. It shows the number of free buffers (Free),
the number of transaction-in-progress (TIP) buffers in use, and the number of polling buffers
in use (Poll). Buffers in use are represented as pound signs (#) next to the type, in
hexadecimal, of the buffer. Pound signs appear and disappear as buffers change type.
The table below shows the types of buffers available.
Buffer Type Code Description
01 SITE_POLL messages to host and loops
02 SCRATCH temporary scratch buffer
03 WHEN sent when time limit expires
04 TTY_BUF tty input buffer
05 COMMAND command from SCIII to loop device
06 RQST_DATA data requested from device
07 TIP transaction in progress buffer
09 LOG_MESS message to be logged
0A HOST_AUTH host authorization message
0B HOST_ABORT host abortion message
0C HOST_COMP host completion message
0D COMP_TRANS completed transaction
0E LOG_FILE log this file
0F PUMP_MESS command to/from pump driver
10 KEY_REQ key management request
11 TRANS_COMP different completed transaction
12 HOST_UP host is now up
13 ENABLE tells driver to startup devices
14 LIFE_AND_DEATH tells driver device came up/down
15 DISABLE tells driver to kill a device
16 ABORT_TRANS message to abort a transaction
Diagnostic Commands System Status
Page 25-8 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
17 DIS_DEV device can now be disabled
18 ACTIVATE message to activate pump
19 DEACTIVATE message to deactivate pump
1A IGNORE response is to be ignored
1B RBROAD reader broadcast message
1C DIAG_ERROR log error in diagnostics
1D RESET_DIAG reset all diagnostics
1E PUMP_STAT get pump status update
1F REACTIVATE message to reactivate a pump
20 PUMP_PAUSED message saying pump is paused
21 ABORT_VERF abort a verification in progress
22 HAVE_VERF we have verification
23 SETTLE perform settlement with bank
24 P_ESTOP command to E-stop a pump
25 P_ECONT command to E-continue a pump
26 ASK ask if user wants receipt
27 RCPT_REC standard receipt record
28 REC_DONE end of receipt
29 NEED_HOST call host
2A GOT_CARRIER got carrier on line
2B LOST_CARRIER lost carrier on line
2C ACKNOWLEDGE acknowledge transmission received
2D ACK_MEMLOST acknowledge memory lost
2E RESPONSE general response
2F PRICE load a single price
30 PRICE_LEV load price levels
31 CON_UPREQ console pump update request
32 CON_UPDATE console pump update
33 GET_HOSE get hose number off hook
34 BAD_HOSE invalid hose off hook
35 IDLE_PRICE clear pump display
36 TEST_PCU test PCU state 0
37 TEST_PCU1 test PCU state 1
38 GOT_PIN got PIN from PIN pad
39 ITEM_POD a pod of items
3A COR_VOL temperature corrected volume
3B DELIVERY delivery request
3C GAU_DONE gauge acknowledgement
3D ALARM gauge alarm conditions
3E RAW_VOL uncorrected volume
3F UPDATE request update
40 GRADES PAM grades
41 PAM_LEV PAM price level
Buffer Type Code Description
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 25-9
System Status Diagnostic Commands
How to Examine Contents of Memory
The disk-based command DUMP displays the contents of various portions of memory. You
can use it to inspect Transactions In Progress (TIPs), tables by name, or ranges of addresses
in core.
DUMP TIP (DTIP) prints a human-readable status of transactions in progress. The card data
will appear encrypted.
DUMP can take several forms, as shown below:
DTIP pumpnumber [P]
dumps the transaction in progress on the specified pump.
If the P option is given, it will display data for the previous transaction.
42 SET_PRIORITY set user priority
43 GET_PDATA unsolicited data update
44 PAM_REAC PAM reactivate
45 GET_CAP get tank capacity
46 HOST_DOWN host has gone down
47 PAM_DEAC deactivate if RQST_DATA unexpected
48 ECHO_DATA echo data for command
49 DISK_J OURNAL disk journal request
4A CON_GOFER console background process request
4B EVENT an event
4C PC_MESS message to/from PC host (SC3)
4D FILE_BUF buffering for PC files (SC3)
4F PMP_DISPLAY pump tells reader to display
50 FREE_DISPLAY pump tells reader to abort
51 LOG_COMM log communications monitor text
52 GOT_ENTRY got non-PIN from PIN pad
53 DO_DPT_MESG reader process must call dpt_msg ( )
54 GO_FLEET put pump in fleet mode
55 LEAVE_FLEET take pump out of fleet mode
56 GET_VERSION request version information
57 ACK_MOP verify MOP at DPT/CRIND device
58 CODE_RECORD contains code file entry
59 WASH_BUF contains car wash message
5A TIP_BAG extra storage for a TIP
5B XFBROAD broadcast for a file transfer
5C DO_INVOICE request invoice buffer
5D INV_ERROR error occurred when printing invoice
5E SCRP_MESS site controller router protocol message
5F HOST_STORED we know the trans is stored on the host
60 ROUTCMD router command: (for multi-router)
61 ROUTFALLBACK router fallback function
Buffer Type Code Description
Diagnostic Commands System Status
Page 25-10 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
DTIP NF consolenumber [P]
dumps the transaction in progress on the specified console.
If the P option is given, it will display data for the previous transaction.
DUMP CORE [addressrange [page size]]
dumps the specified range of addresses from memory.
DUMP tablename [major range [minor range]]
dumps, from the specified table, record numbers included in the major range (or
subrecords in the minor range).
Ranges of address may be specified using hexadecimal numbers separated by a hyphen (-)
character. Record number ranges are given in decimal numbers separated by a hyphen.
How to Display Site Controller Status
The disk-based command STATUS provides various system information, depending upon
what options are given it. Options may be combined as a string of letters.
STATUS takes one or more of the options shown below.
If no option string is given, STATUS just reports on switch, transaction table, and version.
You can halt the repeating STATUS command by pressing ^C.
Options Descriptions
B Backup: Backs up user data in a file of your choosing (enter the command as
STATUS;>>filename B).
C CPU: Calculates percentage of CPU being used at site. Program requests all available
CPU for five seconds and reports how much it was not able to get.
D Prints daily settlement control information.
H Host: Reports last transaction number sent to a CFN host.
N No-sale: Reports all non-zero no-sale counters.
O Oldest: Returns oldest transaction number as its error code %E.
R Reports. Prints reports on users (sign-ons). The reports give statistics on no-sales, item
voids, sale voids, and how long that user was signed on during the requested period.
The default report is for the previous shift. A character following the R indicates the
period requested:
C =Current shift
D =Current day
Y =Yesterday
T =Cumulative totals
1 =Previous shift
2 =One before previous shift
3 =Two before previous shift
P =Cumulative totals at last day-change
S Switch: Reports current DIP switch settings.
T Transaction table: Reports how full the transaction table is and how many more
transactions can be put in it. If site has crashed, tells which transactions have bad
check sums.
U Unpaid: Reports all non-zero unpaid totalizers.
V Version: Reports operating system version.
! Repeat: Causes specified reports to be repeated every 1 second (longer if report takes
longer to generate). For user on CRT.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 25-11
How to Test a Pump Control Units Memory Diagnostic Commands
How to Test a Pump Control Units Memory
Use the command TEST PCU or TE PC to test the RAM and ROM of a pump control unit.
The test checks the transaction and program memory. If the pump control unit does not pass
the test, an error message is printed. If it does pass the test, no message is displayed.
TEST PCU ( TE PC)
[ P: ] * TEST PCU
PCU addr ess? 1
[ P: ] *
How to Test a Receipt Printer
You can use the command PRINT RECEIPT or P REC to print any text on a console or island
card reader receipt printer. This is a handy way to test the receipt printer without having to
print a receipt.
PRI NT RECEI PT ( P REC)
[ P: ] * PRINT RECEIPT
Pr i nt er number ? 1
Li ne t o pr i nt ? GASBOY CFN
[ P: ] *
(Refer to Making Your Own Commands on page 19-1).
For receipt printers on island card readers, the printer number is the number of the island card
reader. Line to print is the text you want printed on the receipt printer.
SHOW Command
SHow: Designed to display communication between the site and devices. Displays
communication for chosen devices when there is a change. The devices chosen must be up in
order to be displayed. The syntax for the command is:
SHow <device>[<device>...]
A device is a device name followed by a space and either a device number or an asterisk (*)
indicating all of that device. The valid devices are: REader, COnsole, GAte, TMs, FPr, SDI,
PUmp Pcu, and LOOP.
Additionally, a device may be a single word if it is one of the following:
ALL - Shows communication for all devices.
RBroad - Shows reader broadcast messages.
CBroad - Shows console broadcast messages.
ROUTer - Shows router activity.
Communication will continue to be displayed until ^C (control key -C) is typed.
Communication errors such as failure to respond or CRC errors are indicated. It must be noted
that since this display function is being handled at a relatively high level within the software,
partial responses from a device will appear to be a non-response.
Diagnostic Commands How to Test a Receipt Printer
Page 25-12 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 26-1
Shut Down and Restart a Site Enabling and Disabling Devices
26 Enabling and Disabling Devices
Shut Down and Restart a Site
Often it is convenient to shut down the site so that transactions cannot be started when you are
changing shifts, changing prices, or printing transaction or sales totals reports. On rare
occasions it may be required to quickly shut down the site, terminating all transactions in
progress.
How to Shut Down a Site
Use the command STOP to shut down the site before changing prices, performing
maintenance, or synchronizing totals and transaction numbers for printout. The site will shut
down after all transactions in progress are finished. Once you enter STOP, no new transactions
will be started until you enter RUN. The terminal will display the normal prompt when the site
has shut down.
STOP
[ P: ] * STOP
Ver i f y ( y/ n) ? y
[ P: ] *
If transactions have been started from the POS console, you must clear them before STOP will
complete. Either complete the transactions, or terminate them by selecting the pump they are
on and press the STOP key on the POS console twice. Postpay sales that have had fuel pumped
on them must be paid off before STOP will complete.
STOP with the I option (STOP;I) will block new transactions, but will allow you to execute
further commands without waiting for ongoing transactions to complete. The site will wait for
ongoing transaction to complete, but you can continue with your command sequence. STOP;I
is useful for command files for shift breaks and other functions where you do not want to be
hung up for a long time waiting for transactions to complete.
Disable Pumps
As described in the following procedures, you can stop the site by typing STOP;A at the
terminal or by pressing ALL STOP on the Profit Point.
The STOP;A command, DISABLE PUMPS and ALL STOP buttons at the cashiers station
WILL NOT shut off electrical power to the pump/dispenser.
This means that even if you activate these stops, fuel may continue to flow uncontrolled.
You must use the TOTAL ELECTRICAL SHUT-OFF in the case of an emergency and not
only these cashier station stops.
WARNING
Enabling and Disabling Devices Shut Down and Restart a Site
Page 26-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Do an Emergency Stop from the Terminal
You will probably never use this command unless a crisis arises. Use the command STOP;A to
terminate all pump transactions in progress and shut down the site.
[ P: ] * STOP;A
Ver i f y ( y/ n) ? y
[ P: ] *
The terminal will display the normal prompt when all transactions are paid off and the site is
shut down. Postpay transactions that were started from a console before the emergency stop
was executed require to be paid off if fuel has been pumped on them.
How to Do and Emergency Stop from the Console
On the Profit Point, press ALL STOP.
How to Restart a Site
Use the command RUN to restart the site if it was shut down with the command STOP or
STOP;A.
RUN
[ P: ] * RUN
Ver i f y ( y/ n) ? y
[ P: ] *
The RUN command will also restart the site from mild crashes, when no tables have been
reconstructed.
How to Restart from a Console ALL Stop
If the site was shut down by pressing the consoles DISABLE PUMPS or ALL STOP key, the
site can be restarted by simply pressing the DISABLE PUMPS or ALL STOP key again. Use
the command RUN;A to restart the site if it was shut down by a console emergency stop and if
the site will not restart from the console.
[ P: ] * RUN;A
Ver i f y ( y/ n) ? y
[ P: ] *
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 26-3
Shut Down and Restart a Site Enabling and Disabling Devices
How to Restart a Site from a Serious Crash
Do not use the command RUN;I to restart the site after a crash without first
consulting with your service representative. If the problem that caused the crash is
not fixed before the Site Controller is restarted, damage could result.
CAUTION
[ P: ] * RUN;I
Ver i f y ( y/ n) ? y
[ P: ] *
Use the command RUN;I to restart the site after a crash. A crash can be caused by a system
error, file error, or some other problem. RUN;I will restart the site even after a serious crash.
The plain RUN command will restart the site after mild crashes.
How to Reboot the Site Controller
Use the command REBOOT to reboot the Site Controller. REBOOT with the A option causes
the Site Controller to reboot from disk. That is how you load a new version of the software. It
is a good idea to use the command STOP to shut down the site before you reboot.
REBOOT
[ P: ] * STOP
Ver i f y ( y/ n) ? y
[ P: ] * REBOOT
Ver i f y ( y/ n) ? y
[ P: ] *
There are various types of reboots.
REBOOT
The plain REBOOT command reboots the Site Controller and reloads the configuration from
the disk. The file FRAMOS.CFG must be in the root directory of the default drive.
Use this command to load a new configuration.
REBOOT;I
With the I option, REBOOT reboots the Site Controller but does not load a new configuration.
Instead, the former configuration is used.
Use this command to reboot the Site Controller when the configuration file is not available.
REBOOT;A
With the A option, REBOOT reboots the Site Controller and loads the operating system off
disk. The files FRAMOS.BIN and FRAMOS.CFG must be in the root directory of the default
drive.
Enabling and Disabling Devices Site Devices
Page 26-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Use this command to load a new version of the operating system, or to reload the operating
system.
When running REBOOT;A, the Site Controller always attempts to execute
AUTOEXEC.CMD immediately after booting. This allows commands to be executed even if
there is no cron command file.
Site Devices
Use the disable commands to shut down a site device for maintenance or to restrict access to
the device. Use the enable commands to return a device to operation after it has been disabled
by command or through a system error. You can use the command PRINT DIAGNOSTICS to
find out if a device is enabled or disabled.
The C option can be used with all disable and enable commands to disable or enable more than
one device of the same type.
How to Disable and Enable a Pump
Use the command DISABLE PUMP or DI PU to shut down a pump.
DI SABLE PUMP ( DI PU)
[ P: ] * DISABLE PUMP
Pump number ? 4
[ P: ] *
ENABLE PUMP ( E PU)
[ P: ] * ENABLE PUMP
Pump number ? 4
[ P: ] *
Use the command ENABLE PUMP or E PU to return a pump to operation.
ENABLE PUMP with the I option (ENABLE PUMP;I) clears the no-quantity counters for
all pumps and enables all pumps.
ENABLE PUMP with the A option (ENABLE PUMP;A) clears ownership and frees
pump.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 26-5
Site Devices Enabling and Disabling Devices
How to Disable and Enable a Pump Control Unit
Use the command DISABLE PCU or DI PC to shut down a pump control unit (PCU).
DI SABLE PCU ( DI PC)
[ P: ] * DISABLE PCU
PCU number ? 2
[ P: ] *
ENABLE PCU ( E PC)
[ P: ] * ENABLE PCU
PCU number ? 2
[ P: ] *
Use the command ENABLE PCU or E PC to return a pump control unit to operation.
ENABLE PCU with the I option (ENABLE PCU;I) enables all pump control units.
How to Disable and Enable a Reader Terminal
Use the command DISABLE READER or DI RE to shut down an island card reader (ICR).
DI SABLE READER ( DI RE)
[ P: ] * DISABLE READER
Reader number ? 1
[ P: ] *
ENABLE READER ( E RE)
[ P: ] * ENABLE READER
Reader number ? 1
[ P: ] *
Use the command ENABLE READER or E RE to return an ICR to operation.
ENABLE READER with the I option (ENABLE READER;I) enables all ICRs.
Enabling and Disabling Devices Site Devices
Page 26-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
How to Disable and Enable a Console
Use the command DISABLE CONSOLE or DI CO to disable a console
DI SABLE CONSOLE ( DI CO)
[ P: ] * DISABLE CONSOLE
Consol e number ? 1
[ P: ] *
ENABLE CONSOLE ( E CO)
[ P: ] * ENABLE CONSOLE
Consol e number ? 1
[ P: ] *
Use the command ENABLE CONSOLE or E CO to return a console to operation.
ENABLE CONSOLE with the I option (ENABLE CONSOLE;I) enables all consoles.
How to Disable and Enable a Tank Monitor System
Use the command DISABLE TMS or DI TMS to disable a Tank Monitor system.
DI SABLE TMS ( DI TMS)
[ P: ] * DISABLE TMS
TMS number ? 1
[ P: ] *
ENABLE TMS ( E TMS)
[ P: ] * ENABLE TMS
TMS number ? 1
[ P: ] *
Use the command ENABLE TMS or E TMS to return a Tank Monitor system to operation.
ENABLE TMS with the I option (ENABLE TMS;I) enables all Tank Monitor systems.
How to Disable and Enable a Gate Reader
Use the command DISABLE GATE or DI GA to disable a gate reader.
DI SABLE GATE ( DI GA)
[ P: ] * DISABLE GATE
Gat e cont r ol l er number ? 1
[ P: ] *
ENABLE GATE ( E GA)
[ P: ] * ENABLE GATE
Gat e cont r ol l er number ? 1
[ P: ] *
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 26-7
Site Devices Enabling and Disabling Devices
Use the command ENABLE GATE or E GA to return a gate reader to operation.
ENABLE GATE with the I option (ENABLE GATE;I) enables all gates.
How to Disable and Enable a Fuel Point Reader
Use the command DISABLE FPR or DI FPR to disable a Fuel Point reader.
DI SABLE FPR ( DI FPR)
[ P: ] * DISABLE FPR
FPR number ? 1
[ P: ] *
ENABLE FPR ( E FPR)
[ P: ] * ENABLE FPR
FPR number ? 1
[ P: ] *
Use the command ENABLE FPR or E FPR to return a Fuel Point reader to operation.
ENABLE FPR with the I option (ENABLE FPR;I) enables all Fuel Point readers.
How to Disable, Enable, and Download SDIs
Use the command DISABLE SDI or DI SDI to disable an SDI.
DI SABLE SDI ( DI SDI )
[ P: ] * DISABLE SDI
SDI #? 1
[ P: ] *
ENABLE SDI ( E SDI )
[ P: ] * ENABLE SDI
SDI #? 1
[ P: ] *
Use the command ENABLE SDI or E SDI to return an SDI to operation.
ENABLE SDI with the I option (ENABLE SDI;I) enables all SDIs.
DOWNLOAD SDI ( DO SDI )
[ P: ] * DOWNLOAD SDI 1
[ P: ] *
Enabling and Disabling Devices Operating Pumps Manually
Page 26-8 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
To force a download of an SDI, use the command DOWNLOAD SDI. You must include the
SDI number on the same line as the command (you will not be prompted for it). You may
specify more than one SDI on the command line without a C option.
Log messages will report SDIs going up/down and being enabled/disabled.
Operating Pumps Manually
How to Activate a Pump from the Command Window
You can start and stop a pump from the command window. This is useful if you do not have a
console and your island card reader is out of order, or you want to pump fuel without using a
card.
ACTI VATE PUMP ( AC PU)
[ P: ] * ACTIVATE PUMP
Pump number ? 2
Pump i s r eady.
[ P: ] *
To activate a pump from the command window for one transaction, use the command
ACTIVATE PUMP or AC PU.
The transaction is recorded as a cash transaction. If the pump you select is available, the
terminal will print PUMP IS READY. ACTIVATE PUMP uses the fallback price or the price
level selected by the pumps cash/credit buttons, if available.
You may use the C option with the command ACTIVATE PUMP.
If the P1 option is used with ACTIVATE PUMP, the P1 data will be used as the account
number, and the account type will be club. No verification or checks will be performed on the
account data. You may include a D as a field separator, and follow it by discretionary data,
such as the expiration date.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 26-9
Operating Pumps Manually Enabling and Disabling Devices
How to Deactivate a Pump from the Command Window
Use the command DEACTIVATE PUMP or DE PU to turn off a pump that is in use. You may
use the C option with the command DEACTIVATE PUMP.
DEACTI VATE PUMP ( DE PU)
[ P: ] * DEACTIVATE PUMP
Pump number ? 2
[ P: ] *
How to Put a Pump into Full-service Mode
Use the command FULLSERV to place all of the pumps into full-service mode at once. To
remove them from full-service, use the command SELFSERV.
[ P: ] * FULLSERV
1- 2- 3- 4- 5- 6- 7- 8- 9- 10- 11- 11- 12- 13- 14- 15- 16
WARNI NG: Al l pumps now i n
f ul l - ser vi ce mode.
[ P: ] *
[ P: ] * ACTIVATE PUMP;A 1
[ P: ] *
Another way is to use the command ACTIVATE PUMP;A.
When a pump is in full-service mode, the Site Controller activates it when the hose is taken off
its hook.
If the island card reader, FPR, and console are out of service, you can put the pumps into
full-serve mode so they may still be accessed.
Transactions generated in full-serve mode have Fulsrv instead of an authorization code in the
transaction printout. They use the fallback price (unless they are paid at the console) or the
price selected by the cash/credit buttons on the pump, if available. (The printouts for the
PRINT DIAGNOSTICS and PRINT PUMP commands show full serve for pumps that are in
full-serve mode.)
Note: For full-serve mode to work, pumps must be wired for a console installation, even if
there is no console.
[ P: ] * PRINT PUMP
P# T# Pr Pc Pr i ce Tot al s $Tot al Rat e Li mi t Sl ow
1 1 1 1 0. 799 178. 770 181. 10 100/ $ $30 0. 500 Ful l sr v
2 2 2 0. 859 360. 716 322. 74
3 3 3 0. 919 740. 360 741. 94
2 1 1 1 0. 799 84. 110 66. 44 100/ $ $30 0. 500
3 2 3 0. 919 2. 140 3. 13
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[ P: ] *
[ P: ] * DEACTIVATE PUMP;A
Pump number ? 1
[ P: ] *
Enabling and Disabling Devices Operating Pumps Manually
Page 26-10 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Use DEACTIVATE PUMP;A to take a pump out of full-serve mode.
How to Bypass the Pump Control Unit
If the pump control unit is not working, you can bypass it and operate the pumps manually. To
do this, turn the pump relay control switch to MAN. Then use the command ACTIVATE
PUMP;A to put the affected pumps into full-service mode. This will allow the transaction
information to be recorded.
Note: The PCU power must be on for this to work. ACTIVATE PUMP;A may cause
transactions not to be recorded if the PCU hardware is damaged.
If this manual-override procedure does not work, chances are the power supply or the relays in
the PCU are bad, and your only choice at this point is to replace them.
Manual Override Switches
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 27-1
Requirements and Restrictions Invoice Printing
27 Invoice Printing
Invoice printing is new feature available from Gasboy. When only one invoice style is
currently supported, others can be made available. Contact your Gasboy Representative.
Requirements and Restrictions
Invoice printing has several requirements and restrictions:
You must be using the Profit Point system as your POS, running software version 2.2.
Invoices can only be printed on a dedicated impact printer connected to the parallel printer
port on the Profit Point.
The Profit Point system must have a dedicated key for the invoice printer. Refer to the
Profit Point Reference Manual version 2.2 or above, for setting up the dedicated key. The
default key is N.
You must configure the CONSOLE.BIN program, submenu 3 to use invoice printers.
Invoices can only be printed for the current transaction.
Multiple sales are not supported at this time.
Only CENTRAK form 881 is currently available.
Invoice Setup
Header and footer lines of text are set up for the invoice printer the same way as the receipt
printer. Use these line number ranges:
Ranges Function
1 - 9 Receipt header
11 - 19 Receipt footer
31 - 39 Invoice header
41 - 49 Invoice footer
The number of lines and characters is limited by the space available on the invoice form. Enter
the invoice information by using the command LOad Heading. For additional information,
refer to Receipts, Messages, and Date on page 6-1.
Note: You may require to increase the Receipt Heading Table in TABLE config. Refer to
MDE-4773 CFN III Configuration Manual for Windows XP.
Invoice Printing Printing an Invoice
Page 27-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
The Profit Point must be running software version 2.2b or later and must have a dedicated key,
the default is N, and set up with the Profit Point menu options.
1 Select option 4-Keyboard Configuration.
2 From the Keyboard configuration menu, select option 4 Function.
3 From the list, select option 14 - Print Form.
Refer to the Profit Point Reference Manual, version 2.2 for more information.
Printing an Invoice
Once your equipment has been set up by your Gasboy representative and your invoice header
and footer information has been entered, test your form feed of the printer and your system
setup by running some sample invoices.
Enter your sales as regular sales of fuel or merchandise. After the sale is completed, press N, to
print the invoice.
The current form allows for 13 sale items on a page. If there are more items, another page will
automatically feed with the word Continued... printing on the bottom replacing the footer
lines. All pages will contain the same header and general layout with the final page containing
the subtotal, discount, tax, total, and footer lines.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 27-3
Sample Invoice Invoice Printing
Sample Invoice
The following invoice is a sample for reference:
Duplicates
There is only one original document for a transaction and may be either a receipt or an invoice.
Whichever is printed first is the original. Any additional printings are marked as Duplicate.
If automatic receipt printing is enabled, any invoice will be a duplicate.
Invoice Printing Duplicates
Page 27-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page 28-1
Site Controller III Optional Packages
28 Site Controller III Optional Packages
Almost all of the Site Controllers functions are included in its standard package, but there are
some features that are optional.
Several options are grouped together in the Fleet package:
The Lookup Program: Refer to Lookup Program on page 14-1.
The MPG System: Refer to Miles per Gallon System on page 15-5.
Supervisor Cards: Are coded to allow (and have the Site Controller accept) the manual
entry of any valid card number, employee number, and vehicle number. This allows a
supervisor to enter information for an employee with a lost or damaged card. For an ICR
only.
Fuel-drop Cards: Are swiped through an island card reader by a tank-truck driver who
can then enter the number of the tank that received fuel and the number of gallons/liters
received.
Dipstick Cards: Are swiped at a reader by a site employee who has just used a tank
dipstick and who then enters the tank number and gallons/liters in the tank, as seen on the
dipstick.
Fueler ID Cards: Are swiped at an island card reader by a site employee who is then
responsible for all transactions at that island or on a particular pump.
Chain-pumping Feature: Turns on all pumps in a cluster (including such pumps as a
grease gun or air hose) when a master pump in the cluster is turned on. This feature is
useful at sites that have fully equipped repair bays.
Optical Cards: Can be read in an optical reader.
Other options are available individually, not as part of a package:
Fuel Point System: Which automatically reads vehicle identification, fuel authorization,
and odometer information directly from a module installed on the vehicle.
Tank Gauge Interface: Supports Tank gauges that have the Veeder-Root

protocol.
Bank-card Network Router: Allows the use of one of the routers described in the Credit
and Debit Card Network manuals.
Special Card Types: Allow the use of cards that are authorized locally and that do not
follow the standard Gasboy card format.
Dpt String Selection: Allows the use of special CITGO network messages.
Gate Reader Interface: Allows the site to have a gate reader.
Currency.
SDI: Allows the site to use various devices. SDI is the interface.
Key Option: Allows operators to use smart keys at an Islander II.
Pump PC Interfaces: Gilbarco, Wayne, Tokheim.
In-the-pump Reader PC Interfaces: Gilbarco CRIND, Wayne CAT, Tokheim Insight.
Site Controller III Optional Packages
Page 28-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page A-1
Front Panel Components SC III Ports and Switches
Appendix A: SC III Ports and Switches
Front Panel Components
Power Switch: Controls the power to the SC III
PC Reset Switch: Resets the PC but leaves the SC Comm operations running
PC Power Indicator: Indicates that power is being supplied to the controller
Hard Disk Status Indicator: Lights when the disk is being accessed
Serial/Parallel Ports
The RS-232 ports on the SC can be used for any function that requires a RS-232 port. The
ports on the SC III are more limited. Com1-4 can be used for login, log printers, and
command output may be directed to them. LPT1-2 can only be used as log printers or
command output.
The SC III has one more RS-422/485 channel available than the SCII. This has been
assigned to be another island loop. Broadcast messages will be sent to both of these
channels. The POS loop is the only loop that Profit Points can be connected to.
The following is a list of ports and their assignments:
Name Channel Location Function
CON 0 PC CRT/Keyboard Local port login
SC1 1 COMM CPU top DIN RS-232, use cable C05984 for terminal or
C05995 for modem
SC2 2 COMM CPU 26 pin ribbon RS-232 all cont. lines
SC3 3 COMM MEM DB-9 Not used
SC4 4 COMM MEM left DIN RS-232
Note: The Tokheim Pump ports behind the SC III is no longer used for V3.5. It must use PC loop application.
SC5 5 COMM MEM middle DIN RS-232, use cable C05984 for terminal or
C05995 for modem
SC6 6 COMM MEM right DIN RS-232, use cable C05984 for terminal or
C05995 for modem
COM1 7 PC RS-232
COM2 8 PC RS-232
COM3 9 PC RS-232
COM4 10 PC RS-232
LPT1 11 PC Parallel output
LPT2 12 PC Parallel output
LOOP1 N/A COMM CPU left handset Island loop
LOOP2 N/A COMM CPU middle
handset
Island loop
LOOP3 N/A COMM CPU right handset POS loop
SC III Ports and Switches DIP Switch Settings
Page A-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
DIP Switch Settings
Memory Board DIP Switch SC-Memory I/O - S1
On the SC MEMORY I/O board top left DIP switch:
Position and Definition Setting
1 Boot to monitor after reset
Boot to OS after reset
open
closed
2 Debug mode
Normal
open
closed
3 Do not talk to PC when in monitor
Monitor I/O goes to PC also
open
closed
4 Monitor I/O goes to SC port 1
No monitor I/O to SC port 1
open
closed
Memory Board DIP Switch SC-Memory I/O - S2
On the SC MEMORY I/O board top right DIP switch:
Position and Definition Setting
1 Battery 1 open=disabled
closed=enabled
2 Battery 2 External open=disabled
closed=enabled
3 N/A unused
4 N/A unused
PC IRQ Switch, SC-COMM CPU - S1
On the SC-COMM CPU board on the card edge side, the middle DIP switch is the
IRQ-enable DIP switch. The IRQ-enable switch chooses one of four possible interrupt
priorities. Only one may be selected and no other device on the PC can cause that interrupt.
SC3.EXE currently assumes level 10. Other choices are 15, 12, and 11.
Positions Definition Setting
1 Closed IRQ-15 Default - open
2 Closed IRQ-12 Default - open
3 Closed IRQ-11 Default - open
4 Closed IRQ-10 Default - closed
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page A-3
Jumper Settings SC III Ports and Switches
PC Address Switch, SC-COMM CPU - S2
On the CPU board, card edge right, the PC address DIP sets where in the PC address space
the dual RAM will occur. The SC-Comm board currently assumes D0000.
Switch Address Switch Address
cl cl cl cl C0000 op cl cl cl D6000
cl cl cl op C3000 op cl cl op D9000
cl cl op cl C6000 op cl op cl DC000
cl cl op op C7000 op cl op op DF000
cl op cl cl CC000 op op cl cl E0000
cl op cl op CF000 op op cl op E3000
cl op op cl D0000* op op op cl E6000
cl op op op D3000 op op op op E9000
* The SC-Comm board currently assumes this address.
Jumper Settings
SC-Comm CPU Board Settings
Jumper Description Setting
K3 AC power fail sense 1-2-3 to disable*
K4 AC watch dog timer 1-2 to enable*
K5 SC-Comm CPU (testing only) 1-2 to reset
K6 RS-485 loop 1 2-3 for 4 wire*
1-2 for 2 wire
K7 RS-485 loop 2 2-3 for 4 wire
1-2 for 2 wire*
K8 Rx Clock from synchronous modem (DB-25-15) 1-2 to connect
K9 ETC output to synchronous modem (DB-25-24) 1-2 to connect
K10 Tx clock onput from synchronous modem (DB-25-17) 1-2 to connect
K11 EPROM type 2-3 for 27128 or 27256
K12 EPROM type 2-3 for 27128 or 27256
* = default
SC III Ports and Switches Jumper Settings
Page A-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
SC-Comm Memory I/O Board Settings
Jumper Description Setting
K1 Date/Time Clock Speed 1-2 for 4 wait state*
2-3 for 1 wait state
K2 Enable A19 to RAM 2-3 for 128Kx8*
1-2 for 512Kx8
K3 RAM size 2-3 for 128Kx8*
1-2 for 512Kx8
K4 External Battery no connector =disabled*
K5 Do not Install, not supported
* = default
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page B-1
Setup Instructions for C01533 - Answer Modem Modem Settings and Cables
Appendix B: Modem Settings and Cables
Setup Instructions for C01533 - Answer Modem
The modem comes factory-programmed with the correct command strings and you must
typically never require to perform this configuration.
The C01533 Answer Modem is identified by the following manufacturers and Model
Numbers:
Zoom Faxmodem 56Kx Dualmode (white case) - Models 2948L, 2949L
Zoom V.90 Faxmodem (black case) - Model 2948C
Hayes Accura - Model 5611US, 5914US, or 4703US
Boca Research - Model MV34ED, MV34FEMS, M144EW, or MD56AE
Practical Peripherals - Model 5615US or 5638US
Configuring to Use as an Answer Modem
To configure the modem, proceed as follows:
1 Use the diskette supplied with the modem to run the configuration utility,
PROGMODM.CMD. Insert the diskette into the A: drive and type A:PROGMODM.
Follow the instructions in the PROGMODM for configuring as an Answer Modem.
2 If you do not have the diskette containing the PROGMODM.CMD utility, follow the
procedure below. The symbol indicates that the Enter key must be pressed.
a Connect a terminal to the modem with a 1:1 cable male DB-25 to male DB-25 (C04549) or
male DB-25 to female DB-9 (C04654). The terminal must be configured at the baud rate
at which the modem will operate.
b Connect the modems power cord and turn the modem power switch ON.
c For Zoom Model 2948C (V.90 Faxmodem, black case), enter the following:
Type: AT&F&W
Modem response: OK.
Type: AT&D2S0=1&C1&Q6X0&K0+MS=nnnn
Note: nnnn is a baud rate variable. Valid values are: V22 for 1200 baud, V22B for 2400
baud, or V32 for 9600 baud.
Modem response: OK.
Type: ATQ1&W
Modem does not respond.
Modem Settings and Cables Setup Instructions for C05899 - Credit/Debit Network Modem
Page B-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
For all other modem types enter the following:
Type: AT&F&W
Modem response: OK.
Type: AT&D2S0=1&C1B1&Q6X0&K0&W
Modem response: OK.
Type: ATQ1&W
Modem does not respond.
The modem is now ready for testing. The settings are saved and power may be turned off
without losing the configuration.
Setup Instructions for C05899 - Credit/Debit Network
Modem
The modem comes factory-programmed with the correct command strings and you must
typically never require to perform this configuration. Refer to CFN Router Configurations
on page B-3.
The C05899 Credit/Debit Card Network Modem is for SC III with a network interface which
requires the fuel management system to contact a credit or debit network for verification of a
users card. This modem is identified by the following manufacturers and Model Numbers:
Multitech - Model MT2834ZDXb or MT1932ZDX
Zoom - Model 2948L, 2949L
Hayes Accura - Model 4703US
Boca Research - Model M024ED
Modems to be used for dial-out to a bank network require a dedicated phone line.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page B-3
Setup Instructions for C05899 - Credit/Debit Network Modem Modem Settings and Cables
Configuring to Use as a Credit/Debit Card Network Modem
To configure the modem, proceed as follows:
1 Use the diskette supplied with the modem to run the configuration utility,
PROGMODM.CMD. Insert the diskette into the A: drive and typeA:PROGMODM. Follow
the instructions in PROGMODM for configuring as a bank network modem.
Note: Network modems are setup using a Network Setup menu, or by using the command
MODEMS and following the prompts that appear.
2 If you do not have the diskette containing the PROGMODM.CMD utility, follow the
procedure below. The symbol indicates that the Enter key must be pressed. After you
perform the following steps, run the commands in the following table for your specific
modem.
a Connect a terminal to the modem with a male DB-25 1:1 cable to male DB-25 (C04549) or
male DB-25 cable to female DB-9 (C04654). The terminal must be configured at the baud
rate at which the modem will operate.
b Type: AT&F&W.
Modem response: No response from Multitech. All others respond with OK.
The modem is now ready for testing. The settings are saved, and power may be turned off
without losing the configuration.
CFN Router Configurations
If the router you are using does not use a MODEMS.INI file, choose the correct modem in the
routers configuration menu. If the correct modem is not listed, choose Hayes 1200 for any of
these modems.
Modem Baud Rate Command
Multitech 1200 Type:
ATE0Q0V0X4&B1&Q1&D2&E3$MB1200S0=0S6=1S11=60&W
Modem response: 0
2400 Type:
ATE0Q0V0X4&B1&Q1&D2&E3$MB2400S0=0S6=1S11=60&W
Modem response: 0
Zoom 1200
Type: ATV0E0X4\N1S0=0S37=5S7=255S11=70&K0%C0&W
Modem response: 0
2400
Type: ATV0E0X4\N1S0=0S37=6S7=255S11=70&K0%C0&W
Modem response: 0
Boca Research 1200 or 2400
Type: ATV0X0E0L1&Q0&D2&C1&S0&W
Modem response: 0
Hayes 1200 or 2400
Type: ATV0X0E0L1&Q0&D2&C1&S0&W
Modem response: 0
Modem Settings and Cables Modem DIN Cabling
Page B-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Modem DIN Cabling
Use cable C05995 for connecting to the SC-modem or C05994 for SC-terminal.
If connecting to the COM port of the PC, the RS-232 cable connecting the Site Controller to
the modem is a straight cable as shown below.
Figure B-1: Modem DIN Cabling
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page B-5
Null Modem Cross Cable Modem Settings and Cables
Null Modem Cross Cable
Sometimes you might want to connect a device other than a modem to the SC IIIs modem
port. You first must find out whether that device is configured as Data Terminal Equipment
(DTE) or Data Communications Equipment (DCE).
A DCE is a device that looks like a modem and the straight cable shown above must be used
with it. If the device is a DTEthat is, it looks like a terminalthen the cable below must
work. A null modem cross cable with male DB-25 to male DB-25 is part number C05039. A
null modem cross cable with male DB-25 to female DB-9 is part number C05928.
Figure B-2: Null Modem Cross Cable
Connection Cable Type Gasboy Part Number
Port 1, 4, 5, and 6 to the
modem
MiniDIN to DB-25 C05995
Port 1, 4, 5, and 6 to the
terminal
MiniDIN to DB-25 C05994
Modem Settings and Cables Null Modem Cross Cable
Page B-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page C-1
EFT Regulation E Printed Receipt Regulations
Appendix C: Printed Receipt Regulations
The Federal Regulations on Electronic Funds Transfer Regulation E set standards for the
documentation of electronic transfers, including the information that must appear on printed
receipts.
The applicable sections of Regulation E are printed below.
Note: When these are the regulations that were in effect at the time this manual was written,
Gasboy obviously cannot guarantee that these regulations have not since been
amended or rewritten. Check with your companys lawyer.
EFT Regulation E
Section 205.9(a)Documentation of Transfers
(a) Receipts at electronic terminals. At the time an electronic fund transfer is initiated at an
electronic terminal by a consumer, the financial institution shall make available
1
to the
consumer a written receipt of the transfer(s) that clearly sets forth the following information
as applicable:
(1) The amount of transfer. A charge for the transfer may be included in this amount if the
terminal is owned or operated by a person other than a financial institution holding the
consumers account, provided the amount of the charge is disclosed on the receipt and on a
sign posted on or at the terminal.
(2) The calendar date the consumer initiated the transfer.
(3) The type of transfer and the type of the consumers account(s)
2
to or from which the
funds are transferred, such as withdrawal from checking, transfer from savings to
checking, or payment from savings. These descriptions may be used for transfers to or
from accounts that are similar in function to checking accounts (such as share draft or
negotiable order of withdrawal accounts) or to savings accounts (such as share accounts).
Codes may be used only if they are explained elsewhere on the receipt.
(4) A number or code that uniquely identifies the consumer initiating the transfer, the
consumers account(s) or the access device used to initiate that transfer.
1. A financial institution may arrange for a third party, such as a merchant, to make the receipt available.
2. If more than one account of the same type may be accessed by a single access device, the accounts must be uniquely identified unless the
terminal is incapable of such identification and was purchased or ordered by the financial institution prior to February 6, 1980. In a POS
transfer, the type of account must not be identified if the access device used may access only one account at POS.
Printed Receipt Regulations EFT Regulation E
Page C-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
(5) The location (in a form prescribed by paragraph (b)(1)(iv) of this section) of the terminal at
which the transfer was initiated or an identification (such as a code or terminal number).
(6) The name of any third party to or from whom funds are transferred; a code may be used
only if it is explained elsewhere on the receipt. This requirement does not apply if the name is
provided by the consumer in a form that the electronic terminal cannot duplicate on the
receipt.
Section 205.9(b)(1)(iv)
(A) The address, including number and street (the number may be omitted if the street alone
uniquely identifies the terminal location) or intersection, city, and state or foreign country
1
;
(B) A generally accepted name for a specific location (such as a branch of the financial
institution, a shopping center, or an airport), city, and state
2
or foreign country, or
(C) The name of the entity at whose place of business the terminal is located or which owns or
operates the terminal (such as the financial institution
3
or the seller of goods or services), city,
and state
4
or foreign country.
1. The city and state may be omitted if all the terminals owned or operated by the financial institution providing the statement (or by the system in
which it participates) are located in the same city. The state may be omitted if all the terminals owned or operated by the financial institution
providing the statement (or by the systemin which it participates) are located in that state. The state may also be omitted for transfers occurring
at terminals within 50 miles of the financial institutions main office.
2. See footnote 3.
3. If the financial institution providing the statement owns or operates terminals at more than one location, it shall describe the location of its elec-
tronic terminals by use of paragraphs (b)(1)(iv)(A) or (B) of this section.
4. See footnote 3.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page C-3
Gasboy Receipt Printed Receipt Regulations
Gasboy Receipt
The core of the standard Gasboy receipt complies with the sections of Federal Regulations on
Electronic Funds Transfer Regulation E that apply to the contents of the receipt of an
automated fueling transaction. To comply with the spirit of the regulation, we recommend that
the heading or footing of the receipt include the company name, street address, city, and state
of the fueling location.
Figure C-1: Receipt for Club Sale
AUTOMATED FUELI NG
TRANSACTI ON
SMI TTY S STATI ON
10 MAI N STREET
SMI TH, WA 90000
6/ 10/ 95 2: 56 PM
Si t e Tr an Seq Aut h
644331 9040 3021 026956
Fr om: CLUB
Car d # 123123123
Pump #1 Regul ar
Gal l ons . . . . . . . 10. 360
Pr i ce/ Gal . . . . . . $1. 159
Fuel sal e . . . . . $12. 01
Soda 1@0. 55 $0. 55
Snack 1@0. 95 $0. 95
Subt ot al . . . . . . $13. 51
Sal e t x $. 95 = $0. 05
Tot al . . . . . . . . $13. 56
THANK YOU
PLEASE COME AGAI N
Figure C-2: Receipt for Credit Sale
AUTOMATED FUELI NG
TRANSACTI ON
SMI TTY S STATI ON
10 MAI N STREET
SMI TH, WA 90000
2/ 23/ 09 3: 40 PM
Si t e Tr an Aut h I CR I D
009999 3466 992597 1 0
Fr om: CREDI T
Vi sa ************1114
Pump #22 Di esel 2
Gal l ons . . . . . . . 11. 369
Pr i ce/ Gal . . . . . . 2. 199
Tot al . . . . . . . . $25. 00
Mer chant I D 1691
THANK YOU
PLEASE COME AGAI N
Custom receipt formats must comply with these regulations.
The example shows the core of the standard Gasboy receipt with a possible heading and
footing format.
Note: The tax name is limited to only 7-characters.
Printed Receipt Regulations Gasboy Receipt
Page C-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page D-1
Messages on the Log Printer Status and Error Messages
Appendix D: Status and Error Messages
This chapter is divided into three sections:
Messages on the log printer or in diagnostics
Messages in the transaction printout
Messages in command mode
Messages within each section are listed alphabetically. If the first word of the message may
vary, it is listed at the beginning of the section.
Messages on the Log Printer
The following messages may appear on the log printer or terminal when it is in log printer
mode, or may be printed in response to the command PRINT DIAGNOSTICS.
Name Table Reconstructed
Table name has been reconstructed because of an error. Some or all of the data in the
specified table may be missing.
The SC III will reboot itself to crashed state.
Call your service representative and report the table name.
You may use the appropriate print command to inspect the data. However, if the Global
table was reconstructed, the transaction data may still be there even though it does not print
out.
Do not restart the SC III until you have talked to a service technician. Then use the
command RUN;I to restart the SC III.
Switch the pumps to manual mode until the problem is fixed. Ensure to record pump
totalizer readings before switching the pumps to manual, than again after the problem is
solved and before switching back to automatic so fuel inventory can be balanced. Follow
your normal procedure for manually writing proprietary-card transactions.
linename DSR not present
linename DSR regained
linename CTS not present
linename CTS regained
These messages report changes in the status of devices connected to the SC III through
RS-232 Ports. DSR stands for data set ready, and CTS stands for clear to send.
Linename describes the function of the port on which the status change occurred. Possible
functions are: CFN host port, Bank host port.
Status and Error Messages Messages on the Log Printer
Page D-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
These messages indicate interruptions in communications, but are not in themselves serious.
In particular, a DSR regained message when a Hayes Modem establishes a connection,
followed by a DSR not present message when the modem hangs up, does not indicate a
problem.
For local devices like Tokheim or special pump controllers, use PRINT DIAGNOSTICS to
see if the corresponding device is down or is reporting a large number of errors.
[Pump #] Card #XXXXXXXXXXXX denial_reason WED 11/29/08 12:34 PM
The pump number does not appear if the pump has not yet been selected.
XXXXXXXXXXXX is the number read from card or VM or entered.
A customer has been denied access to the system.
Possible denial reasons are:
Invalid PIN, abort
Invalid PIN, retry
Card is not valid
Card has expired
Down, try later
Cannot verify card
Exceeded allocation
Exceeded daily limit
Invalid fuel
Invalid pump
Pump disabled
Invalid card format
Invalid system ID
Not accepted here
Card is locked out
Another possibility is that the customer was granted access, but then one of these conditions
arose:
Timed out
Mem lost
Power fail
If your site is connected to a remote hosteither PC or a bank networkfor card
authorization, the remote host may provide a denial message.
For Invalid PIN, Card is not valid, and Card has expired errors on Proprietary Cards, refer the
customer to your companys business office (ensure to follow company policy on what to tell
customers about Card is not valid denials).
No further action is required, unless all cards suddenly give the same denial error or a
particular pump gives Down, try later repeatedly.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page D-3
Messages on the Log Printer Status and Error Messages
Bank Verification Came Up
Communication with the bank network has been re-established.
No action is required.
Bank verification went down
Communication with the bank network has been lost.
Check modem cable, connections, and switch settings, if any. Call network number from
another computer to make sure host is available and that passwords work.
Battery FAILED
One of the two SC III back-up batteries has failed.
Do not turn off power to the SC III; data may be lost.
Call your service representative and report the problem.
Battery OK
A SC III back-up battery that had failed is now functioning properly.
Intermittent failure of a battery is a serious problem. Call your service representative.
Card Reader Terminal #X Came Up
The indicated island card reader is functioning normally.
No action is required.
Card Reader Terminal #X Disabled
The indicated island card reader has been disabled by the command DISABLE READER.
No action is required. Use the command ENABLE READER to return the card reader to
operation when appropriate.
Card Reader Terminal #X Paper Low
The indicated island card reader receipt printer is low on paper.
Replace paper in the receipt printer.
Card Reader Terminal #X Out of Paper
The indicated island card reader receipt printer is out of paper.
Replace paper in the receipt printer.
Status and Error Messages Messages on the Log Printer
Page D-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Card Reader Terminal #X Paper Refilled
Paper has been replaced in the indicated island card reader receipt printer.
No action is required.
Card Reader Terminal #X Printer Down
The indicated island card reader receipt printer is not functioning.
If you cannot find and correct the problem, call your service representative.
If the island card reader in question is not equipped with a receipt printer, then ignore this
message.
Card Reader Terminal #X Printer Jammed
The indicated island card reader receipt printer is not functioning.
If you cannot find and correct the problem, call your service representative.
Card Reader Terminal #X Printer Unjammed
The indicated island card reader receipt printer is now functioning.
Card Reader Terminal #X Printer Up
The indicated island card reader receipt printer is now functioning.
Card Reader Terminal #X Reader Jammed
A unit in the indicated island card reader is not functioning.
If you cannot find and correct the problem, call your service representative.
Card Reader Terminal #X Reader Unjammed
The indicated island card reader is functioning properly.
No action is required.
Card Reader Terminal #X Went Down
The indicated island card reader is not functioning.
Try to bring the unit up with the command ENABLE READER.
If that does not work, execute the command PRINT DIAGNOSTICS and report the results to
your service representative.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page D-5
Messages on the Log Printer Status and Error Messages
CFN Verification Came Up
Communication to a remote SC III or PC used for card verification has been re-established.
No action is required.
CFN Verification Did Not Respond
The SC III did not get a response when it contacted the host for remote verification of a card
transaction.
If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the system administrator.
CFN Verification Went Down
Remote communication has been lost.
Ensure that the modem is plugged in and the baud rate is set correctly. If everything looks
okay at your site, report the problem to the network administrator.
Profit PT #X Came Up
The indicated POS console has been returned to operation.
No action is required.
Profit Pt #X Disabled
The indicated POS console has been disabled by the command DISABLE CONSOLE.
No action is required. Return the console to operation with the command ENABLE
CONSOLE if appropriate.
Profit Pt #X Went Down
The indicated POS console is not functioning.
Try to return the console to operation with the command ENABLE CONSOLE.
If that does not work, check to make sure the console power cord is plugged in and that the
RS-422/485 Data Cable (small 4-wire Modular Connector) is connected.
If the console still does not work, execute the command PRINT DIAGNOSTICS 4 and report
the results to your service representative.
Data Corrupted in Table
Data in table has become corrupted. The SC III will reconstruct the table and reboot itself in
the crashed state.
Refer to Name Table Reconstructed on page D-1.
Status and Error Messages Messages on the Log Printer
Page D-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
CARD: XXXXXXXXXX DES Not Ready
DES (data encryption standard) encryption unit in a card reader was not ready to process a
bank card, probably because one of the two keys was not loaded.
Contact your bank network representative.
Diagnostics Table Too Small
Not enough available records in the diagnostic table.
The size of the diagnostic table is set in the SC III configuration.
If this message occurs at startup, you will require to configure for a larger diagnostic table
size.
Disk Full
The RAM disk is full.
Delete unnecessary files from the disk.
EMERGENCY STOP
An ALL stop has been done from the POS console, or a STOP; a command was issued.
No action is required. Press the ALL STOP key on the console again when all is secure to
end the emergency stop, or issue a RUN;A command from the terminal keyboard.
End EMERGENCY STOP
ALL stop done from the console is no longer in effect.
No action is required.
Fuel Point Reader # on Loop # Went Down
A Fuel Point Reader has gone down.
Check reader.
Fuel Point Reader # Came Up
A Fuel Point Reader has come back online.
No action is required.
Gate # on Loop # Went Down
A Gate has gone down.
Check gate.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page D-7
Messages on the Log Printer Status and Error Messages
Gate # Came Up
A Gate has come back online.
No action is required.
Island EMERGENCY STOP
The DISABLE PUMP button on the island has been pressed, or a communications problem
has developed on the RS-422 loop to the island.
To end an island emergency stop, enter a RUN;A command from the terminal keyboard, or
press the ALL STOP key on the console twice.
If the island button was not pressed (or does not exist), contact your service representative.
Island Reader Only
Displays when you try to use Fueler ID, Supervisor cards, Fuel Drop cards, Dipstick cards
and Fueler cards at the Console. These can only be used at the Island Reader.
Loop Table Overflow
There can be 64 loop devices.
If there are more than 64 loop devices, this error occurs.
Loop devices are consoles, island card readers, pump control units, electronic pumps, MPDs,
and so on.
If you do not have more than 64 loop devices and experience this error, contact your service
representative.
Master Key Loaded
DES decryption master key is present.
No action is required.
Memory Available
Memory is available for new transaction records.
Memory Full
There is no room in memory for additional transactions.
The SC III will not accept new transactions.
If your site is connected to a host site, contact your system administrator.
Status and Error Messages Messages on the Log Printer
Page D-8 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
If your site is not connected to a host site or polled by a remote computer, then print
transactions in memory using the command PRINT TRANSACTIONS, or transfer them to
your billing computer, according to your usual procedure.
After the transactions are securely recorded for billing or accounting purposes, use the
command RESET TRANSACTION to make room in memory for additional transactions.
XPE PC-SCIII Interface V#.# Started
Boot message that the SC#.EXE interface program has started.
PC Not Responding
The site is running but not getting a response from the PC through the SC3.EXE program.
Check the PC. May see this on startup. Site must still open.
PC Responding
Site is communicating with the PC.
No action is required.
Product #XX Name Below Reorder Level
The product inventory of the indicated product is below the reorder level configured with the
LOAD INVENTORY command.
Follow your companys procedures for reordering products.
Pump #X Disabled
The indicated pump has been disabled by the command DISABLE PUMP.
No action is required. Return the pump to operation with the command ENABLE PUMP
when appropriate.
Pump #X Disabled, No Quantity
The indicated pump has been disabled because the SC III has received too many
zero-quantity transactions from that pump.
A zero-quantity transaction is one in which the pump is activated but no fuel is pumped. The
SC III will automatically disable any pump that exceeds a certain number (set in SYS_PAR)
of zero-quantity transactions. This is a precaution against pump pulser (flow sensor) or pulser
cable failure.
Check the pump no-quantity transaction (NQN) count in the diagnostics printout, using the
command PRINT DIAGNOSTICS 8. If there are several NQNs, try to determine the cause or
consult your service representative.
If a pulser unit or attached cables have failed, fuel can flow until the pump times out, but no
gallons or dollars will be recorded.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page D-9
Messages on the Log Printer Status and Error Messages
To re-enable a pump that has been disabled because of too many zero-quantity transactions,
after first identifying and correcting the cause, type the command ENABLE PUMP.
To reset the NQN counters for all pumps back to zero, give the command ENABLE PUMP;I.
Wait until no fuel transactions are in progress.
Pump #X Disabled, No Price
The SC III has disabled the pump because no price or price code has been assigned for that
pump.
Use PRINT PUMP to determine if a price code has been assigned to the pump. If one has, then
use PRINT PRICE to see if a price has been assigned to that code for level 0 and for the level
for each method of payment that is accepted. If a price is missing for that code or for some
required level, use LOAD PRICE to load it.
If no price code has been assigned to the hose, then use LOAD FUEL to assign a price code to
the pump. (Some sites may choose to assign a product that has a price to the pump instead of a
price code, if multi-level prices for cash, credit, etc., are not required.)
Pump #X Enabled
The indicated pump is operating normally.
No action is required.
Pump Control Unit #X Came Up
The indicated pump control unit is now functioning properly.
No action is required.
Pump Control Unit #X Disabled
The indicated pump control unit has been disabled by the command DISABLE PCU.
No action is required. Use the command ENABLE PCU to return the pump control unit to
operation, when appropriate.
Pump Control Unit #X Down, Bad Memory
The indicated pump control unit is not functioning because of a memory failure.
Call your service representative.
Pump Control Unit #X Found Unassigned Transaction
The SC III received unexpected information from the indicated pump control unit. This is
recorded as an unpaid transaction.
Status and Error Messages Messages on the Log Printer
Page D-10 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
You will require to determine whether the information recorded as an unassigned transaction
really is a CFN sale that is not recorded anywhere else, or a duplicate of an already recorded
sale, or a transaction that was accomplished and recorded manually.
First, locate the unassigned transaction(s) in the log printout. Watch for Unassigned in the
ERROR column. Unassigned transactions look like proprietary-card transactions with no card
or account number, but in fact may have used any method of payment.
Compare any unassigned transactions found to adjacent normal transactions with respect to
time and quantity. Try to determine whether the unassigned transactions are duplicates of
other normal transactions, or really represent new transactions.
This is a potentially serious error. Call your service representative.
Pump Control Unit #X Went Down
The indicated pump control unit is not functioning.
Try to return the unit to operation with the command ENABLE PCU.
If that does not work, execute the command PRINT DIAGNOSTICS and report the results to
your service representative.
Remote Command: command
Applies only if the logging of remote commands is selected in configuration (system
parameters).
The command was executed by a remote user.
Command can be any command listed in HELP.
Options and data typed by the remote user are not shown.
Remote Verification Did Not Respond
An attempt to verify a card on the remote host was unsuccessful.
Check modem, cable, and switch settings. Contact your service representative or
communications network representative.
SC III Vx (HHMM/MMDDYY) Router:r_name, Handler:h_name Day MM/DD/YY
HH:MM AM/PM
Boot message. Gives the version of the site and the date the version was created, what bank
card router and handler are installed, and the current date and time.
Tank #X Below Reorder Level
The indicated tank is below the reorder level entered with LOAD TANK.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page D-11
Messages in the Transaction Printout Status and Error Messages
Tank #X Fuel Leak
Applies only to systems connected to tank level monitors.
The tank level monitor has detected a decrease in level when in tank testing mode that could
indicate a leak.
Consult tank level monitor documentation for additional steps to take to confirm or refute
this measurement.
Leaking underground tanks can create serious environmental and health hazards.
Tank #X Probe Error
Applies only to systems connected to tank level monitors.
The tank level monitor reports trouble with probe.
Consult tank level monitor documentation.
Tank #X Excess Water
The tank level monitor reports excess water in the indicated tank.
Use the tank stick and water-detecting paste to confirm measurement. If no water is found,
consult the manual of the tank level monitor for possible causes of erroneous water readings.
Tank #X YYY Gal Delivery
The tank level monitor reports delivery of YYY gallons of product.
No action is required unless the delivery does not match scheduled deliveries.
Warm Boot
Appears on log printout when the CFN3 operating system has been reset.
Usually, no action is required. If the site was stopped before rebooting, you will require to
type a RUN command.
Messages in the Transaction Printout
The following messages may be printed in the error/status column of the transaction printout.
error #
The pump control unit sent an error code that the SC III did not recognize. Report the
problem to your service representative.
Status and Error Messages Messages in the Transaction Printout
Page D-12 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Aborted
The transaction was terminated before it was completed.
Limit
A customer pumped the maximum amount of fuel authorized.
Mem Lost
The SC III could not get the information that it expected for this transaction from the pump
control unit that the transaction was assigned to.
Pwr Fail
The transaction was terminated when a power failure occurred at the pump control unit.
Payout
The transaction was a pay out. The amount is positive, but is not included in the total of
PRINT TRANSACTION.
Prod Out
Product is out of stock.
Pump Down
A pump is down.
Refund
The transaction was a refund. Dollar total is negative.
Return
Transaction was a return. Dollar total is negative.
Reversal
Transaction was reversed. Dollar and quantity total is negative. There must be a completed
transaction that matches the reversal.
Timed Out
The customer did not pick up the hose in the allotted time; or the customer did not start
pumping fuel in time after picking up the hose; or the customer stopped pumping and did not
resume pumping in the allotted time.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page D-13
Messages in Command Mode Status and Error Messages
Unassigned
The SC III did not expect this transaction from this pump. If pumps were reassigned during
the transaction, this transaction will be accompanied by a transaction with the message MEM
LOST. See the error message Pump control unit #X found unassigned transaction.
Withdrawal
Transaction was a withdrawal.
Messages in Command Mode
The following messages may be printed in response to commands entered by the user.
Already exists
You are trying to load a price code, product, or other data element that is already on file.
Look up the ;I option of the command to see if it is appropriate for what you want to do.
Bad Data Input
You entered a string that contained invalid characters or data that was outside the acceptable
range.
Check data and retype.
BAD MESS
This message stands for bad message. It indicates that a program error has occurred.
Call your service representative.
Cant activate
You tried to activate a pump with the command ACTIVATE PUMP, but the action was
terminated because of an errorsuch as no price loadedor because the pump was already
in use.
Cant open file
You tried to create a file on a non-existent directory or disk drive, or with an illegal name, or
the disk is full.
Check the path, the file names, and the disk used with the command.
Status and Error Messages Messages in Command Mode
Page D-14 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Cannot run program
You do not have a high enough permission level to execute the command you just entered.
Use the manager or supervisor key, if available, or get user with higher permission level to run
the command.
Card is not valid
You tried to lock out a card with the command LOCK CARD, but it was already locked out or
it was outside acceptable range.
You have limited lockout and tried to unlock an account number that matches a wildcard
number that is locked out.
You used CHECK CARD and the card number you entered was found to be not valid.
Card is valid
You tried to unlock a card with the command UNLOCK CARD, but it was already unlocked.
You have limited lockout and tried to lock out an account number that matches a wildcard
number that is unlocked.
You used CHECK CARD and the card number you entered was found to be valid.
Command failed
The command was unable to complete the requested action.
Device out of service
You tried to activate a pump with the command ACTIVATE PUMP, but the pump was not in
service.
Does not exist
You tried to execute a command, such as an enable or disable command, for a device that does
not exist.
You tried to execute a command for a product that does not exist.
Error loading program
Try to load the program again. If the message appears again, call your service representative.
Invalid option
You tried to use an option with a command that does not take that option.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page D-15
Messages in Command Mode Status and Error Messages
Manager key required
Need user with higher permission level to sign on and run the command.
No more file space
There is no room in a file for information you are trying to add. For example, this message is
printed if you try to add too many island card reader messages.
You are adding rows to a table that is full.
Delete some rows, or if required and if enough space is available, reconfigure the system with
a larger table size.
Permission denied
Your permission level is not high enough to execute the command you just entered.
Insert the manager key in the console on this site, sign on as a user with a higher permission
level, or have another user with a higher permission level sign on to execute the command.
Program checksum error
Try the command again.
If the message persists, use a backup copy of the program.
Pump deactivated
You deactivated a pump with the command DEACTIVATE PUMP.
Pump is not on
You tried to deactivate a pump that was not pumping.
Pump is ready
You activated a pump with the command ACTIVATE PUMP.
Site is stopped
Operations are suspended at the site.
No transactions are in progress.
Use RUN to resume operation.
Some valid, some not
You have limited lockout and used wildcard numbers with the command CHECK CARD,
LOCK CARD, or UNLOCK CARD, but there was not an exact match.
Status and Error Messages Messages in Command Mode
Page D-16 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
String too long
This is a software error.
Contact your service representative.
Transactions in progress
You tried to execute a command that cannot be executed when a transaction is in progress.
Unknown command
You have tried to enter a command that does not exist; your mistake is possibly just a
typographical error.
If you are trying to execute a command file or a disk-based command, the correct disk may not
be inserted, (must use full path name for file on floppy or on hard disk not in SC3 or SC3\BIN
directories) or you may be in the wrong directory.
Use the DIRECTORY command to list the current directory.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page E-1
Customer Diskette Files on the Hard Disk
Appendix E: Files on the Hard Disk
The following table lists the files on the SC III. These files are installed on your hard disk. The
CFN3 software is distributed on a 3.5-inch floppy diskette labeled Customer Disk, and a CD
ROM. If you have a network router, such as Buypass or VisaNet, for credit and debit card
verification, the router software is included on the Customer disk.
Note: The distributed files change occasionally, so this appendix may not be completely
up-to-date. However, most of the files on the diskettes are described here.
Customer Diskette
Root Directory: Operating System
Root Directory Definition
FRAMOS.BIN The CFN3 operating system program.
FRAMOS.CFG The CFN3 configuration file
(not shipped with updates).
SC III Root (C:\SC3) Directory
Root Directory Definition
CRASH.DOC Warning message printed by CRASH.CMD in the event of an
operating system crash. May be edited.
SYSBACK.DTA Created by SYSBACK.CMD. Stores backup copy of system data.
TRANBACK.DTA Created by TRANBACK.CMD. Stores backup copy of transactions.
Files on the Hard Disk Customer Diskette
Page E-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
SC3\BIN Directory: Disk-based Commands and Command Files
Disk-based Command Files
Commands Description
ADMPASS.BIN Setup and control user access to the system.
BACKTRAN.BIN Backs up transactions only.
BLEND.BIN If you have blenders, produces a report on blended product.
BUFFERS.BIN Displays buffer usage.
CHKDSK.BIN Checks and repairs disk directory.
CONSOLE.BIN Console configuration program.
DUMP.BIN Allows technician to print areas of memory.
EJ _AUTH.BIN Sets authorization codes for E.J . Ward cards.
FIND.BIN Looks for string in text file.
FRED.BIN Full screen text editor.
FUELER.BIN Program to set the fueler ID for a cluster with Fueler ID.
FUELPT.BIN Fuel Point configuration program.
GATE.BIN Gate controller configuration program.
KERMIT.BIN Send or receive file from another computer.
LOOKUP.BIN Part of the Fleet Options package. The Lookup program lets you
quickly set up accounts for customers.
OFFROAD.BIN Discount for selling off-road fuel.
PASWD.BIN Set up the password for users to access the system.
PERM.BIN Set permission levels of system commands.
PRODMRG.BIN Merge information for downloading to the Profit Point.
PUMP.BIN Pump configuration program.
RCP.BIN Copy directory and subdirectories.
RDEL.BIN Deletes a directory and all subdirectories under it.
Ensure that you know what you are doing when you use
this command.
CAUTION
READER.BIN Island card reader configuration program.
RESTORE.BIN Restore backed-up system tables and transaction data.
SECURITY.BIN Set up and control the keys required for system security.
SET_PERM.BIN Set permission levels of disk-based commands.
STATUS.BIN Display system status information.
SYS_PAR.BIN System configuration program.
TABLE.BIN Table size configuration program.
TAX.BIN Tax table lookup program.
TREE.BIN Displays directory structure as a tree.
TRFMT.BIN Transaction format configuration program.
WHERE.BIN Prints the full pathname of the current directory.
WOW.BIN Display transactions in progress, history, and pump data.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page E-3
Customer Diskette Files on the Hard Disk
Miscellaneous Command Files
Commands Description
AUTOEXEC.CMD Run automatically after cold boot. Loads standard crons and copies a few CMD files
to the RAM disk.
CD.CMD An alias for the command CHD.
CONFIG.CMD Print configurations.
CRASH.CMD Command file run by cron in the event of a system crash.
EASYFAX.CMD Sample command file for sending faxes with EasyLink.
FULLSERV.CMD Put all pumps in full service.
INSTALL.CMD Hard drive installation.
MAKEPERM.CMD Reset permission levels on disk-based command to default.
OFFROAD.DTA Tax information for OFFROAD.BIN.
POS.CMD Send PRODMRG data to the Profit Point.
PURGEMEM.CMD Save transactions to disk and purge memory.
PUTPRICE.CMD Load pump prices.
REPEAT.CMD Repeat specified command every second.
RESTORE.BIN Restore selected tables to memory from applications disk file.
SECURITY.BIN Set up and control the keys required for system security.
SELFSERV.CMD Put pumps in self-service mode.
SET_PERM.BIN Set permission levels of disk-based commands.
STARTUP.CMD Sample site startup command file. May be edited for actual site.
SYSBACK.CMD Backup all tables except transactions to disk file.
TABLE.BIN Table size configuration program.
TAX.BIN Tax table lookup program.
TIMESET.CMD Call Boulder, Colorado, to set the timeclock.
TRANBACK.CMD Backup transactions to disk file.
TRANEXPT.CMD List exception events in transaction file.
TRANFULL.CMD If loaded as a special % cron, will display a warning on the reader terminal and
receipt printer #1 when transaction file reaches percentage full specified in system
parameters.
TRANHOUR.CMD Display bar graph of transactions by hour.
TREE.BIN Displays directory structure as a tree.
TRFMT.BIN Transaction format configuration program.
WHERE.BIN Prints the full pathname of the current directory.
WOW.BIN Display transactions in progress, history, and pump data.
Files on the Hard Disk Customer Diskette
Page E-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page F-1
Type of Cards Dialout Communications
Appendix F: Dialout Communications
In addition to accepting privately issued cards, the SC III can be configured to accept cards
issued by financial institutions (FI). This appendix covers card-authorization networks
supported by the CFN System.
The CFN system can handle many types of credit and Debit Cards. You must decide which
cards (if any) fit the needs of your operation and set up the required business relationships to
accept those cards profitably.
With privately issued cards you have a billing relationship directly with your customer. With
cards issued by FIs, your billing relationship is with the financial network that governs the
card and with the FI you select to do your transaction processing.
You must order your system with the particular network interface you want. Then, you require
to set up an agreement with the bank or network for the system to be able to work. The bank or
network representative will provide information on loading the system, such as phone
numbers, merchant IDs, and type of cards accepted.
The following sections cover many aspects of the system which have to be set up according to
the dictates of the network. Make sure that all aspects of the system have been set up correctly,
because sometimes the response of the network to invalid parameters can be confusing to
diagnose.
Be sure to check with your local fire marshal for approval to accept credit and Debit Cards
when the site is unattended.
Type of Cards
Cards issued by FIs fall into two, occasionally overlapping, categories:
Debit cards electronically move the customers funds from a checking or savings account
to pay for the sale. Debit cards are also used in automatic teller machines at banks and
thrifts, and they are usually issued only by banks and savings and loan associations.
Credit cards obligate the customer to pay the issuing financial institution (issuer) the
amount of the sale. The FI that does your processing pays you, and the issuing financial
institution pays your FI.
Familiar examples of Credit Cards are MasterCard, VISA, and American Express. MasterCard
and VISA are issued by banks that are participating members in those credit organizations,
when American Express (issued by American Express) and Discover (issued by Sears
Financial Services) are issued by non-banks.
Credit cards may sometimes be used to initiate debit transactions, provided that the customer
enters a PIN (Personal Identification Number) at the time of sale. Less frequently, Debit Cards
may bear VISA or MasterCard symbols so that they may be used as Credit Cards.
Dialout Communications Credit Card Numbering
Page F-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Credit Card Numbering
Credit Cards are identified by the account number prefix (the first digit or digits) and the
number of digits in the account number. For example, VISA credit card account numbers all
start with 4, and they have either 13- or 16-digits.
However, electronic card readers cannot always distinguish a cards type (for example, Credit
Card, Phone Card, Library Card, or Video Rental Card) just by that cards magnetically
encoded number. And some of these other special purpose cards, which you certainly do not
want to accept for payment, may even have the same encoded numbers as valid Credit Cards.
Confusion can even occur between different types of Credit Cards.
Consult your bank or card network for current information about the account number prefix
and length.
Handling Transactions
Accepting debit or Credit Cards in transactions usually consists of three parts: authorization
(called verification by Gasboy), data capture, and settlement.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page F-3
Handling Transactions Dialout Communications
Authorization (verification)
Command Description
No verification This method is not recommended, due to the financial risk
involved.) No checking - except for the mod 10 check digit,
and then only if so configured - is done on the status of the
card.
Local lockout (This method is not recommended, due to the financial risk
involved.)
Credit and Debit Cards are verified in the same ways as
privately issued cards, through the CFN IIIs lockout
options (which are described in the Card Lockout chapter
of the System Administrators Manual for version 1.0 and
in Proprietary Cards on page 13-1). Do not use local
authorization for debit card transactions, since the bank
that issued the card must be contacted to check the PIN
that the customer entered.
Only limited lockout is appropriate for local authorization of
Credit Cards. (Bit-mapping is used only for private-issue
cards; you cannot have both limited and bit-mapped lockout).
You must set up the local lockout file to include
information about the ranges of card numbers you want
to accept. You can also specify certain card numbers as
valid or invalid.
Remote verification through
dial-up
Usually the site is configured to place a telephone call to a
local number. The site signs on to the communications
network using an account name and password provided by
the card network and then requests authorization for the
requested sale amount. If there is a sufficient account
balance (for Debit Cards) or line of credit (for Credit Cards) to
cover the sale, the transaction is approved and the balance is
adjusted. The authorizer assigns the transaction an approval
number, which is your proof that the transaction was
approved. If the card is not valid or if it does not have funds or
a line of credit to cover the transaction amount, the sale is
denied.
If you do remote verifications through dial-out, you will
require a phone modem dedicated to this purpose (in
addition to the modem you use for polling, if any).
Remote verification through
leased line
This type of authorization is the same as remote verification
by dial-up, except that the transaction is sent over a
dedicated communications line to the network node. You can
configure the SC III to do both local and remote verification.
In that case, the cards will be verified locally only if the
remote verification cannot be completed after several tries.
This may happen if the network is down or busy.
Data Capture
As the sale is completed, the CFN3 application records data about the sale: time, date,
product, price, quantity, and amount. It stores this information in a file for later
transmission to the financial network at settlement.
The CFN3 application cannot capture any data embossed on the card, nor can it obtain the
customers name and address from the transaction information. Your attendant will have
to collect this information if you want it for your records.
For sales approved inside, you must get a signature on a receipt.
Dialout Communications Card Networks Certifying CFN III
Page F-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Settlement
For most networks, the CFN3 application must contact the financial network at least once a
day to reconcile the credit and debit card transactions it has captured and stored. The network
may generate a settlement report containing total dollars for the batch of transactions and
transmit this report to the CFN3 application. The report may be used for reconciliation with
the totals on the CFN3 application. For the total to balance, settlement must occur at shift
break or the end-of-day break.
The form of the settlement report is defined by the network and varies from one network to
another. Refer to the specific Debit/Credit manual for details about your networks settlement
report.
Card Networks Certifying CFN III
You can connect to any one of the financial networks that have certified the CFN III.
As used in this appendix, Proprietary Cards refer to cards issued by a financial network; this
does not include Credit Cards. Club cards are issued by Gasboy sites themselves.
Most card networks require that you display card logos to inform the customer that those cards
are accepted at your site.
The following table summarizes the networks that have certified the CFN III and the card
types accepted.
Card Types Accepted Network Interface
B
u
y
p
a
s
s
N
B
S

G
L
3
P
a
y
m
e
n
t
e
c
h

American Express x x x
Discover x x x
MasterCard x x x
VISA x x x
Debit Cards x x
Buypass Fleet x
Cenex
SM
Prepaid x
Cenex Credit x
Fleet One x
Fuel 24 x
Fuelman Plus x x
Gascard Access x x
General SVS Prepaid x
GoGas Prepaid x
Gulf x
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page F-5
Modems Dialout Communications
Upper Case Error Messages
All error messages from the networks are in upper casecapitalletters. When you see
such a message, you must contact your networks help desk, not a Gasboy service
representative.
Modems
When the CFN3 application dials out to a network for card authorization a sequence of
modem events occurs during the dial session. This section is a quick primer on how the
CFN3 application interacts with a dial-up modem and how to debug problems with network
connections.
J CB x x
Kwik Trip Credit x
Kwik Trip Fleet x
Kwik Trip Prepaid x
MasterCard Fleet x x x
Quarles x
Sinclair Retail x
Sinclair Driver ThankYou x
Sinclair Prepaid x
Stored Value x
VISA Fleet x x x
Voyager x x x
Wright Express x x x
Card Types Accepted Network Interface
B
u
y
p
a
s
s
N
B
S

G
L
3
P
a
y
m
e
n
t
e
c
h

Dialout Communications Modems

Page F-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
The modem example given here is a Hayes 2400 Smartmodem. Most Hayes compatible
modems have similar features. Figure F-1 shows the indicator lights on the modem. These are
used to diagnose problems in communications.
Figure F-1: Indicator Lights on Hayes 2400 Smartmodem
HS AA CD OH RD SD TR MR
After the CFN3 application has initialized the modem, only the TR (Data Terminal Ready)
and MR (Modem Ready) lights must be on steadily if the modem cable has no bad
connections at this point.
An on light is shown in lowercase letters. Figure F-2 shows how the modem looks when the
site first reboots and before the network handler task initializes the modem.
Figure F-2: Indicator Lights on Modem - aa, tr, mr On

HS aa CD OH RD SD tr mr
When the CFN3 application initializes the modem, the SD (Send Data) and RD (Read Data)
lights must flicker. These indicate when data is being sent or received by the site.
After the modem is initialized, the lights must look as in Figure F-3. Every few seconds, the
RD and SD lights must flicker. If this is not happening, the network software may not have
been initialized and the network handler is stopped until this step is done. Refer to the
specific Debit/Credit manual for setup information for your router.
If the AA (Auto-Answer) light is on, the modem has not been initialized for network
communications. Also, check the port setup. The host modem might be connected to the
remote CFN port.
Figure F-3: Indicator Lights on Modem - hs, tr, mr On

hs AA CD OH RD SD tr mr
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Page F-7
Modems Dialout Communications
When the network software is set up and running, the RD and SD lights flicker every few
seconds. When an authorization is attempted, if the speaker is on you must hear tones
indicating the modem has been given a number to dial. The OH (Off-Hook) light must go on
(see Figure F-4).
Figure F-4: Indicator Lights on Modem - hs, oh, tr, mr On

hs AA CD oh RD SD tr mr
If a good connection is made, the CD (Carrier Detect) light will go on.
Most networks have a setup time called Carrier Wait Timeout. If this is set too short, the site
will hang up before carrier is detected, which must take less than 20 seconds. Twenty seconds
is the default setting. If the CD light as shown Figure F-5 does not come on, set this parameter to
a larger value and try it again. The modem may be slow in matching the carrier signal with the
host on the other end. If you listen to the modem, you will hear a digital tone; when the tone
shifts, the modem is attempting to sync up with the host. If a carrier signal is detected by both,
the light goes on.
New modems with 14400 and 28000 baud speeds may take several seconds as they down
shift, trying to match the host modems which typically run at 1200 and 2400 baud. This is
why GASBOY recommends a Hayes 2400 baud modem, even a used one. The connections
will be faster.
Figure F-5: Indicator Lights on Modem - hs, cd, oh, tr, mr On

hs AA cd oh RD SD tr mr
At this point, the CFN3 application waits for a signal from the host computer. You must see the
RD and SD lights flicker as data is sent back and forth. At the end of the call, the CFN3
application hangs up the modem. OH must go off and the modem must look again as in
Figure F-3 on page F-6.
Troubleshooting - Quick Diagnostic Checks
No Indicators Lit on the Modem
When the indicator lights are not lit on the modem, proceed as follows:
1 Check power to the modem. At the least, the MR light must be on.
2 Check the cable and the cable connectors.
Only the MR Light is On
Check the cable and the cable connectors.
Dialout Communications Modems
Page F-8 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
No Tones Produced When You Swipe a Card
If there is no tone produced when swiping a card, proceed as follows:
1 Check the phone numbers.
2 Make sure that the system parameters on page 4 and 5 of SYS_PAR have Remote
Authorization set to Credit.
3 Try cycling power to reset the modem.
No Connection
If there is no connection, proceed as follows:
1 Do you require to dial 9 first? Add a 9 and a comma (9,) to the front of the phone number or
check to see what the outside line command is.
2 Another method is to run Kermit on the site.
If the host port is 4, type
kermit 1200 l4 (note: that is L4, not fourteen)
Then type AT and press Enter. You must get 0 or OK back.
Now type ATDT 15551212, substituting the host number for the 555 number shown.
After the modem dials, type
AH0 (note: that is a zero)
to hang up the line. If the modem dials out, recheck the phone number, and ensure that the
network is set up properly.
Enter Shift Ctrl 6 and press Enter to leave Kermit.
Bad Connections with a 950 Number
There must be a backup 800 number. Put it in as the main phone number and see if a better
connection with the host results.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Glossary-1
Glossary
Glossary
Account Number
Account number in CFN documentation refers to the entire customer-information field of a
Proprietary Card or the account-number field of a bank card. For Proprietary Cards, the
account-number field is usually divided into sub-fields that may include a card number,
vehicle number, employee number, customer account number, or other fields. Although it
may seem confusing to call the entire field the account number when it can contain a
sub-field called account number, this terminology conforms with the Track II Standard as
defined by the American Banking Association. Refer to Card Number also.
Account Number Lockout
Refer to Limited Lockout.
Activate
Pump must be activated before a customer can pump fuel. A console user can active a pump
by selecting the pump with the pump number key, accepting payment (for prepaid sales
only), and pressing the START key. A customer can activate a pump from the island card
reader by entering a valid card and keying in the required information, including the pump
number. The Site Controller command ACTIVATE PUMP also activates a pump for one
transaction. A pump in full-serve mode is always active. ACTIVATE is also used to activate
a gate using the command ACTIVATE GATE.
Allocation, Fuel
Quantities or dollar amounts of fuel can be allocated to totalizers for each allocation number.
When a card with an allocation number pumps fuel, the totalizer for that allocation number is
decremented. When the totalizer is zero, cards with that allocation number cannot access
fuel.
Alphanumeric
Consisting of characters of the alphabet and numbers. An alphanumeric display can display
letters and numbers, and usually other characters such as punctuation.
Application
A computer program designed to solve a specific problem. PC Site control is an application
program.
ASCII
Pronounced as askee. An acronym for American Standard Code for Information
Interchange. A standard 8-bit code used by the CFN System and many other computers. An
ASCII character is a character encoded in ASCII. An ASCII file is a file made of ASCII
characters.
Glossary
Glossary-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Approved
A transaction is approved when the customers card has been authorized for use at that site (if
it is a Prepaid Card sale), a pump has been reserved, and all other conditions have been met so
pumping can start
Authorization
Authorization refers to bank or club-card transactions. The steps required for card
authorization depend on the type of card used and the system configuration. Authorization
may include checking the local lockout file, the card expiration date, and the customers PIN,
and getting approval from a bank network.
Backup
An extra copy of information stored on a disk as a precaution against damaging the original. It
is a good idea to make a backup copy of your transaction records. On the Site Controller, you
can back up transaction and other data to a floppy disk.
Batch
To group a set of commands and data to be executed together. On the Site Controller, you can
create BATCH FILES (files with .CMD extensions) for the Site Controller to execute. When
you enter commands as a batch file, all the commands are executed before you see a new
prompt.
Batch File
A file that contains commands and their data, which can be executed as a group. Refer to
Command File.
Baud
A measure of the rate data is transmitted, expressed in bits per second.
Bit
An abbreviation for binary digit, the smallest unit of information in a computer. A bit can have
a value of either 0 or 1.
Bit-mapped Lockout
Uses less memory but is less flexible than Limited Lockout. Bit-mapped lockout can be
used with privately issued cards. The number used for lockout can be up to eight digits long.
Same as Card Number Lockout.
Boot
To start or restart the operating system of a Site Controller restoring power after a power
failure.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Glossary-3
Glossary
Browser
Short for Web browser, a software application used to locate and display Web pages. Graphical
browsers can display graphics as well as text. In addition, most modern browsers can present
multimedia information, including sound and video. Text browsers display only text, no
images.
Buffer
A temporary data-storage location for information.
Bug
An error in a program.
Byte
The storage space required for one character of information. In the CFN System, a byte is 8
bits.
Cable
A group of plastic-encased wires with a connector on each end, used to connect one electronic
device to another.
Card Number
For CFN System Proprietary Cards, the sub-field of the account number used for bit-mapped
lockout.
Card Number Lockout
See Bit-mapped Lockout.
Cathode Ray Tube
A vacuum tube resembling a television screen, used as a display device. Also refers to a
terminal with a CRT display.
CD-ROM
A compact disk, read-only memory. A form of storage characterized by high capacity (roughly
600 megabytes) and the use of laser optics rather than magnetic means for reading data.
Central Processing Unit (CPU)
The computers brain, comprising all the required circuits for handling information or
instructions.
CFN3
The software application running on the Site Controller III unit. The application includes
commands, windows, and icons.
Glossary
Glossary-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
CFN III
The POS system consisting of Site Controller, Islander, Profit Point, Distribution Boxes, and
peripherals. Also refer to Site Controller and System.
Character
Any letter, digit, punctuation mark, or symbol (usually represented by a unique binary code
consisting of 8 bits). Also refer toControl Character.
Club Card
Same as Proprietary Card.
Command
A direct instruction to the CFN Site Controller or console that is carried out immediately.
Command File
A command file contains a list of Site Controller commands and data for the commands.
Command files for the SC III have the extension CMD. When you type the name of the
command file (without the extension), all the commands in it are executed.
Command Mode
When the data terminal is in command mode, it will accept user commands.
Configuration
The configuration for a CFN site refers to the hardware and software options that were
selected for that site.
Control Character
Character obtained by holding down the key marked CONTROL or ^when pressing another
key on the keyboard.
CPU
Refer to Central Processing Unit (CPU).
Crash
When the Site Controller cannot complete or restart a program as the result of a hardware or
software malfunction.
Cron
A user-defined command file or command that is to be executed at a specific time or event.
Cron is short for chronological.
CRT
Refer to Cathode Ray Tube.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Glossary-5
Glossary
Current Sale
The POS console can keep track of two sales for each pump. The current sale for a pump is
the sale that is displayed when you first press a Pn key. Also refer to Previous Sale.
Cursor
A visible mark or character (sometimes flashing) on a CRT monitor indicating where the next
character you type will appear.
Data
Information in the form of characters or words.
Database
A large, organized collection of information that can be retrieved by the Site Controller or
other computer. The transaction information is a database.
Default
The actions the CFN System automatically takes or the configurations it initially uses, unless
and until you tell it otherwise.
Department Key
The product keys on the POS console can be used for departments, such as deli, grocery, or
miscellaneous non-taxable.
Dip Switch
Stands for dual in-line package switch. DIP switches are mounted on the printed circuit
boards of some CFN System components. DIP switch settings can be changed to configure
some functions.
Directory
Files on a SC III hard disk, RAM disk, or floppy disk can be organized in directories.
Directories have been compared to drawers in a file cabinet, but a CFN3 directory can have
other directories (subdirectories) under it.
Disk
A flat circular device with a magnetic surface upon which Site Controller III programs and
data are stored. Though the disk itself is circular, it is enclosed in a square casing, so you
cannot see its circular shape.
Disk-based Command
A disk-based command is a CFN3 command that is on a hard or floppy disk instead of being
part of the Site Controllers operating system. Disk-based commands work just like other,
system-based, CFN3 commands, but the command must be on the SC IIIs hard disk (if there
is one) or a floppy disk with the command on it must be in the SC IIIs disk drive to execute
the command.
Glossary
Glossary-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Disk Drive
A device for reading and writing magnetic data on a floppy or hard disk. The SC III may
have one floppy disk drive. SC IIIs also have a hard disk drive.
Diskette
Refer to Floppy Diskette.
Disk File
A file saved on disk. It may contain text, data, batch commands, or executable programs.
Documentation
The manuals; the printed descriptions and instructions for the CFN System hardware and
software.
Dot-matrix Printer
A printer in which each character is formed from a pattern of dots made by moving pins. The
standard printers for the Site Controller I, II and III are dot-matrix printers.
Down
The condition of a CFN System or system component that is shut off or not working.
Download
To transfer data from another computer to your Site Controller.
Edit
To make changes in an established file. The CFN3 application has editorsprograms that
allow you to edit files.
Electronic Mail
Computer messages sent from one user to another. You can send mail from one SC III to
another, and have it print on the log printer, if required. Also known as E-mail or e-mail.
Enter Key
The key on the console that you press to complete a numeric entry. On some computer
keyboards, the key is called Return instead of Enter.
Execute
To carry out or perform an operation. When you type the name of a command at the prompt
and press Enter, you are telling the Site Controller to execute that command.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Glossary-7
Glossary
Fallback Price
One price level (usually level 0) is designated as the fallback price level. The fallback price
level is used if prices for other price levels have not been entered, or if another price level has
not been selected for the sale yet. The fallback price is the price loaded for the fallback price
level.
Field
One piece of information from a record. For example, the transaction number and the account
number are fields in the transaction record. Also refer to Record.
File
Related information treated as a unit and stored on a disk for the SC III. Data for pumps,
tanks, totals, and so on is stored in special files. On the SC III, it is called Table. Also refer
to User File, Command File, and Disk File.
Fill
A sale is approved for a fill if an amount is not specified before authorization is requested.
The amount of a fill depends on the various limits in effect for that sale.
Floppy Diskette
A circular plastic storage medium that is soft, flexible, and permanently enclosed in a square,
rigid, plastic protective sleeve. Information is stored and retrieved on the smooth magnetic
surface of the disk by a head similar to those used in tape recorders. SC III uses 3.5-inch
floppy disks.
Fuel Point Reader
Optional program and hardware for automated fleet fueling. Prevents unauthorized
dispensing when automatically recording vehicle information.
Graphical User Interface
A program interface that takes advantage of the computer's graphics capabilities to make the
program easier to use.
GUI
Refer to Graphical User Interface. Pronounced goo-ee.
Hard Disk
A disk that is similar to a floppy disk, but rigid and built into its computer. All SC IIIs have
hard disks.
Hardware
The physical equipment that makes up a computer system.
Glossary
Glossary-8 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Host
The computer that your Site Controller may be connected to. The host can be at a remote
location with the connection over a direct connect or dial-up phone line, or the host can be at
the same location as the Site Controller with the connection made by only a cable.
HTML
Short for Hypertext Markup Language, the authoring language used to create documents on
the World Wide Web. Gasboys Online documentation uses HTML.
ID Number
See User ID.
Input
Data for a Site Controller command.
Intelligent Modem
A modem that, among other things, is able to dial and answer your phone. Hayes
Smartmodem, used with the CFN System for dial-out and dial-in, is an intelligent modem.
Interactive
When you enter commands interactively, you type each command in response to the prompt,
the Site Controller executes the command, and then gives you a new prompt. Refer to
Batch.
Interface
Anything connecting two or more electronic devices together.
Internet
A global web connecting more than a million computers.
Internet Service Provider (ISP)
A company that provides access to the Internet. For a monthly fee, the service provider gives
you a software package, user name, password and access phone number. Equipped with a
modem, you can then log on to the Internet and browse the World Wide Web, and send and
receive e-mail.
K
Abbreviation for kilo, meaning one thousand.
Keyboard
An input device that generates a character when you depress a key.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Glossary-9
Glossary
Keyswitch
A switch that looks like a lock and that requires a key to operate. CFN devices, such as Site
Controller IIs and POS consoles, have keyswitches that can be used to change the operating
modes of the devices. For example, the manager keyswitch on Site Controller IIs allows them
to be put into manager mode. Site Controller III has no keyswitch.
LCD
Liquid crystal display. One system for displaying characters and background on a computer
screen. The island reader terminal uses an LCD.
LED
Light-emitting diode. LEDs are used as indicators on CFN devices. Some displays use LEDs;
for example, the Site Controller status lights are LEDs.
Limited Lockout
Flexible type of card lockout. Uses more memory than Bit-mapped Lockout. Can be used
with bank cards and privately issued cards. The number used for lockout can be up to 19
digits. Same as Account Number Lockout.
Load
To enter data or cause data or programs to be read into memory.
Local
A local command means the Site Controller is accessed directly, through its data terminal or
console. Local verification means transactions are authorized by the Site Controller initiating
them, without going through a CFN network or a host system. Refer to Remote.
Log Off
Refer to Sign Off.
Log On
Refer to Sign On.
Log-printing Mode
When the data terminal is in log-printing mode, it prints transaction data when transactions
are completed, and system errors as they occur.
M
An abbreviation for mega, meaning million.
Glossary
Glossary-10 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
MPD
Multi Product Dispenser. In CFN documentation, one set of hoses (one side) of a Multi
Product Dispenser.
MPG
Miles per gallon.
Memory
A device, or series of devices, within a Site Controller capable of storing information on a
temporary or permanent basis. Floppy disks and RAM are types of memory.
Menu
A program that displays a list of options for selection by the user. Each selection leads down a
different branch of the program, which may contain more menus for further choices.
Method of Payment
How a transaction is paid. Methods of payment the CFN System allows include cash, Credit
Cards, Debit Cards, and Proprietary Cards.
Modem
An abbreviation for modulator-demodulator. A modem is a device that can send data to or
from a computer over telephone lines.
Network
A group of interconnected terminals or computer systems that exchange data electronically,
usually through telecommunications devices (such as modems). A CFN III connected to other
CFN sites and bank networks makes up a network.
Non-fuel Product
Any product that is not assigned to a pump. Motor oil, antifreeze, and grocery items are non-
fuel products, also called merchandise. The Site Controller II and III allow non-fuel products;
the Site Controller I does not.
Online
The state of being connected (usually through telephone lines) to a computer.
Operating System
A program, usually built into the computer, that controls the operation of the computer. The
Site Controller II and III operating system is FRAMOS.
Output
Results produced by a Site Controller command and usually printed on the terminal.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Glossary-11
Glossary
Parallel
Means more than one event happening at a time or occurring simultaneously. Printers and
other devices are said to be either parallel or serial. Parallel means the device is capable of
receiving more than one bit at a time (that is, it receives several bits in parallel). Most printers
are parallel.
Parallel Port
A parallel interface for connecting an external device such as a printer. Most personal
computers have both a parallel port and at least one serial port. On PCs, the parallel port uses a
25-pin connector (type DB-25) and is used almost exclusively to connect printers.
Pathname
The path that leads to a file, including the drive name, directory, and any applicable
subdirectories, where the file is located.
Pn KEY
In CFN documentation, this symbol represents one of the pump-select keys on a POS console.
PCU
Pump control unit. A device that controls one or more pumps.
PIN
Personal identification number. A PIN is required at some sites for bank cards or Proprietary
Cards. If a PIN is required to use a card, the customer must enter a correct PIN on the POS
console PIN pad or the island card reader keypad.
Port
A place where the connection is made between the Site Controller and other devices. What
you plug a Cable into.
Postpay
To pay for a sale after fuel is pumped. The POS console can start postpay sales if the site is
configured to allow postpay sales. Also refer to Prepay.
PPP
Short for Point-to-Point Protocol, an Internet standards for transmitting Internet Protocol (IP)
packets over serial lines (phone lines). Internet information is packaged into IP packets, a
method for enclosing data into small, transmittable units (wrapped up on one end, unbundled
on the other). A service provider might offer PPP, SLIP, or both. Your computer must use
connection software (usually provided by the service provider) that matches the protocol of
the server's connection software. PPP is a more recent and robust protocol than SLIP.
Prepay
To pay for a sale before fuel is pumped. Sales started from the island card reader are always
prepaid. Sales started from the POS console can be prepay or postpay sales. Also refer to
Postpay.
Glossary
Glossary-12 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Preset
A preset sale is one where a specific dollar amount or volume is requested before pumping
starts. Both prepay and postpay sales can have preset amounts.
Previous Sale
The POS console can keep track of two sales for each pump. The previous sale for a pump is
the sale that is displayed when you first press the PREV key. Also refer to Current Sale.
Printed Circuit Board
A computer board that an electronic circuit has been printed or etched on.
Printer
An output device that prints data from the Site Controller.
Printout
A printed copy of the information produced by the Site Controller.
Program
A set of prepared instructions that a computer such as the Site Controller carries out in
sequence to provide a solution to a problem.
Programmable Read Only Memory
A type of read-only memory (ROM) chip that can be programmed.
PROM
Refer to Programmable Read Only Memory.
PROMPT
The character the Site Controller uses to indicate that its waiting for your response. The
prompt for the Site Controller II is the current drive letter (A, B, C, or D) followed by an
asterisk. The prompt for the Site Controller III is P. Commands that require you to enter
additional information display prompts to tell you what information to enter. The console and
island card reader also display prompts when additional information must be entered.
Proprietary Card
A magnetic strip card issued for use with a specific CFN system. Proprietary Cards must
conform to the CFN Proprietary Card format.
Pump
In CFN System documentation, one hose on a single or dual dispenser or pump, or one set of
hoses on a multi-product dispenser.
RAM
Refer to Random Access Memory on page Glossary-13.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Glossary-13
Glossary
Random Access Memory
The temporary storage device for programs and data for a computers central processing unit.
CFN System devices use battery-backed-up RAM, so the contents of the memory are
preserved even during a power failure.
Read Only Memory
Computer memory that stores information permanently and that cannot be altered by normal
operation of the computer.
Record
A collection of related information treated as a unit. For example, all the information about a
completed transaction makes one transaction record.
Remote
A remote command means the Site Controller is accessed through its remote port by a remote
host. Remote verification means transactions are authorized by a host system.
Return Key
The key that on a typewriter would actually return the carriage. On the Site Controller data
terminal it signals the end of a line or the entry of a command. Also known on some terminals
as the Enter key.
ROM
Refer to Read Only Memory.
RS-232
An industry-standard serial interface used to attach devices such as modems, printers, to your
Site Controller. A type of cable.
RS-422/485
An industry-standard serial interface used to attach reader terminals, pump control units, and
other CFN System devices to the Site Controller. A type of cable. The 422 is a single device,
the 485 a multiple device.
Run
When the Site Controller is running, it is allowing transactions. You can also runthat is,
executea program or command file.
SCSI
Abbreviation of small computer system interface. Pronounced scuzzy, SCSI is a parallel
interface standard used by Macintosh

computers, some PCs, and many UNIX

systems for
attaching peripheral devices to computers. SCSI interfaces provide for faster data
transmission rates (up to 40 megabytes per second) than standard serial and parallel ports. In
addition, you can attach many devices to a single SCSI port, so that SCSI is really an I/O bus
rather than simply an interface.
Glossary
Glossary-14 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Serial
An interface that transmits information bit-by-bit, rather than in whole bytes like a parallel
interface.
Serial Port
A port, or interface, that can be used for serial communication, in which only1 bit is
transmitted at a time. Most serial ports on personal computers conform to the RS-232C or
RS-422 standards. A serial port is a general-purpose interface that can be used for almost any
type of device, including modems, mice, and printers (although most printers are connected to
a parallel port).
Sign Off
To exit command-entry mode on the Site Controller. After you sign off, the Site Controller
will not allow you to enter commands until you sign on again.
Sign On
To enter command-entry mode. When you are signed on, the Site Controller will allow you to
enter commands. To sign on you must enter a user ID number (for the Site Controller II and
III) and a password.
Site
A complete CFN System installed at a location. Also, the business location that uses a CFN
System, such as a gasoline station or a convenience store with fuel pumps.
Site Controller
The PC that controls the CFN system. Site Controller is sometimes abbreviated according to
its version, such as SC I, SC II, and SC III. The SC III has a CFN 3 logo on the front of the
tower. Refer to CFN III and System.
SLIP
Short for Serial Line Internet Protocol, an Internet standard for transmitting Internet Protocol
(IP) packets over serial lines (phone lines). Internet information is packaged into IP packets, a
method for enclosing data into small, transmittable units (wrapped up on one end, unbundled
on the other). A service provider might offer SLIP, PPP, or both. Your computer must use
connection software (usually provided by the service provider) that matches the protocol of
the servers connection software. PPP is a more recent and robust protocol than SLIP.
String
A set of consecutive alphabetic and/or numeric characters.
System
An organized collection of hardware and software that works together. The CFN System is
made up of a Site Controller I, II or III and the devices connected to it. Refer to CFN III.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Glossary-15
Glossary
System-based Command
A command that is included within the SC IIIs operating system. This means that if you load
the operating system into the SC IIIs memory from a floppy disk, you can subsequently
remove the floppy disk containing the operating system from the floppy disk drive and still be
able to use all system-based commands. In comparison, a disk-based command requires that
the disk containing it be in the disk drive or you cannot use that command.
Syntax Error
An error in the way you entered a command or its options, if any.
Table
A collection of data organized for quick reference. The Site Controller II and III store data for
pumps, products, tanks, and so forth in tables. These are called files on the Site Controller I.
Telecommunications
The communication from one computer to another over distances, usually through a telephone
line and modems.
Terminal
A peripheral device used for input and output, usually including a keyboard and a screen
monitor or printer.
Text
Words (as opposed to graphics, programming commands, or formulas).
Upload
To enter data from your computer into another computer. For example, you could upload
transaction data from a Site Controller to another computer.
User
A person who makes use of a CFN System.
User File
Files that you or other users create. On the Site Controller II and III, user files are saved on
disk. On the Site Controller I, user files are saved in memory.
User ID
A number that when combined with a password, will allow you access to a Site Controller II
and III or console. Each user ID is assigned a permission level.
World Wide Web
A system of Internet servers that support specially formatted documents. The documents are
formatted in a language called HyperText Mark-up Language (HTML) that supports links to
other documents, as well as graphics, audio, and video files. This means you can jump from
one document to another simply by clicking on hot spots. Not all Internet servers are part of
the World Wide Web.
Glossary
Glossary-16 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
Index
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Index-1
Symbols
% variable 20-8
* prompt 3-1
* wildcard 17-2
. directory 17-3
.. directory 17-3
.BIN extension 25-4
/ (slash) 17-3
? wildcard 17-2
@N 6-1
@O 6-1
\ (backslash) 17-3
~0A control code 19-6
Numerics
14400 baud F-7
28000 baud F-7
A
A command 17-7
ACTIVATE PUMP command 26-8, 26-
9, 26-10
Activate the window 3-1
ADD ALLOCATION command 15-3
ADD DRAWER command 11-10, 11-
11
ADD INVENTORY command 7-5, 9-
6, 9-7, 9-8
ADD TANK command 7-5, 8-2
Adding
fuel products 7-1
merchandise products 9-1
merchandise-product inventory 9-7
software 1-4
to cash drawer amount 11-11
to tank inventory counters 8-1
Administrator
adding software 1-4
logon 1-4
Run command 1-4
Alert symbol 2-1
AND operator 20-3
Applications diskette E-3
Assigning
fuel limits to fuel limitation
codes 13-10
prices to hoses 8-8
product codes to authorization
codes 13-8
products to hoses 8-8
tanks to hoses 8-8
Assigning a Fueler ID 13-16
Asterisk 3-4
as first character in file 19-3
wildcard 17-2
Asterisk as first character in line 19-3
At sign (@) 21-1
Authorization (verification) F-3
Authorization codes 13-7
assigning product codes to 13-8
fuel-product codes 13-7
merchandise codes 13-7
printing code definitions 13-9
removing product codes from 13-9
AUTOEXEC.CMD file E-3
Automatic sign off 3-4
B
Backing up 16-1, 23-1
custom system 16-3
restore 16-5
system data 16-2
system files 16-3
transactions 16-4
Backslash as last character in line 19-3
BACKSPACE key 3-11, 3-12
BACKTRAN command 16-2, 16-4
BACKTRAN.BIN file E-2
BACKUP command 16-3
Back-up files 16-2
Bank host 22-2
Bank-card network router 28-1
Barricading 2-1
Battery failure 24-1
BIN extension 3-9, 17-2, 19-2, 21-1
BIN files 3-9
BLEND.BIN file E-2
Boolean options 20-3
Brackets, square
in commands 23-1
Branching in command file 20-10
Buffered totals 11-1, 11-9
Buffers
in use 25-7
types 25-7
BUFFERS command 25-7
BUFFERS.BIN file E-2
C
Cabling and wiring 1-9
see also Appendix A
CALL command 22-2
Card
authorization codes 13-7
Card lockouts
bit-mapped 13-2
bit-mapped, disk-based 13-5
checking cards status 13-5
limited 13-2, 13-3
locking out 13-6
negative 13-2, 13-4
negative, selecting 13-4
positive 13-2, 13-4
positive, selecting 13-5
printing list 13-7
unlocking 13-6
wildcards 13-3
Caret sign (^) 21-2
CASE command 20-5
Case statements in command files 20-5
Cash drawer 11-10
adding to 11-11
entering amount 11-10
printing totals 11-11
subtracting from 11-11
totals 11-1
Cash-withdrawal special product 9-2
Caution warnings 2-1
CD.CMD file E-3
Certifying CFN F-4
CFN III 3-1
cabling and wiring 1-9
see also Appendix A
command window 1-2, 3-1
commands 3-3
desktop 1-3
operation 1-3
ports 1-9
quitting 1-2
restarting 1-2
start up 1-1
system ID number 13-1
user levels 1-2
CFN III icon 1-3
CFN3
command window 1-3
Chaining command files 19-5
Chain-pumping feature 28-1
Index
Index-2 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Index
Changing
directories 17-9
disk drives 17-9
fuel price codes 8-5
fuel product information 7-3
fuel products 7-1
island card reader messages 6-5
merchandise products 9-1
merchandise-product
information 9-4
receipt heading and footing 6-3
shifts 11-12
CHDIR command 17-9
CHECK CARD command 13-3, 13-5
Checking
a diskette 17-11
cards lockout status 13-5
CHKDSK command 17-11
CHKDSK.BIN file E-2
CLOSE command 20-13
CMD extension 3-9, 17-2, 19-2, 21-1
CMD files 3-9
CMD#.VAR file 20-8
CMD1.VAR file 20-9
CMD2.VAR file 20-9
CMD3.VAR file 20-9
Command 3-3
arguments with 3-6
disk-based 3-7
EXIT 3-13
how to enter 3-5
how to verify 3-8
LO ME 6-6
LOAD DATE 3-5
PRINT DATE 3-5
redirecting input 3-10
redirecting input and output 3-9
redirecting output 3-10
SCReen 20-13
short forms 3-3
SHow 25-11
SYStem 3-13
terminating 3-12
using options with 3-6
using ranges with 3-8
Command file 19-1
branching 20-10
calling a command file 19-5
case statements 20-5
commands 19-4
comments in 19-3
contents 19-1
debugging 19-3
executed from console 19-6
exit from 19-13
extension 19-1
how to execute 19-2
log event 19-9
loops 20-4
name restrictions 19-1
output 19-2
printing output 19-8
saving output 19-7
sign on 19-7
string search 20-12
subroutines 20-10
terminal input 19-3
user input 19-5
user variables 20-7
variables 19-9
Command line 17-5
Command options 3-6
A option 3-6
C option 3-7
C option, press ENTER twice 3-8
H option 3-6
I option 3-6
L option for lines 3-6
P1 and P2 options 3-6
parameters 3-6
redirect input option 3-6
redirect output option 3-6
semicolon needed 3-6
T option 3-6
Command prompt 3-4
Command terminal 3-3
how to sign off 3-4
how to sign on 3-4
keyboard 3-3
Command window 3-3
activating 3-1
minimizing 1-2
Command-line arguments 19-11
Commands
entering devices 20-9
making your own 19-1
Commas
entering two commas to print one 3-
7
Comments in command files 19-3
CONFIG.CMD file E-3
Console 3-1
error codes 25-3, 25-4
executing command file from 19-6
CONSOLE configuration command 23-
1
CONSOLE configuration program 10-3
CONSOLE.BIN file E-2
Control characters
keyboard 3-11
Control codes 19-8
CONTROL key 3-11
COPY command 17-6
Copying
a directory 17-10
files 17-6
Crash cron entry 21-2
CRASH.CMD file E-3
CRASH.DOC E-1
Creating
directories 17-9
new fuel product 7-2
new merchandise product 9-1
Site Controller files 17-4
special merchandise products 9-2
Credit card numbering F-2
Credit cards F-1
Cron
crash 21-3
defined 21-1
permission level 21-1
program space 21-1
purpose 21-1
reboot 21-4
specified conditions 21-1
timed 21-2
transaction memory 21-4
Cron command output 21-5
redirected from log 21-5
Cron commands 21-1
entering 21-5
hyphen for redirection 21-5
removing 21-6
search path 21-5
Cron entry
crash 21-2
printing a list 21-6
reboot 21-2
timed 21-1
transaction memory 21-2
CTRL-C 3-11
CTRL-Q 3-11
CTRL-S 3-11
CTRL-X 3-11
Cumulative tax totals 10-2
Index
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Index-3
Cumulative totals 11-1
curly braces 6-4
Currency 28-1
Current day totals 11-1
Current directory 17-3
Current shift totals 11-1
Current system status 25-7
D
Daily totals 11-1
Danger warnings 2-1
Data
how to enter 3-5
restoring 16-6
Data entry
prompt 3-5
shortcut 3-8
Data transfer 22-3
Date 6-1
Day-night pricing 8-7
DEACTIVATE PUMP command 26-10
Debit cards F-1
Decimal points
displaying with p1 option 20-9
DELETE command 17-5
DELETE key 3-11
Deleting
a line 3-12
characters 3-12
fuel-product price codes 8-7
island card reader messages 6-6
receipt heading and footing 6-4
Desktop 1-2
icons 1-3
refreshing 1-6
Run command
used by Windows NT 1-4
taskbar 1-3
Diagnostic commands 25-1
Diagnostic error codes 25-2
Dial-out phone number 22-1, 22-2
DIP switch
memory A-2
settings A-2
Dipstick cards 28-1
DIRECTORY 17-8
Directory
. 17-3
.. 17-3
/ 17-3
changing 17-9
commands 17-8
copying 17-10
creating 17-9
current 17-3
files, listing 17-8
name, printing 17-10
removing 17-10
root 17-2
DIRECTORY command 17-8, 17-9
DISABLE DUMP command 19-7
DISABLE HISTORY command 25-4
DISABLE PRODUCT command 9-8
Disabling
event history 25-4
merchandise inventory tracking 9-8
redirection 19-3
Disk commands 17-11
Disk drive
changing from remote site 17-9
name of 17-3
Disk full D-6
Disk-based commands 3-7, 3-9, 21-1
Diskette
checking for errors 17-11
Diskette drive
cleaning 24-1
cleaning kit 24-1
Display multiple lines 6-4
Displaying
buffers in use 25-7
current system status 25-7
Site Controller status 25-10
Dollar totals
printing 11-7
DPT string selection 28-1
P 3-1
DUMP command 25-9
DUMP.BIN file E-2
E
EASYFAX.CMD file E-3
ECHO command 19-4, 19-6
p1 option 20-9
Echo string
more than 80 characters 19-3
editing a file 18-4
EJ _AUTH.BIN file E-2
Electrical
Shut-off 2-1
Electronic funds transfer regulation C-1
Emergency
Electrical shut-off 2-1
In Case Of 2-3
Personnel (contacting) 2-2
ENABLE DUMP command 19-2, 19-
7, 21-5
ENABLE HISTORY command 25-4
ENABLE PRODUCT command 9-1, 9-
3, 9-6, 9-7, 9-8
Enabling
event history 25-4
merchandise-product dollar
inventory 9-8
Entering
cash drawer amount 11-10
fuel-product inventory 7-5
fuel-product price codes 8-5
island card reader messages 6-4
merchandise-product inventory 9-7
merchandise-product price
lookups 9-6
multiple blocks of information 3-7
receipt heading and footing 6-1
tax accumulator names 10-2
Entering cron commands 21-5
Evacuation 2-1
Event history 25-4
disabling 25-4
enabling 25-4
printing 25-5
Exclamation mark 21-2
EXECUTE 19-13
EXECUTE command 19-12
Executing a command file 19-2
Executing command file from
console 19-6
EXIT command 19-13
Exiting from command file 19-13
Explosions
Preventing 2-1
F
Fallback price 8-4
File list
short 17-8
File system 17-2
Filename
extensions 17-2
restrictions 17-1
wildcards 17-2
Index-4 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Index
Files
copying 17-6
listing 17-9
moving between directories 17-7
on other drives 17-4
printing contents 17-5
removing 17-5
renaming 17-6
FIND command 20-12
FIND.BIN file E-2
Fires
Preventing 2-1
Fleet packages
FleetKey Option 13-16
fueler ID 13-16
Floppy diskette
formatting 17-11
FORMAT command 17-11
Formatting
floppy diskette 17-11
FRAMOS.BIN file E-1
FRAMOS.CFG file E-1
FRED screen editor 18-1, 18-4
advanced editing 18-8
appending files 18-11
changing modes 18-3
command mode 18-3
command summary 18-12
copying a line 18-8
correcting text 18-4
deleting specified lines 18-10
deleting text 18-7
deleting to a specified character 18-
11
edit mode 18-3
editing a new file 18-12
entering text 18-4
erasing work buffer 18-10
exiting 18-5
exiting without saving 18-6
insert mode 18-3
inserting text 18-7
joining 2 lines 18-7
moving cursor 18-6, 18-8, 18-9
naming files 18-5
opening a line 18-7
replacing a character 18-8
resaving files 18-5
saving files 18-5
search & replace 18-10
searching & printing a string 18-9
searching for a string 18-9
setting tab stops 18-11
splitting 2 lines 18-7
undoing changes 18-7
FRED.BIN file E-2
Fuel allocation 15-1
Fuel limitation code 13-10
assigning fuel limits to 13-10
printing 13-10
removing 13-11
Fuel Point system 28-1
Fuel product
adding 7-1
category 7-3
changing 7-1
changing information 7-3
creating 7-2
day-night pricing 8-7
deleting price codes 8-7
entering inventory 7-5
entering price codes 8-5
inventory 7-4
maximum price 7-3
minimum price 7-3
printing information 7-3
product code 7-3
product name 7-3
removing 7-4
tax code 7-3
Fuel-drop cards 28-1
Fueler ID
card format 13-16
cards 13-16
Fueler ID cards 28-1
FUELER.BIN 13-16, E-2
FUELPT.BIN file E-2
Fuel-related commands 7-1
FULLSERV command 26-9
FULLSERV.CMD file E-3
G
Gasboy login 1-3
Gate reader
interface 28-1
GATE.BIN file E-2
GOTO command 20-10
H
Handling transactions F-2
Help 3-14
HELP command 3-14
Help system 1-7
How to load messages 6-6
I
I command 17-8
Icons
CFN system 1-3
double clicking 1-3
Help 1-7
Profit Point 1-6
IF command 20-1
IF switches 20-2
Indicator lights F-6
Initializing
product information 7-2
INSTALL command 16-2
INSTALL.CMD file E-3
Internationalization
currency decimal points 20-10
Inventory
fuel product 7-4
tracking 9-8
Inventory counters
tank 8-2
Invoice Printing
how to print 27-2
Profit Point setup 27-1
requirements 27-1
setting up 27-1
IRQ switch
settings A-2
Island card reader
cleaning 24-1
display multiple lines 6-4
error codes 25-3
messages 6-4
messages, changing 6-5
messages, deleting 6-6
messages, entering 6-4
messages, printing 6-5
multiple line displays 6-5
J
J OURNAL.LOG 12-8
J umper settings A-3
K
KERMIT command 22-3
KERMIT.BIN file E-2
Keyboard
cleaning 24-2
command keys 3-3
control characters 3-11
L
Limitation code 13-10
Line breaks 19-6
Line length limitations 19-6
List of all commands 3-15
Index
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Index-5
Listing files 17-9
in directory 17-8
LOAD AUTHORIZATION
command 13-8, 13-9
LOAD CRON command 21-1, 21-5, 21-
6
LOAD CUTOFF command 8-11
LOAD DRAWER command 11-10
LOAD FUEL command 7-1, 8-4, 8-
8, 9-3, 11-3
LOAD HEADING command 6-1, 6-3
LOAD INVENTORY command 7-5, 9-
1, 9-6, 9-7, 9-8
LOAD LIMITATION code 13-11
LOAD LIMITATION command 13-10
LOAD MESSAGE command 6-4, 6-5
LOAD PHONE command 22-1
LOAD PLU command 9-1, 9-4, 9-6
use of dollar sign 9-6
LOAD PRICE command 8-4, 8-5
LOAD PRODUCT command 7-1, 7-
2, 7-3, 9-1, 9-2, 9-4, 10-1, 11-3
LOAD PUMP command 8-11
LOAD SHIFT command 11-1, 11-12
LOAD TANK command 7-1, 7-5, 8-2
LOAD TAX command 9-2, 10-2
LOAD VEHICLE command 15-7, 15-8
Loading receipt heading and footing 6-3
LOCK CARD command 13-3, 13-5, 13-
6
Locking out cards 13-6
LOCKOUT?.DTA file 13-5
LOG EVENT 19-9
LOG FILE command 3-10
LOG MESSAGE command 3-11
Log off
Administrator 1-5
Log on
Administrator 1-4
Log printer 3-2, 3-10, 19-8
Lookup
account fields 14-3
adding records 14-7
ask for $ amount 14-5
authorization code 14-4
configuration 14-17
deleting records 14-8
editing records 14-9
expiration date 14-4
global delete 14-8
limitation code 14-4
listing records 14-14
lookup number 14-1
lookup type 14-1
main menu 14-6
merging data 14-11
message 14-4
optimizing 14-18
PIN 14-4
price level 14-4
records 14-5
rejection code 14-4
require manual #14-5
require odometer 14-4
require PIN 14-5
search and replace 14-10
tender subtype 14-2
tender type 14-2
updating 14-6
LOOKUP command 14-5
Lookup program 14-1
types of accounts 14-1
LOOKUP.BIN E-2
LOOKUP.DTA file 14-5
LOOP command 20-4
Loops in command files 20-4
M
Magnetic card reader
cleaning 24-2
Maintenance 24-1
MAKEPERM.CMD file E-3
Making your own commands 19-1
Memory
contents 25-9
Memory I/O
settings A-4
Merchandise product 9-1
adding inventory 9-7
cash-withdrawal 9-2
category 9-2
changing product information 9-4
creating new 9-1
creating special 9-2
default price 9-6
disabling inventory tracking 9-8
enabling dollar inventory 9-8
entering inventory 9-7
entering price lookups 9-6
inventory 9-6
manually entered price 9-6
maximum price 9-2
minimum price 9-2
printing attributes 9-3
printing information 9-4
product code 9-1, 9-2
product name 9-2
refund special product 9-2
removing 9-5
subtracting inventory 9-7
tax code 9-2
Index-6 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Index
Message D-1, F-1, F-5
______ CTS not present D-1
______ CTS regained D-1
______ DSR not present D-1
______ table reconstruction D-1
______DSR regained D-1
Already exists D-13
Bad data input D-13
Bad mess D-13
Bank verification came up D-3
Bank verification went down D-3
Battery failed D-3
Battery ok D-3
Cant activate D-13
Cant open file D-13
Cannot run program D-14
card denied D-2
Card is not valid D-14
Card is valid D-14
Card reader terminal #came up D-3
Card reader terminal #disabled D-3
Card reader terminal #out of
paper D-3
Card reader terminal #paper low D-
3
Card reader terminal #paper ok D-4
Card reader terminal #printer
down D-4
Card reader terminal #printer
jammed D-4
Card reader terminal #printer
unjammed D-4
Card reader terminal #printer up D-
4
Card reader terminal #reader
jammed D-4
Card reader terminal #reader
unjammed D-4
Card reader terminal #went
down D-4
CFN verification came up D-5
CFN verification did not respond D-
5
CFN verification went down D-5
Check Pt/Profit Pt #came up D-5
Check PT/Profit Pt #went down D-
5
Command failed D-14
Data corrupted in table D-5
DES not ready D-6
Device out of service D-14
Diagnostics table too small D-6
Does not exist D-14
EMERGENCY STOP D-6
End EMERGENCY STOP D-6
Error loading program D-14
Fuel Point Reader #came up D-6
Fuel Point Reader #on loop #went
down D-6
Gate #came up D-7
Gate #on loop #went down D-6
Invalid option D-14
Island card reader 6-4
Island EMERGENCY STOP D-7
Island Reader Only D-7
Loop table overflow D-7
Manager key required D-15
Master key loaded D-7
Mem lost D-12
Memory available D-7
Memory full D-7
No more file space D-15
PC not responding D-8
PC responding D-8
Permission denied D-15
Product #(name) below reorder
level D-8
Program checksum error D-15
Pump #disabled D-8
Pump #disabled, no price D-9
Pump #disabled, no quantity D-8
Pump #enabled D-9
Pump contol unit #came up D-9
Pump contol unit #disabled D-9
Pump contol unit #found
unassigned transaction D-
9
Pump contol unit #went down D-10
Pump control unit #X down, bad
memory D-9
Pump deactivated D-15
Pump is not on D-15
Pump is ready D-15
Pwr fail D-12
Remote command D-10
Remote verification did not
respond D-10
SC III boot message D-10
Site is stopped D-15
Some valid, some not D-15
String too long D-16
Tank #below reorder level D-10
Tank #excess water D-11
Tank #fuel leak D-11
Tank #gal delivery D-11
Tank #probe error D-11
Timed out D-12
Transactions in progress D-16
Unknown command D-16
Warm boot D-11
Minimizing the command window 1-2
MKDIR command 17-9
Modem B-1
cabling B-1
switch settings B-1
Modem indicator lights F-6
Modems F-5
Moving files between directories 17-7
MPG system 15-5
cumulative totals, resetting 15-7
information calculation 15-7
report, printing 15-8
setting up 15-6
vehicle numbers, removing 15-8
vehicle numbers, setting up 15-7
Multiple line displays 6-5
Multi-product dispensers 8-8
N
New line 19-6
NEXT CLERK command 19-11, 20-12
NEXT DAY command 11-11, 11-13
beginning drawer balance 11-13
required hours between 11-13
NEXT SHIFT command 11-12
beginning drawer balance 11-12
required hours between 11-12
Novatronics printer 6-2
O
OFFROAD.BIN file E-2
OFFROAD.DTA file E-3
On line documentation 1-7
Operating system
Windows NT 1-1
Optical cards 28-1
Optional packages 28-1
OR operator 20-3
Output
printing 19-8
Output redirection 19-2
P
Password 3-4
Pathname 17-2, 17-3
PAUSE command 19-5, 19-6
Pausing printout 3-12
L option 3-12
Percent sign (%) 19-11, 21-2
Percent variables 19-9
PERM command 4-6
PERM configuration command 23-1
PERM.BIN file E-2
Permission level 4-6
Index
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Index-7
Permission levels 3-13
Personnel
Emergency (informing) 2-2
Phone number
auxiliary 22-2
backup 22-2
main 22-2
PJ command 12-7
Port 1-9, A-1
POS.CMD file E-3
Postpay 3-1
Prepay 3-1
Price codes 7-1, 8-3, 8-5, 8-6, 8-8
levels 8-4
Price level 0 8-4
PRINT ALLOCATION command 15-4
PRINT AUTHORIZATION
command 13-9
PRINT CRON command 21-6
PRINT DIAGNOSTICS command 25-1
PRINT DRAWER command 11-11
PRINT HEADING command 6-3
PRINT HISTORY command 25-5
PRINT LIMITATION command 13-10
PRINT LOCKOUT command 13-7
PRINT MONITOR command 25-5
PRINT PHONE command 22-2
PRINT PRICE command 8-4, 8-5
PRINT PRODUCT command 7-3, 9-
3, 9-4
printout 9-6
PRINT PUMP command 8-9, 8-10
PRINT QUANTITY command 11-
5, 11-6, 11-7
PRINT RECEIPT command 19-8, 25-
11
PRINT SALES command 10-2, 11-
2, 11-3, 11-4
PRINT SIGNON command 4-5
PRINT SUMMARY command 11-9
PRINT TANK command 8-1
PRINT TIP command 12-4
PRINT TOTALS command 11-7, 11-
8, 11-9
PRINT TRANSACTION command 12-
1, 12-2, 12-3, 12-4, 12-5, 12-6
PRINT VEHICLE command 15-8
PRINT VEHICLE printout 15-8
Printed
receipt regulations C-1
Printing
a file 3-10
a sales summary report 11-9
an invoice 27-2
authorization code definitions 13-9
card lockout list 13-7
cash drawer totals 11-11
cron entries 21-6
directory name 17-10
event history 25-5
files 17-5
fuel limitation codes 13-10
fuel-product information 7-3
island card reader messages 6-5
list of user numbers 4-5
merchandise-product attributes 9-3
merchandise-product
information 9-4
messages 3-11
output from command file 19-8
quantity and dollar totals 11-7
quantity reports 11-5
range of transactions 12-4
receipt heading and footing 6-3
sales reports 11-2
short file list 17-8
specified transactions 12-3
system diagnostics 25-1
system monitor messages 25-5
tax accumulators 10-2
transactions 12-1, 12-2
transactions in progress 12-4
Printout
pausing 3-12
pausing with L option 3-12
Private cards
allocation file 15-2
allocation numbers 15-2
allocations, changing 15-3
allocations, printing 15-4
allocations, removing 15-5
authorization code 13-1
authorization codes 13-2
codes 13-1
cumulative limits 13-2
dollar allocations 15-2
expiration date 13-1
field separator 13-1
format 13-1
fuel allocation 15-1
fuel allocation system 15-1
fuel allocations 15-2
limitation code 13-1
limitation codes 13-2
price level 13-1
restricting purchases 13-2
restriction code 13-1
volume allocations 15-2
PRODMRG.BIN file E-2
Profit Point
connecting to POS loop A-1
icon 1-6
invoice printing setup 27-2
Program space 19-1
Pump commands 8-8
PUMP configuration command 23-1
Pump control unit
error codes 25-3
testing memory of 25-11
Pump information
viewing 8-9
Pump totalizers
setting up 8-11
PUMP.BIN file E-2
Pumps
fill limit 8-11
slow-to-cutoff 8-11
totalizers 8-11
totalizers, resetting 8-11
PURGE SITE command 12-7
PURGEMEM.CMD file E-3
PUTPRICE.CMD file E-3
Q
Quantity reports 11-5
Quantity totals
printing 11-7
Question-mark wildcard 17-2
QUIT command 19-13
Quiting the CFN III application 1-2
Index-8 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Index
R
Ranges in commands 3-8
RCP command 17-10
RCP.BIN file E-2
RDEL.BIN file E-2
READER configuration command 23-1
READER.BIN file E-2
REBOOT command 21-2
Reboot cron command 21-4
Reboot cron entry 21-2
Receipt printer 19-8
testing 25-11
Receipts
changing heading and footing 6-3
customer name line 6-1
deleting heading and footing 6-4
heading and footing 6-1
no customer name line 6-1
printing heading and footing 6-3
regulation C-1
RECORD command 8-7, 17-4
Redirecting command input and
output 3-9
Redirection
options 19-2
terminating 19-7
Remote access
changing drives 17-9
EXIT 3-13
SYStem command 3-13
Remote authorizations 22-1
Remote communications 22-1
Remote host 22-2
REMOVE ALLOCATION
command 15-2, 15-5
REMOVE AUTHORIZATION
codes 13-9
REMOVE CRON command 19-13, 21-
1, 21-6
REMOVE HEADING command 6-4
REMOVE LIMITATION command 13-
11
REMOVE MESSAGE command 6-6
REMOVE PRICE command 8-7
REMOVE PRODUCT command 7-2, 7-
4, 9-1, 9-5
REMOVE VEHICLE command 15-8
Removing
a directory 17-10
cron commands 21-6
files 17-5
fuel limitation code 13-11
fuel product 7-4
merchandise products 9-5
product codes from authorization
codes 13-9
RENAME 17-7
RENAME command 17-6
Renaming files 17-6
Reports 11-1
daily totals 11-1
quantity, printing 11-5
sales summary, printing 11-9
sales totals 11-1
sales, printing 11-2
shift totals 11-1
RESET DIAGNOSTICS command 25-2
RESET PUMP command 8-11
RESET TOTALS command 10-2, 11-
1, 11-9, 11-10, 11-11
RESET TRANSACTION command 12-
5, 12-6
Resetting
pump totalizers 8-11
sales totals 11-9
system diagnostics 25-2
tax totals 10-2
transaction-begin pointer 12-5, 12-
6
transaction-begin pointer,
automatically 12-7
Restart cron command 21-3
RESTORE command 16-2, 16-5, 16-
6, 21-4
Restore from backup 16-5
RESTORE.BIN file E-2
Restoring
data 16-6
RETURN command 20-4
RMDIR command 17-10
Root directory 17-3
RS-232 cable B-4, B-5
RUN command 11-12, 21-4
RUN command used by Windows NT 1-
4
Running totals 11-1
S
Safety Information 2-1
Alert symbol 2-1
Barricading 2-1
Emergency electrical shut-off 2-1
Emergency personnel 2-2
Evacuation 2-1
NFPA regulations 2-1
Open flames 2-2
Preventing explosions and fires 2-1
Regulations 2-1
Replacement parts 2-1
Safety symbols 2-1
Shut-off 2-1
Signal words 2-1
Smoking 2-2
Sparks 2-2
Warning words 2-1
Working alone 2-2
Safety symbols 2-1
Sales reports
printing 11-2
summary 11-9
Sales totals 11-1, 11-9
Saving command file output 19-7
SC3 files 17-1
Screen editor 18-1
FRED 18-2, 18-4
SDI 28-1
Search path 19-2
Search path for cron commands 21-5
Searching for string 20-12
Selecting
negative card lockout 13-4
positive card lockout 13-5
SELFSERV command 26-9
SELFSERV.CMD file E-3
SET_PERM command 4-6, 17-7
SET_PERM.BIN file E-2, E-3
SET_VAR
international format 20-7
SET_VAR command 20-7
Setting
tank inventory counters 8-2
user variables in command files 20-
7
Settlement F-4
Shift change 11-12
day-night pricing 11-12
printing reports 11-12
Shift totals 11-1
Shifts 11-1
Shut-off 2-1
Emergency electrical 2-1
Index
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Index-9
Sign off
from a command terminal 3-4
Sign on
changing code 4-4
command file 19-7
to command terminal 3-4
Signal words
Safety 2-1
SIGNON?.CMD file 19-7
Site Controller
current status 25-7
displaying status 25-10
event history 25-4
file system 17-1
files 17-1
switches A-1
system monitoring 25-5
Site Controller files 17-4
creating 17-4
Site record 3-2
SLEEP command 19-5
Software
Run command 1-4
Sorting
transaction printout 12-2
Special card types 28-1
Specified conditions for cron 21-1
Specifying files on other drives 17-4
Star printer 6-2
Starting the Profit Point 1-6
Starting your CFN III 1-1
STARTUP.CMD file E-3
STATUS command 25-10
STATUS.BIN file E-2
STOP command 11-12
Strings 19-11
Subroutines 20-10
SUBTRACT ALLOCATION
command 15-4
SUBTRACT DRAWER command 11-
10, 11-11
SUBTRACT INVENTORY
command 7-5, 9-7
SUBTRACT TANK command 7-5, 8-2
Subtracting
cash drawer amount 11-11
merchandise-product inventory 9-7
tank inventory 8-1
Supervisor cards 28-1
SYS_PAR configuration command 23-1
SYS_PAR.BIN file E-2
SYSBACK command 10-10, 13-5, 16-2
SYSBACK.CMD file E-3
SYSBACK.DTA file 16-2, E-1
System data
backing up 16-2
System diagnostics 25-1
error codes 25-2
printing 25-1
resetting 25-2
System diskette E-1
System monitor messages 25-5
System overview 3-1
System variables 19-9
T
T option 19-3
TABLE configuration command 23-1
TABLE.BIN file E-2, E-3
Tank
setting inventory counters 8-2
Tank commands 8-1
Tank gauge interface 28-1
Tank inventory counters 8-1
Tank monitoring system 8-1
Taskbar
opening windows 1-3
start button 1-4
Windows NT 1-3
Tax accumulators 10-1
names 10-2
printing 10-2
Tax as percentage 10-3
Tax data
backing up 10-10
TAX program 10-7, 10-8, 10-9
Tax rates
percentage 10-1, 10-3
rounding boundaries 10-3
Tax tables 10-1
building 10-7
setting up 10-3
storage space 10-7
tax number 10-7
TAX.BIN file 9-2, E-2, E-3
Taxes 10-1
cumulative totals 10-2
Tender
type 14-2
Terminal
input in command file 19-3
option 19-3
Terminating redirection 19-7
TEST PCU command 25-11
Testing
pump control units memory 25-11
receipt printer 25-11
Text editor
Fred 18-1, 18-2
NotePad 18-1
Windows NT 18-1
WordPad 18-1
Time 6-1
Timed cron
commands 21-2
entry 21-1
TIMESET.CMD file E-3
Tokheim pump driver 28-1
Totals
buffered 11-1
cash drawer 11-1
dollar, printing 11-7
quantity, printing 11-7
running 11-1
sales 11-1
sales, resetting 11-9
TRANBACK command 16-2, 16-4
TRANBACK.CMD file E-3
TRANBACK.DTA file 16-2, E-1
TRANEXPT.CMD file E-3
TRANFULL.CMD file E-3
TRANHOUR.CMD file E-3
Transaction-begin pointer 12-1, 12-
5, 12-6, 12-7
resetting automatically 12-7
Transaction-memory cron command 21-
4
Transaction-memory cron entry 21-2
Transactions 12-1
backing up 16-4
file 12-5
handling F-2
in progress 12-4
logged transactions 12-1
negative numbers 12-1
printing 12-2
printing a range 12-4
printing specified types 12-3
printing transactions in progress 12-
4
printout 12-2
reports 11-1
resetting begin pointer 12-5, 12-6
sorting 12-2
TREE command 17-9
TREE.BIN file E-2, E-3
TRFMT configuration command 23-1
TRFMT.BIN file E-2, E-3
Index-10 MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
Index
Troubleshooting
Bad connections with a 950
number F-8
No connection F-8
No indicators lit on the modem F-7
No tones produced when you swipe
a card F-8
Only the MR light is on F-7
Quick diagnostic checks F-7
TYPE command 17-5
Types of cards F-1
U
Ullage 8-1
UNLOCK CARD command 13-3, 13-
4, 13-5, 13-6
Unlocking cards 13-6
Use
levels 1-2
User
Administrator 1-4
Gasboy 1-3
User ID numbers 4-1
User number 4-1
printing a list 4-5
User string variables 20-7
User variables in command files 20-7
V
Variables in command file 19-9
Verifying commands 3-8
Viewing
current tank inventory 8-1
fuel prices and price codes 8-5
pump information 8-9
W
Waiting for user input 19-5
Warning words 2-1
Warnings 2-1
WHERE command 17-10
WHERE.BIN file E-2, E-3
Wildcards 17-2
Windows NT 1-1
Windows NT Explorer 17-1
WOW command 25-7
WOW.BIN file E-2, E-3
Write-protecting diskettes 16-5
Index
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010 Index-11
This page is intentionally left blank.
2010 GASBOY
7300 West Friendly Avenue Post Office Box 22087
Greensboro, North Carolina 27420
Phone 1-800-444-5529 http://www.gasboy.com Printed in the U.S.A.
MDE-4871 CFN III Managers Manual for Windows XP Embedded - Version 3.6 August 2010
409

is a registered trademark of the Clorox Company. Amerada Hess

SM
is a service mark of Amerada Hess Corporation. American
Express

is a registered trademark of American Express Co. Amoco

is a registered trademark of Amoco Oil Company. Buypass

SM
is a
service mark of Buypass Inco Corporation. Carte Blanche
SM
is a service mark of Diners Club International Ltd. Cenex
SM
is a service mark
of Cenex Harvest States Cooperatives. CITGO

is a registered trademark of Citgo Petroleum Corporation. Coastal

is a registered
trademark of The Coastal Corporation. Comdata

is a trademark of Comdata Network Inc. Country Energy

SM
is a service mark of CHS
Inc. CRIND

and MPD

are registered trademarks of Gilbarco Inc. Diamond Shamrock

SM
is a service mark of Diamond Shamrock Refining
and Marketing Company. Diners Club
SM
is a service mark of CitiCorp Diners Club Inc. Discover
SM
is a service mark of Novus Credit
Services Inc. Fantastik

is a registered trademark of Dow Consumer Products Inc. FINA

is a registered trademark of FinaMark Inc.

Fuelman
SM
is a service mark of FleetCor Technologies Inc. Gulf

and Texaco

are registered trademarks of Chevron U.S.A. Inc. Hayes

is
a registered trademark of Zoom Telephonics Inc. JCB
SM
is a service mark of JCB Co., Ltd. Macintosh

is a registered trademark of Apple

Computer Inc. MasterCard

is a registered trademark of MasterCard International Incorporated. Excel

, MS-DOS

and Windows

are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Okidata

is a registered trademark of Oki Electric Industry Company Ltd. Paymentech

is
a trademark of Paymentech LLC. Phillips 66

is a registered trademark of ConocoPhillips Company. Procomm Plus

is a trademark of
Symantec Corporation. Quarles
SM
is a service mark of Qualres Petroleum Inc. Quick Fuel
SM
is a service mark of Jacobus Energy Inc. Shell

is a registered trademark of Shell Oil Company. Sinclair

is a registered trademark of Sinclair Oil Corporation. Star

is a registered
trademark of Star Micronics America Inc. Tank Monitor

is a trademark of Gilbarco Inc. Tesoro

SM
is a service mark of Tesoro Petroleum
Corporation. Tokheim

is a registered trademark of Tokheim Holding B.V. Corporation. Ultramar

SM
is a service mark of Ultramar Inc.
UNIX

is a registered trademark of Unix System Laboratories Inc. Veeder-Root

is a registered trademark of Danaher Corporation. Visa

is a registered trademark of Visa International Service Association. Wayne

is a registered trademark of Dresser Equipment Group Inc.

Wright Express
SM
is a service mark of Wright Express LLC.